JP7347913B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a decorative body has a notch that penetrates from the front and back and has a metal plated surface, a translucent lens member that closes the notch of the decorative body, and a back side of the decorative body. A game machine has been proposed that includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and can emit light forward through a lens member (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technology of Patent Document 1, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the shine of the metal plating on the decoration, and the decoration can be decorated with light emitted from the LED, thereby attracting the attention of players. You can have fun with it.

JP2015-223485A

By the way, in a decorative body whose surface is provided with a metal decorative part by metal plating, as in the technique of Patent Document 1, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative body, the part of the metal decorative part becomes highly conductive. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of Patent Document 1, since the substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative object on which metal plating is applied, the metal plating and the substrate are as close as possible, so the decorative object (metallic Static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged between the metal plating and the substrate, causing sparks. Therefore, if a spark (discharge) occurs between the metal plating and the board, electronic components such as LEDs, LED driver ICs, resistors, etc. mounted on the board will be damaged, and the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting As a result, it becomes impossible to entertain the players, and there is a fear that the players' interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress damage to electronic components by making it difficult for static electricity to be discharged to a board. be.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the present invention,
A gaming machine that grants a predetermined gaming profit when a lottery result by a lottery means is a specific result,
Equipped with a decorative part decorated with a predetermined decoration,
The decoration part has an LED mounted on at least one side, a copper foil forming a predetermined circuit for electrically connecting the LED, and a coating made of white solder resist. board,
a first member provided to face one side of the substrate;
a second member provided to face another surface different from the one surface of the substrate,
The substrate includes a specific area where the copper foil is not provided, and the specific area is an area formed around the entire circumference of the substrate by providing the copper foil within a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the substrate. and
When the first member, the second member, and the substrate are combined, one of the first member and the second member fits into the other, so that at least a portion thereof overlaps,
The creepage distance from the outside of the decoration part to the copper foil is determined by the length of the path created by the overlapping parts when the first member, the second member, and the board are combined and the predetermined distance of the specific area. increases the
The substrate includes a first wiring pattern formed on one side, a second wiring pattern formed on the other side, a first land electrically connected to the first wiring pattern, and the first wiring pattern formed on the other side. a through hole having a second wiring pattern and a second land electrically connected;
Among the through holes, a specific through hole in which no electronic component is mounted has a specific land whose outer peripheral edge is covered with the white solder resist.
It is characterized by

In the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that can suppress damage to electronic components by making it difficult for static electricity to be discharged to the board .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a dish base unit in a dish unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a top view of the production operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation button unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit seen from the front from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring seen from the bottom and front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the bottom front. (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. It is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit as seen from the lower front. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a performance operation ring and a rotational drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the press operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central press operation section of the press operation section. It is a front view of the dish unit when pressed. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a state with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front and above. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 108 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back. It is a left side view of a starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. It is an enlarged front view showing parts of a starting port unit and a side unit in the game board. (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of game balls in the first attacker unit in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. It is a perspective view seen from behind. It is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the gaming area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. (a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the rear effect unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit. It is a front view showing a rear movable decorative body together with a rear decorative board. (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (a) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back movable ornament. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), and (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the same part as the decorative body in (a). FIG. 143(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in a section of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board at the part of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram where the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate in the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the effect of the light guide radiation plate in the second decorative part of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate and the first LED of the rear decorative board. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement from the front. FIG. 2 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and (b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in (a). FIG. 3(c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part having a different form from that in (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of a second embodiment different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a rear movable decorative body of a third embodiment. FIG. 12(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the rear movable decoration body of the fourth embodiment in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration body unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from behind. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back lower center decoration unit by the back lower center lifting mechanism in the back lower center production unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center decoration unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the stop position of the back bottom center rotating decoration. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the detection sensor and each detection sensor in a table. It is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of LEDs of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending and descending decorative body unit in the rear unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotating decorative body in the back upper presentation unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back rising/falling decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back rising/lowering decoration with the back rising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back up-and-back rotating decorative body from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a decoration board from the front in a state where a back raising/lowering decoration body unit has been moved to an appearance position in a back upper presentation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left decoration body unit of the rear rear left production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear left production unit from the front. It is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back rear left decoration body unit in the back rear left production unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right presentation unit, as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the back right decoration unit in the back back right production unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state. (a) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right presentation unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower middle rotation decorative body of the back lower middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Move the back up/back rotation decoration of the back up/back presentation unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the back rear left rotation decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back of the back rear right presentation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the rear clockwise rotating ornaments moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. A state in which the rear left rotating decoration of the rear rear left production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left presentation unit and the shutter unit of the back front right presentation unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. Move the rear movable decoration of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the rear up and rear rotating decoration of the rear upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, rear left rotation decoration of the rear rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the rear lower middle rotation decoration of the rear lower middle production unit raised from the lowered position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which it has been moved to its respective position. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. This figure shows the shape of the solid ground at the part where the front side of the disconnection prevention rib part formed on the base comes into contact with the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board, and shows the shape of the solid ground on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the shape of a resist with respect to a land when a peripheral control board is poured into a solder bath. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko game machine. 213 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 212. FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is a structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a main control solenoid drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. This is a circuit showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a performance control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing an effect control motor drive circuit. Schematic of the copper foil surface on the front (mounting side) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board with which a door frame is provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board including one LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 229 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 228. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 235 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 234. 235 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on after FIG. 235. FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpots, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types, and (C) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types. This is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for . It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a modification. (A) is a front perspective view of the dot matrix display, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (A) and a perspective view seen from the back side. (A) A front view and an AA sectional view of a circuit board of Modification 1, and (B) a front view and an AA sectional view of a circuit board of Modification 1. It is a front view of the circuit board provided in the dot matrix display of a modification. It is a time chart showing the control state of the dot matrix display. It is an explanatory view showing an example of display contents of a dot matrix display. (A) is a front perspective view of a modified dot matrix display, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (A) and a perspective view seen from the back side. (A) A front view of the specific board, (B) A front view showing the decoration of the specific board, and (C) A specific board in a modified example. It is a detailed diagram of the main control unit in the game board. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the first fluctuating display of symbols after the setting value is changed when the power of the Pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special monitor related production process performed in peripheral control part regular processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a signal path when a handle touch sensor or a single button operation sensor is detected. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st firing stop command related process performed in peripheral control part steady processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd firing stop command related process performed in peripheral control part steady processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of firing permission command-related processing executed in peripheral control unit steady processing. This is a specific example of a suspension notice performance and a setting value suspension suggestion performance. They are a perspective view (a) of the function display unit seen from the front and a perspective view (b) of the function display unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the front (surface) of a function display board accommodated in a function display unit. It is a schematic diagram of a game board side matrix display device provided on the game board and a door frame side matrix display device provided on the door frame. Schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board, XX in (a) They are a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section of a line, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). Schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of a through hole according to the second embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on a game board, and XX in (a) They are a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section of a line, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). Schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of a through hole according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on a game board, XX in (a) They are a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section of a line, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). Schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on the land of a through hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on a game board, XX in (a) They are a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section of a line, and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). (a) is a schematic diagram of the rear (back) side of the decorative board on which a DIP type connector is mounted, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the front (front) side, on which a surface mount (SMD) type connector is mounted. They are a schematic diagram (c) of the rear (back) side and a schematic diagram (d) of the front (front) side of the decorative substrate. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. This is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. This is a modification example of a specific display displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated in the downward direction. This is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a game ball enters when the second starting port is closed. It is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when an abnormality is detected. It is a time chart showing the standby position of the movable body on the peripheral control board side at the time when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the relationship between suggestion performance and abnormality detection. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. Covers a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral device located on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment) that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , a general prize opening 2001 that grants a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) by accepting or passing game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate part 2003, and a second starting opening. It includes an opening 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a second grand prize opening 2006. Obstacle nails N having a golden color are planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, or displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production The unit 3800 and the like can be used to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., thereby entertaining the players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b. The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends briefly to the contact portion 13d. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punched metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders, and communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; the door frame left side unit 400, which is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a door window 101a penetrating the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear, and the speaker duct 103 attached near the right end of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 105 when viewed from the rear. A door frame relay board cover 107 covers the handle rear relay board 106, which covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a handle rear relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. In addition, hereinafter, the frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a "front frame".

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing a game where you type.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, and closes the front side of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The gaming area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a rectangular flat shape and whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 which is attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base 101 and to which a handle unit 180 is attached. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front left outside of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that extends through the door frame base 101 in the front and rear directions and has a substantially rectangular inner circumferential shape when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and slanted so that the left end side projects slightly further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. There is an insertion recess 101c that is recessed from the rear toward the front near the right end in front view, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and an insertion recess 101c that passes through the cylinder lock 130 in the front and back directions. The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attachment member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a from the rear end of the tube portion 102a, and a tube portion 102b. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a, extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a, and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 102b in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The cylindrical portion 102a has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided at the top of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided at the bottom of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c on the handle base 181. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 102, the base 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attachment member 102 can be attached to the slanted handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is in an inclined state extending to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the upper part of the rectangle extending up and down, when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is used to relay connections between the window interior decoration part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and various boards of the main body frame 4. The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, right side, and top side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 in a hinge-rotatable manner relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening, closing and locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141, and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of the ball extraction member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 211) of the payout control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 in which the operation transmitting part 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 contacts is formed is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. 143a can prevent it from rebounding.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the batted ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142 and recessed forward. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed against the body frame 4, and also allows the game area 5a to be visible from the player side (front). This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear protruding piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is something.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 that is attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover pedestal 183 is attached to the handle base 181, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") that is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183. A transparent handle cover 185 is attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and to the transmission gear 188 at the other end through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are placed in each of the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle attachment member 102.

The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that are spaced apart from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction and protrude outward, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extend in an arc shape as a center and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 182e and is locked. A locking protrusion 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To be more specific, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, which is the part that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward. The side surface in the direction of is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 182b has a part that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182 and is separated from the most protruding part of the first protrusion 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in the clockwise direction. protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in a clockwise direction at the most protruding portion that bulges outward, and an opposite side surface in a counterclockwise direction curves inward. The first protrusion 182a is recessed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c has a portion that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182, which is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of approximately 70 degrees in the clockwise direction. It stands out at about half the height. This third protrusion 182c has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is sloped more gently than the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182, which is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of approximately 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, and is further away from the first protrusion 182a. It stands out somewhat high. This fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape and includes three attachment bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward and is transparent. An inner lens 185a formed three-dimensionally from a transparent member is attached to the inside of the handle cover 185 on the back side of the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the handle decoration board 184 disposed behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the multiple LEDs mounted on the mounting surface. In addition, the inner lens 185a may have a lens cut on its back surface as well as its front surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on its back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. (may be formed into a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. Note that the front surface of the handle cover 185 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front and back surfaces of the handle cover 185 may have a lens cut. Alternatively, the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located further back than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when a player touches the handle 182, etc., it detects the static electricity that acts on the player, and prevents the player from touching the handle 182, etc. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 Firing solenoid 542 is deactivated. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. When the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the greatest force (so-called "right-handed hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the same as the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is approximately the same as that of the first protrusion 182a, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. The pan unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a dish unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right side of the attachment base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213. It includes an upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit body 252 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions; It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate right upper decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. ing. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302; and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 to which the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 that emits light to decorate the production operation ring 330, a decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration board 352, and a decoration board cover 353 that is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. a vibration speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. It is equipped with.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed into a container shape that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center on the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guide passage section 201a (FIG. 46) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 moves the game ball from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the performance operation unit 300 are attached to the front side.

The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper plate body 212 at the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213 at the front surface of the plate unit base 211. A tray unit relay board 214 is provided.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper tray ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the pan unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e that penetrates through the upper plate body 212, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the tray unit base 211 has a mounting protrusion 211f that protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and on which the mounting base is placed, and a mounting projection 211f that protrudes forward on the right side of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, and A slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower part of the plate body in the front and back, through which the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and a slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower right corner of the plate body in the front view. A handle insertion hole 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion hole through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. The opening 211i is provided.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the tray ball, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being placed on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end, and a through hole 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is inserted through the insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate lower left decorative board 283, and a plate lower right decorative board 288. , and for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and also discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202. After inserting cash or a prepaid card into a machine (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball B, and to adjust the sound volume related to the performance to be louder or softer.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper plate ball removal button 222 on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the ejection button 222 and has transparency, and a ball lending operation base 223 that is located on the lower right side of the upper plate ball ejection button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221. a volume up button 226 located on the lower left of the base section 221, a volume down button 227 located below the volume up button 226 on the top surface of the base section 221, and a ball located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. It includes a lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (distance dimension over which the upper plate ball withdrawal button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). ) The pressing operation part of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (reed type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player can release the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves upward to its original position, the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension that the upper plate ball extraction button 222 moves downward when the player presses the button). ) The press operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the return button tactile switch 225a, but when the player releases the press operation, The return button 225 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, allowing the return button tactile switch 225a to be turned off. The ball rental display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is returned after deducting the amount of the game balls B lent out. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged so that one of its three vertices faces upward, and when pressed by the player, it moves slightly downward (when the player presses it) (It is small compared to the distance that the upper plate bulb removal button 222 moves downward when operated.) The press operation part of the tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) for the volume up button is pushed slightly downward, and the button for the volume up button is moved downward. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation part of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and when pressed by the player, it moves slightly downward (when the player presses it) (It is small compared to the distance that the upper plate bulb removal button 222 moves downward when operated.) The press operation part of the tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) for the volume down button is pushed slightly downward and the volume down button is moved downward. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned ON, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. , the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (controls the progress of the performance) via the performance drive board 1720 (described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which will be described later. The ball rental board 228 and the volume adjustment board 229 are housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 in an adjacent state.

In this way, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. The door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted are connected electrically. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side that is connected to is a completely different relay board, and in the various relay boards on the door frame 3 side, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 224a for the return button, etc. The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are configured so that they do not coexist on the same relay board. . This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which so-called main side signals are transmitted, so the door on the door frame 3 side In contrast, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which so-called main side signals are transmitted. Therefore, the configuration is such that it passes through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

On the top surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228, there are pads to which the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs are soldered, and through holes (the inside of the holes that pass through). The surrounding wall is copper-plated and has conductivity (hereinafter the same applies), and the green resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding lands etc. to form a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as " (Sometimes referred to as "solid green resist.") A green resist layer is formed. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball rental board 228, the area where a connector (lead type) (not shown) is mounted is a solid green color in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which soldering is performed. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Furthermore, although not shown, the top surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball lending board 228 includes a ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, three 7-segment LEDs, etc. Near the side electronic component, the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component) (This may include the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic components on the front side, and the model number of the electronic components on the front side.) Printed on green resist using silk screen printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball lending board 228, the part number of the back side electronic component and the back side electronic component are arranged near the back side electronic component such as a connector (surface mount type). Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the back side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, ) is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing using white paint that stands out against the green color.

On the other hand, the top surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 has no pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are soldered. In the entire area, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, the area where a connector (not shown) is mounted is covered with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding soldered pads, through holes, lands, etc. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229 is equipped with electronic components near the front surface, such as a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button and a tactile switch 227a for a volume down button. In addition, the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component The markings on the front side indicating the component mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the front side are solid white with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. It is printed on the resist by silk printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

In this way, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume adjustment board 229, which are accommodated in the ball rental operation unit 220 in an adjacent state, are different in color. To explain this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is the path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. However, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is not a path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220, and The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) does not go through the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (the peripheral control unit 1500 (described later) that can control the progress of the performance) It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in this embodiment, the volume control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance) on the gaming board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1, is electrically connected to the The adjustment board 229 and the ball lending board 228 that is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) that is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. However, the volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating, whereas the ball lending board 228 is coated with a green resist liquid, which is different from the white. Since a green coating film is formed, a worker who connects the wiring can use the color of the coating film thus formed (in other words, the color of the resist) as a guide to connect electrically to the volume control board 229. This can contribute to preventing erroneous connections between the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball lending board 228. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing incorrect wiring connections.

The volume control board 229 also includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to increase the volume related to the performance, and a volume down button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to decrease the volume related to the performance. 227a is implemented, and the detection results (ON signal due to ON, OFF signal due to OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The information is transmitted to the side peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance), and the player can request the payout of game balls B by lending balls to the ball lending board 228. A tactile switch 224a for a ball rental button, a tactile switch 225a for a return button that can request a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and a tactile switch 225a for a return button that can request a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are installed, and the detection results by the ball rental button tactile switch 224a and the return button tactile switch 225a (ON signal when ON, OFF signal when OFF) ) is transmitted to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by transmitting the drive signal from the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) to the ball rental board 228, the ball rental display section configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 displays the ball rental information. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume can be adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance). No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 operates based on a drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance). No electronic components that make up the display section are mounted. In this way, the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance) on the gaming board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. Since there is a path to the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 are incorrectly connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a white resist liquid is applied to the ball lending board 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist liquid different from white is applied to the ball lending board 228. A green coating film is formed to prevent erroneous connections.

In addition, surface-mounted electronic components are used as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, whereas surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on the ball rental board 228. The tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are lead-type electronic components. The wiring that is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be determined based on the type (one of the types). This can contribute to preventing erroneous connections.

Incidentally, although the reflectance of light is highest for white and lower for dark, as described above, the volume control board 229, which is not provided with a display section, is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental board 228 on which the ball rental display section is provided is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency with which the light emitted by the ball rental display section is reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, so that the production by the production device other than the ball rental display section is not hindered. Can be done. Note that in this embodiment, green is used as the dark color, but instead of green, purple or black may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball lending board 228 connects to the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 is connected without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side or the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , a drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (an effect to be described later that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and back unit 3000 in response to commands from a peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later). It is electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the production), via the drive board 1720), and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball lending board 228 is adopted, and a green resist liquid is applied. The configuration is such that a green coating film is formed, and the same color as the color of the resist solution applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is preferable to apply a white resist solution to form a white coating film. Note that the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When manufacturing by arranging and cutting out multiple substrates from the same material), cracks or tears may occur.

By the way, as mentioned above, when manufacturing a board, multiple boards are arranged and cut out from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed length, so the color of the silk paint and the resist solution are different. have the same color, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. For this reason, for example, by examining white boards, it may be possible to determine whether they are manufactured from the same copper-clad laminate (base material), and if there is a problem with white boards. Once discovered, when checking for other defects, it is sufficient to first trace (find) and examine other white substrates one by one, which has the advantage of contributing to early detection of defects.

Note that the volume adjustment operation, such as increasing the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume down button 227, is performed for a certain period of time (for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1). The variable display will be displayed for a certain period of time until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter, a device that also has the functions of a peripheral control MPU may be referred to as a "peripheral control IC" instead of a peripheral control MPU) starts up. It may be possible to execute the special symbol by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) at all times except for a certain period before and after the special symbol stops, or it may be possible to execute the special symbol by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) at all times except for a certain period before and after the special symbol stops. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) allows execution by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) only when specific conditions such as the period during which the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration are satisfied. It may be something that Further, the volume adjustment result based on the volume adjustment operation, such as increasing the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume down button 227, is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control MPU). control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may reflect the adjustment at a timing later than the timing of the volume adjustment operation depending on the situation (whether or not variable display is in progress, progress of production, etc.) It may be reflected.

Incidentally, gaming machines having multiple boards have been proposed in the past (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). In the case where the wires are placed in the same position, the person performing the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring electrically connected to one board and the wiring electrically connected to the other board.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before upper plate ball extraction and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball post-removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 that is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and extends vertically, and a front plate that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A slider 232 is provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and its lower end is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 that is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a rear base 241 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. an upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that is attached so as to be slidable toward the upper plate ball extracting slider 242; a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward; and a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It is equipped with

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the rear, and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the accepted game ball B to the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view is provided.

The ball socket 241a extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuation receiving part 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and protruding backward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the actuation receiving part 242a. An operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part 242a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving part 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface. In addition, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and biases the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can be moved downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal post unit 240 are such that the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end. The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving part 242a. In addition, since the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game balls B can be sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball ejecting button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 is activated. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can now move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143 to open the partition portion 143a. is retreated from between the entrance port 141a and the ball exit port 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b are discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. It will be done. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is removed via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiver 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray before ball extraction unit 230 and the upper tray after ball extraction unit 240 feed the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit which are attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. In addition, when the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and have a plate upper left decorative unit 270, a plate lower left decorative unit 280, a plate upper right decorative unit 275, and a plate lower right decorative unit on the front of each. 285 is installed. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 also has a front notch 252e that is cut upward from the front lower end of a portion that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. A bottom cutout portion 252f is provided at a portion below the bottom face cutout portion 252f. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Furthermore, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decoration part 252b and into which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. A production operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front and back and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction. 300 is attached. The production operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball extractor unit 260 includes a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a vertically penetrating through hole in the front right corner in plan view, and a lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view. A slider 262 that is attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower plate ball release button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-back direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned to match the lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed therethrough. The through hole of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending back and forth, and is attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower plate ball removal cover 265 has its left end side attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending up and down, and its right end side is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the hole, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. A slit extending from side to side is formed in the lower plate ball removal cover 265, into which a projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower plate ball removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removing base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate part 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the normal state of the lower plate ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the forward moving end due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball eject button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower plate ball eject button 263. becomes. As this slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal cover 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center and the right end side. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is in an open state. The game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball extraction lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 are continuously rotated. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the slider 262. Ru. Then, when the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes a transparent upper left plate decoration body 271 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, a transparent upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271, and an upper left inner plate A plate upper left decorative board 273 is attached to the rear side of the lens 272 and has a front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The plate upper left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper left decoration body 271 is transparent. Note that the surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be provided with lens cuts on its front and back surfaces. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper left inner lens 272 is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate are of a surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light. . The upper left inner lens 272 is transparent. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is arranged behind the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 273 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the upper left inner lens 272 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left plate decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left plate decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper right plate decoration unit 275 includes a transparent upper right plate decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends from side to side, a transparent upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276, and a transparent upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276. A plate upper right decorative board 278 is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)").

The plate upper right decoration body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper right decoration body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper right decoration body 276 is transparent. It should be noted that the surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be provided with lens cuts on its front and back surfaces. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the upper right plate decoration body 276 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the upper right decorative body 276 from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate can be decorated with light. . The upper right inner lens 277 is transparent. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can diffusely refract light, and the upper right inner lens 277 is placed behind the upper right inner lens 277. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 278 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the upper right inner lens 277 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and its left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper right plate decoration 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper right plate decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the upper left side of the plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right side of the plate decoration unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his or her finger using the level difference between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and the game balls B in the upper tray 201 can be evenly distributed. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate bottom left decoration unit and plate bottom right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. It will be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a transparent lower left plate decoration body 281 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, and a lower left inner plate It is provided with a plate lower left decorative board 283 attached to the rear side of the lens 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)").

The plate lower left decoration body 281 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in plan view. is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge part 252a. The plate lower left decoration body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower left decorative body 281 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decorative body 281 is transparent. Note that the surface of the lower left plate decorative body 281 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front and back surfaces of the lower left plate decorative body 281 may be provided with lens cuts. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the plate lower left decorative body 281 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative board 283 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 is transparent. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 is cut into a polyhedron (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 283 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower left inner lens 282 may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left edge of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Continuous with the left edge. The left end of the lower left plate decorative unit 280 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left plate decoration body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left plate decoration board 283 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right plate decoration unit 285 includes a transparent lower right plate decoration body 286 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends from side to side, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right plate decoration body 286. , a lower right decorative board 288 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). , is equipped with.

The plate lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper right rear at the right end, and at the left end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear. The central axis extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower right decoration body 286 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decorative body 286 is transparent. Note that the surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the surface and the back of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back side of the lower right plate decoration body 286 (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The lower right inner lens 287 is inserted into the lower right decorative body 286 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative board 288 of the plate are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is decorated with light. I can do it. The lower right inner lens 287 is transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 is cut into a polyhedron (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 288 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. Lens cuts may be made (may be formed into a polyhedron), and lens cuts may be made on the front and back surfaces of the lower right inner lens 287 (may be formed into a polyhedron). Alternatively, instead of the front surface of the dish lower right inner lens 287, a lens cut may be made on the back surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is located below the right edge of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and its left end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right edge of . The right end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the right end of the lower right plate decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right plate decoration body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right plate decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the device can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it look like a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the performance operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward and backward direction of the performance operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a transparent rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. In the production operation section 301, a rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and a pressure operation section 303 is arranged within the ring. . The press operation section 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and includes a transparent central press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302, and an outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section. 302, and a transparent annular outer periphery pressing operation part 303b disposed between the inner periphery of

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 that has a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330; and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the operation section 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation section base 320.

The production operation unit 300 also includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 which is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the production operation ring 330 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a production operation ring decoration board 352. The decorative board cover 353 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit is placed so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330. It includes a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the performance operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper and rear side.

The production operation section cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward. A transparent upper dish center inner lens 313 is attached from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a transparent inner lens 313 is attached to the rear side of the dish center upper inner lens 313 and can emit light toward the front. A plate center upper decorative board 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 attached from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens. 315, and a plate center lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape with the front side bulging downward from the rear center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is the production operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is installed in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drainage holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular shape in plan view that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. installed. The unit front cover 312 has a transparent plate center upper decorative body 312a whose semicircular arc bulges forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a lower plate center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a transparent plate center lower decoration body 312b whose semicircular arc bulges forward and extends in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are made by cutting a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the cut surface facing the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature compared to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. It is formed into a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the lower plate center decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled into the plate unit 200, both left and right ends of the plate center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate right upper decorative unit 275, and the plate center lower decorative body Both left and right ends of the plate 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Furthermore, when the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the same as the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center upper decorative board 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and has a front (outside ) is equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light toward. The plurality of LEDs on the upper plate center decoration board 314 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the upper plate center decoration body 312a can be decorated with light. In addition, the surface of the center upper plate decoration 312a may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the upper plate center decoration 312a may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back side of the plate center upper decoration body 312a (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is transparent. The surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is below (or behind) It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 may be provided with a lens cut. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center lower decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and has a front (outside) upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") ) is equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light toward. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center lower decoration board 316 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light. Note that the surface of the lower plate center decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower plate center decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the plate center lower decoration body 312b (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 at the lower center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the inner lens 315 at the lower center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center lower decorative board 316. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be provided with a lens cut. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular arc shape. When the LEDs on the upper center decorative board 314 and the LEDs on the lower center decorative board 316 are made to emit light, the entire area can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate right upper decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is connected to the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the section 212a. The operating unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top, and is transparent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 includes a main body part 321 which has a substantially cubic box-like outer shape and is open at the top, and a main body part 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body part 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a flange portion 322 that is attached to the main body portion 321; a plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 that protrude downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward, and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 formed in a size that can accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. A vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 from below, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed as a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified and the vibrations can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the production operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 has a through hole formed at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall to discharge liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 . In the main body 321, a rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and an operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer periphery of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. A production operation ring decorative board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 of the production operation section cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operating ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing part 325, the upper part of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the flange part. 322 and is exposed to the outside.

When the operating unit base 320 is assembled to the performance operating unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Furthermore, when assembled into the production operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Performance operation ring]
The performance operation ring 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring of the performance operation unit viewed from the front from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from the front from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is approximately twice as large as the longitudinal dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter that is approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in a circular ring. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably placed on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 are in contact with the outer circumferential surface of the ring mounting base 332 and are rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. A ring removal prevention member 334 is provided. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are each formed transparent.

In addition, the production operation ring 330 is attached to a ring outer upper cover 335 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitutes a part of the rotation operation section 302, and to the lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 is attached to the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner circumferential side of the ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 is a part of the rotary operation section 302. A ring inner cover 337 is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 and an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and a mounting portion 331a on the upper surface that is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside of the mounting portion 331a. A boss portion 331b protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and is used to rotatably attach the bush 333, and a boss portion 331b is provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outside of the mounting portion 331a on the top surface. It is provided with through holes 331c that penetrate vertically in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the performance operation ring decoration board 352.

The rotating base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotating base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed into a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, faces downward from the inner circumference of the ring attachment base 331. This ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface part 335a and an outer upper surface part 335a in which an arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. a decorative portion 335b, and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner circumferential end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center and arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface part 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface parts projecting upward and toward the center from the inside of the outer lower surface part 336a in the circumferential direction. An outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a shaped cylinder surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a region that is 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole has a donut shape. The performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light by means of a performance operation ring decoration board 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotational drive unit 340 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 57(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotationally driving the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 and detecting rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover which rotatably attaches the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

The rotational drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotation drive base 341 is formed into a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-back direction, and is open to the left. The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a first gear 344a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear, and a second gear 344b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and a gear portion 345a that protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a and extends in the circumferential direction. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The circumferential length of the plurality of detection pieces 345b is the same as the interval at which they are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval that is different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It looks like this. Thereby, the rotational direction and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 302 in the production operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is connected to the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located within the performance operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The rotational drive unit 340 is driven by the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily control the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. It can be rotated in the direction of Furthermore, the rotary drive unit 340 allows the rotary operation section 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the forward and reverse directions within a predetermined rotation angle range using the operation ring drive motor 342. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302.

In addition, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation was performed. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player's rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotary operation section 302 with an operational feeling or a click feeling that corresponds to the content of the player participation type performance.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330, and transmits rotation between the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a on the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotational drive unit 340. It includes a drive side gear part 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear part 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear section 350a and the drive side gear section 350b have pitch circles formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation unit base 320. It will be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the production operation unit 300, the ring side gear part 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330, and the drive side gear part 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the production operation ring 330. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Performance operation ring decoration board]
The performance operation ring decoration board 352 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the performance operation ring 330, and can decorate the performance operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is formed in the form of a circular ring divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative board 352a on the front side and a rear decorative board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "surfaces (mounting surfaces)") of the front decorative board 352a and the rear decorative board 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 are of a surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300. The upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is covered with a transparent decorative board cover 353. The decorative board cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and is a front board cover that covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a, and a rear board cover 353b that covers the rear decorative board 352b from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decorative board 352 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface that emit light, so that the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparent, so the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 or through the through hole 331c of the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner The cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration in which an LED is provided in the rotary operation section 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voices and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operating unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a more variety of performances to the player.

[3-5e-8. Performance operation button unit]
The performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 62(a) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. The performance operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the performance operation ring 330, and has a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The press operation section 303 of the production operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central press operation section 303a, and a transparent cylindrical outer circumferential press operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central press operation section 303a. , is made up of.

The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the center axis of the button unit base 361 as a border. A pair of guide shafts 362 extend upward in a cylindrical shape, and a disc-shaped disc-shaped member that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has a circular outer circumference smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, and has a circular outer circumference approximately the same size as the button unit base 361. A pair of lift springs 365 each having a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therethrough and biasing the lift base 364 upward are provided.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the bottom surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lift drive motor 367 that is attached to protrude upwards, the spur gear-like lift drive gear 368 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the lift drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member is rotated by the driven gear 369 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, and is rotatably attached. 370, an elevator cam member 371 whose lower end is connected to the elevator cam drive gear member 370, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and which raises and lowers the elevator base 364 by rotating; and an elevator drive gear. 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed into a cylinder shape with a bottom that extends vertically and has an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the lifting base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward; A transparent center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with approximately the same diameter and closed at the upper end, and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363. The center button decoration board 376 is mounted on the top surface and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon that can emit light upward. The production operation button unit 360 includes a center button main body 373 and a center button cover 375, which constitute a center press operation section 303a.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes an annular outer button decoration board 377 that is attached to the upper surface of the lift base 364 outside the center button body 373 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and A transparent outer peripheral board cover 378 is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the center button main body 373, and the outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the outer periphery of the center button main body 373. A transparent cylindrical outer decorative inner lens 379 with three-dimensional decoration is arranged above the outer button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part, and the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379. A transparent peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. The production operation button unit 360 includes an outer substrate cover 378, an outer decorative inner lens 379, and an outer button cover 380, and constitutes an outer pressing operation section 303b.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303, and a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303. It includes an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 to the lower surface. is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately 1/2 the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The lifting spring 365 has a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter that is approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a center hole 364b that is vertically penetrated through the center hole with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. It includes a standing wall portion 364c projecting upward in a cylindrical shape from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The vertical movement of the lift base 364 is restricted by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and a space is created between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373. is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through its center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed like this. By rotating, the elevating cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 using the cam portion 371a, thereby elevating the elevating base 364.

The center button body 373 has a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted thereinto, a central opening 373d penetrating through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364; It includes a press detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

The center button body 373 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends briefly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the lift base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the center button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws with washers inserted therein are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting upward movement of the center button main body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 detects when the bottom 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the vertical base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 and protrudes downward. This central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker urging force than the lifting spring 365.

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is equipped with a transparent structure. The center button cover 375 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In this central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373.

The center button decorative board 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of a surface mount type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The center button decoration board 376 can decorate the center button cover 375 with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate. The outer button decoration board 377 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of a surface mount type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can decorate the outer periphery decorative inner lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 includes an annular board part 378a that covers the upper side of the outer button decorative board 377 and is attached to the lift base 364, and extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the inner periphery of the board part 378a, and covers the center button body 373. It includes a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral board cover 378 is formed transparent.

The outer periphery decorative inner lens 379 has twisted portions that are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction and extend so as to move upward in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached above the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer periphery button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical part 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer periphery decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular part 380b extending from the upper end of the cylindrical part 380a toward the center. . In the outer button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the production operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365, and the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365. The locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, having moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button body 373 is located at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward more than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It becomes.

Therefore, when assembled to the production operation unit 300, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 is higher than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The press detection piece 373e is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press operation of the central press operation section 303a is detected. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed, the top surface of the center button cover 375 is at a height that substantially matches the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer button cover 380 (outer press operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is also not detected by the detection sensor 381. In other words, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view in this lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible in the front in FIG. As the cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) and the outer circumference button cover 380 (outer circumference press operation section 303b) at the lower position is maintained, and the center button cover 375 The entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is protruding upward than the upper surface of the outer button cover 380.

When assembled to the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 will be in a state that protrudes more than the top surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) etc.) reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374. The center button main body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the lift base 364, but the lift base 364 is in contact with the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lift spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lift base 364, the outer periphery button cover 380 (outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lift base 364 is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer periphery button cover 380 (the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the raised position, the lifting base 364 is moved through the outer button cover 380 by the lifting spring. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 as it moves downward against the urging force of the elevating base 365 . In this state, the outer button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the lift base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and is operated. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, it returns to its original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, etc. The operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 in the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 installed inside the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, by relaying the connection between the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. 65(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is pressed at the center. FIG. 7 is a front view of the dish unit when the operating section is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a large annular rotary operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The press operation section 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation section 303a located at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and an annular outer circumferential press operation section disposed between the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302. 303b.

The rotation operation section 302 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, an outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337 of the performance operation ring 330. The central pressing operation section 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the performance operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing operation section 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation section 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation section 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Specifically, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward from the top surface of the outer button cover 380. (See Figure 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotational drive unit 340, the performance operation ring 330 is rotated through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view. .

The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operating section 302 can be rotated back and forth and vibrated. This vibration differs from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation section 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation using two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

Rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. To be more specific, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is larger than the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , an interval that is not an integral multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected depending on the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302. Further, when a rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is detected, the rotational operation section 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotational operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby making the rotational operation lighter and assisting. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation section 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation section 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotary operation section 302 is installed with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a portion of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation section 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation section 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do. sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated even when the push operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Note that since the rotary operation section 302 is attached to the operation section base 320 on the lower surface side, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation ring decoration board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular manner below the performance operation ring 330. Thereby, by causing the LED of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the performance operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation section 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in the row are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation section 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotary operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decorative board) is provided inside the rotating rotary operation section 302.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in the lowered position, protruding slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central press operation section 303a of the press operation section 303 can be pressed. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed downward, the top surface of the center press operation section 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the top surface of the outer circumferential press operation section 303b (outer circumference button cover 380), and the press is detected. The sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b of the pressing operation part 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and the press is detected. Pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 comes off from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation part 303 is vigorously protruded upward together with the lifting base 364 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330.

When the center push operation section 303a is pressed downward with the push operation section 303 in the raised position, the center push operation section 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center push operation section 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing operation section 303a moves downward together with the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation section 303a and the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b are moved downwardly from the rotating operation section 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Furthermore, when the outer circumference press operation section 303b is pressed downward with the press operation section 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central press operation section 303a remains in a state protruding upwardly than the upper surface of the outer circumference press operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b becomes approximately at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

In this way, regardless of whether the pressing operation section 303 of the present embodiment is in the lowered position or the raised position, unless the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, it will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press and operate the central press operation section 303a, so that attention can be drawn to the operation of the performance operation section 301 in a player participation type performance. , it is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable.

Note that even when the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the push operation section 303 is in the raised position, some players may use the push operation section 303 as a cue to make the rotation operation easier, or the push operation section 303 may get in the way and make it difficult to perform the rotation operation. As a result, the operability of the rotary operation section 302 can be changed, and more diverse operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") and a door frame left side decorative board 402 to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the left side base 401 of the door frame, and a transparent left side decoration of the door frame attached to the left side base 401 of the door frame to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. A body 404 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the left side inner lens 403 has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) that can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative board 402 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decoration body 404 is transparent. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. In addition, the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be provided with a lens cut. A lens cut may be made (it may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (it may be formed in a polyhedron). good).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the left edge of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left edge of.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-back direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to approximately the same position as the upper plate 201 and lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. and a plurality of side window internal decoration parts 410b that can emit light and are arranged in a plurality of side windows 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 is designed to make it difficult for players who are playing with the pachinko machine on the right side to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine located on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the gaming area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the player.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically; A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically; and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 is mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted in parts corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b, and a side window interior decoration member. The transparent inner lens 414 is inserted into each of the plurality of side window inner decoration parts 410b of 412.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is placed in front of the front end of the side window internal decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A through hole 416a is formed that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side base 411 of the cage door frame and the right side surface of the right side inner lens 415, and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a. It is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side inner lens 415, and is attached to the top and bottom so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a that extends in a flat plate shape in the forward and backward directions and penetrates in the left and right direction to form a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (in this case, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration part 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated conical cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed into a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the right side outer panel 416 of the door frame. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper part with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is transparent. Note that the surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412 Lens cuts may be made on the front and back surfaces of the plurality of side window inner decoration parts 410b (or they may be formed into polyhedrons), The back surface of the decorative portion 410b may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the side window interior decoration member 412 that is behind the connection base 412a on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape in the upper, lower, left and right directions around the axis of the side window interior decoration part 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b. has been done.

The internal inner lens 414 has an X-shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration part 410b into which it is inserted. The internal inner lens 414 partitions the inside of the side window interior decoration part 410b into four parts: top, bottom, left and right. Internal inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the internal inner lens 414 is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the inner inner lens 414 has a side window interior decoration section arranged behind the internal inner lens 414. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative board 413. Note that the inner inner lens 414 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back surface instead of the front surface of the internal inner lens 414. (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the right side inner lens 415 has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative board 418 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. Note that the right side inner lens 415 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back surface instead of the front surface of the right side inner lens 415. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The right side outer panel 416 of the door frame has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and also connects the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and back, with a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of an upper right side decorative board 418a and a lower right side decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The door frame right side decoration body 419 is transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. In addition, the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a lens cut. A lens cut may be made (it may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 419 (it may be formed in a polyhedron). good).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (column-shaped) side window inner decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 to emit light. In this way, the side window interior decoration portion 410b can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emitting decoration, the interior of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 that emits light and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b is off, the side window The inside of the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through between the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing games can easily play this pachinko machine 1 without having to move along the island equipment to the front of this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase expectations for the game with the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the right side unit 410 of the door frame, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of players located nearby. By making it difficult for players to see the entire gaming area 5a and making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without hesitation. .

Further, when the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light using the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a can be changed. let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are columnar, the light is emitted in a band-like and radial manner. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult for other players, such as those next to them, to look into the gaming area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the gaming area 5a, it is possible to avoid other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. This can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are unable to concentrate on the game, or from feeling like a loss due to being induced to make mistakes. This can prevent a decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. Figure 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the bottom front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 that has translucency (for example, has a milky white color) and is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and A translucent (for example, milky white) top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides and the upper front of the top base 451, and a top cover 452 is attached to the front end of the top cover 452. a transparent door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top bottom plate having translucency (for example, having a milky white color) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. 454. In addition, in this embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, have a milky white color). A top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides and the upper front of the base 451, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are connected to the door frame top base 451. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured to be transparent instead of having translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. We are prepared.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, it is arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration The transparent top central inner lens 458 is placed in front of the top cover 452 (disposed in front of the substrate 455), and the transparent top center inner lens 458 is disposed between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (i.e. , a transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452 (disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decorative board 456); A top cover 452 is disposed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the lens.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached to the center speaker box 461 facing downward, and a door frame top base plate 454. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near both left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. The top lower cover 465 is attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, and the top lower cover 465 is attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer periphery of the top bottom cover 465 from below. a lower cover frame 466 (having a lower cover frame 466), a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and a top upper cover 452 attached to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top plate 468 has a translucent property (for example, has a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body part 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left and right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a main body part 451a extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body part 451a. A front protrusion 451b protrudes forward. The main body part 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side thereof is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that their front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 has substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top cover 452 protrudes most forwardly at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved manner so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top cover 452 has an opening 452a on its upper surface that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is transparent. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left and right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively. Note that the surface of the door frame top decoration 453 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the surface and back of the door frame top decoration 453 may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back side of the door frame top decoration body 453 (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends from left to right. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is bent so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker ports 454b, which the top center speaker 462 faces, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c, which vertically penetrate through the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, and which the top side speakers 464 face. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each cut into lenses (formed into polyhedrons) so that they can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decorative board 455 placed behind the top center inner lens 458, and the door frame top left decorative board placed behind the top left inner lens 459. 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 located behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to clearly see it. Note that the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may each have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may each have a lens cut on their back surfaces instead of on their surfaces (they may be formed into polyhedrons).

The center speaker box 461 is formed into a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. This central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speakers 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. There is. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illumination by top side speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The top side speaker 464 has vibrating parts such as a diaphragm and a center cap made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene, etc.), and magnetic circuit parts such as a magnet and a yoke on the front and rear. The vibration part and the magnetic circuit part are held by the housing part. This housing portion has a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by a center cap disposed at the front, but is open at the rear.

A top side speaker 464 is attached to a mounting portion (not shown) on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, approximately The acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extended by 18 mm). Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached to the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bending plates (not shown) together with the acoustic decoration board 469 so as to cover the rear (back) side of the acoustic decoration board 469. This transparent plate protects the rear (back) side of the acoustic decoration board 469 from coming into contact with other members and causing electrical troubles. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration board 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker illumination unit includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit part of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged to cover the rear of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464.

A white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed by applying a white resist liquid to the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the acoustic decoration board 469. ), a white resist layer is formed. A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) 469a are mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. A constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 flows through the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Note that the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives the light emission data and clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be turned on, turned off, blinked, gradation lighting, etc. A variety of light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body (opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)). When not, the light emission data that becomes the light emission mode of the production mode is outputted to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. In response, the peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, 3 opening, main body frame 4 opening, wire breakage, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) )) is occurring, the light emission data serving as the notification mode is outputted to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal in a mode different from the above-mentioned normal time.

Note that the lighting mode (normal mode) of the production mode is a variety of lighting modes that combine lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 sends commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set when displaying the symbols to the peripheral control board 1510, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emitting mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time) in the effect mode. On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness, and the dispensing control MPU When the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame release command to that effect is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control board that has received this door frame release command 1310 adds predetermined information (information for preparing the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame open command that communicates the opening of the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, and sends the command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command after transmitting it to the control board 1510 controls the notification mode to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the surface-side electronic component are arranged near the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position (also including the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is placed. Attributes of the back electronic component (which may also include the shape of the back electronic component, the size of the back electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back electronic component, and the model of the back electronic component) The markings on the back side shown are printed by silk printing on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hardly noticeable compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination by light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 As described above, it is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, and the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, a white coating film is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist.") A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is further formed on this solid white resist. The front side markings that allow identification are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that the yellow front side markings are not noticeable against the white resist when the full-color LED, which can emit multicolor light, is turned off. In addition, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), it is possible to use a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white. The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be maintained high by the combination of .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is connected to the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464. Since the rear side is covered, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the column shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap that has optical properties, and light is also emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, thereby increasing the power of the top side speaker 464. It is now possible to decorate. As mentioned above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate with numerous through holes, so the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings can be viewed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465. It is possible to visually recognize the illumination of the top side speaker 464.

Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and the light is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464. It repeatedly moves between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top base 451 of the door frame has an acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached, so that the acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, the acoustic decoration When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 (from the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface)), and onto the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. In the door frame base 101, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, there are through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through holes 451ba and penetrating back and forth. are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 (acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 469), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the door frame top base. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap between the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame 451 and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted is directed to the upper left area of the front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. The light will be reflected in the upper right area. In this embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may also be made of black resin. In addition, hereinafter, when opening and closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will be referred to as "the pivot side of the door frame 3" or "the pivot side of the main body frame 4". The opposite side to the opening/closing shaft side is sometimes referred to as the "opening side of the door frame 3" or the "opening side of the main body frame 4."

[Top left area of front component]
On the front (surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000, there is a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status (in this embodiment, it has a black color except for each transparent area for checking the lighting state of a plurality of LEDs). ), a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance of white or a color close to white, is pasted except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The front (surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is pasted is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is the area where the door frame 3 is placed relative to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, the area except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is placed is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the reflective sheet 1000a passes through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. In other words, since the presence of the reflective sheet 1000a, which has no relation to the content of the game performance, can be hidden, it does not become an eyesore during the game.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a reflective sheet 1000a is placed in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front side of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4). The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is provided on the game board 5 side, which is provided separately from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). It is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front, passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the left through hole 101k formed in the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the left side through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 through a gap between the inner periphery of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left top side speaker 464. is emitted, so the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left side acoustic decoration board 469 can be efficiently used for game effects and notification modes. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of panels are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by a reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side, which is provided separately from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). In order to emit the light toward the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left side acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 and enters the gaming area 5a. It does not emit toward the player, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in the closed state), the reflective sheet 1000a is attached to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to that of the game board 5, and is configured to reflect the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration board 469 toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light leaking backward from the left acoustic decoration board 469 can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration board 469. It is designed to be able to function as a reflective member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress light leakage from the left acoustic decoration board 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, light directed toward the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

Although not shown, on the reflective sheet 1000a, there is a QR code (registered trademark) that stores a number (management number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. and are printed in dark black paint at predetermined locations. Specifications regarding the pachinko machine 1 can be made using the reflective sheet 1000a, a number that identifies the model of the game board 5 (management number), and a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display section is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number identifying the model of the game board 5 and a manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored). ing. When the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin (if the front component 1000 is made of black resin, the background will be black), Since the white reflective sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of staff such as clerks in the game hall to the reflective sheet 1000a due to its attractiveness.

Further, as described above, the front (surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is pasted is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is an area outside the door frame. 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the area except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the reflective sheet 1000a is Since it is difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the management number and QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflective sheet 1000a are difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflective sheet 1000a, since the reflective sheet 1000a is white, when the background is white, the dark black color stands out, making it easy to visually recognize the management number and the QR code (registered trademark). In addition, when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device that is a separate device from the pachinko machine 1 and is carried by an employee such as a clerk at the game hall, the reflective sheet 1000a is white, so that is white, and a QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. In other words, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). Note that the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional barcode, letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used, or a combination of letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used as appropriate.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. A through hole is formed in the reflective sheet 1000a in a portion corresponding to a region where a golden pseudo nail is arranged. As described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the false nails are also made of gold-colored metal, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, they can be used as reflective members in the same way as the reflective sheet 1000a.

[Top right area of front component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000, there is a metal plate for maintaining the attached state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. A manufacturing stop FT (see FIG. 10) is provided respectively. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal stoppers FT are arranged on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side. The end portion of the metal stopper FT is inserted into and engaged with a plate stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4.

Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, by being attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it reinforces the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101. The door frame base unit 100 is given rigidity, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions are connected to each other, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 are connected to each other. an upper reinforcing frame 113 extending left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112; 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112; and a plurality of door frame hooks of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 vertically apart from each other. 652 is hooked to the hooking member 116. That is, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

As described above, in this embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, metal stops FT are provided on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In addition, on the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface of the game board 5 is transmitted by the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the light emitted from the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of panels are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 that passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 that has passed through the right side through hole 101k formed in the right side through hole 101k is not emitted toward the game area 5a, and the light is not emitted toward the back of the game board 5. It also does not emit light. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

Note that since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the acoustic decoration on the right side passing through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 is transmitted through a metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcement. Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. It does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

In addition, a white reflective sheet with the shape of the above-mentioned white reflective sheet 1000a modified as appropriate is attached to the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the surrounding area where the metal stopper FT is arranged. It may be configured as follows. In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface of the game board 5 is transmitted to the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. Since the light can be reflected by the white reflective sheet, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light is not emitted toward the game area 5a, nor is it emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

By the way, when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, an employee such as a clerk of the game hall inserts a regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and operates the cylinder lock 130, and then, A decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 is grasped by hand, and the door frame 3 changes from the closed state to the main body frame 4 to the open state. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more work is done to open the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, the more the load is repeatedly applied to the joint between the decorative member and the door frame 3, which may damage the door frame. There is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. The plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are mounted on the front side (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 in order to emit the light to the rear through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. It can emit light towards the rear of 3. A metal right reinforcing frame 112 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3, and a right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. Since the metal stopper FT is arranged on the (front) side and both are metal members, when an employee such as a clerk at the game hall opens the door frame 3 from the main body frame 3, Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, light reflected by the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and metal reflective parts such as the metal stopper FT leaks out, and the gap is filled. can be made to emit light. As a result, when an employee such as a clerk at the game hall performs the work of opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side of the door frame right side unit 410 provided on the door frame 3 Grasp the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 with your hand and pull the decorative member to the extent that you can see the luminescence in the gap, then stop pulling the decorative member, and then insert your finger into the gap and tighten the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand can be shortened, the time for which a load is applied to the joint between the decorative member (right side unit 410 of the door frame 3) and the door frame 3 can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player is playing a game, a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5, while flowing down, accidentally collides with another game ball and hits a nail. It may become clogged. When the player shoots game balls one after another toward the game area 5a in this state, more game balls are piled up on top of the packed game balls, resulting in a grape-shaped collection of game balls. In order to resolve the situation in which the game balls have gathered in a grape shape, the player must call an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall and have them remove the game balls that have gathered in the grape shape. An attendant such as a clerk at a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is opened. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to turn off, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. ``control the game board at the time''. In addition to or instead of controlling the game board when the door is opened, certain LEDs (for example, the front surface of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 In addition to controlling the lighting of a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, if the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained in the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. ``Control the door frame when opening''.

When opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are all turned off, and/or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 lights up in a notification mode to notify that the door is open. It becomes a state where When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the cylindrical magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 and becomes transparent, as described above. Light is emitted from the center cap, and light is also emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Furthermore, it is reflected from the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the cylindrical magnetic circuit section) and is repeatedly reflected between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. On the other hand, since the light is emitted backward from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light). Then, since the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469), ) A gap between the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the door. The light passes through a through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101 and is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100.

In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and can also emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3. 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decoration board 469 is viewed from the front side of the door frame 3 and the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) can be visually recognized. In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in a notification mode so that it can be seen not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469. As a result, in the game hall, the front side (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be seen by staff such as clerks of the game hall who pass through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the screen. Therefore, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is opened. In addition, in the gaming hall, abnormalities or malfunctions may occur to staff such as pachinko players from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. There is an abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball jam in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the main body frame 4, wiring Disconnections, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) can be quickly reported, and the game The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is torn to pieces with an unauthorized tool, the sound will no longer flow, but while it is easy to see that the speaker's diaphragm is torn to shreds, it is also possible to tear a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool. If you just open it, the sound will change, but the sound will continue to flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool and remove or break the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals to prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker, the magnet may be damaged or hit. Even if the gaming machine were to detect someone illegally acquiring game balls by doing so, no warning sound would be emitted from the speakers in the first place. If a person who commits such illegal acts leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a state where it is waiting for a player, and a silent demonstration (multiple LEDs on the door frame and gaming board switch to a lighting mode for waiting for a player). At the same time as the light is emitted, an image for waiting for the player is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image.) will be repeated. If this happens, the clerk or other staff member at the game hall, while waiting for a player, may find that an unauthorized tool has been used to puncture a hole in the speaker's diaphragm, disconnecting the wiring connected to the speaker's connection terminal, or disconnecting the wire. This makes it difficult to determine whether sound is coming from the speakers or not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is made with a hole using a wire, since the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the front surface (surface ) When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted in Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the diaphragm. Since the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is The light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap shines with high brightness like a spotlight compared to the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes as described above, when performing a silent demonstration, the top lower cover 465 can be penetrated easily. Through the hole, the presence of the hole drilled in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as a spotlight shining with high brightness. Therefore, it can contribute to determining whether or not the sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is made with a wire and a silent demonstration is being performed, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off (by chance they are turned off). ), or a state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, since the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which a white coating film coated with a white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to this white coating film, so that the top side speaker The white color of the white paint film could be seen through the holes drilled in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the numerous through holes formed in the top lower cover 465. The holes are easily visible. This makes it possible to discover whether or not a hole has been illegally punched in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. Therefore, it can contribute to determining whether or not the sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration in which the plurality of LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player-waiting mode, and a player-waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 that can display an effect image. As a result, a plurality of LEDs emit light in the player-waiting mode, so even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally punched with a wire, it cannot be mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through the hole made in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464, it appears that a part of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is emitting light. This makes it possible to discover that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

Note that a translucent speaker net may be provided in front of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be blocked from unauthorized intrusion with a wire, and the act of making a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be made time consuming. , can contribute to early detection of such fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the speaker net has translucency, it is unlikely to interfere with light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

Furthermore, in the top side speaker 464, the vibration parts such as the diaphragm and the center cap were made of translucent resin, such as milky white polypropylene, but they were made of translucent resin, such as gray polypropylene. It may be made of polypropylene having a color similar to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc., or it may be made of a transparent resin instead of a translucent resin.

Incidentally, gaming machines have conventionally been proposed that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects, error notifications, etc. that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that include a front frame configured to removably hold a game board in the middle frame and cover the front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (Paragraph [0019] and Figure 1)). By the way, when opening the front frame of a game hall, an employee such as a staff member of the game hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and operates the rotation operation, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame with his/her hand. As the number of opening operations increases, there is a risk that the front frame may be damaged due to repeated loads being applied to the joint between the decorative member and the front frame.

Furthermore, gaming machines that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). When some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special manner different from normal times, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, in the same manner as in the past, it was difficult to say that it was sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Furthermore, gaming machines have conventionally been proposed that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). When some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special manner different from normal times, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the amount of light directed toward the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light directed toward the front of the game machine decreases, so it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Furthermore, a gaming machine in which specific information regarding the gaming machine is provided on the gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). This makes it possible to confirm from the outside whether the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized changes to the game machine. However, in the same mode as in the past, since the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, there is a possibility that the decorativeness is lowered and the interest in the game is lowered.

Furthermore, gaming machines that include a speaker in the front frame have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A speaker provided in this gaming machine plays the performance sound generated during the game, as well as error notification sound and the like. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces with an unauthorized tool, the sound will no longer flow, but it will be easily visible that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces. Simply drilling a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool will cause the sound to flow, although the sound will change. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool and remove or break the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals to prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker, it will cause magnet bumps and hammer bumps. Even if the game machine is able to detect an act of illegally acquiring game balls by doing so, a warning sound will not be emitted from the speaker. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and displays a silent demonstration (the light-emitting device emits light in the player-waiting mode, and the image display device emits light). A player waiting image is displayed.) will be repeated. However, while waiting for players, the staff at the game hall, such as the staff at the game hall, may use unauthorized tools to puncture the diaphragm of the speaker, disconnect the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals, or disconnect the wires. It was difficult to determine whether sound was coming from the speakers or not.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decoration body 271, a plate right upper decoration body 276, a plate center upper decoration body 312a, a door frame left side decoration body 404, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. 453 is formed in a half-tube shape, so that the player can see the decoration as if the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decoration body 453 are a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decorative substrates can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light. A light emission effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 has an annular, donut-shaped rotary operation section 302 on the top surface that is larger in diameter than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a rotary operation section 302 arranged coaxially within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. A press operation section 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b and a cylindrical central press operation section 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation section 302 is attached below the rotation operation section 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and plate center lower decoration bodies 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and The door frame left side decoration body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration body of the door frame right side unit 410 have the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration body 312a and the lower center plate decoration body 312b. 419 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302, the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the two plate center lower decoration bodies 312b, and the rotation operation part 302, the outer periphery Since the pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be made to stand out.

In addition, the plate lower left decorative body 281, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and the lower plate center decorative body 312b, which are arranged below the plate left upper decorative body 271, the plate right upper decorative body 276, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the plate center lower decoration body 312b. As a result, since the performance operation unit 300 becomes larger from the bottom end toward the top, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotary operation unit 302 that is placed on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The press operation section 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the top surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotary operating section 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends upwardly toward the front. Since the upper surfaces of the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face toward the head (face) of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1. The entire operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire structure of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be easily seen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is donut-shaped. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation section 302 is used for rotation operation, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front and back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. Therefore, in the tray unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are in a state that protrudes more forward than the upper plate 201, and the upper plate center Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out. At the same time, the appearance of the area around the rotation operation portion 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to make the game more appealing to the players. This makes it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine they want to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging the water to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and a payout base unit 550 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it includes a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 that is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later). It is connected to the effect drive board 1720 (to be described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the back unit 3000, and the opposite end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. and is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 (described later) of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 guides the interface board 635 and the side of the drive board unit 1700 on the body frame 4 side connected to the effect drive board 1720 (described later) extending from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. The binding band 504 is inserted into a pair of through holes 502d in the same position in the left and right direction among the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a while in contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. , is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment part 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the center axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is installed. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been released toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. Can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 90(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape that is open to the rear, and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a, It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward by about 1/3 of the total height from above so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat outside the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 on the left side in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 90).

When the ball extracting lever 593 is raised to make the ball extracting movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which have been tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extracting movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extracting movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so the game balls B are not allowed to flow from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball extracting movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extracting passage 580b, the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball extracting passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and strong force can be prevented from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b, the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper bulb removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

Further, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detecting state.

To discharge the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is small, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 The space is in communication with the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 , the speaker box 623 , the curtain front member 42 , and the curtain rear member 43 . The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made wider, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the base 626 after the base unit 620b, and a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, when looking at the front of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear surface of the board 630 (sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630") on which electronic components are mounted. A cover 631. The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, so that the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the power supply board 630 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter, may simply be referred to as "solid green resist"). ), and a power switch 630a having an operation section for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630. In addition to the power switch 630a, the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 has attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are placed The front side markings indicating the shape of the side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component) are displayed in green. It is a highly visible white paint that is printed on a solid green resist using silk printing. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Furthermore, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of a transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board box 632 housed in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and lock the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a locking spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end prevents rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 101(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and which is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite end (right side wall 552e side), and has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This results in changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-back direction, and has the same side in the left-right direction as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Moreover, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the open upper part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface part. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m; The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a dam extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this part. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game balls B spilled outside the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they can be made difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and rides on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the front component, game panel, front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 seen from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 107 seen from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board with the front structural members, game panel, front unit, etc. made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board shown by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is square when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board, the LED emits light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board. If the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side view LED). Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 182 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate section that provides a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) by accepting or passing the gaming balls B. 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole in the gaming area 5a. 2006 etc., it is for playing a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front side of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 114, FIG. 211, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116, etc.) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has a transparent panel board 1110, the game panel 1100 can be passed from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) to the rear of the game panel 1100. The presence of various members can be easily recognized (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400) that are electrically connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 described above. , the side window interior decoration board 413 of the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc.), as well as the main control board 1310 and peripheral control The decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to commands from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a performance drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 that accommodates the panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720. The left side of the drive board box 1730 when viewed from the rear is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and the right side when viewed from the rear is detachably attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. For example, the effect driving board 1720 has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). ) to form a green resist layer. A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the production drive board 1720, and attributes of the electronic components such as the part number of the electronic component and an area indicating the position where the electronic component is placed are displayed near these electronic components. (It may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component.) The marking section is a white paint that stands out easily against the green color. Each is printed using silk screen printing on a solid green resist.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, and a second starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first grand prize opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A second grand prize opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the game ball 2004.

In addition, the table unit 2000 has an output port 2010 provided at the lower end of the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B from inside the gaming area 5a, and an outlet 2010 provided in the middle of the up and down direction within the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the contents from within the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front; A second attacker unit 2600 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; Comprising a side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003. There is.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear effect unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top effect unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 116. FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 116(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient to allow the two game balls B to be lined up in the left and right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail N even if it is planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at its lowest position in the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center are The width is wide enough to allow the balls B to line up, and the upper side is narrow enough to prevent a plurality of game balls B from being lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into this out recess 1123.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engagement claws that elastically engage with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined parts of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step. It is provided with a pair of engaging pieces that engage with two engaging step portions on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the holding portion with the engagement pawl, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, A feeling of openness can be given to the player, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is transparent along with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, on the back side of the transparent flat panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, when viewing the game board 5 from the front, in the vicinity of the right side of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, an unauthorized A magnetic sensor 1111 that detects magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113, etc.).

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 112, 113, and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge part 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the back side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. This board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B ejected downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and allows them to be ejected from the ejection part 1201 formed on the bottom to the ejection ball receiving part 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 211) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. It is equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a general winning hole sensor 3051, a first big winning hole sensor 2402, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 276 to 279 in addition to FIG. 107. Figure 276 is a perspective view (a) of the function display unit seen from the front, (b) a perspective view of the function display unit seen from the back, and Figure 277 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit seen from the front. 278 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 279 is a schematic diagram of the front (surface) of the function display board accommodated in the function display unit.

As shown in FIG. 107, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the gaming status, and a normal symbol display unit consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate section 2003. and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the passage of game balls B at the gate section 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the pending number of game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

As shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, the function display unit 1400 includes a box 1400a that is open at the rear and has an opening, a flat cover 1400b that closes the opening, and the box 1400a and the cover 1400b. and a function display board 1400c that is sandwiched and housed in the space. The shape of the side surface of the box body 1400a (that is, the external shape) and the shape of the side surface of the cover body 1400b (that is, the external shape) are the same shape, and the cover body 1400b covers the opening of the box body 1400a. When attached to the box body 1400a, the side surfaces of the box body 1400a and the side surfaces of the box body 1400a are flush with each other. The outer shape of the function display board 1400c is smaller than the outer shapes of the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. In this embodiment, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded from colored opaque resin (black resin). In addition to black, the colored opaque resin may be gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like. Moreover, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b may be molded with a milky-white resin instead of a colored opaque resin, or may be molded with a colorless and transparent resin.

[5-5-1. Box]
The box body 1400a has a plurality of through holes 1400az at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in this embodiment, LED bare chips) arranged and mounted in a matrix on the front surface 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. LED insertion tubes 1400aa, which are arranged in a matrix and have a cylindrical shape and communicate with the through holes 1400az, are provided to protrude rearward from the back side of the box body 1400a, and are connected to the function display board. 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is in contact with the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. There is. That is, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since it is housed in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lit or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lit or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. .

Further, the box body 1400a is provided with plate-shaped ribs 1400ab that connect mutually adjacent through holes 1400az and reinforce the through holes 1400az, protruding rearward from the back side of the box body 1400a. The tip of the rib 1400ab is formed so as not to protrude from the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa (that is, the tip of the rib 1400ab is formed shorter than the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa). As described above, since the box body 1400a is molded from colored opaque resin (black resin), the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the ribs 1400ab are also colored (black). Note that the tip of the rib 1400ab may be flush with the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

The inner diameter of the through hole 1400az and the inner diameter of the LED insertion tube 1400aa are the same, and there is no step at the portion where the through hole 1400az and the LED insertion tube 1400aa communicate. Further, on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the box body 1400a, there are protrusions 1400ac that are inserted into locking holes 1400baa formed in four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover body 1400b. It is provided in a recess formed on the side surface. The side surface of each protruding portion 1400ac is flush with each side surface of the box body 1400a, and does not protrude from each side surface of the box body 1400a. In addition, a side surface of each protrusion 1400ac is partially sloped upward from the opening of the box 1400a toward the front (surface) of the box 1400a, and the four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover 1400b makes it easy to insert into the protrusion 1400ac. Note that when the protruding portion 1400ac of the box body 1400a is inserted into the locking hole 1400baa formed in the attachment piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b, the locking hole 1400baa formed in the attachment piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is inserted into the locking hole 1400baa formed in the attachment piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b. At the same time, the side surface of the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b and the side surface of the box body 1400a become flush with each other, and unless the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is destroyed, the cover body 1400b The structure is such that it cannot be removed from the box body 1400a. In other words, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealed board box that seals the function display board 1400c.

In addition, the box body 1400a has a plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad along the inner outer circumferential surface of the box body 1400a for regulating movement of the function display board 1400c in the vertical, horizontal, and front-rear directions and for holding the function display board 1400c. It is provided.

Although not shown, a white function display sticker is pasted on the front surface of the box body 1400a. This function display sticker has a circular transparent portion formed at a position corresponding to each LED insertion tube 1400aa when attached to the front surface of the box body 1400a. In other words, the lighting or blinking of the LED 1400ca mounted on the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is guided by the LED insertion tube 1400aa and can be visually recognized through the through hole 1400az and the transparent part. ing.

[5-5-2. cover body]
The cover body 1400b is provided with mounting pieces 1400ba on the top side, left side, bottom side, and right side, each of which protrudes forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400b, and is secured to these four mounting pieces 1400ba. Holes 1400 baa are each formed. As described above, a recess is provided on the side surface of the box 1400a, and a protrusion 1400ac is formed in this recess. When the locking hole 1400baa formed in the attachment piece 1400ba is inserted into the protrusion 1400ac, the attachment piece 1400ba is housed in a recess provided on the side surface of the box body 1400a ( Regarding the mounting piece 1400ba provided on the upper side of the cover body 1400b, the tip of the mounting piece 1400ba is flush with the front surface (surface) of the box body 1400a, and does not protrude from the front surface (surface) of the box body 1400a).

In addition, the cover body 1400b is provided with a connector opening 1400bb at a position corresponding to the surface mount type connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a, the connector 1400cb of the function display board 1400c protrudes from the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b and is exposed through the connector opening 1400bb. Connector 1400cb A wiring cable through which control signals from main control board 1310 are transmitted is electrically connected to connector 1400cb. The color of the housing of the connector 1400cb is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Note that the connector 1400cb may be of a surface mount (SMD) type instead of a surface mount type.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 1400bc for attaching the function display unit 1400 to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, protruding rearward from the back side of the cover body 1400b (in this embodiment, Three mounting bosses 1400bc are provided). As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a flat panel plate 1110 that is formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the front component 1000 that defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a, and an outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a panel holder 1120 that holds the front component 1000 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. As described above, the front component 1000 is provided with a function display unit attachment part 1011 at the upper left corner in a front view to which the function display unit 1400 is attached. A fixing hole (not shown) has a through hole in the front (surface) of the panel holder 1120 at the upper left corner in front view and at a position corresponding to the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400. are formed respectively. The function display unit 1400 is assembled by inserting the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b into the three fixing holes provided on the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120, and inserting the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b into the three fixing holes provided on the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120. The cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (surface) of the panel holder 1120 by inserting and screwing the screw into the through hole of the function display unit 1400. It will be in a state where it is In this state, the panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000 while holding the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, so that the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit attachment part 1011 of the front component 1000, and the function display The front surface (surface) of the box body 1400a of the unit 1400 and the front surface (surface) of the front component 1000 are flush with each other, and there is no difference in level.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a rib portion 1400bd along the inside of its outer periphery, and is provided to protrude forward from the surface side of the cover body 1400b. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a, the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd comes into contact with the inner surface of the opening of the box body 1400a. In addition, the cover body 1400b has a plurality of protrusions 1400bda for holding the function display board 1400c at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad provided on the box body 1400a along the inner circumferential surface of the rib portion 1400bd. It is provided.

Although not shown, the product management number (for example, FDU-TYP-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b.

[5-5-3. Function display board]
A plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements")) are mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition to pads to which (front side electronic components) are soldered, through holes (through holes whose inner walls are plated with copper and are conductive; the same applies hereinafter), lands, etc. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid black resist") formed by applying a black resist solution in the entire area except for . In this embodiment, the front side (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c shows the part number of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) and the position where the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) such as area (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), the size of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), the front-side electronic components ( The front side marking section (front side marking section) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) may include the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component)) is displayed in a predetermined color ( For example, the paint is a bright color (white or yellow that is easily noticeable against black), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

In addition to the connector 1400cb to which the wiring cable is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. In addition to the pads to which rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as resistors and various capacitors are soldered, a black resist solution is applied to the entire area, excluding through holes, lands, etc., to form a black color. A black resist layer is formed by a coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid black resist"). In this embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c indicates the part number of the rear electronic component (back electronic component) and the position where the rear electronic component (back electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of the rear side electronic components (backside electronic components) such as areas (in addition, the shape of the rear side electronic components (backside electronic components), the size of the rear side electronic components (backside electronic components), the rear side electronic components ( The rear electronic component (back side electronic component) is displayed in a predetermined color ( For example, the paint is bright (white or yellow, which is easily noticeable against black), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

As described above, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and the control from the main control board 1310 is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. A connector 1400cb to which a wiring cable for signal transmission is electrically connected is mounted. A plurality of terminals provided on a connector 1400cb to which a wiring cable for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310 is electrically connected are connected to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca via various wiring patterns formed on the function display board 1400c. electrically connected. In addition to wiring for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310, the wiring cable also includes wiring for supplying power (for example, +12V) and wiring for making the board ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 the same. included. Note that among the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, one surface may be a solid ground, both surfaces may be a solid ground, or both surfaces may be a solid ground. You don't have to.

The front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c and the rear (rear) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c are lands, respectively. (The land includes a land on the front side (front side) and a land on the rear side (back side).) through a through hole 1400cc having a A plurality of terminals are electrically connected to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c.

When a through hole 1400cc having a land is placed near a plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the light emitted by the LED 1400ca is reflected by the land of the through hole 1400cc, and when this reflected light is emitted to another LED 1400ca adjacent to the LED 1400ca, other LEDs 1400ca are emitted. The LED 1400ca may emit light even though it is not emitting light, or the light may be mixed with the light emitted by other LED 1400ca, resulting in a color different from that emitted by the other LED 1400ca. In some cases, the light emission mode is such that the color is blurred. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on control signals from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to display important information such as the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc. Since it is a display device, if such a light emission pattern occurs, there is a risk that the player may misread or misrecognize it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 279, the through-hole 1400cc having a land is located at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, and the LED insertion tube 1400aa and ribs formed on the back side of the box body 1400a. It is placed outside the area corresponding to the area 1400ab. This makes it possible to suppress the light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca from being reflected on the land of the through-hole 1400cc, thereby preventing the light reflected from the land of the through-hole 1400cc from traveling toward the multiple LEDs 1400ca. can contribute to this.

Although it is difficult to prevent disturbance light from entering through the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cb, the connector 1400cb is placed on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c where the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are not mounted. Since it is implemented, it is possible to prevent disturbance light from directly proceeding toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca.

In addition, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, as described above, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is inserted into the front surface of the function display board 1400c ( surface) is in contact with 1400cx. That is, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since it is housed in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lit or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lit or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. . As a result, disturbance light entering from the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cb passes through the through hole 1400cc having a land and passes from the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1400c. (Surface) Even if it enters the LED insertion tube 1400cx, the LED insertion tube 1400aa that functions as a partition wall can suppress the disturbance light from entering the LED insertion tube 1400aa, so the color of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca will change. It is possible to prevent the colors of the ambient light from mixing (it is possible to reduce the mixing of the colors of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and the color of the ambient light).

In this manner, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c. In the present embodiment, the front (surface) side 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is provided with a front (surface) side wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a front (surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component each side electronic component (front side electronic component) is is formed by removing the foil from the surrounding copper foil on the outside of that information, In addition, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, there is no rear surface side electronic component ( Information for specifying what type of electronic component each (back side electronic component) is is not formed by the foil residue formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. That is, in this embodiment, information for specifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is. Identify what kind of electronic component is the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) that is not written on the front side (front side) 1400cx of 1400c and is mounted on the rear side (back side) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. No information is written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c.

Moreover, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. This is because when a black resist solution is used, the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca disposed nearby is prevented from being reflected by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. This is because it can contribute to preventing mixing with.

Furthermore, since the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded from colored opaque resin (black resin), light can pass through the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b into the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. can be prevented from entering. Even if light were to enter the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a black resist liquid would be applied to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Since a black resist layer is formed by the black coating film, this reflected light is directed toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca by suppressing reflection on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. It is possible to suppress the progress of the project.

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important display device that is controlled to display lottery results, game status, etc. by the main control board 1310, the function display board 1400c housed in the box body 1400a of the function display unit 1400 is If the game is altered, lottery results, gaming status, etc. cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, even though no game balls have actually entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, a fraudulent signal may be input to the main control board 1310 as if a game ball had entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Even if a fraudulent act to obtain many lottery opportunities is performed, the functional display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery results, game status, etc., and it is difficult for staff such as game hall clerks to notice.

Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c. In other words, on the front side (front side) 1400cx and rear side (back side) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, there is no front side marking part (front side marking part) and rear side marking part (back side marking part) printed by silk printing. Not formed. In the present embodiment, the front (surface) side 1400cx of the function display board 1400c is provided with a front (surface) side wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a front (surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component each side electronic component (front side electronic component) is is formed by removing the foil from the surrounding copper foil on the outside of that information, In addition, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, there is no rear surface side electronic component ( Information for specifying what type of electronic component each (back side electronic component) is is not formed by the foil residue formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. This can make it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1400c and understand the circuit configuration.

In this embodiment, instead of mounting an LED package in which an LED bare chip is encapsulated on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. We adopted a configuration that directly implements the LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements") are extremely small electronic components that are enclosed in surface-mounted (top-type or side-type), chip-on-board, or bullet-shaped packages. be. For this reason, compared to the case where the LED package is mounted on the front (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the depth distance dimension of surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, shell type, etc. Therefore, the function display unit 1400 can be made smaller. Note that since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 etc. is transmitted directly to the door frame 3, the impact to the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 will not be affected. Since the impact caused by the impact is weakened, there is a low probability that the multiple LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c will be damaged by the impact caused by such a knock.

Examples of methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, etc. In this embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, a wire is not used to electrically connect the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, but a bump is used to connect the electrode of the LED bare chip A protrusion called a protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the front (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c. This connection part is reinforced with solder, resin, etc.

Further, in this embodiment, there is no area printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, so the board manufacturing cost can be lowered by reducing the cost of silk printing plates and the number of manufacturing steps for the board.

Note that in the present embodiment described above, there was no silk printing on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c; Instead, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealed board box that seals the function display board 1400c, and the cover body 1400b cannot be removed from the box body 1400a unless the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b is destroyed. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c has a front side marking section (front side marking section) in a predetermined color (for example, white, which is a bright color that stands out from black, or Yellow) paint may be printed on a solid black resist by silk printing, and rear side electronic components (back side electronic components) may be printed on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. , it may be printed by silk printing on a solid black resist using paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that is easily noticeable against black).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the box body 1400a is provided with LED insertion tubes 1400aa each having a cylindrical shape and projecting rearward from the back side of the box body 1400a and communicating with the through hole 1400az. , instead of the cylindrical LED insertion tube 1400aa, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted separately from the box body 1400a and arranged in a matrix on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. A grid-like spacer may also be provided. The lattice-shaped spacer is molded from colored opaque resin (black resin) similarly to the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. Even with this configuration, when the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of Since each LED 1400ca is housed in a rectangular opening formed in the corresponding grid spacer, the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca should not be mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. The lattice-shaped spacer can function as a partition wall similarly to the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the through hole 1400cc having a land is located at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, and corresponds to the area of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the rib 1400ab formed on the back side of the box body 1400a. However, if it is difficult to arrange the through hole 1400cc with a land at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, this hole should be placed outside the area corresponding to the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa. (In other words, it may be arranged in a region smaller than the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and it may be arranged in a region smaller than the LED insertion tube 1400aa. ), within the outer peripheral area of each LED insertion tube 1400aa (in other words, within the area where the LED 1400ca is accommodated, called inside the LED insertion tube 1400aa, and at the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the function display). The substrate 1400c may be disposed in a region other than the region where the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the substrate 1400c comes into contact with the substrate 1400c and the combined region thereof.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, front side electronic components (front side electronic components) mounted on the front side (front side) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c are mounted on the front side (front side) 1400cx and the rear side (back side) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. No information for specifying what kind of electronic component the component is is written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and it is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. Although there is no information written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c to identify what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) is, the board of the function display board 1400c The management number may be written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board 1400c. This board control number can be written by silk printing using paint in a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a light color that is easily noticeable against black, or gray, which is a dark color that is difficult to stand out against black, and is close to black). The wiring pattern may be printed on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and the board control number may be printed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the board control number in the wiring pattern that is copper foil. It may also be formed by leaving a foil.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, although the model of the connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c is not written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the model of the connector 1400cb is may be written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. The method for indicating the model of this connector housing is to use silk paint in a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a light color that is easily noticeable against black, or gray, which is a dark color that is difficult to stand out against black, and is close to black). It may be printed by printing, or the wiring pattern of the connector 1400cb may be formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the connector 1400cb model with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It may also be formed by removing the foil and leaving the foil remaining.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of the product control number stamped on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the product control number is engraved on the box body 1400a. The product control number of the function display unit 1400 may be engraved on any one of the left side wall, upper side wall, right side wall, and lower side wall.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back side) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of being engraved, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved. It may be printed directly on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b with a paint of a color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or it may be printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b. In addition, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is displayed on any one of the left side wall, upper side wall, right side wall, and lower side wall of the box body 1400a. It may be directly printed with paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or the product management of the function display unit 1400 may be printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may also paste something with a number printed on it.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. However, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c on which no LED 1400ca is mounted, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution instead of black. Alternatively, a white resist layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. For example, a green resist solution is commonly used and is therefore inexpensive.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. However, instead of black, a green resist layer may be formed by applying a green resist liquid to form a green resist layer, or a white resist layer may be formed by applying a white resist liquid to form a green resist layer. A white resist layer may be formed. For example, a green resist solution is inexpensive because it is commonly used.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1400c. (Surface) Although a configuration was adopted in which the LED package is directly mounted on the 1400cx, instead of the bare LED chip, an LED package having a surface mount type (top type or side type), a chip-on-board type, a bullet type, etc. is used on the function display board 1400c. It may be mounted on the front (surface) 1400cx.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, flip-chip bonding was adopted as a method for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, but instead of flip-chip bonding, Wire bonding may also be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the front (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c has a front (surface) side wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the front (surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Information for identifying what kind of electronic components each of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), which are multiple LEDs of 1400 ca, is is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. Although it was not formed due to remaining foil, a circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the terminal (anode terminal or cathode terminal) of multiple LED1400ca and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. Terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and are painted solidly on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c in black (green or white may be used instead of black). The foil removal reference terminal symbols may be each covered with a resist. The front (surface) side wiring pattern forming the foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed to be electrically insulated from the LED 1400ca. In addition, as a foil-cut reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called solid ground (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be foil-cut. In addition, the foil removal standard terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED1400ca instead of a circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that allows distinguishing between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), or a symbol used in the circuit diagram (The symbol used may be a simplified version of the symbol used to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal.) In addition, if the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c are almost the same (that is, the mounting direction of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca is the same for the mounting worker or automatic machine), Orientation (if there is a rule in advance that there is no one to be mounted in the opposite direction), the function display board has a foil-cut standard terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the terminal of one of the LED1400ca out of multiple LED1400ca. 1400c, or a foil-cut standard terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c near a predetermined position corresponding to the terminal of one or more LEDs 1400ca. may be formed. In this case as well, the foil removal standard terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED1400ca instead of a circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), It may be a simplified version of the symbol used in the circuit diagram (symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal).

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on control signals from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, etc. Since this is an important display device that displays special lottery results, etc., a black resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c to form a black coating film. By forming a resist layer, the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c is prevented from being reflected, so that it does not mix with the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca placed nearby. I was able to contribute to making this happen. Therefore, for the substrates accommodated in display devices other than the functional display unit 1400, similarly to the functional display substrate 1400c accommodated in the functional display unit 1400, on the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the substrate, A black resist layer may be formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. In this way, by preventing reflection of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the board housed in the display device, it contributes to preventing the light from being mixed with the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca placed nearby. be able to.

This display device will be explained with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of the game board side matrix display device provided on the game board and the door frame side matrix display device provided on the door frame. As shown in FIG. 280, the display device includes a display device 1600 that accommodates a board on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted, and a game board 5 that is separate from a performance display device 1600 that can display a predetermined performance image. A circular game board side matrix display device UDPC is provided in the upper center of the center accessory 2500, and the left side of the door frame 3 houses a plurality of boards on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted. Examples include the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR provided in the unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, respectively. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL, TDPR are different from the function display unit 1400 which is controlled by the main control board 1310 which controls the progress of the game, and the peripheral control unit 1500 (which controls the progress of the performance). The difference is that it is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510 (to be described later) that can be used to control the peripherals. Note that the game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL, TDPR have the same configuration, and a detailed explanation of the game board side matrix display device UDPC will be described later as a "dot matrix display device."

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 211) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 112, 113, and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a are formed for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and a long ventilation length is formed in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where they are aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and has approximately the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, are installed in the back box. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the lower fixing piece 1601c side forward and inserting the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and a portion of its rear end extends through the opening 1110 of the panel board 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of receiving game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. The first grand prize opening 2005 is different from the first grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B of The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second grand prize opening 2006.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the horizontal center in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part of the gaming area 5a. It is placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 located at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a slightly higher height than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize opening 2006 is located above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is located on the right side of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as seen and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting port 2004, a first big winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the approximate center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate part 2003. A gate member 2800 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the front, FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the back, and FIG. ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101. It includes a flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 has a shape in a front view that is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long from side to side and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in the shape of a gutter with an open upper side. The bottom surface of this peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and the game ball B can be guided rearward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the flange part 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall part 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110, a first starting port 2002 that can receive the game ball B is formed by a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110. is forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 located directly below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the slope of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000 It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 at. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is pasted on the front surface of the front wall portion 2101, making it more conspicuous than the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general winning hole 2001, and it is possible to encourage the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002. At the same time, by allowing the first starting port 2002 to accept the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the special lottery result that will be drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B backward is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

In addition, when the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitting decoration is carried out using light from LEDs on the lower back inner first decorative board 3322, the lower back inner second decorative board 3329, etc. of the inner back inner decoration unit 3320.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002. This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a portion may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. The distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 to the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is longer than the distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the sloped portion. (the ribs are positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is brought into contact with the rib and guided backward is adjusted so that the timing when the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is brought into contact with the first front wall portion 2203. The timing can be set later than the timing at which the robot contacts the inclined part and is guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and two side units extending from the base plate in the shape of a gutter in the front and back directions, the front end of which is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes downward, and is spaced apart from side to side. a first guide gutter, a first front wall portion that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutter, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate to the left of the two first guide gutter. and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed toward the upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 has an upper side extending vertically with a border at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and a lower side near the base plate 2201 so as to move backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

This side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The game ball B can be received at the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Furthermore, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. These first guide gutter 2202 and second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surfaces become lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general prize openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning a prize port sensor 3051, and then It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker affixed to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general prize winning port 2001. It is less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002. In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of these general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, even if no decorative sticker is pasted on the front. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the back lower left presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, as shown in FIG. Light from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light-emitting decoration, and the lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has an inclined part on the first front wall part 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower left side of the back in the back unit 3000 is The light emitted forward from the lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It can make it look better.

In this side unit 2200, the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100, so that the side unit 2200 moves relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. Note that the bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, the received game ball B disappears from view in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily drawn to the general winning hole 2001 for a long time while ensuring that the player is aware of the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's attention to the next game ball B and other winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. It is possible to enjoy the game within the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portions 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined, the first front wall portions 2203 can be viewed from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203, since the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may not accept the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. If the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel a sense of distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of this embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 and directed backward. Since the guided game ball B can be made visible to the player for a short time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, even if the user has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When the game ball B passes through, if most of the game ball B (at least half of the game ball B or more) overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may place the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to create an illusion as if the player has been accepted, and it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B was accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefits (payout of game balls B and drawing of the first special lottery results) are not given afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning hole 2001 out of the three general winning holes 2001 in parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with the second front wall portion 2205. The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 has a similar shape. Thereby, when the game ball B is accepted into the left-most general prize opening 2001, some players can be given the illusion that it has been accepted into the starting opening. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning slot 2001, which is under the illusion that it is a starting slot, the special lottery result is not drawn, so the player feels a sense of distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 that is far to the left from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position where it cannot be accepted for "right-handed hitting"), and the second Since there is no decorative sticker affixed to the front of the front wall portion 2205 to indicate a starting port, it can be reconfirmed that it is not a starting port, and the player may feel distrustful and lose interest in the game. This can be avoided.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, since a decorative sticker is not pasted on the front surface of the general winning hole 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Although not shown, the angle of inclination from the horizontal in the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is such that variable winning openings such as the big winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the winning opening door rotates around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward and is in the open state so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning opening side. It is an angle. To be more specific, some players may find that if the number of game balls B paid out by receiving game balls B into the variable winning hole is larger than that of the general winning hole 2001, many of the game balls B may be delivered to the variable winning hole. I started hoping for a prize. Alternatively, even if it is a variable winning opening (big winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the slope of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening more gentle than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall part 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As mentioned above, when the game ball B is accepted into the variable winning hole, the accepted game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to make the user reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole to the general winning hole 2001. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was received. In addition, since the angle of the winning slot door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the winning slot door to close from the open state, so the game ball B is won more than the specified number for the player. It can make you think that you do.

In addition, in the two general winning holes 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the part extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the part is longer than the part extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall part 2203. The distance between them is longer. As a result, since the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001, the game balls B are paid out, but no drawings such as normal drawings or special drawings are held. can be made invisible from the player's view at an early stage.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is inclined, but this is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are inclined. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position in the normal gaming state (so-called "left-handed hit") can enter the general prize opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided in the position shown is not limited to this, the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can be used in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable change", or "jackpot"). It may be provided at a position where the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called "right-handed hitting") can enter the ball, or it may be provided at both locations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 with a slope on the front side is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from when it is closed. The angle is narrow. If the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, even if the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is set, the player cannot win more than the specified number I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that won into the grand prize opening rolls toward the back side is said to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that entered the general winning hole 2001, which has an inclined front surface, rolls toward the back side. There is. In other words, if a prize is won in the general winning hole 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning in the big winning hole, the speed of the game ball B that won in the big winning hole is said to be faster than the speed at which it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning hole that pays out more often takes longer to disappear from the player's sight. As a result, the winning slot with more payouts can provide a longer period of joy when winning a prize.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right. This side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. 1st attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the first attacker unit in cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is disposed to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is placed on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning port 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out opening 2011 is provided at a lower position than the first big winning opening 2005 below the second starting opening 2004.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a first attacker unit that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning port 2005. It includes a big prize opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. Two first large prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel board 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 forming a flow path for the game ball B, and a front cover 2412 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. The second starting port door 2414 is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2414 is moved to open and close the second starting port 2004. a solenoid cover 2416 that covers the starting port solenoid 2415; a first large winning port door 2417 that is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the first large winning port 2005; A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the forward and backward movements of the first attacking solenoid 2418. A member 2419 is provided.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first major winning opening decoration board 2420 for decorating the first major winning opening 2005 with light emission, and to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413, Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with 1710 is provided.

Unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end on the right side from the center in the lateral direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c extending horizontally and penetrating back and forth in the upper part on the left side of the center, two second guide holes 2411d running side by side and penetrating back and forth below the second opening 2411c; It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates forward and backward below the first guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right width is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b has a cylindrical shape and protrudes rearward, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The second opening 2411c has a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and extends left and right, and the door 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. The second guide holes 2411d each protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and are inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

Further, the unit base 2411 has two contact portions 2411e that are arranged left and right along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and protrude forward in a triangular shape. These abutting parts 2411e connect the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 to the contacting part of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Furthermore, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411, at a portion to the left of the first guide hole 2411b and to a portion to the right of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and is formed into a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downwardly to the left from near the upper right corner, and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a when viewed from the front. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2412a, with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the first shelf part 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf 2412b so as to be lower to the left. A third shelf part 2412c that extends shorter than the third shelf part 2412b is spaced from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to the left by a length of four to six times the diameter of the game ball B. It has a fourth shelf part 2412d that extends lower to the left from a lower position than the fourth shelf part 2412d and forms a first big prize opening 2005 with the third shelf part 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a length slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

The front cover 2412 also includes a first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall 2412f extends to the same height, a third standing wall 2412g extends vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall 2412e, and a third shelf 2412c. a fourth standing wall 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412; a fifth standing wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c; and a right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. It has a sixth standing wall part 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf part 2412d, and a seventh standing wall part 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf part 2412d.

The fifth standing wall part 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf part 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. , and extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right. It extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, it slopes lower to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between it and the first horizontal wall part 2412l, and then goes halfway to the fourth vertical wall part 2412h on the left. It has a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher toward the second side. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed such that a portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j in the direction approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, respectively. It has an extending third horizontal wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends in a stepped manner along the upper side of the front cover to become lower to the left, and has an interval that allows the game balls B to flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is set apart. It has an upper shelf section 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has triangular shapes in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and at alternate positions in the left and right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, these contact parts hold the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 with the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The rear cover 2413 has a box shape that is open to the front, and is made of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting opening door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting port door 2414 includes a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a left-right direction extending from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d is provided at a portion remote from the rotating shaft 2414c at the lower part of the arm portion 2414b and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

This second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotating shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 moves forward and backward, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front and back direction, and the second starting port door 2414 The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When this starting port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The first big prize opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and each of the pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d projecting rightward from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bend forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided at the lower part of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

This first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with the door part 2417a. The first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotating shaft 2417c due to the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front and back direction. The first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When this first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a, and a transmission member 2419 that penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first large prize opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first large prize opening decoration board 2420 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The first big winning hole decoration board 2420 can decorate the first big winning hole 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door section 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is located above the first grand prize opening 2005, and the door section 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first grand prize opening 2005. It is in a state of In other words, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door part 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf part 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf part 2412a, and the door part 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released from the second shelf part 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf part 2412c or the door part 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and due to the inclination of these, the game ball B falls to the left. roll towards. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is against the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact part of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right from the first shelf section 2412a, it passes on the right side of the first vertical wall section 2412e, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m, and falls on the second horizontal wall section 2412m. Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c, it passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a. The substrate is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed on the right side of the first shelf section 2412a and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c are both It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate part 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. moves backward, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting port door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in a direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g and reaches the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. A portion of the first horizontal wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined to be lower to the rear, and due to the inclination, the game ball B rolls backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower board holder 1200. be discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves back together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding within the slit 2419c. That will happen.

As a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates around the rotation axis 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. It becomes possible to accept game balls B (see FIG. 124). In other words, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the first big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B is accepted into the first big winning hole 2005, it passes between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, and then enters the fifth standing wall. After passing between the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth vertical wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o and being detected by one of the two first big prize opening sensors 2402, It falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n. This third horizontal wall portion 2412n is sloped so that it becomes lower toward the rear from the top surface, and the game ball B that falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the slope, and the unit base 2411 It is emitted backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, in the first big winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first big winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door part 2417a that closes the first big winning opening 2005. By rotating the door part 2417a around the rotation axis 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front and back direction, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by a different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is ejected backward, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from staying between the first big prize opening 2005 and the first big prize opening sensor 2402, and also to release many game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 126(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the production display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support section 2503 provided above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, and at a portion where the peripheral wall section 2501 protrudes most to the left, the shape of the peripheral wall section 2501 at that section is in the middle of the vertically extending section. It has a shape that looks like it is bulging out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, It has a different shape from the peripheral wall part 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 135). When the support part 2503 of this part is assembled to the game board 5, the part extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support part 2503 is the back front left decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is approximately along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support part 2503 is aligned with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, it becomes difficult to distinguish the support part 2503, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively difficult to distinguish. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape, whereas the peripheral wall part 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decoration unit 3710C in the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 when assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107, etc.) ). The end sides of the support portion 2503 extending left and right extend parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, so that the end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 when viewed from the front and is located in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be rolled in the left and right direction and then released into the game area 5a, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel board of the game panel 1100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) is located at the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the front component 1000). 1006), and is formed so that a game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove open to the front, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and a first guide passage 2521 that extends along the peripheral wall part 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522 extending from the top. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly under the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the stopper 1006 are in the first guide It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left and right direction, and an exit opening diagonally downward to the left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the center accessory 2500 in the region where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it forms the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall part 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the performance image of the rear performance display device 1600 and the back unit can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. 3000 decorations etc. can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left production unit 3700 are placed as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. , it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 from becoming blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the visibility of the decorations etc. provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effects thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent, and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of luminescent decoration or the production display device 1600, the luminous decoration can be performed using the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 135 etc., the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support part 2503 (the cross-hatched part in FIG. 135). , Transmits, reflects, refracts, or diffuses the light emitted forward from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714 in the back front left direction unit 3700, the direction display device 1600, etc., to create a dazzling luminescent decoration. It can be shown to players. Note that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step can diffuse light from the rear, making it look more dazzling.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

Note that the edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left presentation unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support part 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from becoming conspicuous and reducing the decorativeness of the rear decoration. can be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left direction unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the lens effect allows those decorations to be Although the example shown above is designed to prevent blurry appearance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 may be provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that is far from the back unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through it, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the peripheral wall 2501 may not have a rear part inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Furthermore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100, and in this case, the flange portion 2502 is not provided on the center accessory 2500. You can do it like this.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit, viewed from the front, and FIG. 128(b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gate member seen from behind. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and It is attached to the front surface of a panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second big prize opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second big winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time that acts near the second big winning hole 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second big winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening door 2611 to open the second big winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second big prize opening door 2611, and a second attacker solenoid 2612 for moving the second big prize opening door 2611. It has a guide path 2613 that guides the accepted game ball B and releases it rearward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A prize opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular bottom side that bulges out downward, a right side that touches the right end of the bottom side and extends straight upward, and a right side that bulges out to the left from the top end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called feather shape, consisting of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big prize opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a that extends in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as the axis, and a link that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position farther from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The second big prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotating shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is installed with the plunger projecting downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, so that the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit into which it is inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled to the game board 5, its right side is located so as to be in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the second attacker unit 2600 is located on the peripheral wall of the second big prize opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space is formed between the right side of 2501 and the game ball B through which it can flow. In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second grand prize opening door 2611 is upright, and the second grand prize opening 2006 is closed by the second grand prize opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is selected. When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big prize opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second big winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to the left, and the right end side of the second big winning opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. In other words, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when the game ball B that has flown down comes into contact with the second grand prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and then guided by the guiding path 2613 and released backward. The game balls B discharged rearward from the guiding path 2613 are delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and are discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side middle right unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning hole 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and the general winning hole 2001 is adjacent to the right side of the general winning hole 2001, and the left-right direction is the game ball B. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width corresponding to two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and a second guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. It has two guiding passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bent rightward, and further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

When this side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of each of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Furthermore, when the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, its right end is in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end is in approximate contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, A space is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 connects the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over almost the entire area between the two (see FIG. 130, etc.).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the first guidance passage 2701, and then guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the second guide passage 2702, and then guides the game ball B received into the second sub-out port 2012 to the back side of the panel board 1110. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is being The gate member 2800 includes a gate part 2003 in which a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes a second starting port 2004 when a game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, and a gate sensor for detecting that a game cow B has passed through the gate part 2003. 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely toward the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general prize opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700 when assembled on the game board 5.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A gap is formed through which the ball B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the gaming area in FIG. 115. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly cause the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. Thereby, by hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B that have passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with respect to the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N, you are guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is transferred to the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is sent to the first starting port sensor. 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, a first special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a passes through the gate part 2003 or is accepted into the second starting opening 2004, the first grand prize opening 2005, and the second grand prize opening 2006. There is no possibility that you will be exposed.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are not in an open state, it is possible to encourage the driving operation of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hit").

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate section 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the left side of the gate member 2800 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800, the probability decreases in this order, and the liquid flows down toward the side middle unit 2700.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B hits the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. is emitted downwards. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability is approximately the same on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800, and the probability is lower on the right side of the gate member 2800. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then sent to the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. Upon detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery with a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided to the second grand prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flowing down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and after being guided to the back of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, the game ball B is placed in the back unit 3000. The substrate is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by this second big prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B that was not accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 and flowed down the left side of the second grand prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guiding passage 2530. from there to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flown down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and hits the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, depending on the momentum, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417, and the slope thereof , and after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is released from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf part 2412a but to the upper shelf part 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to the inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. The contact changes direction downward, and after flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door part 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417, the door part 2417a and the fourth shelf part 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf part 2412p, the first prize will depend on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf part 2412p and the timing at which the first prize opening 2005 becomes open. It may be accepted into the winning slot 2005.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may rebound to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, etc. By flowing upward, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll to the right against the inclination thereof, and may be ejected from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2412a passes between the first standing wall section 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. However, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received into the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the gaming area 5a until it reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate part 2003, the second start Since the opening door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is received into the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

In addition, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. When a "jackpot" is drawn as a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this first big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Note that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released leftward from the second shelf 2412b, it comes into contact with the level difference on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows diagonally downward to the right and connects the second shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf portion 2412c and the shelf portion 2412c. The game ball B that entered the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received into the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big prize opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 must receive the game ball B, and the "small hit" is achieved. It is necessary to draw the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "Jackpot" or "Jackpot". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 requires the game ball B to pass through the gate section 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "small hit" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed hitting" so that the game ball B can be received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006. 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can increase expectations for acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage allows for easy passage through the gate part 2003. , the driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide path, and the game ball You can enjoy the typing operation of B.

In addition, by performing a "right-handed hit" and passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, there is a possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn in which the second starting port 2004 will be in an open state. By allowing the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, there is a possibility that a "small win" or "big win" will be drawn, so that expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. I can do it.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear effect unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top effect unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside this back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030, a back front right decorative body 3040, and various production units are attached, and a production display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side. This back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting decorations, presentation units, and the like.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a band-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and both left and right sides of the opening 3010a. This reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 affixed to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and its left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). This back front left decorative body 3030 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 affixed to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and its right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that when assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge is located outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. (See Fig. 111, Fig. 135, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are shaped like a flat plate so that when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the outer peripheral edge thereof is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It has extended to

To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is moved half way from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left presentation unit 3500. It extends to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back-rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back-front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded part in FIG. 135), and from the player's side the back-rear left The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the rear left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player, improving the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1). can do.

In addition, the back front left decoration body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and when assembled on the game board 5, the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is extended. Although a part (the upper half) is visible from the front, by assembling it into the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) etc. provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the back rear right presentation unit 3600 when viewed from the front, and the transparent front Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1) is improved by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear of the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible to the player. Therefore, the same effect as the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of this embodiment, at least a portion of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, the functional parts can be made difficult to see from the player's side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided at the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. In other words, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, giving players a sense of openness, and making it easier to see the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 that are decorated with predetermined decorations are located on the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 Since they can be seen from the front through the play area, the outside of the play area 5a can also be decorated with them, and the play area 5a can be made to look larger than it actually is, making it possible to strongly attract the attention of players. It can be the board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Moreover, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Note that the parts of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 that extend outward from the gaming area 5a allow functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be accessed from the player's side. Since they can be made invisible, all functional parts may be provided outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure space for installing all functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a must be relatively reduced. Therefore, as in this embodiment, some of the functional parts are moved outside the gaming area 5a in such a way that the gaming area 5a can be large relative to the size of the gaming board 5. It is desirable to provide one.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that extend from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of players.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the first starting opening 2002. An out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. A magnetic sensor 3055 is provided at the rear of the device to detect unauthorized magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 is delivered, and a general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which game balls B are delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which game balls B received into the general winning slot 2001 on the inside side of the side unit 2200 are delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the prize winning port 2001, and the fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the first big prize hole 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second big prize hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 receive it. the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game balls B received are delivered; the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game balls B received into the general winning slot 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered; A ninth delivery port 3069 is provided to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Furthermore, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path that guides the game balls B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges them downward, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The game balls B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game balls B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are connected to a second discharge path that merges them and discharges them downward, and the balls are delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game balls B downward and discharges them diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are lower than the sixth delivery port 3066. A fourth discharge path is provided, which guides the liquid downward to a position that is further left than the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharges the liquid diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with this fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path and then discharged downward. be done. A game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. After merging with the ball B in the second discharge path, it is detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 and then discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received into the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that was delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B that was received into the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is placed on the upstream side of the portion of the fourth discharge path that communicates with the ninth delivery port 3069. It is detected by the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051 and is discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, merges with the fourth discharge path, and passes through the fourth delivery path. It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and is received in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. To detect the game ball B that was received into the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the gaming area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (game balls B that were not given a benefit, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and is connected to a cylindrical portion 3081 that extends cylindrically in the front and rear direction so that the game ball B can flow therethrough, and A partition part 3082 that divides the interior into left and right parts, a flange part 3083 that projects in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 in the left and right direction, and a flange part 3083 that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 and allows the game ball B to be moved downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). In the out ball detection member 3080, an out outlet sensor 3053 is provided between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The cylindrical portion 3081 has approximately the same size as the out port 2010, has a width in the left and right direction that is enough for two game balls B to be lined up (width that does not line up three game balls B), and has a lower inner surface. It slopes downward toward the rear. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out outlet sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081. This is to detect game balls B that have been distributed. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, since the direction of flow of the game ball B flowing inside the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the location of the outlet sensor 3053, the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053, and the game ball B can be quickly discharged to prevent it from stagnation in front of the outlet sensor 3053.

When this out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out-guiding section 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical section 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the gaming area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 and received into the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 ejects the game ball B to the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without bringing it into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, since the partition part 3082 partitions between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right sides, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be detected. It is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the side of the outlet sensor 3053 on the right side. Therefore, depending on the number of game balls B detected per time by each of the left and right exit sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left-handed" or "hit right-handed." Based on this determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable input operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out ball detection member 3080, the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over the partition. The game balls B can be released to the left or right side of the section 3082 where the flow rate of the game balls B is relatively small, and the game balls B can be discharged without being delayed at the outlet 2010.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is made to protrude below the discharge part 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big prize opening 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows backward by the out ball detection member 3080 and is detected by the out exit sensor 3053. This can prevent the ball from being detected, and only the "out ball" received at the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection member 3080 is shown as being provided on the back unit 3000, but the invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so it can be compatible with the existing game panel 1100 that has an out recess 1123. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is driven into the gaming area 5a, and the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. Since the game ball B ("out ball") that is not accepted by any of the players can be detected by the out exit sensor 3053, the first sub out exit sensor 2403, and the second sub out exit sensor 3054, If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of game ball B into the opening is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out with respect to a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, by detecting "out balls", the number can be counted, so the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole The number of "winning balls" counted by the detection of game balls B accepted in 2006, the number of "out balls", general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, first large The "ball payout rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006. Although not shown in the drawings, a display section is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 to display a "ball payout rate".

In addition, on the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all balls") hit into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B ("all balls") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), since only the "out ball" is detected by the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "," and "all balls," it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jamming in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back and rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 137(b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back and rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position in the back box 3010 (the front of the rear wall). The back and rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 includes a back side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back side movable mechanism 3120 that moves the back side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorative bodies provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 on the front surface. It includes a rear decorative board 3114 on which an LED 3114a and a second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are each a surface-mounted type full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear decorative board 3114 can decorate the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) with light emission.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 also includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b triangularly protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. have.

The rear movable mechanism 3120 has a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front, and includes a unit base 3121 that is installed inside the rear box 3010, and a columnar shape that extends vertically on the left side of the unit base 3121. A slide shaft 3122 supports the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a spiral shaft extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. A spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 connected to the rotating shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 is attached, the motor base 3127 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

The back movable mechanism 3120 also includes a slide guide 3130 that is screwed onto the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be raised and lowered so that its lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131. a link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction as the link member 3133 moves up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction as the link member 3133 rotates and can come into contact with the lock protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110; It is equipped with

Further, the rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a lower rear detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130. A front left cover 3137 is attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a front left cover 3137 is attached to the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connections between the front right cover 3138 attached, the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137 and the production drive board 1720. The back left relay board 3139 is installed between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and connects the back decorative board 3114 of the back movable decorative body 3110 to the effect drive board 1720. A rear right relay board 3140 is provided.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that absorbs shock by coming into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 that has moved downward. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are held between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 protrudes to the right from near the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by a back and lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and cannot rotate around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can come into contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. Furthermore, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can come into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is made vertically movable only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 includes a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower projection 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protruding pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a triangular shape when viewed from the front, with each vertex being rounded. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the upper apex from the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the protruding pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the locking member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The locking member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The locking member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and extends in the left-right direction. a contact surface 3134b which extends and can be contacted by the lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110; It has a guide surface 3134c on which the locking protrusion 3116b can come into contact.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the behind-the-scenes effect unit 3100 will be explained. In the normal state of the rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position where it has been moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 has moved to the right and is located in the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear movable decorative body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 is in contact with it.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 3132. Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in a clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and also biases the locking member 3134 in a direction to slide rightward. Therefore, the locking member 3134 is maintained at the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the relevant position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining members cannot prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward (falling). can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the lower rear detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

In the normal state of the retracted position, the back and rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back and top production unit 3400, and is not visible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise in plan view) by the rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if this slide guide 3130 moves downward, the rear movable decorative body 3110 will not move downward from the retracted position because the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward with the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136 detecting the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b moves to the left. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected by the rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and thereby stops falling and returns to the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back and rear effect unit 3100, in the state where the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are in the appearance position where they have fallen, the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are visible from the front (player side). In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear decorative board 3114, the rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be decorated with light. Players can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration.

When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the normal retracted position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the spiral shaft 3123 in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view). direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, as the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the locked position, contrary to the above. Become.

Furthermore, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing , the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to near the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking protrusion 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking protrusion 3116b abuts the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking protrusion 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c applies a force to move the locking member 3134 to the left. As a result, the locking member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 which attempts to move it to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure by the locking protrusion 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The locking member 3134 slides to the right due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 and enters the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the locking member 3134 prevents the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the upper rear detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the normal state, ie, the retracted position.

According to the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 extending left and right can be dropped from the retracted position where it cannot be seen from the player side to the appearance position where it can be seen. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players and to strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is unlocked by moving to the left, it can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving the back movable decorative body 3110 when the lock is released, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward.

[5-9d-1. Back movable decorative body]
Next, the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative board. 143(a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144(a) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the front, and FIG. 144(b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147. FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 149(b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet at the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a portion of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board at the same portion as the decorative body in (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the area of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. FIG. 6(c) is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide and radiation plate in the area where the light guide and radiation plate acts, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in FIG. 156(a). It is an enlarged sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of decoration body which had a metal decoration part of a form further different from (a) and (b).

The rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. 142, etc., and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. To be more specific, when viewed from the front, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged between two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends, and a horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151. It has a plurality of second decorative parts 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative parts 3151 each imitate one cherry blossom flower. Although not shown, the second decorative parts 3152 each imitate a predetermined character, and by being arranged in rows on the left and right, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (in other words, pachinko A predetermined logo is formed in accordance with the world view of machine 1 (gaming board 5). In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo placed between two cherry blossom flowers.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is a decoration that extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 with relief-like unevenness. a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a transparent flat plate shape, and a translucent region (area) provided with a decoration (picture) provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative part 3150; A decorative sheet 3112 in the form of a sheet having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided at the rear of the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided at the rear of the light guide radiation plate 3113. A rear decorative board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and a plurality of second LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)"), and a rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. A flat decorative base 3115 is attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extends vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3116 extends vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. A slider 3117 is provided.

Note that the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, and the surface of the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged, etc. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (which may also include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component) The front side inscription is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a translucent region ( Since the decorative sheet 3112 is arranged in this order, the decorative sheet 3112 has a transparent portion (area) and a transparent portion (region), the light guide radiation plate 3113 is a transparent flat plate, and the back decorative substrate 3114 is arranged in order. Although there are parts (regions) having a characteristic, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 by silk printing is different from that of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and Visible through the decorative body 3111, when the first LED and the second LED are off, the area corresponding to the translucent part (area) and having a predetermined paint color is visible. If it is visible, it is only possible to confirm the presence of the specified paint color, and it is not possible to determine whether the specified paint color indicates letters, symbols, or shapes. On the other hand, if the area corresponds to a transparent part (area) and the color of the specified paint can be visually recognized, the color of the specified paint will be used to display characters, symbols, shapes (i.e., the surface indicated by the surface side markings). Attributes of side electronic components) can be determined.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b that is shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes forward. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion forming the outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the first decorative part 3151 are formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, and in the central part imitating the stamens and pistils. . The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the second decorative portions 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in double (two strips). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that its front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape that resembles a cherry blossom or flower petal, which is smaller than the first decorative part 3151. The front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so as to bulge forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative part 3151 is curved. Moreover, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative part 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 in the decorative part 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes more forward than the second decorative protrusion 3111b (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156(a))). It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (the darkly shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decoration part 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. This makes it possible to improve insulation against electrostatic discharge and short circuits.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative part 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative part 3111d can impart a sense of luxury. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized due to the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114, as shown in FIG. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a, etc. of the rear back decorative board 3114 is transmitted through the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. By reflecting the light backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by hot stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). To explain in detail, first, an intermediate product before the decoration body 3111 is completed is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a etc. protrudes facing upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having an elastic lower surface and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decorative part 3111d is formed in the first foil stamping area FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment has elasticity at the portion that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along that surface, and the metal foil can be kept in good condition even on curved surfaces and other three-dimensional parts. It can be transferred (foil stamped). As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition.

In addition, although in the said embodiment, the metal decoration part 3111d was provided only in the front-end|tip part of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111, but it is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative part 3111d using a hot stamping device, the first decorative protrusion can be lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, with the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is stamped using a transfer sheet having metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and the first Transfer metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a different color from the first metal foil, the hot plate is moved so that it is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) and transferred to the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, a decorative body 3111 is formed in which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b have metal decorative parts 3111d of different colors without performing masking on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of an intermediate product before the decorative body 3111 is completed, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative protrusion 3111a using a laser beam. Alternatively, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a in addition to the tip portion.

The decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recess 3111e is provided to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The rear recess 3111e equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111, thereby suppressing deformation due to resin sink during injection molding.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at a portion of the flat rear surface corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of a first contour portion 3112a, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern etc. of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen through the transparent decorative body 3111.

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of a first light diffusing portion 3112c and a second light diffusing portion 3112d, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. located at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the gap allows light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. , diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, light from the front illuminates the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, i.e. , the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111. The attachment boss 3111f is provided at a location directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereby, the attachment boss 3111f is difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a portion in front of the attachment boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the attachment boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern applied to the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152, except for the rear part of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and in the central part of the first decorative part 3151. A second contour portion 3112b is provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a, which corresponds to the second decorative portion 3152, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is formed doubly on the decorative body 3111; A first light diffusing portion 3112c is provided at a portion of the decorative body 3111 that corresponds to the first decorative portion 3151 and is located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided on the inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a which corresponds to the second decorative part 3152 and is provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 (at the rear of the third decorative protrusion 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. have.

The first contour part 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is said to be the area where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed to be opaque. In this embodiment, the hologram portion in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. In addition, the portion imitating cherry blossoms in the first outline portion 3112a is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The colors are in line with the concept of the Japanese government. Note that the ink (paint) used for the pattern etc. may contain glitter particles that sparkle.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, the first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity can be provided to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the sense of perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made less noticeable.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the images and holograms on the front side. Furthermore, the light emitted forward from the light guide and radiation plate 3113 can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide and radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the transparent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back movable decoration body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, so that It is located at the rear of the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

The second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed into a black line shape with a predetermined width, as shown in the figure. This second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided twice on the decorative body 3111. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b brings out the double metal decoration portions 3111d. Therefore, the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To explain in detail, the first light diffusing section 3112c is formed into a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b) etc., in the first light diffusion part 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower imitated by the first decoration part 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery. The predetermined color (this embodiment Multiple dots (pink) are printed. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing part 3112c is made to emit light, the pear-like pattern of the first light diffusing part 3112c causes a slight As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the light-emitting decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and dark hatching in FIGS. 147 to 149. It is being The second light diffusing portion 3112d is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of this embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing part 3112d is made to emit light, the halftone pattern of the second light diffusing part 3112d causes a predetermined The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of the characters can be decorated with light with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the part of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and are located on the rear surface of the part of the decorative body 3111. A rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward is provided. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. The state will be as follows. Due to the gap, light irradiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front causes the first light to The diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, the light from the front can illuminate the first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, that is. , the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 This constitutes the remainder of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decoration body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear side of a transparent sheet serving as a base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Moreover, the first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by pasting a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transparent part 3112e is provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative part 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 is transmitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative part 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side side remains transparent, so the first decorative protrusion 3111a is viewed from the rear through the transparent part 3112e. The light irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration as if a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transparent portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment is formed to have approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 with the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and also to entertain the players with the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the players.

Note that in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side is visible through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from becoming unsightly. Moreover, by providing the first contour part 3112a to the rear part of the metal decorative part 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour part 3112a can be passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a is visible, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Even if the decorative portion 3150 is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the opposite side from the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. .

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in front view.

The main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface that is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by approximately 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of this flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative board 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110.

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumferential shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are provided behind a portion of the decorative part 3150 with low transparency when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. To be more specific, in the first decorative part 3151, the plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c are provided behind the part of the first light diffusing part 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shading by the dots is dark. ing. To be more specific, the first LED accommodating part 3113c provided in the first decorative part 3151 is located closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower. The inner circumference is rectangular, and the center of the long side is located on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c provided in the second decorative part 3152 are located behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is being For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided at the second decorative portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152. In addition, when the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED accommodating parts 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149(c) and 153(c). It is formed in a state that By connecting the first LED accommodating parts 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a part in the main body part 3113a that is thinner than the thickness of the main part 3113a, thereby preventing damage to the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating part 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body part 3113a. As a result, when the light that is guided inside the main body part 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body part 3113a reaches the first LED housing part 3113c, the light is A portion is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the remainder passes through the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and enters the first LED accommodating portion. 3113c. When the light emitted inside from one of the four surfaces of the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating section 3113c reaches another surface of the inner circumferential surface, a part of the light on the surface reaches the first LED accommodating section 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a inside the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED accommodating part 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface and the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c that is incident on the main body 3113a side, so that the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating part 3113c The amount of light will be greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

For this reason, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Note that since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the first LED 3114a cannot block the light that is about to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. In the region where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light is prevented from passing to the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, by providing the first LED accommodating part 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative part 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating part 3113c can be It is possible to prevent light from being guided to another second decorative part 3152 and decorated with light, and it is possible to ensure that only a desired second decorative part 3152 among the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 is decorated with light. .

To explain in more detail the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. In order to decorate with light, a first LED housing part 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative part 3152, and light is irradiated into each first LED housing part 3113c toward the inside of the second decorative part 3152. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to In this embodiment, the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, so that they are connected to each other. It is a single hole. Thereby, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" placed below the "i" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is made to emit light, there is a risk that the "i" provided above the "☆" will be decorated with emitting light. An extending portion 3113j extending to cover the upper part of the “☆” is provided in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that accommodates the first LED 3114a for decorating a part of the “i” with light emission. ing. This extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" from being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with luminescence, "i" will not be decorated with luminescence. Further, the extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for illuminating the “i” from being guided toward the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portions 3152 such as "i" and "☆" can be reliably decorated with light, and the desired presentation effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. The plurality of second LED accommodating parts 3113d are provided behind five circular parts imitating stamens provided around the center of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing part 3113c and one second LED housing part 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

This second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the light is A part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the second LED accommodating part 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body part 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, the second LED accommodating part 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light irradiated into the main body part 3113a from the first LED 3114a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing part 3113d. The light can make the petals brighter and decorative.

One of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e is formed in the shape of a square pyramid, and is arranged in rows so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, portions around the first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can reflect the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface mainly forward within the thickness of the main body part 3113a, and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body part 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that the rear part is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on almost the entire rear surface of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from almost the entire surface, so it is possible to change the model or design. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to modification, etc., there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change can be easily accommodated, reducing costs. can suppress the increase in

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface facing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c flush with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving part 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body part 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body part 3113a. Can be done. In addition, when the leg portions 3113f are assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surfaces thereof are in contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114, and there is a gap between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection section 3113g is provided in a C-chamfer shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating section 3113c at the rear end of the leg section 3113f. This auxiliary reflection section 3113g is for reflecting forward the light irradiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg section 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h cooperates with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later, to form a right slider 3117.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming unsightly. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward than the rear decorative board 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is connected to the rear decorative board. 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic components 3114e) can be made longer, static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, and the rear decorative board 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are holes penetrating the main body part 3113a. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing part 3113d can be released to the front of the main body part 3113a, and the influence of heat on the rear decorative board 3114 can be reduced.

Moreover, since the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are not blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, etc. Even if the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) with a bottom that does not penetrate through the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, a sudden temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be alleviated, and the influence of heat on the rear decorative board 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portions 3113c that are closely connected to each other and the first LED housing portions 3113c that have the extension portions 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portions 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and to further alleviate a sudden temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED accommodating part 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a can be brought as close as possible to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f that protrude rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body part 3113a and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the rear decorative board 3114 can be suppressed to suppress the effects of heat. can be reduced. Note that the gap between the main body part 3113a and the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114 is set to be between "half the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the light emitting part of the first LED 3114a" to "the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the third board main body 3114c". It is desirable that the distance be within the range of "the distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114. Furthermore, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will decrease, causing the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the rear decorative board 3114, and directs the light from the reflecting portion 3113e to the substantially entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted forward even in a portion of the main body portion 3113a where the rear decorative board 3114 is not provided at the rear. In other words, even if the rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative board 3114 can be made smaller than the main body part 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body part 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made smaller. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Rear decorative board of rear movable decorative body]
On the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, there are a plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and side view type, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a surface mount type and a top view type, and a surface mount type LED 3114b. A connector 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the surface (front) of the rear decorative board 3114) is mounted. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is made of white (natural color). It is made of resin with a color that is recognized to be the same as white (natural color). Electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor are mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. The rear decorative board 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and copper foil 3114d (Fig. 154 etc.).

In addition, on the surface (front) of the rear decorative board 3114, on the surface (front) of the board main body 3114c, a first LED 3114a (surface mount type), a second LED 3114b (surface mount type), and a connector 3114g (surface mount A white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the soldering type (type) is soldered. ), a white resist layer is formed. The back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 has pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the area on the back surface (rear surface) of the board main body 3114c where the electronic component 3114e (surface mount type) is mounted is soldered. In the entire area except for this, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist. Furthermore, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, surface-side electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g that are mounted are provided. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number, area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front side electronic component (mounting direction) Direction), may include the model number of electronic components on the front side) is printed on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Printed by. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, near the back electronic components such as the electronic component 3114e, the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is placed are indicated. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as area (may also include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is hardly noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a dazzling light emitting effect by illumination using light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are used as described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, and the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 includes a pad that is the surface (front surface) of the board main body 3114c and to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered. A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., resulting in a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on this solid white resist, a front side marking part that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that it can emit multicolor light. In addition to making it possible to make the yellow surface side markings inconspicuous against the white resist when the full-color LED is turned off, it is also possible to The surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 (front ) can maintain high reflectance.

In addition, when using yellow as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between it and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that approximately follows the inner circumference of a flange portion 3115b in a decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and there is approximately a slight gap between the inner circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a constant size. That is, the rear decorative board 3114 is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

In the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. (Metal decoration part 3111d) is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the inner tip. Thereby, the first LED 3114a of the first decorative portion 3151 can decorate each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower with light.

In addition, in the second decorative portion 3152 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged on the left and right, the first decorative protrusion provided twice on the decorative body 3111 It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 near the rear of the second decorative portion 3111a. Thereby, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right can be illuminated one by one by the first LED 3114a of the second decoration part 3152.

As shown in FIG. 152, etc., the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are located in a circular part imitating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central part imitating a cherry blossom flower in the first decorative part 3151. It is located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, which corresponds to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. Thereby, the five parts imitating the stamens in the central part of the first decoration part 3151 can be decorated with light emission, respectively, by the second LED 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light forward, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, the central part of the first decorative part 3151, which resembles a stamen, is made to look more like a stamen than other parts. It is also possible to emit point light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the attention of players. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part 3150, it is possible to provide a part that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a part that emits light in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b. It is possible to perform a variety of light emitting effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the body portion 3113a of the light guide and radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the board body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (the shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL=1 mm) inward from the outer peripheral edge of the board main body 3114c. ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and space distance from the external conductive member of the back decorative board 3114 (for example, the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d are secured, and the discharge of static electricity etc. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer periphery of the copper foil 3114d is provided to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the board body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , and the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined width on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side to facilitate forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board main body 3114c side. (the area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). The light reflection auxiliary area 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a). As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, so that the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f approaches the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, making it easier to reflect the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c forward. Can be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 153(a) etc., the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since the leg portions 3113f are brought into contact with each other, the leg portions 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving part 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased. and decoration sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light.

Further, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a), etc.). As a result, even if the white coating film (white resist) applied to the surface is worn out or rolled up due to contact with the leg portions 3113f, only the front surface of the board body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulation properties, making it possible to suppress damage due to short circuits caused by static electricity or the like.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the rear decorative board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the flange portion 3115b (described later) of the decorative body base 3115 and the flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are assembled. 3113b, the outer periphery is double surrounded, making it difficult to see the outer periphery from the outside and preventing deterioration in appearance. In addition, when the rear decorative board 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the light guide and radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration part 3111d on the front side of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is caused by the presence of the flange part 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, causing damage to the rear decorative board 3114. This can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to be 10 mm or more, or a distance that can accommodate a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative board 3114 allows the members (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decoration sheet 3112 and decoration body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 etc. provided at the rear, so that the decoration part 3150 can be unintentionally decorated with light. It is possible to avoid this, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can reliably perform the desired light emitting effect. In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the rear side from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the back rear decorative board 3114, and the rear movable decoration Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 is configured such that only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, are provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, the rear decorative board 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. The LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), resistor, etc. as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, so by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114, the black color can be seen from the front. The electronic component 3114e can be made invisible, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 that cannot be seen from the front, there is no need to apply white or other colored paint to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base with movable decorative body on the back]
The decoration base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decoration base 3115 passes through a flat cover plate part 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, a flange part 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate part 3115a, and the cover plate part 3115a. The right slider rear portion 3115d extends downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in front view.

The covering plate part 3115a has an outer circumferential shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed at a substantially constant distance between the cover plate part 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b. It is formed to a size that fits. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (ornament base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the cover plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3114, it is possible to protect the back decorative board 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back decorative board 3114 from the rear. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, and extends its front end forward of the rear decorative board 3114. protrudes so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative board 3114 from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114. Due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, the shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made to meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back decorative board 3114 and damaging the back decorative board 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have slit-shaped portions that are long in the left and right directions, and portions that are larger than the slit-shaped portions. These plurality of openings 3115c allow heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 to be released to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby affecting the thermal effect on the rear decorative board 3114. can be reduced.

The right slider rear part 3115d cooperates with the right slider front part 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to form a right slider 3117.

Furthermore, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. By bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 into contact with the front surface of the plurality of protrusions 3115e, a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate part 3115a. . Thereby, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable decorative body on the back]
Next, the main effects of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in this embodiment will be explained. The rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guiding radiation plate 3113, and the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the light guiding radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body. The attachment boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 is attached to the decorative body base 3115 with the rear decorative board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and assembled (see FIG. 143, etc.). Thereby, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front and back direction is made relatively thin.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, and a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrude forward. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a equipped with a hologram on which a pattern and interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 is Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a lens effect. A sense of depth can be given by holograms. As a result, even if the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the player does not feel that it is thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be fully enjoyed. By making the most of this, players can enjoy themselves.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour part 3112a, etc. can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in arranging the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it can be placed in a more effective position inside the game board 5. By providing the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily realize a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players. In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is relatively easier to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can provide a good-looking pachinko machine 1, can provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy a variety of performances, and has a high appeal to players and can be differentiated. can do.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative part 3111d can make the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the player's interest. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decoration part 3111d, and it is also possible to give a sense of luxury. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position where it cannot be seen by the player to the appearance position where it can be seen, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has approximately the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, so that the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is , it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 has the decorative sheet 3112 approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, thereby creating a sense of unity in the game. It is possible to show this to the players, give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the players' interest.

In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at the rear of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the second The first LED 3114a can be made difficult to see from the front by the two-contoured portion 3112b, and deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be suppressed to fully exhibit the decorative effect.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a surrounding the outer periphery of each of the first decorative part 3151 and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152, so that the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be decorated with light emission in order, or only a specific first decoration part 3151 or second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission. By appropriately embellishing the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 with light emission, it is possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. can.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in the direction along the surface within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 using the side view type first LED 3114a, and then The light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 because the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, so even if the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front and rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and players can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 with light, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front and back direction can be further reduced. It is possible to reliably realize a pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of a side view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of a top view type. ) In the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect), it is possible to add a region that emits light in a dotted manner with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a region decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a. As a result, it is possible to add sharpness to the light emitting effect by emitting light from the second LED 3114b, making it easier to present the optimal light emitting effect according to the gaming state, making it possible to further entertain the player, and making the game more enjoyable. It is possible to increase expectations for the game, and to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, the rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating part 3113c in which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light receiving part 3113c is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in a position close to the desired area to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired area can be decorated with light emission more brightly, resulting in a more dramatic effect. This allows players to enjoy the highly luminous decorations.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear. Since it has the housing part 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a is connected to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portions 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are in contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, so that the rear movable decoration body 3110 is located between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative board 3114. Since a gap is formed in the rear decorative board 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress temperature rise and reduce the effects of heat. Note that the gap between the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114 is set between "half the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the light emitting part of the first LED 3114a" to "the board main body 3114c". The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a is preferably within the range. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114. Furthermore, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will decrease, causing the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. 3115c, by raising and lowering the rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap or opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, Heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, thereby suppressing a rise in temperature of the rear decorative board 3114.

In addition, a temperature sensor is provided on the back movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the back movable decorative body 3110 (back rear decorative board 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) of execution may be increased. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, thereby making it possible to ventilate the surface of the rear decorative board 3114, cooling the rear decorative board 3114, and suppressing the occurrence of problems caused by heat.

Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is made possible by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, allowing light to be emitted. Since it snakes around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be achieved, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back decorative board 3114, causing the back decorative board 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided at a position a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c on the back rear decorative board 3114. This predetermined distance SL also makes it possible to lengthen the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, thereby increasing the insulation against discharges such as static electricity and short circuits, thereby suppressing damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharges and the like.

In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not yet. Thereby, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, since the metal decorative part 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative part 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decorative part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to reduce the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is driven by the rear rear drive motor 3126 to move up and down (move) between the retracted position where it moves upward and the appearance position where it moves downward. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, right slider 3117, etc. every time it goes up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to accumulate on the surface of the rear movable decorative body 3110. This rear movable decorative body 3110 has a decorative body 3111 and a decorative body base 3115 that make up the surface, which are made of synthetic resin with low conductivity. Static electricity accumulated throughout is difficult to discharge all at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decorative part 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111, but as described above, static electricity is easily accumulated from the metal decorative part 3111d. Since the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative board 3114 will not be damaged by static electricity discharge, and the movable effect in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, and the movable rear movable decorative body It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy both the light-emitting effect in which the 3110 is decorated with light-emitting light.

Note that when the area of the metal decorative part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative part 3111d to GND (ground). Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of rear movable decorative body]
Next, with reference mainly to FIG. 157, a rear movable decorative body 3160, a rear movable decorative body 3170, a rear movable decorative body 3180, etc., which are different from the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above, will be explained. Explain in detail. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a composition of a decoration object in cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a composition of a rear movable decoration object of a fourth embodiment in cross section.

As schematically shown in FIG. 157(a), the rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A decorative sheet 3162 in the form of a sheet with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and configured to radiate light in a direction along the front surface forward inside the decorative sheet 3162, and a light guide radiation plate 3163. A rear decorative board 3164 is provided on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate light into the interior of the interior of the display device 3163 in a direction along the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a main body 3161a in the form of a transparent flat plate, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and a metal part provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be decorated with relief-like unevenness. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet with a predetermined decoration (picture) printed on it. In this decorative sheet 3162, a portion of the decoration with low transparency is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed to have a smaller size than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed into a flat plate shape with the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and includes an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative board 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided on the rear surface. It has a reflecting part 3163b. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflection parts 3163b each have a triangular cross-section and are recessed forward, and are provided only at predetermined locations. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are each provided to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. . In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3163b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, like the reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear decorative board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164. In addition, a white coating film made of white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3164.

In the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163, and furthermore, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3160 in the front and rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3164. As a result, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear decorative board 3164 are covered by the flange portion 3161b, making their outer peripheral surfaces difficult to see from the outside. It looks good.

This rear movable decorative body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164, so that the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the rear decorative board 3164 (copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3161c flows to the rear decorative board 3164, causing the rear decorative board 3164 to have a sufficient creepage distance EL. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decorative board 3164.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an external decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the external decorative body 3171 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b). a light-transmitting flat interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inner decoration body 3172; and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside the interior decoration body 3172. , a rear decorative board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface to irradiate light into the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the rear movable decorative body 3170 includes a main body portion 3171a that has a frame shape and extends back and forth, a support portion 3171b that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decoration part 3171c provided on the front surface. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 has a relief-like decoration with unevenness. The interior decoration body 3172 is attached to close the front opening of the frame-shaped exterior decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the rear decorative board 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflective portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular inner periphery along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape centered on a predetermined LED housing portion 3173a, and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflection parts 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from each determined LED housing part 3173a forward. In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3173b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, like the reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear decorative board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces at a predetermined distance SL inside from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174. In addition, a white coating film made of white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3174.

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, an internal decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of an external decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the external decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172 are substantially coincident with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In addition, in the back rear movable decoration body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3170 in the front and rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decoration body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the interior decoration body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decoration board 3174. In this rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the rear rear decorative board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer circumferential surfaces of these are covered from the outside. It makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

This rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174 with the main body part 3171a extending to the rear of the external decorative body 3171, so that the metal decorative part 3171c on the front side of the main body part 3171a The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back decorative board 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back decorative board 3174, and the back decorative board 3174 can be prevented from being damaged.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the interior decoration body 3172. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base may be provided to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3174.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an external decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the external decorative body 3181 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c). an interior decoration body 3182 with translucent properties that closes the inner decoration body 3182; and a rear decoration board 3183 on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3182 and can emit light forward. It is equipped with.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a main body portion 3181a in the shape of a flat plate frame, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a covering metal decorative part 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. This metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decoration body 3182 includes a flat body part 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body part 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange part 3181b, and and a flange portion 3182b extending to the flange portion 3182b. Although not shown in the drawings, the main body portion 3182a has a relief-like decoration with unevenness formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decorative board 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the interior decorative body 3182. In other words, the rear decorative board 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3183. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL inside from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183. Further, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of white resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered by the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3182 and the back decoration board 3183 from being seen from the outside.

This rear movable decorative body 3180 has a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182 provided inside a flange portion 3181b of an external decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative portion 3181c, and a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182. Since the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is apart from the inner periphery of the flange part 3182b of the interior decoration body 3182, the copper of the rear decorative board 3183 (of the rear decorative board 3183) The creepage distance EL to the metal decorative portion 3181c can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the rear decorative board 3183 and damaging the rear decorative board 3183. can do.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the interior decoration body 3182. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base may be provided to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3183.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. Figure 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from the rear. FIG. Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front.

The back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250 are located on both the left and right sides of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle production unit 3300 when assembled on the game board 5, and are visible from the front. It is made visible through the transparent game panel 1100, front unit 2000, etc.

First, the back lower left effect unit 3200 will be explained. The back lower left direction unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a rearwardly protruding shaft 3201a, and a transparent back lower left decorative body provided behind the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202, and a back bottom left decorative board which is provided behind the back bottom left decorative body 3202 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3203, and is provided behind the back lower left decorative board 3203, to which the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached, and the back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 A unit base 3204 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3204.

In addition, the back lower left production unit 3200 includes a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back lower left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 is engaged with the drive gear 3206, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and is engaged with the drive gear 3206. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower left rotation decorative body 3201. A third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear is provided, and a front cover 3210 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3201a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decoration body 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

The back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3202 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 and the back bottom left decoration body 3202 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions. Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 placed behind the back lower left decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In the back lower left decorative board 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back lower left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back lower left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left production unit 3200 of this embodiment is operated by The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front and back direction. In addition, the back bottom left direction unit 3200 lights up a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 to display the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back bottom left decorative body 3202. It can be decorated with luminous light.

In addition, the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, and a transparent back lower left decorative body is printed behind the transparent back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202 and the back lower left decorative board 3203 are arranged in order, so the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 is the back lower left decorative body 3202, Then, it is visible through the lower left rotating decorative body 3201 on the back side, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, letters and symbols are displayed using the predetermined paint color. , the shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, the multiple LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connectors are The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be explained. The back lower right production unit 3250 includes a transparent back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 having a rearwardly protruding shaft 3251a, and a transparent back lower right decorative body provided behind the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251. 3252, and a back bottom right decorative board that is provided behind the back bottom right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3253, and is provided behind the back lower right decorative board 3253, to which the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached, and the back lower right decorative body 3252 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the unit.

In addition, the back bottom right production unit 3250 includes a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3254 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 meshes with the drive gear 3256 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. A second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3251a of the lower right rotation decorative body 3251. A front cover 3260 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252.

The back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3251a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower right decorative body 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

The back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 and the back lower right rotation decoration body 3252 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3252 are formed into a pear skin-like pattern with a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions, Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 placed behind the back lower right decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In the back lower right decorative board 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back lower right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back lower right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative board 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255, the back bottom right production unit 3250 of the present embodiment transfers the back The lower right rotation decorative body 3251 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 can decorate the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right decorative body 3252 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the back bottom right decorative board 3253.

In addition, the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253, and a transparent back lower right decorative body is printed behind the transparent back lower right rotation decorative body 3251. 3252 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 are arranged in this order, so the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 is the same as the back lower right decorative board 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3252, Then, it is visible through the right-turning decorative body 3251 on the bottom of the back, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, letters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , the shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, each of the multiple LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 3253 is made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector is made of resin. The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

On the front surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a connector (surface mount type), a back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a back lower left decorative board 3203a (lead type). A white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white coating") is formed by applying white resist liquid to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered. (sometimes referred to as "resist") forms a white resist layer. On the back side (rear surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are pads and through holes to which the back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for holes, lands, etc. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there is a Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, and the mounting direction of the front side electronic component) (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the front side) is painted on the solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Printed using silkscreen printing. Although not shown, on the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are located near back side electronic components such as the back lower left detection sensor 3203a and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, and the area where the back side electronic component is placed) The markings on the back side indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the back side are painted solidly with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against the white color. Printed on top using silk screen printing.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 is covered with the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs and connectors are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid On the painted white resist, the front side markings that make it possible to identify full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, they are white. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side inscription less noticeable on the resist, it also has a solid coating with high reflectance when the full-color LED, which can emit multicolor light, is turned on (when emitting light). The surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 is created by the combination of a white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white. can maintain high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Back and middle production unit]
Next, the back-lower-middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Figure 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. Fig. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 166 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back lower center decoration unit by the back lower center raising and lowering mechanism in the back lower center presentation unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center presentation unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back inner decoration unit in the lower back inner production unit from the front.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower middle production unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250. The back-bottom center production unit 3300 includes a back-bottom center decoration unit 3320 having a transparent back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-bottom center decoration unit 3320 that raises and lowers the back-bottom decoration unit 3320. A lifting mechanism 3350 is provided.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle direction production unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeric decorations formed in a relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface in circles every 60 degrees in a clockwise direction around the center. arranged around the circumference. This back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 in a lower back inner decorative body unit 3320 to be described later on the rear side, a first decorative board 3322 in the back lower middle, and a front end side of a board fixing member 3323, It has a recess 3311 that can accommodate.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed transparently, and has an outer peripheral part of each of the six number decorations protruding forward, and a rib part that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. It is formed to protrude forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a with metallic luster is formed on these protruding outer peripheral portions and rib portions. In other words, the metallic decorative part 3310a with metallic luster is arranged near the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In this embodiment, the outer periphery and the rib part on which the metal decorative part 3310a with metallic luster is formed are integrally molded with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, but the outer periphery and the rib part are may be formed separately from the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, metal decorative portions 3310a having metallic luster are formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration part 3310a can give a sense of luxury, and also make the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. It has become. The metal decorative portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a metal decorative part 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral part and the rib part that protrude to the front surface, and no metal decorative part 3310a is formed on the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. do not have. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decoration part 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 is made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and damaging the back lower middle first decorative board 3322. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

In addition, as described above, the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed with a rib portion protruding forward that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. The back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion extending from the peripheral edge portion (periphery side root portion) protruding from the front surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and then the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The rotary decorative body 3310 is formed to be transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface, and is also provided with a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion extending from the peripheral edge portion (periphery side root portion) protruding from the front surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, A pear skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of protrusions extending in short lines in random directions up to the rear edge of the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and the rib part is the lower back middle rotating decoration. The shading becomes darker as it goes from the peripheral edge portion (peripheral side base portion) protruding on the front surface of the body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and toward the side rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) so that the transparency is low) is applied by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided at the rear of the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) 3321, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface (mounting surface)"), a first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, A board fixing member 3323 is attached to the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative board 3322 from the rear side, and has a shaft portion 3323a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a shaft of the board fixing member 3323. The rotary base 3324 has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted, and is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and is placed behind the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side are difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. The back surface may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower back inner decoration unit 3320 also includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxially with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. It includes a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 at the top, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324.

Further, the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 has a circular opening 3328a provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent lower back inner decorative body 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and a rear side of the lower back inner decorative body 3328. a second lower back decorative board 3329 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)"); and a second lower back decorative board 3329; 3329, and a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) that can detect the area detection piece 3325, and a plurality of area identification sensors 3330 (lead type) that are attached to the front of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, and can detect the position detection piece 3326. A detectable position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) is provided.

In addition, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back center decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back lower center decoration 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that its rotating shaft protrudes forward; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360.

The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323 are located between the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. , is accommodated in the recess 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 or the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the number decoration (relief) portion of the back lower middle rotary decoration body 3310 can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168(a), the area detection piece 3325 detects the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” on the lower back center rotation decoration body 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis, passing through the numeral decoration and ending between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 on a circumference having a larger diameter than the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the number decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, and There is an interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees − α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168(a)). .

A plurality of (in this case, three) area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged at angular intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) with the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 as the center. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order: a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c. In this embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are configured to detect the numbers "3", "4", and "5" with the "1" decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numerical decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has a lifting pin 3332a that projects rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350. The back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor whose rotational position can be detected.

This lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotating gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. Can be done. In addition, the back lower center decoration body unit 3320 is configured such that the lower back center rotating decoration body 331 And the back lower middle decoration body 3328 can be decorated with light emission.

Note that the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are to be placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative board 3322 with a predetermined paint color, and an inner lens (diffusion lens) is printed behind the transparent rotating decorative body 3310. ) 3321 and the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are arranged in order, so the color of the predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 is the color of the inner lens. (diffusion lens) 3321 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to visually recognize the color of the predetermined paint when the plurality of LEDs are off, and the color of the predetermined paint is visible. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined by the color.

Moreover, each of the plurality of LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

White resist liquid is applied to the surface (front) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which multiple LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part number of the surface side electronic component, the surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed on a solid white resist using a yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to the white color, and is silk-screened. . Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

In addition, part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, an area identification sensor 3330, a position identification sensor 3331, etc. mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, and front-side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the front side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, ) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 on the lower back side by silk printing, and the transparent lower inner decorative body 3328 Since the second decorative board 3329 in the back lower middle is arranged behind the lower back middle, a predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the back lower middle Visible through the decorative body 3328, when a predetermined paint color is visible when a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, shapes (that is, Attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation can be determined.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back are each made of a white resin package (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It becomes.

On the surface (front surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, there are pads to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered. A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., resulting in a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). layers are formed. On the back side (rear side) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, there are pads to which an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, the part number of the surface side electronic component and the surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed on a solid white resist using a yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to the white color, and is silk-screened. . Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, pads, through-holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs, etc. are soldered, are provided on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, as described above. In the excluded area, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further , On this solid white resist, the front side markings that make it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light can be turned off. In addition to making it possible to make the yellow surface side markings inconspicuous compared to the white resist, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid surface with high reflectance can be used. The combination of the painted white resist and the front side markings printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white allows the first decoration board 3322 on the lower back and the second decoration on the lower back The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained high.

In addition, when using yellow as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends left and right and has a unit base 3351 attached to both ends thereof to the back lower left presentation unit 3200 and the back lower right presentation unit 3250, and the unit base 3351. A lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward. A drive gear 3353 in the form of a gear, a first transmission gear 3354 in the form of a spur gear that is in mesh with the drive gear 3353 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a first transmission gear 3354 in mesh with the first transmission gear 3354. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a gear portion 3356a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a driving pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and an elevating cam gear 3356 rotatably attached to the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

In addition, the rear lower intermediate lifting mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at its proximal end extending in the left-right direction, and in the longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted. A second slit 3357b extends in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. A lower back middle relay board 3358 is attached to the front surface.

Furthermore, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 has a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and is attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359, and is attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359, and the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 has a vertically extending vertically extending vertically extending slit 3359a. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from behind, and a tip side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward in the moving direction (front view). A spring 3362 biases the lifting arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

The lower back middle elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356 . The tip of the lifting arm 3357 extends to the left of the lifting cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a lower back middle second decorative board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, relays the connection between the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in a lower back inner decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the front cover 3359 with respect to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting and lowering slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, the back/lower intermediate lifting mechanism 3350 is moved to the upper/lower cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The driving pin 3356b that revolves due to the rotation of the lifting cam gear 3356 can rotate the lifting arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the driving pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be raised and lowered together with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the back bottom center rotating decorative body 3310 and the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 in the back bottom center presentation unit 3300 will be described in detail. In a normal state, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located lower than the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the distal end moves the back lower middle relay board 3358 up and down. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution thereof and near the proximal end within the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . Specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a biasing force is applied by the spring 3362 to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in a clockwise direction, the line of force of the biasing force is transmitted to the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. , and passes through the center of rotation of the lifting cam gear 3356, so the lifting cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the back lower center decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The biasing force of 3362 does not act on the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 has a number decoration located at the uppermost side of the plurality of number decorations in the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the number decoration located at the lowest side is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the number decoration is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. By making the LED of the second decorative board 3329 emit light, in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be decorated with light-emitting light (see FIG. 120, etc.) ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, a As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end side moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , and the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides toward the base end within the first slit 3357a. At this time, on the lifting arm 3357, a biasing force is applied in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, so that the biasing force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When this drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the proximal end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time The pin 3356b stops rotating. As a result, the movement of the lower back center decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back center decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position in which it has moved to the highest position.

When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the line of force of that force will hit the first slit 3357a. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state where the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may further revolve to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

When the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and All numerical decorations are clearly visible from the side (see Figure 201).

To return the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the above, and the lifting arm 3357 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position which is the normal state (furthermore, the center which prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall part 2501) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1.

In the back bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, the back bottom center rotational decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back bottom center rotation drive motor 3333 in the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 via the rotation gear 3327. can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. By rotating this back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front side rotate like a roulette wheel. The back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 even when the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position.

In the normal state of the back-bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, one of the plurality (six in this case) number decorations in the back-bottom rotation decoration body 3310 is located directly above the center of rotation (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), in a state where the numeral decoration "1" on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is moved to identify the first area. The three area specifying sensors 3330, the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect the area. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stopping positions of the lower back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the number decoration "1" is at the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324. is being detected. In other words, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are in detection, the number decoration "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect the area, the numeral decoration "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect the area, the number decoration "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the number decoration "4" indicates the range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, depending on the combination of detection and non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, which number decoration indicates the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether the vehicle is located within the stopping area that includes the vehicle.

Since the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to identify the area of the stop position using the three area specifying sensors 3330 and recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 can recognize the origin. This suppresses the complexity of the control related to stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and reduces the load.

To be more specific, when it is desired to stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a desired stop position for the number decoration, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 move the number decoration to the desired stop position. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated by a rotation angle of 30 degrees from the stop position.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 further rotates by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable. The angle at which this position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is defined as the origin. Then, when it rotates by β degrees (in this case, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), by stopping the rotation of the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333, the desired number is set. The decoration can be accurately stopped at the stop position.

In addition, although the rotation stop of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 was explained by the angle above, it may be made to stop rotation by the rotation step of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 which consists of a stepping motor. For example, if one rotation is 396 steps, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps with the three area specifying sensors 3330 in a combination that satisfies the desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 The position identifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable when the position goes away from the position identifying sensor 3331. When the position specifying sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps with the angle at which it is not detected as the origin, the desired number decoration is stopped by stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. It can be stopped precisely in position.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower-middle effect unit 3300 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 169, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 is a back-bottom center first display unit in which a back-bottom decoration unit 3320 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310. It includes a decorative board 3322 and a second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are located behind the six number decorations on the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, and each of the number decorations can be decorated with light emission independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the second decorative board 3329 on the lower back side are located at the rear of the part on the outside of the plurality of number decorations on the lower back side middle rotating decoration body 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-bottom center production unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensors 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, it is rotated in a state in which only a specific number decoration is decorated with light emission, or in a state in which each number decoration is decorated with light emission in a different color. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a performance that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light by emitting light from the LED in the corresponding part of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the LED on the first decorative board 3322 at the bottom of the back emits light (or one light emitting mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the LED emits light). ).

As described above, according to the back-bottom center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating back-bottom center rotating decoration body 3310 having six stop positions can be detected by detecting an area with a length spanning the three stop positions. piece 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325, and one position specifying sensor for detecting the position detecting piece 3326. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detecting, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Since the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 is equipped with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the back bottom middle rotation is performed by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, the stop position can be accurately detected, and the deviation of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 which has a plurality of stopping positions as small as possible.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at any stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to enjoy the performance (movable performance) by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to suppress the shift of the stop position even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, and it is also possible to By making the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotate, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is designed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front side, the roulette wheel rotates in circles and then stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position. Since it is possible to show the player such an effect, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position. , the number of stop positions is the same as the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back and middle rotating decorations 3310 can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the back and lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. Therefore, the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with (together with) the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, but this The present invention is not limited to this, and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member, such as the drive gear 3334, that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

[5-9g. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back top effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 170(b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. Fig. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending/descending decoration unit in the back upper production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending/descending decoration unit in the back unit as seen from behind. It is a diagram.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the back top and front rotating decorations in the back top presentation unit from the front. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a lifting mechanism of the lifting decoration unit and a rotation mechanism of the back up-and-down rotating decoration from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front with the back raising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position in the back upper presentation unit.

The back upper effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back top presentation unit 3400 includes a transparent back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 having a shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top and front rotating decorative body. A transparent back top front decoration body 3421 extends left and right through which the shaft 3410a of 3410 passes through the center in the left and right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter referred to as "surface (mounting A back top front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 and a back top front decorative body 3421 provided at the rear of the back top front decorative board 3422 and on the front surface. is attached to a unit base 3423 rotatably supporting the shaft 3410a of the back and front rotating decorative body 3410.

In addition, the rear upper production unit 3400 has a rear cover 3424 attached to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 between the front unit base 3423. A back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 is installed so as to protrude into the space of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 is attached to the rotating shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and the drive gear 3426 meshes with the drive gear 3426. a rotating gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; and a back upper front decorative board 3422. It is provided with a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the back upper production unit 3400 includes a back lift/lower drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that its rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a back lift/lower drive motor 3429. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a that meshes with the motor gear 3430, and a portion that protrudes outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a pass through the rear cover 3424. an elevating cam gear 3431 that is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424 and has a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3431c that protrudes forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a; , a rear up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) that is attached to the rear surface of the back top front decoration board 3422 and can detect the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431, and a tip where a back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 is provided. A back lifting decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around an axis in the front and back direction so that the side moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431; A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and is attached to a spring 3433 that urges the lifting decoration unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. and a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 that regulates the movement of.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is a transparent back up/down decoration unit 3440, which has an axial shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back up/back rotation decoration 3440 passing through the center. A back top and rear decoration body 3451 and a back side provided at the rear of the back top and rear decoration body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). An upper and rear decorative board 3452 and a back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are attached to the front from the rear of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and the axis of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 A lifting unit base 3453 rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

In addition, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 includes a back up/down rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454. a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453; A second transmission gear 3457 in the shape of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457. A rotating gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end.

Further, the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear up-and-down rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 passes through the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper front decorative board 3422, and the unit base 3423, and connects the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover 3424. The back top front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 stacked one on top of the other in the center in the left and right direction, and the rear petal is placed between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been rotated so that it is located at the top.

The back top front decorative board 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422, the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421 can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the upper and lower back decorative substrates 3422 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 are formed transparently, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed into a pear skin-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions, The concept ( In other words, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in accordance with the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) are printed, and also Pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5 ) concept (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. Through the back upper front decorative body 3421 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422 disposed behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422 by silk printing, and behind the transparent back top front rotating decorative body 3410, a transparent back top front decorative body 3421, Since the back top and front decorative boards 3422 are arranged in order, the predetermined color of the paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and front decorative boards 3422 by silk printing is applied via the back top and front decorative bodies 3421. , or through the back top front decoration body 3421 and the back top front rotating decoration body 3410, and when the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side markings) can be determined by the color of the predetermined paint.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back top and front decorative board 3422 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white). ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the front surface (front side) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. The entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. is white due to the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying white resist solution. A resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back rise/fall detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are written near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back up/down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a that is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface, and a circular arc shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is inserted. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting decoration unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, a gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward is provided at a portion that bulges outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a back elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the rear upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 passes through the upper and lower rear decorative body 3451, the upper and lower rear decorative board 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear of the The back top and back decoration body 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 front and back, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration shaped like a tree.

The back upper and rear decorative board 3452 can decorate the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are formed to be transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), but the back side is rotated up and down. Through the decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decoration board 3452 arranged behind the back top and rear decoration body 3451 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

Note that the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, and the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the positions where front-side electronic components are to be placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, and a transparent back top and back decoration is printed behind the transparent back top and rear rotating decoration 3440. 3451 and the back top and rear decorative board 3452 are arranged in this order, so the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 by silk printing is applied to the back top and back decorative body 3451. When the predetermined paint color is visible through the back top and rear decoration body 3451 and the back top and rear rotation decoration body 3440, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the predetermined paint color is visible. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side markings) can be determined based on the color of the predetermined paint.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color that is recognized as the same color as white), and the connectors are The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are written near the front side electronic components of the plurality of LEDs mounted. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, The inscription on the front side indicating the name (which may include the model number) is printed on a solid white resist using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color, using silk printing. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, there is an area near the back side electronic components of the connector that indicates the part number of the back side electronic components, the position where the back side electronic components are placed, etc. Attributes of the backside electronic component (which may also include the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, and the model of the backside electronic component.) The markings on the back side showing ``are printed with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white, on a solid white resist by silk printing.

The elevating unit base 3453 includes a shaft hole 3453a that penetrates back and forth on the base end side (right end side in front view) and into which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a shaft hole 3453a provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a. The shaft hole 3453a has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. A drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration resembling a cherry blossom flower formed on its front surface.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422 and the back top and rear decorative board 3452, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs, etc. are soldered, is A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid coating further forms a white resist layer. On the white resist, the front surface side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned off, the white In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side markings inconspicuous on the resist, it is also possible to use a solid white color with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light). The combination of the resist and the front side markings printed by silk printing with a yellow paint with a reflectance very close to that of white allows the surfaces (front surfaces) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 to be Reflectance can be maintained high.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

Next, the movements of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back rising/lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the back upper presentation unit 3400 will be explained. In the normal state of the back top production unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top and front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top and front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front and back direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450, which is provided with the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 on the tip side, extends in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the tip side is It is in a retracted position located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left production unit 3700 when assembled to the game board 5. It is not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back elevation detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below its center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

Specifically, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in a counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, that force is suppressed. Since the line of force passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decoration unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There isn't. Therefore, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b that is far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back lift/lower drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides inside the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. Due to the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a so that its tip side moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b moves upward. It begins to slide within the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b 's revolution stops.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 via the up/down unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip side of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 including the back up/down rotation decoration 3440 is , the appearance position is moved downward from the back upper front decoration body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side of the rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3450 is located below the center of the rear upper and lower decoration unit 3450 than the rear upper front decoration 3421, so the back upper and rear rotating decoration 3440 etc. are visible from the front. becomes possible.

When the back elevation decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves downward. In addition, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

In addition, in the state where the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the raising/lowering cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to further rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

When the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up/back rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side becomes visible from the front. In the back up/down decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454, the back up/down rotation decoration is moved through the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, if the driving gear 3455 is rotated by the back vertically rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When returning the back lift/lower decoration unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back lift/lower drive motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above, so that the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 moves up/down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450 moves upward. When the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting/lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, thereby moving the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. It can be reinstated.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 toward the retracted position, and The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back top effect unit 3400 of this embodiment has a back top front decorative board 3422 provided behind the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative board 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a back top and rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top and rear decorative board 3452 can be used to emit light as appropriate. By doing so, the back upper and rear rotating decorative bodies 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be decorated with light.

At this time, with the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back top and rear decoration board 3452 is made to emit light, and the back top and rear rotating decoration that is being decorated with light is emitted. The body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 178(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Fig. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back rear left decoration unit in the back rear left presentation unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 near the left end inside the back box 3010. The back-rear-left presentation unit 3500 includes a transparent back-rear left-rotating decoration 3510 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear-left decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear left-rotating decoration 3510 on the lower end side. The rear left drive unit 3550 is installed in the back box 3010 and rotates the upper end side of the back left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The rear rear left rotation decoration body 3510 of the rear rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The rear left rotation decorative body 3510 has a shaft 3510a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a transparent back rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left rotating decorative body 3510 passes through the center, and a back left decorative body 3521. A rear left decorative board 3522 is provided at the rear of the rear left decorative body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface)"). A front cover 3523 is attached from the rear of the left decorative board 3522 to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably supports the shaft 3510a of the rear left rotating decorative body 3510; A movable base 3524 is attached to the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear left drive unit 3550.

The back left decoration unit 3520 also includes a back left rotation drive motor 3525 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that its rotating shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a back left rotation drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525; A gear-shaped rotating gear 3527 is provided.

The rear left decorative body 3521 of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the rear left rotation decorative body 3510 one after the other, so that the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a rotated shape so that it is located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back left rotating decorative body 3521 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back left rotation decoration body 3510 and the back left rotation decoration body 3521 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions. Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 arranged behind the back left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and behind the transparent back rear left rotation decorative body 3510, a transparent back rear left decorative body 3521, Since the back left decorative board 3522 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 by silk printing is applied to the back left decorative body 3521 and then to the back left decorative board 3522. Visible through the rear left rotation decorative body 3510, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed according to the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522 is made of resin in a white color (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back left decorative board 3522, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the rear left decorative board 3522, near the mounted front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components and the front-side electronic components are displayed. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back left decorative board 3522, there is an area near the back side electronic components such as connectors that indicates the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are placed. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 has a shape in a front view that is a combination of a portion having the same outer shape as the rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. Furthermore, the operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the back left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the drive gear 3526, the back left rotation decoration unit 3520 rotates the back left rotation decoration 3510 front and back through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a flat reinforcing plate 3551 that extends vertically and has a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front of the reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front of the unit base 3552; A back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is installed so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear is attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555.

The rear left drive unit 3550 also includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , an elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the front outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3557b of No. 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 extending left and right below the first slit 3558a. It has a second slit 3558b into which it is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back left relay board 3561 is attached to the front of the rear left relay board 3561, and the rear left lift detection sensor 3562 (lead) is attached to the back of the back left relay board 3561 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557. type) and.

In addition, white resist liquid is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the back left relay board 3561 in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back left lift detection sensor 3562 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "a solid white resist"). Although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the rear left relay board 3561, the part number of the surface side electronic component, the surface side electronic Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the back side electronic parts and the back side electronic parts are printed near the back side electronic parts such as the connector and the back left lift detection sensor 3562. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the back side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist using silk-screen printing using bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to white. Although the back left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board and has no LED mounted, it is a board provided inside the game board 5. Therefore, the front and rear surfaces of the back left relay board 3561 are equipped with reflectors By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided inside the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is directed toward the front of the game board 5 to emit light. They are now able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has approximately the same length as the unit base 3552, extends vertically, and is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, a drive pin 3557b passes through a slit 3560a of a partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3558a of a link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays connections between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear-left effect unit 3500 will be explained. In the normal state, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is a back rear left decorative body in which a back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184(a). The unit 3520 is in a suspended retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decoration 3510) is located behind the back front left presentation unit 3700 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-rear left presentation unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decoration body 3030 and the back-front left presentation unit 3700, and the back-rear left lifting drive motor Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131, etc.). Note that the front part of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is covered in front by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see Figure 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and near the left end of the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3559; Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotating decoration 3510) is moved from the retracted position to the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving leftward, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve, and upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, thereby preventing rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When this drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right inside the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. That will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. While the operating pin 3524b slides to the right inside the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates. It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, thereby reducing the load on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554.

As the back left decoration unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a in this way, the back left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. As a result, the back-back left rotating decoration 3510 moves to the right of the back-front left presentation unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b begins to slide to the left within the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left lift drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearance position (Fig. 184(c) ). In this second appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520, a force acts on the back left decorative body unit 3520 to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and this force causes the movable base The link member 3558 will try to move downward via the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 also does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear left decoration unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

In addition, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise to bring the drive pin 3557b into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, the The lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but because the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back left decoration unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 183). Therefore, when the back left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front (player side), if the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the drive gear 3526, the rotating back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decoration unit 3520 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 moves the motor gear 3555 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left lift drive motor 3554 is stopped, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of this embodiment includes a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back left decoration unit 3520 being rotated from the retracted position toward the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back left decoration board 3522 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. The player can see the back left rotation decoration 3510 and the back left rotation decoration 3521.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 185(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Figure 186 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right effect unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the front, and Figure 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right effect unit disassembled into its main parts and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 189 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear right decoration unit in the rear right production unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end inside the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear-right presentation unit 3600 includes a transparent back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-back direction, and a back-rear-right decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side. The rear right drive unit 3650 is installed in the back box 3010 and rotates the upper end side of the back right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the rear rear right presentation unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The back right rotation decorative body 3610 has an axial shaft 3610a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent back right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the transparent rear right rotation decorative body 3610 passes through the center, and a back right decorative body 3621. A rear right decorative board 3622 is provided at the rear of the rear right decorative body 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"); A front cover 3623 is attached from the rear of the right decorative board 3622 to the rear side of the rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably supports the shaft 3610a of the rear right rotating decorative body 3610; A movable base 3624 is attached to the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear right drive unit 3650.

The back right decorative body unit 3620 also includes a back right rotation drive motor 3625 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back right rotation drive motor 3625. A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decoration body 3610, which meshes with the drive gear 3626. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decorative body 3621 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the rear right rotation decorative body 3610 one above the other, so that the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a rotated shape so that it is located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back right rotation decoration body 3621 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back right rotation decoration 3621 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions, Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (in other words, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), but when the reverse side is rotated clockwise. Through the decorative body 3610 and the rear right decorative body 3621 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 arranged behind the rear right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 by silk printing, and behind the transparent back right rotating decorative body 3610, a transparent back right decorative body 3621, Since the back right decorative board 3622 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 by silk printing is applied to the back right decorative body 3621 and then to the back right decorative board 3622. Visible through the rear clockwise rotating decorative body 3610, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized when a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed using the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the rear right decorative board 3622, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the front electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back right decorative board 3622, near the back electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is placed. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 has a shape in front view that is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Furthermore, the actuating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the back right rotation drive motor 3625 rotates the drive gear 3626, the back right rotation decoration unit 3620 rotates the back right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a reinforcing plate 3651 in the form of a flat plate extending vertically and having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed inside the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover. 3653, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the unit so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotation shaft of the rear right lift drive motor 3654. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655 is provided.

The rear right drive unit 3650 also includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. 3658a, and has a second slit 3658b extending left and right below the rear right decorative body unit 3620 into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and includes a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. and a link member 3658 that is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction between.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The back right relay board 3661 attached to the front of the rear right relay board 3661 and the rear right lift detection sensor 3662 (lead A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and the lower part of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

Note that white resist liquid is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear right relay board 3661 over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "a solid white resist"). Although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right relay board 3661, the part number of the front electronic component, the front electronic component number, and the Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back right relay board 3661, there are a plurality of connectors, the part number of the back side electronic parts, the back side, etc. near the back side electronic components such as the back right lift detection sensor 3662, etc. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed using silk-screen printing on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to white. . Although the back right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board and has no LED mounted, it is a board provided inside the game board 5, so the front and rear surfaces of the back right relay board 3661 are equipped with reflectors By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided inside the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is directed toward the front of the game board 5 to emit light. They are now able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically by approximately the same length as the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed into a shallow container shape open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3657, a drive pin 3657b passes through a slit 3660a of a partition plate 3660 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3658a of a link member 3658. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays connections between the back back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right lift drive motor 3654, the back right lift detection sensor 3662, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear right effect unit 3600 will be explained. In the normal state, the back right direction production unit 3600 is a back right decorative body in which a back right rotating decorative body 3610 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a suspended, retracted position. In this normal state, the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 (back-rear right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located behind the back-front right decoration body 3040 and the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and the entire back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located at the front (on the player's side). It has become invisible since then.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is It is located near the right end within the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 that is in contact with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction, and link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear right rotating decoration 3610) moves around the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear right lift drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lift cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of movement to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, thereby preventing rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear right lift drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. The drive pin 3657b will revolve in the clockwise direction. When this drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left inside the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620, which protrudes below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides to the left inside the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 retreats. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, thereby reducing the load on the rear right lift drive motor 3654.

In this way, as the back right decoration unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As a result, the back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front right presentation unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back and right direction production unit 3600 of this embodiment, the rotational position of the back and right decoration unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the second appearance position (FIG. 191(c)) ). In this second appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620, a force acts on the back right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and this force causes the rear right decorative body unit 3620 to move. The link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted into the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 also does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that even if the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decoration unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, and the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, The lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but because the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back right decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 190). Therefore, when the back right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3658 can be moved downward due to the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back-rear-right production unit 3600 of this embodiment has a back-rear-right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back-rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back right decorative body unit 3620 rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back right decorative board 3622 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. It is possible to show the player the back right rotation decoration 3610 and the back right rotation decoration 3621.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192(b) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and FIG. 195(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030. The back front left presentation unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, from the top: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left presentation unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decoration unit 3710 of the back front left production unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front and back, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shaped shutter support members 3712 are arranged vertically in a row on the front surface of the shutter support members 3712, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left and right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided at the rear of the back front left decoration 3713 in the form of a transparent flat plate and the back front left decoration 3713. A back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") and a back front left decorative board 3714 are covered from the rear. A rear cover 3715 is attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front of the rear left presentation unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left decoration unit 3710. A transmission member 3718 is attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and is attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. It includes a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape that resembles a "convex" character turned to the right and rounded corners (a shape that is a stylized "pine"). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion where a metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In this embodiment, the part having the metallic decorative part 3711a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3711, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and this molded part and the front cover 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a sense of luxury, and also make the front cover 3711 stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the front cover 3711. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decoration part 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration part 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative part 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative board 3714 and damaging the back front left decorative board 3714. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3712a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. This boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left and right direction, and a left shaft portion 3733 that protrudes from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3734 extending in a cylindrical shape toward the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located at the rear of the shaft portion 3733.

The shaft portion 3731 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate about the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). It has a pattern on it. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear front left decorative board 3714 are difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the front and back left decorations 3713 may have a lens cut on the front and back surfaces (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back in place of the front and back left decorations 3713. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparent, the surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (mounted surface) can be visually recognized.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by silk printing, and the back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is transmitted through the back front left decorative body 3713. If the color of the specified paint is visible when multiple LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the markings on the front side (attributes of the surface-side electronic component shown) can be determined.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

On the surface (front) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a white resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. layers are formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are marked near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side markings (back side markings) are red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow color.

In addition, when using yellow as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a front end bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent to the right on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the right. This support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3716a. This link member 3719 has a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted in between, and a second connecting portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and is a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front left direction unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732, which is a closed state. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). has been done.

In a normal state, the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting part 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting part 3719b to move downward.

By moving the opening/closing slider 3720 downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted into the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 will rotate around the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the rear front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of the game, and it is possible to entertain the player by changing the decoration.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state. The shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are made to emit light, so that the back front left decorated with light emission can be shown. The decoration body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left presentation unit 3700, three back front left decoration units are provided: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710, the shutter units 3730 can be opened and closed independently, and the shutter units 3730 can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front left decorative units 3710, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 196(b) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in an open state.

The back front right presentation unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right presentation unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, from the top: a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right production unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 that penetrates from front to back and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shaped shutter support members 3812 are arranged vertically in a row on the front surface of the shutter support members 3812, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left and right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided at the rear of the back front right decoration 3813 in the form of a transparent flat plate and the back front right decoration 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") and a back front right decorative board 3814 are covered from the rear. A rear cover 3815 is attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front of the rear right presentation unit 3600.

Furthermore, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right decoration unit 3810. A transmission member 3818 is attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and is attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. It includes a link member 3819 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape shaped like a "convex" character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape that is a stylized "pine"). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In this embodiment, the part having the metallic decorative part 3811a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and this molded part and the front cover 3811 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a sense of luxury, and also make the front cover 3811 stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the front cover 3811. The metal decorative portion 3811a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decoration part 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration part 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative part 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decorative board 3814 and damaging the back front right decorative board 3814. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. This boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3830 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a shaft portion 3833 that projects from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extends to the right. It has a crankshaft 3834 extending in a cylindrical shape toward the direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located at the rear of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate about the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is decorated with characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). It has a pattern on it. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decorative board 3814. The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814. In addition, the front and back right decorations 3813 may have a lens cut on the front and back sides (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back in place of the front and back surfaces of the back and front right decorations 3813. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 (mounted surface) can be visually recognized.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by silk printing, and the back front right decorative board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decorative body 3813. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the predetermined color of the paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted through the back front right decorative body 3813. If the color of the specified paint is visible when multiple LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the markings on the front side (attributes of the surface-side electronic component shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

On the surface (front) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a white resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although not shown, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and is bent leftward at its front end. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that projects leftward from near the lower end in a cylindrical shape. This support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3816a. This link member 3819 has a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted in between, and a second connecting portion 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and is a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back-front-right production unit 3800 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832, and is in a closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the back front right decorative body 3813 is placed on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (a plurality of shutters 3832). has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates around the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection part 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection part 3819b to move downward.

As this opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted into the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 will rotate around the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front right production unit 3800 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. The decorations (pictures) can be changed to different decorations (pictures), allowing the player to enjoy changing the decorations.

Further, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state. The shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are made to emit light. The decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right presentation unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units are provided: a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810, the shutter units 3830 can be opened and closed independently, and the lights can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front right decorative units 3810, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing the rear movable decoration of the rear effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle production unit moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Figure 202 shows how the back up/back rotation decoration of the back up/back presentation unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotation decoration of the back back left presentation unit is moved from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the back back right FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the back and right rotation decorations of the performance unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 203 shows the rear left rotating decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right presentation unit from the retraction position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit changed from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

Figure 205 shows the back movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up and rear rotating decoration of the back upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the back left effect unit. Move the left-rotating decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-rear right-rotating decoration of the back-rear-right production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower-middle rotation decoration of the back-lower middle production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it has been moved from a lowered position to an uppered position.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, , as shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 of back top production unit 3400 and back top The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of the back front left production unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and shutter unit 3830 of the back front right production unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500 The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed through the frame.

Furthermore, to explain in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the blocking part 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side to near the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear production unit 3100 is located behind the upper rear production unit 3400 and is not visible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and front unit 2000.

In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position and is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since this back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is viewed diagonally from above from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the number decoration above the center of rotation can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, the back top front decoration body 3421 of the back top performance unit 3400 extends left and right at the top of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the top left of the center in the left and right direction is connected to the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. 2500, and the rest can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 has one petal facing upward at the center in the left and right direction in front of the back top and front decoration body 3421, and can be easily viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 having the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 of the back upper production unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decoration 3421, and the player It is not visible from the side.

In addition, the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 of the back rear left production unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left production unit 3700 in a normal state. , and are not visible to the player. In addition, the rear right decoration unit 3620 having the rear right rotating decoration 3610 of the rear right presentation unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the front right presentation unit 3800 in a normal state. , and are not visible to the player.

In addition, the three back front left decoration units 3710 of the back front left presentation unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and are transparent game panels. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The middle second back front left decoration unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decoration unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, and the right part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left production unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right presentation unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent game It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the normal state of the back front right production unit 3800, the shutter unit 3830 of each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810 is in a closed state, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs the back side performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , and the back/front right effect unit 3800 perform predetermined effects (movable effects and light emitting effects).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The lock is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decoration body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left and right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, a "jackpot" game). It is possible to make the player think that the player is going to play the game, and it is possible to make the player feel that the player has a high expectation for the game.

Although not shown in the figure, in this rear rear effect unit 3100, after dropping the rear movable decoration 3110 to the appearance position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward, and the rear movable decoration When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position, by appropriately changing forward/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is The movable decorative body 3110 can draw attention, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 201, as a production using the back lower middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is rotated by the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352. is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated around the longitudinal axis by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333. As a result, the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600, and the player sees the Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around and around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

This lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is provided with six number decorations, so by rotating the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, it gives the player the impression that a roulette wheel is spinning. can be given. Therefore, when rotating the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the numeral decoration of the back lower middle rotating decorative object 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "pieces" may advance depending on the situation. As a result, in order for the "pieces" to advance to the desired "squares", the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower side of the back rotates, depending on whether or not it stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration, making the player suspenseful. It can make the players' hearts flutter and entertain them. Further, as the "pieces" advance, the player can be made to feel as if his or her expectations are increasing, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased.

For example, the production using the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is shown in FIG. As shown, in the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, and in the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom right rotation decoration body is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255. Rotate 3251. In addition, in the back upper presentation unit 3400, the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotating decoration 3410, and the back up/down drive motor 3429 moves the back up/down decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position to the lower side. At the same time as it is rotated to the appearance position, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top and back rotation drive motor 3454. Furthermore, in the back rear left presentation unit 3500, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right. Rotate the left rotation decorative body 3510. In addition, in the back rear right production unit 3600, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left. Rotate the clockwise rotation decorative body 3610.

As a result, the back top and rear rotating decorations 3440, the back back left rotation decorations 3510, and the back back right rotation decorations 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decorations Since the body 3201, the back bottom and right rotation decorative body 3251, the back top and front rotation decoration 3410, the back top and back rotation decoration 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate, By rotating the six decorations, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, making him think that something good is going to happen, and increasing his expectations for the game.

At this time, the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated in the normal and reverse directions as appropriate, so that the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the back rear left decoration The body unit 3520 and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back up and back rotating decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate while shaking, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can entertain players.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate around and around, making the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to increase expectations for the game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 203, as a production using the back rear left production unit 3500 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, in the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525. In addition, in the back rear right presentation unit 3600, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate around at approximately the same height as the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, which may surprise the player and bring about something good. This can make the player think that this is the case, and can increase expectations for the game.

At this time, in the performance display device 1600, the positions of the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 An effect image may be displayed that corresponds to the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face according to the world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to present to the player an effect in which the character's eyes are spinning, thereby making it possible to entertain the player.

As a production using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right production unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the changes in the decoration.

Note that the effects using the back front left presentation unit 3700 and the back front right presentation unit 3800 are based on the fact that they each have three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810. , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be made. This makes it possible to present a variety of performances to the players, thereby making it difficult for the players to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, the back rear production unit 3100, the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower middle production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorations etc. may be made to move. This results in
By making all the decorations movable, the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be increased. In this case, in the back rear left presentation unit 3500 and the back rear right presentation unit 3600, the back left decoration unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retreat position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

Although the movement of each decorative object has been explained above, when each decorative object is moved, the LEDs on the decorative board provided at the rear can be made to emit light as appropriate, giving the player a light-emitting effect of the decorative object. It is possible to display the information and attract the interest of the players even more.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the movable effects and the light emitting effects as described above can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored. The player can be entertained and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5-11. Main functions and effects of the game board]
Next, the main effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the game board 5 of this embodiment, a game panel 1100 in which a game area 5a is provided on the front side has a penetrating opening 1112, and the game area 5a is a distribution area where game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into a non-circulating area and shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112, has its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes a circulation area and the inner side becomes a non-circulation area. Then, a flat support part 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front and back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation area side (inside). At the same time, since a flange portion 2502 that contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Therefore, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. In other words, even if the non-circulation area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) divided by the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the actual distribution area will not become smaller unlike in conventional pachinko machines. . Therefore, by increasing the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game balls B circulate within the gaming area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the non-circulation area The effect images of the effect display device 1600 as a effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable bodies and decorations of the effect unit, etc. can be made more visible, and the game with the game ball B in the distribution area and the non-circulation area can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation area side (inside) by the support part 2503, and the peripheral wall part 2502 can be reinforced by the flange part 2502 provided in the part where the support part 2503 is not provided. In addition to being able to reinforce the portion 2501 from the distribution area side (outside), the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and damage to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support part 2503, the flange part 2502, and the attachment to the game panel 1100, when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, the peripheral wall part 2501 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being elastically deformed and repelled like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a from making strange movements different from those in the past due to contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which would cause discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent this and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Because the performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided at the rear and the movable body and decorative body of the performance unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), the non-distribution area It is possible to enlarge the visible range of the production images, movable objects, decorations, etc. provided at the rear of the display device, making it easier to exert the production effect of the production device, and also making it possible to make it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device. By having a large visible range of the performance images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. of the performance display device 1600, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the transparent part allows the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light provided in the pachinko machine 1 to be protected. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make the game look bright, improve its appearance, and increase its appeal to players. At this time, steps, notches, etc. may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, a movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be The light emitted by the light emitting means (LED) provides the above effects, and the transparent support portion 2503 allows the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and back direction as the front side of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is 1100, the lens effect caused by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can also be used for the rear back front left decorative body 3030 or the production device (production display device 1600). etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the part (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, effect image, etc. can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is Because the edge of the edge allows a line different from that of the peripheral wall 2501 to be shown, it becomes difficult to see a single design compared to the case where the shape follows the peripheral wall 2501, and it is possible to create a design that looks like it is made with attention to detail. A pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

Furthermore, since at least part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion of the support portion 2503 is not constant, but may vary. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and back directions as the front surface of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if the support part 2503 exists, and to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support part 2503.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions as the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (midway) of the front and back direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, it is possible to reduce the reduction in the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall part 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even if game media come into contact with it.

Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side thereof is inserted into the opening 1112. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made difficult to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is It appears to protrude forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, creating a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is divided by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image, the movable body, the decoration of the effect unit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear of the non-distribution area can be clearly seen from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of fully exhibiting the performance effects of etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is made to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed diagonally, the peripheral wall part 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the peripheral wall 2501 appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall 2501, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the circulation area and non-circulation area partitioned by the surrounding wall 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area side (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area side (outside) is provided in the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Since the support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support portion 2503 may obstruct the visibility of the presentation device (the presentation display device 1600 or the presentation unit of the back unit 3000). This makes it possible to enlarge the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable bodies of the effect unit, etc. can be seen, making it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect by the effect, and also making it easier for the player to see the effect of the effect. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the presentation enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support part 2503 and the flange part 2502 can maintain the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 at the same level as conventional products, so the peripheral wall part 2501 and the support part 2503 are integrally molded with resin and made of metal. It is possible to prevent the molded product from deforming when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded from synthetic resin, only the support portion 2503 is separated from other portions. It is possible to avoid an increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage, and it is possible to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. , are respectively transparent, and a rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component of the rear rear left production unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a rear rear right lift drive of the rear rear right production unit 3600. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. The back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extend from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to cover and hide at least a portion of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the inside of the game area 5a, it is possible to make the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 difficult to see from the player side, improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to suppress the deterioration of the front back left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 on the front side instead of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, The overall appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the Pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, it becomes difficult to see the boundaries of the game area 5a divided by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not divided. This gives a sense of openness, and even if the gaming area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the gaming area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, the playing area 5a appears larger than that of a conventional pachinko machine, which can give a strong impact to the players, heighten their expectations for playing with this pachinko machine 1, and improve their playing experience. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the portion in the game area 5a in front of functional components such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen within the gaming area 5a, so that the appearance of the gaming area 5a can be improved. In addition to achieving the same effects as described above, it is also possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed diagonally from the center of the gaming area 5a.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface, and when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface, and when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decorations can make it difficult to distinguish the outer boundary of the gaming area 5a, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than its actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. By making it stand out, it is possible to further increase its appeal to players.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left production unit 3500 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear-right presentation unit 3600 etc. from being seen, and the back-rear-left presentation unit 3500, the back-rear-right presentation unit 3600, etc. can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, thereby improving the appearance. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, at least a part of the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front (the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 Since the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are placed completely (entirely) outside the gaming area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a are The back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. By maintaining the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the gaming area 5a from becoming smaller. In other words, since a part of the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged within the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a can be reduced. This makes it possible to relatively increase the space of the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can further exhibit the above-mentioned effects. Furthermore, by providing some of the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for accessories that move within the gaming area 5a outside the gaming area 5a, the space within the gaming area 5a can be enlarged. The range of performances performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, making it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light. can improve the appearance of Although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are Since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent material, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back side. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 is reached and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent even if it does not cover the entire part. It can be spicy and can be made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not large enough to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. The game area 5a can be made to look larger while reducing the cost of the game area 3030. Note that at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, but the part is not included in the pachinko machine. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the gaming area 5a and the outside of the gaming area 5a). Furthermore, for a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the gaming area 5a (such as the lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, the lower left corner location on the game board 5, etc.), it extends from inside the gaming area 5a to outside the gaming area 5a. By providing decorations, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

In addition, the frame of the front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located in front of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not get in the way of the game ball B within the gaming area 5a, facilitating smooth gaming within the gaming area 5a. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body The rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside part of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 is used to lift the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so it is possible to avoid making the back front left decorative body 3030 longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decoration body 3030 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning holes 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. In contrast, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucent decoration. (A sticker is pasted), so the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), making the first starting opening 2002 more noticeable than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness toward the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, the number of game balls B accepted into the first starting hole 2002 decreases (or the first starting hole The player's attention is concentrated on the general prize opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to make the player reliably recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim for, and to make the player aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy playing games.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted into the first starting port 2002, it is possible to make the player nervous. Depending on whether or not a winning game (for example, a "jackpot") that generates an advantageous gaming state is drawn by drawing the first special drawing result, players can be excited and excited, and their expectations for the game can be heightened. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. After that, when a winner is drawn in the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second grand prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, providing great enjoyment to the players. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted into the general winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result will not be drawn, but the game ball B will be paid out as a benefit. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, and can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting hole 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is significantly different, so a sticker is pasted on the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a sticker is pasted on the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it will not make the players feel uncomfortable, and it can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unsightly, allowing the players to enjoy playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reducing their interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning slot 2001 or the first starting slot 2002, and to fully experience the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decline in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of a transparent material, the light from the lighting in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitting device provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the means (LED on the decorative board), the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is good. This can increase the appeal to players.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in 2001 is guided backwards more slowly, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 where the first special lottery result lottery is held is transferred to the general prize winning opening 2001. Since the game ball B that has been accepted can be guided backward at a later timing, the game ball B that has been accepted into the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting slot 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is held, the joy (feeling of superiority) of having the gaming ball B accepted into the first starting slot 2002 is transferred to the general prize winner. The game ball B can be enjoyed by the player for a longer time than when it is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning hole 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since the game ball B can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and ejected faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the same for a long time, to direct the player's attention to the next game ball B, to make the game progress smoothly, and to suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall part 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203. Since this is made possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning hole 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to create an illusion as if the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefit (the first special lottery result lottery) is not awarded afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall, and it is possible to avoid the feeling of distrust for the players. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening Decorations such as stickers on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning hole 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for players by using the cost for the performance device and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom center production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom center rotation having a plurality of even numbered (six in this case) stopping positions is provided. The decoration body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length equal to half the length of the stop position, and a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position. A plurality of (here, four) area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions, and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326. Therefore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection pieces 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease repeatedly. Thus, by combining the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detection piece 3325, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

To be more specific, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 which has six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the number of area detection pieces 3325 is half of the three stop positions that are lined up. The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. (position of the decorative numeral "3"), only the first region specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the region detection piece 3325. From this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back center rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position marked with the decorative numeral "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects the area. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. Detection and non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above are repeated as the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 is provided with a length that extends to half the number of stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be combined to perform the back-bottom rotation decoration. Not only can the rotation of the body 3310 be detected, but also all area specifying sensors 3330 will not become non-detectable even until the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is equipped with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 are detected by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-lower-middle-rotating decoration body 3310, which has a plurality of stopping positions, by minimizing the deviation of the stopping position.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at any stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), and it is possible to enjoy the production (movable production) by the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) without causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to suppress the shift of the stop position even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, and it is also possible to By making the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotate, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by making the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 faces the player in front, and after rotating round and round, it can be rotated freely. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player is excited and excited depending on whether or not the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This allows the user to enjoy the movable effect of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensors 3330) required to detect movement to any stop position. The number of and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping the stop position) of the plurality of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. This allows players to enjoy themselves and to suppress a decline in interest by using the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 having more stopping positions.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, it was shown as having six stop positions, but it is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stopping positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a rotating movable body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) having a plurality of stop positions is shown, but the movable body having a plurality of stop positions is not limited to this. For example, it may be "something that goes around", "something that moves in a straight line", "something that moves in an arc shape", "something that moves in a curved shape", etc.

[5-12. Improving reflectance by insulating coating on the lands of each decorative board on the game board]
Next, a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole formed in each decorative board provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments) ") will be explained with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284. FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5; 282 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is covered with a land of a through hole according to a second embodiment to be formed, and FIG. , FIG. 283 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), and FIG. 283 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of It is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration for covering a film, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). 284 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5; ) is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (b), and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modification of (b). In addition, in FIGS. 281 to 284, parts that perform the same functions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is represented as a decorative board KB.

As mentioned above, a through-hole is a through-hole whose inner peripheral wall is plated with copper to make it conductive.Through-holes are for mounting electronic components, and through-holes are for mounting electronic components. There is a hole, and the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is adopted for the through hole where no electronic component is mounted. In addition to through holes, non-through holes are also provided in the decorative board KB of each decorative board included in the game board 5. In the non-through holes, copper plating is not applied to the inner circumferential wall of the hole passing through the decorative board KB. Copper plating is applied to the inner peripheral wall of the penetrating hole, and there are no lands on the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the decorative board KB. It is very different from a through hole with a A non-through hole is formed to attach a board to a member, or to fix an electronic component to which an external force is applied (such as a connector to which wiring is attached/detached) to the board. Note that there is no problem in adopting a configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film for the through hole for mounting electronic components.

Here, first, we will briefly explain each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and explain the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments, and the structure mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board. We will explain the connectors in order.

Note that the structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is applicable to each decorative board provided on the game board 5 on which a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted. However, it does not apply to decorative boards on which a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted. Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is similar to the structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film. 217), a drive circuit 1310vb (see FIG. 217) for a second distribution drive motor, which will be described later, drives a second distribution drive motor, which is an electric drive source, and a drive solenoid, which is an electric drive source. This does not apply to the main control board 1310 on which a heat source such as a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da (see FIG. 218), which will be described later, is mounted, and the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb (FIG. 221) which drives a dispensing motor 584, which is an electric drive source, which will be described later This does not apply to the dispensing control board 633 on which a heat source such as the This does not apply to the mounted peripheral control board 1510.

Each board on which these heat sources are mounted (i.e., the decorative board provided for the game board, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510) is equipped with each IC (i.e., LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) , the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor, the drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor, the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, and the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb). Wiring electrically connected to the pad portion to which the terminals are soldered. Although the structure of covering the land of the through hole formed on the pattern with the insulating film for the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied, the land of the through hole according to the first or second embodiment is not applied. Each IC (that is, LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), first distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310VA, second distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310VB, drive solenoid drive IC 1310DA, and payout motor drive It may be applied to the pad portion to which each terminal of IC633adb) is soldered.

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the power supply board 630 described below on which the radiation fin is mounted. Among the decorative boards included in the game board 5, the decorative board may be configured to have heat dissipation fins mounted thereon. In this case, the configuration in which the through-hole lands are covered with the insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is as follows. , is not applied to decorative substrates on which radiation fins are mounted, but is applied to decorative substrates on which radiation fins are not mounted. Furthermore, a radiation fin may be configured to be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 (see FIG. 206). The structure of covering with an insulating film is not applied to the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 on which heat dissipation fins are mounted.

In addition, as will be explained later, amplifier boards that have circuits that amplify various sounds consume a lot of power and generate heat, so they are used in metal board boxes that consist of a metal cover body and a metal base body. Encased or attached to a metal partial case. Therefore, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the amplifier board.

[5-12-1. Various decorative boards for the game board]
First, as described above, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 includes a back decorative board 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145, and a back decorative board 3114 provided in the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. Back bottom left decorative board 3203, back bottom right decorative board 3253 provided in the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, back bottom middle first decorative board 3322 provided in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 shown in FIG. The second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, the upper back front decorative board 3422 provided in the upper back effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. A rear decorative board 3452, a rear left decorative board 3522 provided in the rear left decorative unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, a rear right decorative board 3622 provided in the rear right decorative unit 3620 shown in FIG. There is a back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative unit 3710 shown, a back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, and the like. The front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are coated almost entirely with a white resist liquid as an insulating coating (hereinafter simply referred to as a "solid coated" coating). (Sometimes referred to as "white resist.") A white resist layer is formed. In addition, on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, there are full-color LEDs on the solid white resist that make it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components. Attributes of the electronic component, such as the part number, area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed (in addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component) ) is printed with yellow paint using silk screen printing. For the attributes of electronic components, solid lines, broken lines, letters, etc. are used in the case of the model.

Depending on variations, the white color of the resist solution may be pale white, deep white, dark white, or bright white. In addition, since ink companies that supply resist liquid have different white colors (for example, yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), white color as resist liquid is supplied to the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers. Even if specified, the white color will not be completely the same (it is difficult to make the white color completely the same), and the white color will have a wide range.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the marking part is red, the red marking part will stand out against the white resist, whereas the white In the combination of and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and when the marking part is yellow, the yellow marking part is hard to stand out against the white resist.

When a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), his line of sight changes depending on the direction of his head (face), and the player can temporarily see the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. Even if it is visible, the part number of the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED will be placed are marked on the solid white resist painted on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. Since the notation indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the indicated area is printed with yellow paint using silk printing, the yellow notation is difficult to stand out against the white resist, and has no relation to the game for the player. It is possible to prevent the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed from being visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the part number of the full-color LED that makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components, and the notation section that indicates the attributes of the electronic component, such as the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed, is , the front (surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with yellow paint, but instead of this, yellow paint was printed on the rear (back) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. It may be printed with paint by silk printing, or it may be a color different from yellow (for example, a color that is not bright such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red). ) may be printed using silk screen printing. In this case, there is nothing printed by silk printing on the front side (front side) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and only the back side (back side) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is printed using silk printing. There will be something that will be done. In this way, the white resist coated solidly on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component, which have no relation to the game to the player.

In addition, the part number of the full-color LED that makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components, and the notation section that indicates the attributes of the electronic component, such as the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed, is , the front (surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with yellow paint, but instead of this, the part number of the full-color LED was printed in foil-cut letters (in other words, the wiring pattern was formed). The characters are formed by forming characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the copper foil surface and removing the surrounding copper foil, and excluding the attributes of full-color LEDs from each terminal not shown and wiring pattern not shown. The front surface of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is formed as a foil removal area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern). The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters may each be covered with a white resist that is painted solidly on the (surface). Specifically, for example, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED is to be placed is formed as a foil-cutting area on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and a full-color LED and a foil-cutting area are formed in the vicinity of this foil-cutting area. The corresponding part number is formed as a stamped letter on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the foil is removed by a white resist that is painted solid on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. The area and its foil-cut characters are covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. In this way, the white resist coated solidly on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component, which have no relation to the game to the player.

In addition, the part number of the full-color LED that makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components, and the notation section that indicates the attributes of the electronic component, such as the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed, is , the front (surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with yellow paint, but instead of this, the full-color LED part number was printed in white using two coats of white resist. In addition to being formed as resist-cut characters, the attributes of the full-color LED may be formed as white resist-cut areas using double-coated white resist. Specifically, for example, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with almost the entire front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 as the first of two coats of white resist. The entire board is covered with a white resist (that is, as the first of two coats of white resist, a white resist liquid is applied to the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5). The front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with a second coat of white resist in an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (an area instructing the placement of a predetermined pin number). (including the notch) are masked as white resist-cut areas, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs are masked as white resist-cut characters near these white resist-cut areas. The entire front (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in step 5 is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, but the first layer of white resist covers the entire surface, and the second layer By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the white resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is placed is formed as a white resist removed area, and the full color LED is removed. The part number corresponding to the LED is formed as a white resist cutout character. The transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same, so that the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. The white resist of If you look at the area excluding the foil part (the same applies hereafter), the white resist of the second layer looks darker in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. On the other hand, in areas where the second layer of white resist and the first layer of white resist do not overlap due to masking, the first layer of white resist is covered by the second layer of white resist. The white resist of the first layer appears pale because it is exposed. In other words, if you look at the base of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 through the second layer of white resist, you can identify the white resist removed areas and white resist removed characters in the first layer of white resist. It is now possible to do so. In this way, the white resist coated solidly on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component, which have no relation to the game to the player.

In addition, the part number of the full-color LED that makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) that are electronic components, and the notation section that indicates the attributes of the electronic component, such as the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed, is , the front (front) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with yellow paint, but instead of this, the front (front) and rear (back) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was ) may have no area printed by silk printing. In this way, the white resist coated solidly on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs. can contribute. Further, it is possible to completely eliminate the part number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component, which have no relation to the game to the player, from being visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, since the step of silk printing can be omitted, the board manufacturing cost can be lowered by reducing the cost of silk printing plates and the number of manufacturing steps for the board.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB, and a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board KB, as well as a resistor, a capacitor, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. In some cases, one or more electronic components such as a circuit (for example, a constant current drive circuit) for controlling the light emission of the device are mounted. An LED is an electronic component whose package color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream), and a connector whose housing color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream). For example, the constant current drive circuit is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver that is housed in an IC package that has a black color as an integrated circuit. The electronic component is an IC, the resistor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component that has a color such as black, blue, or white, and the capacitor is a surface mount type that has a color such as black, brown, gray, or white. (SMD type) electronic component. In addition, on the rear (back side) of the decorative board KB, electronic components (connectors, resistors, capacitors, circuits that control the light emission of multiple LEDs, etc.) can be identified on the solid white resist. The part number, area indicating the attributes of the electronic component, etc. may be printed using silk screen printing with yellow paint, or may be printed in a color different from yellow (for example, a non-bright color such as black). It may also be printed using a silk screen printing method using a paint of blue, green, red, etc.).

It is better to place surface mount type (SMD type) resistors only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB where no LED is mounted, and not on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB where multiple LEDs are mounted. It is possible to increase the area of the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB. This is because surface mount type (SMD type) resistors are generally black on the top surface (sometimes called a protective film, etc.) except for the terminals; When placed on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist, so the presence of dark black inside the bright white resist causes the solid white color to be painted on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB. The reflectance due to the resist decreases, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. In addition, a resistor whose top surface is black (dark color) is a color that stands out (color that is easy to see) when combined with the white color (light color) of the resist, so players may see unnecessary black color. This may reduce the performance effect. In addition, the resistance value may be written on the top surface (protective film) of a surface mount type (SMD type) resistor. If the top surface (protective film) is black, the numbers or symbols that indicate the resistance value are white. However, because the area of the black base is overwhelmingly larger than the numbers or symbols that indicate the resistance value, the top surface (protective film) is recognized as black even if the resistance value is indicated. Ru. Note that, depending on the packaging density of the decorative board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative board KB, a resistor may also be arranged on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Surface mount type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) are placed only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB where no LED is mounted, and placed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB where multiple LEDs are mounted. If it is not disposed, the area of the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB can be increased. This is because surface mount type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) generally have a top surface (often manufactured using the green sheet method, and the top surface is made of dielectric ceramic). Many capacitors (ceramic capacitors) with brown tops, except for the terminals, are placed on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, and the reflectance is different from that of the white resist. The presence of dark brown on the decorative substrate KB lowers the reflectance due to the white resist applied all over the front (surface) of the decorative substrate KB, impairing the uniformity of the reflectance. In addition, capacitors with brown (dark color) upper surfaces (ceramic capacitors) are used in combination with white (light color) resist. Since it is a conspicuous color (a color that is easy to see), there is a risk that the presentation effect will be lowered by the player seeing unnecessary brown. Note that a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) may also be placed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density of the decorative board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative board KB.

When mounting a connector on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, it is desirable to use a connector with a housing that is the same color as the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, that is, a white housing. . When the connector is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB, colors such as white, black, and blue may be used except in special cases.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow. For this reason, the notation is printed using silk screen printing with yellow paint, but in addition to yellow, the notation is also printed with pastel colors or other paints that have a brightness close to white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). Even when printing by silk printing, as with the yellow paint mentioned above, the color does not come close to the brightness of completely identical white (it is difficult to achieve a color that is close to the brightness of completely identical white), and the brightness of white The color has a range of colors close to . Even if a color different from yellow is used as a silk-printing paint for the marking part, the color will have a wide range, similar to the yellow paint described above.

Further, the LED is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, but it may also be a single-color LED such as white, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, or green, or a surface-mounted top-view type. You may also use a surface mount type side view type. In addition to using surface-mounted LEDs, bullet-type LEDs may also be used.

In addition, a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board KB was mounted on the rear surface (back side) of the decorative board KB, but the color of the housing of the connector was white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, If the electronic component has a color (beige or cream color), it may be mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB. This is achieved by mounting a white connector (or a connector with a color close to white) that has the same color as the white paint film that is the insulating film formed on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (surface) of the substrate KB.

[5-12-2. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 281(a) and (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are formed. By removing the copper foil at and, a front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, as well as a front (front) side wiring pattern and a rear (back) side land. A wiring pattern is formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are The diameter is KTHD1 and they are the same size.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Some have a first front (front) side wiring pattern and a second front (front) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB, and the second front One end of the (front) side wiring pattern will be electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB. The front (front) side wiring patterns (that is, the first front (front) side wiring pattern and the second front (front) side wiring pattern) are exposed. In addition, the wiring pattern on the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Some have a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the second rear surface One end of the (back) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) side KBy of the decorative board KB, and two wires are connected from the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB. At the same time, the other end of the wiring pattern on the rear (back) side, a pad to which a specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and a specific terminal of the connector are soldered. It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are connected through a through hole KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear surface ( The back side wiring pattern, the front (front side) side land KRDx1 formed on the front side (front side) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear side (back side) formed on the rear side (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB. ) are electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a front (front) side resist layer KBxr. A front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1. . In addition, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. In a region of the resist layer KByr that corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. There is.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (front) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the rear (back) side resist opening KByra are the same size. Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. (ground) and are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front side is opened from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. The outer periphery of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB can be covered with white resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 is connected from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB to the front (front) side land KRDx1. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB by touching the tip of the contact probe, and also to conduct an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB from the rear (back) side of the decorative board KB to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. In other words, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when electrically inspecting the decorative board KB. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, for example, Since the front (surface) of the decorative board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe must be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB. If this is possible, an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB can be performed as a malfunction test of the decorative board KB without performing any work to take out the decorative board KB.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (a type with a narrow illumination angle), they will appear as a point light source and become a collection of point light sources that will be visible to the player. There is a risk that it may cause a feeling of discomfort. For this reason, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so that the LEDs are not visually recognized by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED becomes larger (as the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected on multiple other members, causing the decorative board KB More and more people will come back. Therefore, if it is possible to reflect the light that has returned to the decorative board KB so that it can be emitted to the front of the decorative board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted By using the light emitting surface as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for light emitting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB includes a front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB, and a rear surface (back) formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB. A front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and a front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed thereon. Since the front (front) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white paint film) as an insulating coating and the reflection from the front (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, a white resist is coated as an insulating film over the entire outer circumferential portion of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. By keeping the copper foil exposed, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be kept small, and the reflectance by the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted can be made uniform. This makes it possible to contribute to uniformity.

In addition, the decorative board KB is made visible to the player by covering the entire outer periphery of the front land KRDx1 as an insulating film on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. In this case, since the proportion of the copper foil exposed on the front surface (surface) KBx of this decorative board KB can be reduced, the reflectance by the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform (uniform). This makes it possible to make the copper foil portion less noticeable and contribute to improving the light emitting effect of the decorative board KB.

Further, as described above, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, an inner lens is arranged which is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front (front) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. By adopting the structure of covering the lands of the through holes according to the first embodiment with an insulating film, the presence of the holes of the front (front surface) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can be improved. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shading of the solid white resist that is applied as the insulating film formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. You can enhance the performance effect by doing so.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the most visible object for the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative board that is movably arranged to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) is an insulator for the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. In the structure where the film is covered, by minimizing the portion of the land of the through-hole that is not covered with the insulating film, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). The effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole, etc. are enhanced. Also, in other places, for example, a player can place a decorative board in a place where it can be seen through an inner lens that has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. Even in the case where the land of the through-hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the reflectance on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). This has the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole. Note that among the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the reflectance on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect is high, such as the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable and the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. The outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the rear (back) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 281(c). In the rear (back) side resist layer KByr, a region corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. However, the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted is coated with white resist liquid as an insulating coating almost entirely. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, where no LED is mounted, is almost entirely covered with an insulating coating. A resist layer of a different color may be formed by a coating film of a different color that is formed by applying a resist solution of a color other than white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the first embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the process, but almost the entire surface of one or both of the front (front) surface KBx and rear surface (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB was coated with a white resist layer. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by printing a white paint using silk-screen printing as the insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one or both sides, markings indicating the part number of the electronic component and attributes of the electronic component that make it possible to identify the electronic component are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing using a paint having a color close to the brightness of white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as a pastel color. When forming the above-mentioned white silk printing layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or it may not be necessary to form a resist layer. When a resist layer is formed, a white paint is applied as an insulating coating by silk printing so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or a resist solution of another color different from white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first embodiment can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. When a black resist solution is used, as described above, by preventing the reflection of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the LEDs 1400ca disposed nearby can emit light. This can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with other light. For this reason, by covering the entire outer periphery of the land on the front (front) side of the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c with a black resist as an insulating film, the front (front) where the copper foil is exposed ( To contribute to uniformity (uniformity) of the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted by suppressing the area of the surface side land to reduce the reflectance. Can be done.

In addition, as mentioned above, a through-hole is a through-hole whose inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. There are through-holes that do not mount electronic components, and the land of both through-holes is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment. The structure of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film according to the first embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly below where electronic components are mounted. In other words, among the through-holes in which no electronic components are mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-hole provided directly below the electronic component may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part less noticeable in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is invisible. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for players to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes can be visually confirmed during the electrical inspection of the decorative board KB from the side where electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to electrically inspect the decorative board KB (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-3. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 282(a) and (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB ( A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are formed. By removing the copper foil from the foil surface, a front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and rear (back) side land are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the through hole. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB are electrically connected. At the same time, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered. ing.

The rear surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. At the same time, the other end of the wiring pattern on the rear (back side) side, a pad to which a specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and a specific terminal of the connector are soldered. It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Some have a first front (front) side wiring pattern and a second front (front) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB, and the second front One end of the (front) side wiring pattern will be electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB. The front (front) side wiring patterns (that is, the first front (front) side wiring pattern and the second front (front) side wiring pattern) are exposed. In addition, the wiring pattern on the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Some have a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the second rear surface One end of the (back) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) side KBy of the decorative board KB, and two wires are connected from the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are connected through a through hole KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear surface ( The back side wiring pattern, the front (front side) side land KRDx1 formed on the front side (front side) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear side (back side) formed on the rear side (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB. ) are electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a front (front) side resist layer KBxr. In the region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1, there is a layer having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the coating structure and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account a resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front (surface) side of the hole of through hole KTH1. ) side inner peripheral edge to resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent white resist liquid from intruding into the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB. A distance dimension is necessary, and in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is used. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. It is larger by 1.0 mm.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. In the area corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, there is a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. It is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. (ground) and are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr. An opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller and smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above is covered with an insulating film, and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra is formed with The outer periphery of KRDx1 except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention area (that is, the area extending from the inner periphery on the front (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 to a position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)) is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. As a result, from almost the inside of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB to the entire outer peripheral part (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB Since the area (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) can be covered with white resist as an insulating film, the exposed copper foil area becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. Therefore, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small compared to the structure in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. can.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. When applied, the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB should face vertically upward (the decorative board KB is actually made of multiple boards made from one copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed length). Because it is manufactured by arranging it and finally cutting it out, it is fixed in the manufacturing equipment so that the front side of the copper-clad laminate (base material) is facing vertically upward, and the white resist liquid is actually applied. Even when applied, the white resist liquid enters the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without blocking this hole.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 is connected from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB to the front (front) side land KRDx1. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB by touching the tip of the contact probe, and also to conduct an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB from the rear (back) side of the decorative board KB to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. In other words, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when electrically inspecting the decorative board KB. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, for example, Since the front (surface) of the decorative board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe must be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB. If this is possible, an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB can be performed as a malfunction test of the decorative board KB without performing any work to take out the decorative board KB.

By the way, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (a type with a narrow illumination angle), they will appear as a point light source and become a collection of point light sources that will be visible to the player. There is a risk that it may cause a feeling of discomfort. For this reason, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so that the LEDs are not visually recognized by the player as a point light source.

However, as the irradiation angle of the LED becomes larger (as the irradiation angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected on multiple other members, causing the decorative board KB. More and more people will come back. Therefore, if it is possible to reflect the light that has returned to the decorative board KB so that it can be emitted to the front of the decorative board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted can be used. By using the light emitting surface as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for light emitting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB includes a front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB, and a rear surface (back) formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB. A front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and a front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed thereon. Since the front (front) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white paint film) as an insulating coating and the reflection from the front (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the second embodiment, the insulation film is applied from almost the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB (that is, Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film over the front land KRDx1 on the front surface KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region, copper The area where the copper foil is exposed becomes a resist liquid intrusion prevention area, so that the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is smaller than the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. In the first implementation, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs is mounted is made uniform (uniform) by keeping it extremely small compared to the structure in which an insulating film is covered with the LEDs. Compared to a structure in which an insulating film is applied to the land of the through-hole according to the above configuration, it is possible to make a greater contribution.

Further, from almost the inside of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB to the entire outer circumferential portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB The decorative board KB is made visible to the player by being covered with a white resist as an insulating film (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). ) The ratio of exposed copper foil to KBx can be reduced, so by making the reflectance of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil part is less noticeable. This can contribute to improving the light emitting effect produced by the decorative board KB.

Further, as described above, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, an inner lens is arranged which is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front (front) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. By adopting the structure of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the presence of the holes of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is more easily controlled. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shading of the solid white resist that is applied as the insulating film formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. You can enhance the performance effect by doing so.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the most visible object for the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative board that is movably arranged to cover the upper side of the production display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) is an insulator for the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment. In the structure in which the film is covered, compared to the structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, by minimizing the portion of the land of the through hole that is not covered with the insulating film, it is possible to The effect of making the reflectance of the front (surface) of the decorative board on which it is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for players to notice. This effect will be enhanced. Also, in other places, for example, a player can place a decorative board in a place where it can be seen through an inner lens that has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. Even in the case where the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a plurality of LEDs can be mounted, compared to the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the first embodiment. The effect of making the reflectance of the front (surface) of the decorative board uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for players to notice. etc. Note that among the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the reflectance on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that there are high effects such as the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable and the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. The outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the rear (back side) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 282(c). In the rear (back) side resist layer KByr, a region corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. However, the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted is coated with white resist liquid as an insulating coating almost entirely. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, where no LED is mounted, is almost entirely covered with an insulating coating. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color that is formed by applying a resist liquid of a color other than white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the process, but almost the entire surface of one or both of the front (front) surface KBx and rear surface (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB was coated with a white resist layer. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by printing a white paint using silk-screen printing as the insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one or both sides, markings indicating the part number of the electronic component and attributes of the electronic component that make it possible to identify the electronic component are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing using a paint having a color close to the brightness of white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as a pastel color. When forming the above-mentioned white silk printing layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or it may not be necessary to form a resist layer. When a resist layer is formed, a white paint is applied as an insulating coating by silk printing so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or a resist solution of another color different from white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the second embodiment can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. When a black resist solution is used, as described above, by preventing the reflection of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the LEDs 1400ca disposed nearby can emit light. This can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with other light. Therefore, from almost the inside of the front (surface) side land on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (surface) side land on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c) Since the area (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) can be covered with black resist as an insulating film, the exposed copper foil area becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. Therefore, the area of the land on the front (surface) side where the copper foil is exposed is significantly reduced compared to the functional display board 1400c in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the first embodiment. The through-holes according to the first embodiment are used to reduce the reflectance by keeping it small and make the reflectance uniform (uniform) on the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted. This can contribute more than the functional display substrate 1400c which employs a structure in which the lands are covered with an insulating film.

In addition, as mentioned above, a through-hole is a through-hole whose inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. There are through holes that do not mount electronic components, and the land of both through holes is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment. However, among the through holes that do not mount electronic components, The structure of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film according to the second embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly below where electronic components are mounted. In other words, among the through-holes in which no electronic components are mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-hole provided directly below the electronic component may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part less noticeable in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is invisible. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for players to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes can be visually confirmed during the electrical inspection of the decorative board KB from the side where electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to electrically inspect the decorative board KB (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-4. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 283(a) and 283(b), A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are formed. By removing the copper foil from the foil surface, a front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and rear (back) side land are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the through hole. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Some have a first front (front) side wiring pattern and a second front (front) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB, and the second front One end of the (front) side wiring pattern will be electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB. The front (front) side wiring patterns (that is, the first front (front) side wiring pattern and the second front (front) side wiring pattern) are exposed. In addition, the wiring pattern on the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Some have a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the second rear surface One end of the (back) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) side KBy of the decorative board KB, and two wires are connected from the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB. At the same time, the other end of the wiring pattern on the rear (back) side, a pad to which a specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and a specific terminal of the connector are soldered. It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are connected through a through hole KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear surface ( The back side wiring pattern, the front (front side) side land KRDx1 formed on the front side (front side) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear side (back side) formed on the rear side (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB. ) are electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB, white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form the front (front) side resist layer KBxr, so the front (front) side resist A region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1 is also coated with a white resist liquid as an insulating film to form a front (front) side resist layer KBxr.

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . For this reason, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB, the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB should be oriented vertically upward. (Decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The board (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface is vertically upward, and the white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, and the white resist liquid enters the hole. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB dries by becoming depressed from the inner periphery on the front (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight. becomes.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. In the area corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, there is a rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1. It is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. (ground) and are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the region corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr is also covered with white resist as an insulating film. At the same time, white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front (surface) side, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire front land KRDx1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be covered with the white resist as an insulating coating. ) side land KNDx1 so that the copper foil is not exposed, and the conductive plating part applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole KTH1 is not exposed from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. It can be done. Also, since the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB is closed, light from the rear of the decorative board KB passes through the through hole KTH1 toward the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. can be prevented from proceeding.

By the way, if the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (a type with a narrow illumination angle), they will appear as a point light source and become a collection of point light sources that will be visible to the player. There is a risk that it may cause a feeling of discomfort. For this reason, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so that the LEDs are not visually recognized by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED becomes larger (as the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected on multiple other members, causing the decorative board KB More and more people will come back. Therefore, if it is possible to reflect the light that has returned to the decorative board KB so that it can be emitted to the front of the decorative board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted By using the light emitting surface as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for light emitting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB includes a front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB, and a rear surface (back) formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB. A front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and a front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed thereon. Since the front (front) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white paint film) as an insulating coating and the reflection from the front (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

In addition, when the player visually recognizes the holes of the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 formed on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 are The presence of holes may be an eyesore for players.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr. The area covered by the insulating film is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film, and the white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and blocks this hole. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

In addition, in the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a region of the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. , a decorative board that is visible to the player because the white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and blocks this hole. In KB, the proportion of exposed copper foil on the front (surface) KBx of this decorative board KB can be reduced (at least because the copper foil on the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is not exposed at all). By making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil portion can be made less noticeable and can contribute to improving the light emitting effect of the decorative board KB.

Further, as described above, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, an inner lens is arranged which is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front (front) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. By adopting the structure of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with an insulating film, the presence of the hole of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can be more easily controlled. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shading of the solid white resist that is applied as the insulating film formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. You can enhance the performance effect by doing so.

In addition, although the white resist liquid entered from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and blocked this hole, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB was The rear (back) side is open. In other words, the front (front) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is closed with white resist liquid, whereas the rear (back) side is open. This is because the white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, and air remains inside the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB. If the rear (back) side of through hole KTH1 is closed, liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside through hole KTH1, and this liquid may affect the conductivity inside through hole KTH1. Poor contact may occur due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because there is a risk that the through hole KTH1 may be electrically disconnected due to damage to the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1.

In addition, although there are holes for the front (front) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1, their existence can be hidden with white resist, so they are painted solidly on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. It is possible to make the front land (surface) side land KRDx1 less noticeable with respect to the white resist, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made less noticeable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 from becoming an eyesore for the player. Further, it is also possible to prevent the performance effect from being degraded due to the holes of the front land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 being visually recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

In addition, since each decorative board provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-back direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB may be Even if the LED emits light, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 because the hole in the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB is blocked with white resist. The color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB is different from the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB. By passing through the decorative board KB, it is possible to prevent the colors of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB from being mixed. Note that if another decorative board KB is not placed behind one decorative board KB, if the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB is not covered with white resist, the hole of the through hole KTH1 will be closed. looks like a black dot, so compared to the color of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the first decorative board KB, the black dot due to the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB. In other words, while black color is mixed, if the through-hole KTH1 of one decorative board KB is blocked with white resist, the area corresponding to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with white resist as an insulating film, so the hole of through-hole KTH1 gets mixed up (assimilated) with the white resist painted solidly on the front surface (surface) KBx of decorative board KB. It is possible to prevent color mixing due to the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB with respect to the colors emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decorative substrate KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the most visible object for the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative board that is movably arranged to cover the upper side of the production display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) is an insulator for the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment. In a structure in which a coating is applied, there is no part of the front (surface) of the decorative board that is not covered with the insulation coating for the land of the through-hole, and the hole of the through-hole is closed on the front (surface) side of the decorative board. This has the effect of making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform, the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the presence of through holes more visible. This increases the effect of making it difficult for people to understand. Also, in other places, for example, a player can place a decorative board in a place where it can be seen through an inner lens that has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. Even in some cases, the effect of making the reflectance uniform (uniform) on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the through hole hole This has the effect of making the existence more difficult for players to understand. Note that among the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the third embodiment, the reflectance on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that there are high effects such as the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable and the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB corresponds to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A rear (back) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 is formed in the area where the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. The outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the rear (back) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 283(c). In the rear (back) side resist layer KByr, a region corresponding to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 has an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (back) side land KRDy1. A rear surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. However, the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted is coated with white resist liquid as an insulating coating almost entirely. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, where no LED is mounted, is almost entirely covered with an insulating coating. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color that is formed by applying a resist liquid of a color other than white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is not mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB. ) KBy cannot be used as a reflective surface in the first place, so there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above; This is because KBy cannot efficiently utilize the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for light emission effects.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the process, but almost the entire surface of one or both of the front (front) surface KBx and rear surface (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB was coated with a white resist layer. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by printing a white paint using silk-screen printing as the insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one or both sides, markings indicating the part number of the electronic component and attributes of the electronic component that make it possible to identify the electronic component are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing using a paint having a color close to the brightness of white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as a pastel color. When forming the above-mentioned white silk printing layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or it may not be necessary to form a resist layer. When a resist layer is formed, a white paint is applied as an insulating coating by silk printing so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or a resist solution of another color different from white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the third embodiment can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. When a black resist solution is used, as described above, by preventing the reflection of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the LEDs 1400ca disposed nearby can emit light. This can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with other light. Therefore, on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, the area of the front surface (surface) side resist layer corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land is also covered with black resist as an insulating film. , the black resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the front (surface) side of the through-hole 1400cc of the functional display board 1400c and blocks this hole, reducing the reflectance and distributing the LEDs 1400cc. This can contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the function display board 1400c is mounted.

In addition, as mentioned above, a through-hole is a through-hole whose inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. There are through holes that do not mount electronic components, and the land of both through holes is covered with an insulating film according to the third embodiment, but among the through holes that do not mount electronic components, The structure of covering the lands of the through-holes with the insulating film according to the third embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly below where electronic components are mounted. In other words, among the through-holes in which no electronic components are mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-hole provided directly below the electronic component may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part less noticeable in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is invisible. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for players to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes can be visually confirmed during the electrical inspection of the decorative board KB from the side where electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to electrically inspect the decorative board KB (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-5. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with a land of a through hole according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 284(a) and 284(b), A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are formed. By removing the copper foil from the foil surface, a front (front) side land KRDx1 and a rear (back) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed, and the front (front) side wiring pattern and rear (back) side land are formed. ) side wiring pattern is formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the through hole. The outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are The diameter KTHD1 is the same size, and the outer diameter of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above is covered with an insulating film. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and one end of the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB are electrically connected. At the same time, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered. ing.

Note that the front (surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the front (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Some have a first front (front) side wiring pattern and a second front (front) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB, and the second front One end of the (front) side wiring pattern will be electrically connected to the front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB. The front (front) side wiring patterns (that is, the first front (front) side wiring pattern and the second front (front) side wiring pattern) are exposed. In addition, the wiring pattern on the rear surface (back surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Some have a first rear (back) side wiring pattern and a second rear (back) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (back surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the second rear surface One end of the (back) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) side KBy of the decorative board KB, and two wires are connected from the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The rear (back) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear (back) side wiring pattern and the second rear (back) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern formed on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB. At the same time, the other end of the wiring pattern on the rear (back) side, a pad to which a specific terminal of the IC that controls the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and a specific terminal of the connector are soldered. It is electrically connected to any pad such as a pad to be soldered.

The front (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear) surface KBy of the decorative board KB are connected through a through hole KTH1. , are in an electrically connected state, and the front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear surface ( The back side wiring pattern, the front (front side) side land KRDx1 formed on the front side (front side) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear side (back side) formed on the rear side (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB. ) are electrically connected via the side land KRDy1.

On the copper foil surface of the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a front (front) side resist layer KBxr. A front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1. . The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr. A region of the (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also coated with a white resist liquid as an insulating coating to form a rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr.

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards from one regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . For this reason, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB should face vertically upward. (Decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The plate (substrate) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that its rear surface faces vertically upward, and the white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB on the rear (back) side and fills this hole. It will be blocked. The white resist liquid that has entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB dries under its own weight in a depressed state from the inner periphery on the rear (back) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole. becomes.

Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. (ground) and are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in the region corresponding to the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (surface) side resist layer KBxr. Since the front (front) side resist opening KBxra having a smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front side is opened from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film. Further, on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a region of the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film. A white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the rear surface (back surface) side, and the hole is closed. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB can be covered with white resist as an insulating film, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be kept small, and light from the rear of the decorative board KB is prevented from passing through the through hole KTH1 toward the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. can do.

In addition, since the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, the front (front) side land KRDx1 is connected from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB to the front (front) side land KRDx1. It is possible to perform an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB by touching the tip of the contact probe, and also to conduct an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB from the rear (back) side of the decorative board KB to the rear (back) side land KRDy1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tips of the contact probes into contact with each other. In other words, the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the rear (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when electrically inspecting the decorative board KB. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, for example, Since the front (surface) of the decorative board KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe must be brought into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB. If this is possible, an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB can be performed as a malfunction test of the decorative board KB without performing work to take out the decorative board KB.

By the way, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (a type with a narrow illumination angle), they will appear as a point light source and become a collection of point light sources that will be visible to the player. There is a risk that it may cause a feeling of discomfort. For this reason, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large irradiation angle (a type with a wide irradiation angle) so that the LEDs are not visually recognized by the player as a point light source.

However, as the irradiation angle of the LED becomes larger (as the irradiation angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED is reflected on multiple other members, causing the decorative board KB. More and more people will come back. Therefore, if it is possible to reflect the light that has returned to the decorative board KB so that it can be emitted to the front of the decorative board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted can be used. By using the light emitting surface as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for light emitting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB includes a front (front) side wiring pattern formed on the front (front) surface KBx of the decorative board KB, and a rear surface (back) formed on the rear (back) surface KBy of the decorative board KB. A front (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating film on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and a front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is formed thereon. Since the front (front) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance due to the solid white resist (white paint film) as an insulating coating and the reflection from the front (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

In addition, when the player visually recognizes the holes of the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 formed on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, the front (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 are The presence of holes may be an eyesore for players.

Therefore, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist is coated as an insulating film over the entire outer peripheral portion of the front (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. At the same time, white resist liquid has entered from the inner periphery of the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB on the rear (back) side and has blocked the hole, causing multiple LEDs to This can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the mounted decorative board KB uniform (uniform).

In addition, the entire outer periphery of the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB is covered with a white resist. The white resist liquid enters from the inner periphery on the rear (back) side and blocks this hole, so that the front (front) side of the decorative board KB is visible to the player. ) The ratio of exposed copper foil to KBx can be reduced, so by making the reflectance of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (uniform), the copper foil part is less noticeable. This can contribute to improving the light emitting effect produced by the decorative board KB.

Further, as described above, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, an inner lens is arranged which is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front (front) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB. By adopting the structure of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the presence of the hole of the front surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can be more easily controlled. It can be difficult for people to understand. In addition, if there is a difference in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shading of the solid white resist that is applied as the insulating film formed on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, this difference can be suppressed by the inner lens. You can enhance the performance effect by doing so.

In addition, although the white resist liquid entered from the inner periphery of the rear (back) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and blocked this hole, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB was The front (surface) side is open. That is, the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is closed on the rear (back) side with white resist liquid, but is open on the front (front) side. This is because the white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB on the rear (back) side, and air remains inside the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB. If the front (surface) side of through hole KTH1 is closed, liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside through hole KTH1, and the conductivity inside through hole KTH1 may be affected by this liquid. Poor contact may occur due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied. This is because there is a risk that the through hole KTH1 may be electrically disconnected due to damage to the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the front (front) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 exist, the existence of the front (front) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the white resist on the front (surface) of the decorative board KB, and the through hole Since the existence of the hole KTH1 can be hidden by the white resist on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB, the presence of the hole KTH1 can be hidden by the white resist painted solidly on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. On the other hand, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made less noticeable, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made less noticeable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front (surface) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 from becoming an eyesore for the player. Further, it is also possible to prevent the performance effect from being degraded due to the holes of the front land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 being visually recognized by the player as a pattern or handle.

In addition, since each decorative board provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-back direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB may be Even if the LED emits light, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 because the hole in the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB is blocked with white resist. The color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB is different from the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB. By passing through the decorative board KB, it is possible to prevent the colors of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the other decorative board KB from being mixed. Note that if another decorative board KB is not placed behind one decorative board KB, if the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB is not covered with white resist, the hole of the through hole KTH1 will be closed. looks like a black dot, so compared to the color of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the first decorative board KB, the black dot due to the through hole KTH1 of the first decorative board KB. In other words, while black color is mixed, if the through hole KTH1 of one decorative board KB is blocked with white resist, the front surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is Since the entire outer periphery of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, the white resist with the hole of the through hole KTH1 covered and the front (front) side land KRDx1 Because it is placed close to the white resist that covers the entire outer periphery, the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be blended into the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. To prevent color mixing due to the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (surface) of one decorative board KB with respect to the colors emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of one decorative board KB. Can be done.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 is the most visible object for the player, the decorative board around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), and the decorative board that is movably arranged to cover the upper side of the production display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) is an insulator for the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment. In the coating structure, by minimizing the portion of the through-hole land that is not covered with the insulating coating, and by closing the through-hole hole on the rear (back) side of the decorative board, multiple LEDs can be The effect of making the reflectance of the front (surface) of the decorative board on which it is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for players to notice. This effect will be enhanced. Also, in other places, for example, a player can place a decorative board in a place where it can be seen through an inner lens that has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can refract light diffusely. Even in some cases, the effect of making the reflectance uniform (uniform) on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, and the effect of making the through hole hole This has the effect of making the existence more difficult for players to understand. Note that among the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is closer to the effect display device 1600 than each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, the reflectance on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect is high, such as the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable and the effect of making it more difficult for the player to notice the existence of the through hole.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) side corresponds to the land KRDx1 on the front surface (surface) side of the resist layer KBxr on the front surface (surface) side. A front (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 is formed in the area where the front (front) side land KRDx1 has an outer diameter KTHD1. The outer periphery of the front (front) land KRDx1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film from the outer periphery of the front land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front) land KRDx1, as shown in FIG. 284(b). In addition, in a region of the front (front) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front) side land KRDx1, there is a groove smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front) side land KRDx1 and further than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1. A front (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed which is small and has an opening diameter KBxrD2 larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account a resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front (surface) side of the hole of through hole KTH1. ) side inner peripheral edge to resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent white resist liquid from intruding into the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB. A distance dimension is necessary, and in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is used. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. It is larger by 1.0 mm.

As a result, from almost the inside of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB to the entire outer peripheral part (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB Since the area (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) can be covered with white resist as an insulating film, the exposed copper foil area becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. As a result, the area of the front (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. When coating, the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is vertically upward. Because it is manufactured by arranging it and finally cutting it out, it is fixed in the manufacturing equipment so that the front side of a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and the white resist solution is actually applied. Even when applied, the white resist liquid enters the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without blocking this hole.

Further, from almost the inside of the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB to the entire outer circumferential portion (that is, the front (front) side land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB By covering the area (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) with a white resist as an insulating film, the exposed copper foil becomes a resist liquid intrusion prevention area and becomes smaller. However, it is possible to conduct an electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB by touching the tip of the contact probe from the front (front) side of the decorative board KB to the front (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, the front (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when electrically inspecting the decorative board KB.For example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the decorative board Since the front (surface) of the KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (surface) side land KRDx1 from the front (surface) side of the decorative board KB. In this case, it is also possible to perform an electrical test (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative board KB as a malfunction test of the decorative board KB without performing any work to take out the decorative board KB. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating film almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. However, the color of the resist covering the entire outer peripheral part of the land of the decorative board KB and the color of the resist covering the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB are different. The color and may be different colors. For example, on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating film to almost the entire surface of the decorative board KB. The entire outer periphery of the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx is covered with a white resist as an insulating film, whereas the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB is coated almost entirely with white resist. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid as an insulating film, so that the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB can be closed with a black resist. can.

In addition, in the configuration in which the land of the through hole is coated with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist liquid is coated almost entirely on the front surface (front surface) KBx and rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB as an insulating film. A white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed by the process, but almost the entire surface of one or both of the front (front) surface KBx and rear surface (back) KBy of the decorative substrate KB was coated with a white resist layer. A white silk-printed layer may be formed by printing a white paint using silk-screen printing as the insulating coating. In this case, on the white silk-printed layer formed on one or both sides, markings indicating the part number of the electronic component and attributes of the electronic component that make it possible to identify the electronic component are printed with yellow paint. Printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing using a paint having a color close to the brightness of white (for example, light green, light blue, etc.) such as a pastel color. When forming the above-mentioned white silk printing layer on one side or both sides, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (in addition to the pad to which electronic components are soldered, the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area) ) may be formed, or it may not be necessary to form a resist layer. When a resist layer is formed, a white paint is applied as an insulating coating by silk printing so as to cover this resist layer. A white silk-printed layer is formed by the white coating film formed by printing. The resist layer may be a white resist solution, or a resist solution of another color different from white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display board 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. When a black resist solution is used, as described above, by preventing the reflection of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the LEDs 1400ca disposed nearby can emit light. This can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with other light. Therefore, the entire outer periphery of the land on the front (front) side of the front (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c is covered with a black resist as an insulating coating, and the through holes 1400cc of the functional display substrate 1400c are covered with black resist. The black resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the hole on the rear (back) side and blocks the hole, reducing the reflectance and reducing the front surface of the function display board 1400c on which a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted. (Surface) It can contribute to making the reflectance of 1400cx uniform (uniform).

In addition, as mentioned above, a through-hole is a through-hole whose inner peripheral wall is plated with copper and has conductivity. There are through holes that do not mount electronic components, and the land of both through holes is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment. However, among the through holes that do not mount electronic components, The structure of covering the land of the through-hole with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly below where electronic components are mounted. In other words, among the through-holes in which no electronic components are mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through-hole provided directly below the electronic component may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front (front) land KRDx1 on the front (front) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (back) land KRDy1 on the rear (back) KBy of the decorative board KB is exposed. do. Since the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire land of the through-hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil part less noticeable in the first place, and the existence of the through-hole hole is invisible. This is because there is no need to make it difficult for players to understand, and the presence of through-hole lands and through-hole holes can be visually confirmed during the electrical inspection of the decorative board KB from the side where electronic components are not mounted. It is also possible to electrically inspect the decorative board KB (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-6. Connector mounted on the rear (back side) of the decorative board]
Here, the connector mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB will be described with reference to FIG. 285. Figure 285 is a schematic diagram (a) of the rear (back) side of the decorative board on which a DIP type connector is mounted, and a schematic diagram (b) of the front (front) side, in which a surface mount (SMD) type connector is mounted. They are a schematic diagram (c) of the rear (back) side and a schematic diagram (d) of the front (front) side of the decorative board to be mounted. Note that the front (surface) of the connector will be described below as the surface mounted on the rear (back) of the decorative board KB.

[5-12-6a. DIP type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(a) and 285(b), various terminals (in this embodiment, there are four terminals) of the DIP type connector KCN, the first terminal: ground terminal, the second terminal: power supply terminal (for example, +12V), third terminal: assigned to data signal terminal 1 (for example, serial signal terminal), and fourth terminal: assigned to data signal terminal 2 (for example, clock signal terminal). Through-hole KTH (hereinafter simply referred to as "land KRD") has a land KRD into which a terminal is inserted and soldered. ), the through-hole KTH is formed in the base material KBo of the decorative board KB, and the copper foil surface of the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB are formed. Lands KRD each having a predetermined outer diameter are formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of KBy (in this embodiment, four through holes KTH are formed). In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are the same size. There is. One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

Although a resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the front (front) side KBx of the decorative board KB to form the above-mentioned front (front) side resist layer KBxr, the front (front) side resist layer KBxr is The resist liquid is not applied to the area corresponding to the land KRD, and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. Note that on the copper foil surface of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the resist solution may not be applied to an area larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed. In addition, although a resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr The resist liquid is not applied to the area corresponding to the land KRD, and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. Note that the resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decorative board KB has a single reverse insertion prevention through-hole KBa through which the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the DIP type connector KCN is inserted, and two connector mounting locking pieces provided on the DIP type connector KCN. KCNb (instead of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, two screws (or two rivets) for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative board KB may be used) are inserted. A through hole KBb is formed. The single reverse insertion prevention through-hole KBa and the two mounting through-holes KBb do not have copper plating applied to the inner circumferential walls of the through-holes described above, and the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. This hole is formed on the decorative substrate KB as a non-through hole having no land on the surface.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the DIP type connector KCN is placed on the front (surface) of the housing having an oblong rectangular shape, whereas the two connector reverse insertion prevention bosses provided on the DIP type connector KCN The connector attachment locking pieces KCNb are respectively arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having an oblong rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are made of the same resin as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, and have the same color.

To briefly explain the mounting of the DIP type connector KCN to the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the DIP type connector KCN is connected to the through hole KTH (four through holes KTH) from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Insert the various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN, and insert the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the housing of the DIP type connector KCN from the rear surface (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB to the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. and insert the two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN into the two mounting through holes KBb from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

Then, by pushing the rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy side of the decorative board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays within the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. (Incidentally, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may close the front surface (surface ) KBx.), the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb protrudes forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and ) KBx, and various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN protrude from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. In this state, various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are soldered from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB to the land KRD of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

As mentioned above, the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa, and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are the same color, and the color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color). , beige, cream), so when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. This blocks the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa and makes the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, but the tip of this connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is white. Or, due to the color being close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa has a circular shape having a white color or a color close to white, and a white resist is painted solidly on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. This can contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition, when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is directed forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Although the tip of the connector attachment locking piece KCNb protrudes and is locked with the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the tip of the connector installation locking piece KCNb is visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decoration board KB, the tip of this connector installation locking piece KCNb is Since the color of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb is the same as that of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, the color is white or close to white, so that the connector mounting locking piece KCNb and its tip are painted solidly on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. The presence of the through hole can contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the presence of the through hole can be This has the effect of making it difficult to understand. In addition, even if there is a through hole in which no electronic components are mounted on the part of the board facing the housing of the connector mounting part, the same effect as that of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa described above can be obtained, and the reflectance can be reduced. This can contribute to uniformity (uniformity) and also has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the through hole.

In addition, if the DIP type connector KCN is not provided with the above-mentioned connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa, and the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the reverse insertion prevention will be prevented. Since there is nothing blocking the inside of the through hole KBa, the front (surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. Since the color of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is white or a color close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or a color close to white, which is the same color as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN. The insertion prevention through-hole KBa has a circular shape having a white color or a color close to white and blends into the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and multiple LEDs are mounted. This can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform).

Regarding the configuration of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which the DIP type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285(a) and 285(b) is mounted, the DIP type When the connector 1400cb is mounted, it can be applied to the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. In this way, the housing of the DIP type connector 1400cb and the boss for preventing reverse insertion of the connector are the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss remains in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed on the function display board 1400c. Although the through-hole for preventing reverse insertion is blocked with the connector and the tip of the boss for preventing reverse insertion is visible from the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the tip of the boss for preventing reverse connector insertion is black or nearly black. Due to the color, the reverse insertion prevention through-hole KBa becomes black or a circular shape with a color close to black, and blends into the black resist painted solidly on the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c. , it is possible to reduce the reflectance and contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted.

The decorative board KB has two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided on the DIP type connector KCN (instead of the connector mounting locking pieces KCNb, there are two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative board KB). The two mounting through-holes KBb into which two screws (or two rivets) are inserted were formed as non-through holes, but the inner peripheral wall of the through-holes was copper plated. It may also be formed as a conductive through hole and fixed by soldering. In this case, the two connector attachment locking pieces KCNb are made of metal. The land of the through hole is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB. By soldering and fixing the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb to the decorative board KB, the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb and the board ground (GND) of the decorative board KB (that is, The solid ground) is electrically connected to the DIP type connector KCN, and the noise that enters the DIP type connector KCN can be released to the board ground (GND) of the decorative board KB (that is, the solid ground), improving noise resistance. can contribute to Instead of the two metal connector attachment locking pieces KCNb, two metal screws or two metal rivets for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative board KB may be used. In this case as well, by fixing two metal screws or two metal rivets to the decorative board KB, the two metal screws or two metal rivets and the decorative board KB is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) of the decorative board KB, and the noise that enters the DIP type connector KCN is released to the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) of the decorative board KB. This can contribute to improving noise resistance.

[5-12-6b. Surface mount type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(c) and (d), various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN (in this embodiment, there are four terminals, the first terminal: ground terminal, the second terminal: power supply terminal (for example, +12V), third terminal: data signal terminal 1 (for example, serial signal terminal), fourth terminal: data signal terminal 2 (for example, clock signal terminal). The pad KSP to which the pad KSP (not limited to this) to which the terminals can be soldered (in order to further allocate multiple power supply terminals and multiple data trust terminals) is a copper foil on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. By removing the copper foil from the surface, each pad is formed into a predetermined rectangular shape (in this embodiment, four pads KSP are formed). One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad KSP formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In addition, a metal connector fixing part (in this embodiment, two metal connector fixing parts are provided on the housing) that fixes the housing of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN to the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. The fixing pads KSPF to which the fixed pads KSPF (formed in FIG. , two fixed pads KSPF are formed). Although not shown, the four corners of the fixed pad KSPF around the fixed pad KSPF are decorated with a cross-shaped pattern by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. A thermal pattern is provided to be electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the board KB. This thermal pattern allows the heat that melts the solder when soldering the metal connector fixing part provided on the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the fixing pad KSPF on the rear surface (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB to the fixing pad KSPF. It is possible to prevent it from being taken away from the outer periphery.

On the copper foil surface of the front (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, a resist liquid is applied to a region corresponding to the pad KSP to form the above-mentioned front (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. In addition, although a resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (back surface) side resist layer KByr The resist liquid is not applied to the area corresponding to the pad KSP, and the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed. Note that on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the resist solution may not be applied to an area larger than the outer shape of the pad KSP. In this case, the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed, and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

A single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is formed in the decorative board KB, into which a connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN is inserted.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN is arranged on the front (surface) of the housing having an oblong rectangular shape, whereas the single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN The two metal connector fixing parts are respectively arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing, which has an oblong rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is made of the same resin as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN, and has the same color.

To briefly explain the mounting of the surface mount type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the pad KSP (four pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Metal connector fixing provided on the housing of surface mount type connector KCN for various terminals (four terminals) of connector KCN and fixing pad KSPF (two fixing pads KSPF) on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of decorative board KB. (two metal connector fixing parts), and insert the connector provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN from the rear surface (back side) KBy of the decorative board KB into the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. Insert the prevention boss KCNa.

Then, by pushing the rear surface (back surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN toward the rear surface (back surface) KBy side of the decorative board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays within the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed (note that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may protrude forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may close to the decorative board KB). (The front surface (front surface) of the KBx may be flush with the KBx). In this state, solder the pads KSP (four pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to the various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN, and also solder the pads KSP (four pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. The fixing pad KSPF (two fixing pads KSPF) and the metal connector fixing part (two metal connector fixing parts) provided on the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN are soldered.

As mentioned above, the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa are the same color, and the color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream). ), when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays within the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa to prevent reverse insertion. Although the through hole KBa is blocked and the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa becomes visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or a color close to white. This can contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

Note that if the surface mount type connector KCN is not provided with the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa described above, when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the reverse Since there is nothing blocking the inside of the insertion prevention through hole KBa, the front (surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is visible from the front (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. However, since the color of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is white or a color close to white, the through hole KBa for preventing reverse insertion is also white or white as the color of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. The colors are similar and can contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) on the front surface (surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The configuration of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285(c) and 285(d) is mounted is based on the function display unit of the game board 5 described above. When a surface mount (SMD) type connector 1400cb is mounted on the 1400, it can be applied to the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. In this way, the housing of the surface mount type connector 1400cb and the boss to prevent reverse connector insertion are the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss remains in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed on the function display board 1400c. Although this blocks the reverse insertion prevention through hole and makes the tip of the reverse insertion prevention through hole visible from the front (surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, the tip of this reverse insertion prevention through hole is black or black. By having similar colors, it is possible to reduce the reflectance and contribute to making the reflectance uniform (uniform) by the front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted.

Incidentally, a game machine including a game board provided with a light emitting means such as a board lamp has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). Incidentally, the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted is required to be able to efficiently reflect the light emitted by the light emitting means.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which a display device is provided at the lower right portion of the gaming board have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the display board of a display device, when the light emitted by the light emitting means is reflected on the surface of the display substrate, the color of the light emitted by one light emitting means differs from that of the other light emitting means. There is a problem in that the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means (the light emitted by one light emitting means and the other light emitting means becomes disturbance light) is mixed and difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, conventionally, game boards equipped with light emitting means such as board lamps, main control boards that control game progress and gaming profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed as games progress, etc. A gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraphs [0023], [0051], FIGS. 2 and 5)). By the way, the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted may have through-holes formed by routing the wiring pattern, so there is a risk that the presence of these through-holes will be visible to the player, reducing the performance effect. Ta.

[6. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115, 130, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more clockwise the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The speed of the ball B flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn that generates a winning result.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 A plurality of guide passages 2521 or 2522 of the passage group 2520 are discharged above the gate part 2003, and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate part 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, there is a certain probability that the object passes through the gate section 2003.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first guide path 2521 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not hit the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the ball B, it will enter the second guide path 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide path 2522 than through the first guide path 2521. Further, the configuration is such that when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521, the flow passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit The second starting port 2004, which is closed at 2400, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 600 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in normal times (non-time saving state), and in the time saving state (600 seconds). In the short time state), the time is changed to a short time. As a result, the normal lottery results are frequently derived during the time saving period (time saving state), and as a result, the second starting port 2004 is frequently brought into the open state. In this way, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened during time saving (time saving state), so a game aiming at the ball entering the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting") is prohibited. I will do it.

Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of normal lottery results that can be held is set to four, and for more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game balls B are accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received into the second sub-out port 2012, it is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be received into the second large winning hole 2006, the second starting hole 2004, or the first large winning hole 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate part 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and is received by the general winning hole 2001, the second big winning hole 2006, and the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity for it to be accepted into the starting hole 2004 or the first big winning hole 2005, and it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the gaming area 5a, so that the second sub-out port 2012 is not provided to the player. It is possible to encourage a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, rather than "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the stop portion 1006, it is possible to encourage a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which is mainly based on.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the central accessory 2500, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, when game balls B are accepted into the second big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big prize opening 2006 is placed between the first shelf 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, with the upper left side After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and enters the gaming area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate part 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door is opened. When the game ball 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "win" is held.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big prize opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the first big prize opening 2005 will open and close in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Then, the game ball B becomes ready to be accepted. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, when game balls B are received in the first big prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept the game balls B when the first big prize opening 2005 is ready to accept the game balls B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, thereby encouraging the player. Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn that will generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time reduction (time saving) win."Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn will be It is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). Note that the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 to win the lottery. The special lottery results include “Lose”, “Small hit”, “2R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “15R jackpot”, “Probability change (probability change) win”, “Time saving (time reduction) win”, “ There are "variable time saving winnings", "probable variable time saving winnings", "second jackpot", etc.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the second big prize opening 2006 is kept open to accept the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after the opening is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", after the first jackpot opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first jackpot When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is (referred to as a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot", after the first big prize opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Generate time). This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation section 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. using the right effect unit 3800, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is requested, when the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[7. Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 207 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 208 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In addition, in FIG. 207, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from the top, it has been omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and A liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the base body 1502 and a base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 at predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various boards installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 have peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing images to the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having about two-thirds of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side, and is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are located in the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining approximately one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is arranged at the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later. connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground. (GND). Note that the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the cover body 1501 has an oblong rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (thickness: 2 mm) on the top and left sides. Cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively protruded toward the rear (toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 1) on the bottom side and the right side, thereby forming a box shape with an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is equipped with an air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly to the upper right of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center point is the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, there are predetermined cylindrical holes inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. Note that by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally taking out various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the cover flat plate 1501a near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and installed, the front side surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, screw a metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN does not pop out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is now possible to prevent this.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there is a gap (with a predetermined distance) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

Note that the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring draw-out recess 1501ab is formed in a position where the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume adjustment switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed, almost horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) in the connector recess. 1501ac is placed at a position lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position where the distance is longer than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. They are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has 1 position along its lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector recess 1501ad as a closed horizontally long rectangular area is lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. Each of them will be exposed.

Further, when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front, a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side thereof at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af for attaching a wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae is larger than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position where the distance is shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 1503a with a predetermined height (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and a mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front side surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and also connects a flexible flat cable (FFC) to be connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable.A flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wires from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outwardly at the upper and lower sides with a predetermined interval in the center. At the same time, a hinge hook 1501cc is arranged above the guide section 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd is arranged below the guide section 1501cb and projects outward. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda that protrude forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside the side end faces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. has been done. The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the surface of the copper foil is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is 1520r1 and 1520r3 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, The seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at the position. ing. The four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and then attach the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal The bearing surfaces of the pan head screws made by the manufacturer are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the side end surfaces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is arranged between the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

In this manner, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 2.3 mm). is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, lower right side, lower left side, and left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, thereby improving peripheral control. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected to each other. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the air is taken in from the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501). A gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501, and a gap formed between the liquid crystal output board 1530. It will be taken in through the gap formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the cover body 1501 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510) , the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. It is smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are This allows the flow velocity of air flowing into each to be kept low.

Note that when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks in air through the blades and causes the air to flow into the surrounding area. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the upper side of the base flat plate 1502a has a horizontally long rectangular shape; Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side to protrude toward the front (back side of the Pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape with an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When they fit together, they become inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned at a predetermined interval along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (in other words, the peripheral control board Each terminal of connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 may warp due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals. Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent electrical wiring patterns formed on the control board 1510 from being broken.

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca that protrudes outward is formed on the left base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab at positions corresponding to plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving parts 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag parts 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted as described above. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. By turning it around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked onto the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. It is now possible to engage.

Further, a base side sealing portion 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the right side base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to a cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes the peripheral control section 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control section 1512 (functions of various ROMs). ), and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while waiting for players), and various schedule data that regulate the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b (including the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) that stores in advance the peripheral data stored in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 SDRAM 1510c is composed of SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in ROM 1520a can be transferred and stored; A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power generation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. We are prepared. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). t) Communication, etc.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side are used. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to connect the electric drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and the door frame. Drive data is sent to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via connector CN3) provided on the game board 5 side. Emission data is transmitted to the LED control IC for the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided for the door frame 3 (communicating via the connector CN7) and the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (communicating via the connector CN3). , receive signals from various sensors installed on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, or receive signals from various sensors installed on the door frame 3 side (communicating via connector CN3). (communicating)) as detected data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various types of parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotational state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), Signals from various sensors that confirm the operation and origin position of controlled objects (not shown) are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 are input from GPIO (via connector CN6). A signal is output from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in accordance with the SATA standard, achieving a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , and can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. We are prepared. The front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of multiple types of video signals. The multiple types of video signal formats include, for example, the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) format, the eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) format, and the clockless format. , four systems (total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, a peripheral control board that adopts eDP method instead of MIPI method, has one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system of eDP system. 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there is further an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface 635. The LED ML1 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +5V is being supplied, and is maintained in a lighting state in the state in which +5V is being supplied. The LED ML2 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +12V is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +12V is being supplied. The LED ML3 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +24V is being supplied, and is maintained in a lighting state in the state in which +24V is being supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1, SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism, and is similar to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug fit together. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are structured so that when they are fitted together, there is no vertical movement at all when viewing the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 from the front.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are plugs. (Mounting surface) Each of the special connectors SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and plug are connected. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will not touch the flat cover plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the special connector SCN3.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are connected. Fit together. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1 The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the device. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 will be the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 was adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various types of control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (functions of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512, etc.). ). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided for the door frame 3 and game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs etc. installed in multiple units, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., and door frame 3 and game board 5. Examples include drive data for driving and controlling the various movable performance bodies provided.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, which is cheaper than a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize high transfer speed through communication based on the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to reduce costs, reduce power consumption, and read out various stored data at high transfer speeds. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing in the plug of special connector SCN1 provided for 1510x, it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 together with peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a can be absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when connecting the plug and socket, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be improved. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs, from the connector CN10, the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, to the performance display device 1600 to inform the progress of the game performance (for example, to the player). An image that conveys that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image that tells that a jackpot gaming state will not occur, a state that a jackpot gaming state will not occur but a jackpot gaming state will occur compared to the normal state. This is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey that the player is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration performances that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 equipped with a floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the front-back direction that occur during the process, damage to the plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably established. can be formed.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to each other. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is possible to arrange the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 against the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be made smaller. This can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging electrical drive sources and drive mechanisms that can be used, as well as various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[7-4. How to assemble peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( Mounting surface) 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Next, insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and screw them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form the cover flat plate 1501a on the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are filled with metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting pan head screws made by the manufacturer and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a last.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining its movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining in the vertical and horizontal directions. No protrusion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral control board 1510 is restrained in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional errors caused by such restraints are eliminated. When fixing to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a have dimensional dimensions, respectively. This is because the company is able to absorb this amount with ample margin.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are Insert into the guide receiving parts 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502, and insert the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 into the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. When the base body 1502 is wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501, a metal (not shown) A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted therein is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base-side sealing part 1502ea, thereby forming a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea, which is attached to the base side sealing portion 1502ea, is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the wafer are brought into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become electrically connected. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the structure is such that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505. is enhanced.

Next, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are inserted through the wiring draw-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the drawer and attachment holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively.

Next, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the production display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wire pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is assembled by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. 1503 is fixed in the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wires are covered by the wire cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 Insert the engaging portion 1502ca side formed in the game panel 1100 into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various boards into the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed in the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side.) At the same time, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when looking at the cover body 1501 from the back side), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) Insert the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Insert and push the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then move the peripheral control board 1510 to the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the cover). When the body 1501 is viewed from the back, the cover body 1501 can be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501). Even in the installation procedure of these various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 that are equipped with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the errors in the front and back direction that occur when pushing in are absorbed, and the plug and socket can be easily connected. It is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the board, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are multiple types of game boards installed in pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores data according to the game specifications of the game board. By storing peripheral data corresponding to the board, the board is dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that is dependent on the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is not dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and thus becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused. Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the inter-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are multiple types of video signal formats input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI format, the eDP format, and the clockless format. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In this embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Since this is adopted, a liquid crystal output board 1530 compatible with the video signal format (LVDS format) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards), and the noise is removed. (Hereinafter, this may be referred to as "the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of various types of substrates.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the flat cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, these plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of being able to confirm whether or not there is any tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, from multiple angles. In order to be able to check the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the outside, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML1 disposed near the control ROM 1510b is designed to remain lit when +5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Although it has the function of confirming (monitoring) the status of +5V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins can be closely monitored. This can contribute to improved visibility.

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Furthermore, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, In other words, the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the IC pins are arranged in a large area so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be seen from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML3 placed near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state when +24V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Originally, it has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +24V being supplied, but the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x, the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 The special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector.

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) has a larger area. They are distributed and arranged so that This allows modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, since the LED ML4 placed near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, it is originally used to check (monitor) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to improving sexual performance.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with product numbers and The SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 is designed so that the model and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually confirmed, that is, the surface and the status of the IC pin of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state when +12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +12V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM1510c (that is, SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2) and the condition of the IC pins.

Also, among the multiple blades that make up the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gaps between the blades (specifically, the gaps between the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN) From this, the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not an unauthorized board is placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In this embodiment, LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface-mount type, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and of a type with weak directivity. It is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting up LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, which faces the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and its surroundings. Reflecting parts (not shown) are respectively formed to reflect the light and direct it again to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective parts (not shown) may be made of a brightly colored paint such as white, or may be a glossy colored paint, or may be pasted with a glossy metal sheet.

In addition, near the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so the ball path formed by these When the game balls rub against each other, they become charged and generate electrostatic discharge, which becomes a source of noise. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Furthermore, since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and may be affected by the noise. As described above, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data A configuration was adopted in which the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). This prevents noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Noise can be removed by flowing it to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[7-5. Some foil removed from solid ground]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND) except for areas where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid ground (board ground) (also referred to as "solid ground"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is also formed as a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. It is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid ground"), in which the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as those on the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes (holes (copper By being electrically connected through the plated holes), they are connected to the same ground (GND).

Furthermore, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a is spaced at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front, and does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 protrudes from the back side (solder side) 1510y, so it does not interfere with the protruding terminals). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are respectively formed to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from breaking.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are in a sealed state, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and become inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 The front surface of ~1502aa3 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards), and the noise is removed. It is now possible to do so.

Incidentally, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A solid ground was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this abutting part, and the solid ground was covered with a resist. One is to form a solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board 1510 and cover it with a resist, and the other is to form a solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at this abutting part and cover it with a resist. When tested, it was found that the noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this contact area was covered with resist without forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic noise enters through such unexpected routes, electronic components that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns that are electrically connected to these electronic components are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection. If the front surfaces of portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portion that abuts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

Furthermore, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with which of the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the breakage will occur, it is difficult to place electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to the electronic components away from a particular disconnection prevention rib.

Note that when a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid gland are in contact with each other through a resist, high voltage due to electromagnetic noise that has entered the base body 1502 may be applied to the contact portion to infiltrate the brand. It is considered that unnecessary loop wiring is formed in which electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the Betaglan.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the ground will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the part where the front side of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. (a) is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and are similar to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 209(a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are such that a vertically long rectangular foil-cutting area 1510ya having a horizontal distance dgw and a vertical distance dgh is located on the copper foil surface. They are formed at 1510 yp. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, there is formed an area where part of the beta gran is foiled (removed).

These foil-cut areas 1510ya have a distance dg0 between the left side and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. each formed. The length of the distance dg0 between the left side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the left side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg0 between the left side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the left side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately 3.0 times longer than the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

Furthermore, the distance dg1 between the right side and the right side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. They are each formed separately. The length of the distance dg1 between the right side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg1 between the right side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately 3.0 times as long as the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

In addition, the distance dg2 between the upper side and the upper side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. They are each formed separately. The length of the distance dg2 between the upper side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the upper side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg2 between the upper side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the upper side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately twice to 3.0 times the length of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

That is, by forming the foil-cut area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil-cut area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. Note that a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board that corresponds to the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, and the foil removal area 1510ya and No foil-cutting areas of the same shape are formed at all.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and there are When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and connected to the same ground (GND). GND). Therefore, in this embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 to the peripheral control via the foil cutout area 1510ya. A "noise-proof route" is formed that cannot enter the solid ground on the back side (solder side) 1510y of the board, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is Noise can be removed by forming a "noise route" that flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via the metal pan-head screw.

[7-6. Reuse of peripheral control boards]
As mentioned above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is also a board that is not dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused.

As described above, the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular copper foil for soldering (so-called " On the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the peripheral control board 1510 is The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to secure the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it in toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the seat surface of the pan section (the seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw.

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw (seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal using metal pan-head screws. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 may rub against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 and peel off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 may The screw may rub against the seat surface of the screw pan (the seat surface of the head) and be peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 or the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foil on the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, it will oxidize and deteriorate electrical connectivity, making it difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510. The problem is that it is difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have Each piece is soldered to prevent the copper foil from being exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. Covered to allow connection. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the copper foil portions on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to improve the electrical connectivity when the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and to prevent soldering. Electrical connection occurs when the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw (seat surface of the head) due to the viscosity of properties can be improved.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 can be transmitted to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal pan-head screws. ), the above-mentioned "noise escape route" is reliably formed, so that the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. , each is soldered so that the copper foil on its surface is not exposed. As mentioned above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the solder thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised part of the solder), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw may There is a problem in that the contact area decreases and electrical connectivity deteriorates. Furthermore, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Because of the contact, if the thickness of soldering to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised part of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 The contact area between the side lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a decreases, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. Note that if the thickness of soldering to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a part where the solder bulges), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 will be damaged. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, insert metal pan head screws into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This will cause distortion of the control board 1510, and may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, which is in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw, is attached to the peripheral control board 1510. Place a metal mask on the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula), and apply it from the hole formed in the metal mask. By placing the back side (solder side) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness of the soldering to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. I can do it. Also, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is For foil, a metal mask is formed by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). By applying the solder paste through the holes and placing the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be adjusted. The thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[7-7. Modified example]
In the present embodiment described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have The copper foils were soldered to each other so that they would not be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side may be covered with a resist solution. The surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with copper foil when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. Ru. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and are inserted toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screw. It can be a state. Also, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is By applying and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into ~1510r4 and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste was applied through a hole formed in a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) may be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is made so that the soldering does not bulge in some parts. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is poured into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 210(b), and a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes each having a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and as shown in FIG. 210(c), the resist has a vertical line having a predetermined width. and horizontal lines (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width ), as shown in FIG. 210(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and are upward-sloping to the right. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed in a diagonal shape (the resist may be in a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width are formed in a diagonal shape with a predetermined distance apart and downward to the right), a small circular shape (not shown), Examples include aggregated shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made uniform so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The process may also be performed on the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is coated so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Further, in the embodiment described above, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In the embodiment described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the cover 1501 made of conductive resin, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with each other. ~1510rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw are in contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screw. However, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The cover 1501 made of resin may be replaced with a cover 1501' made of metal. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

Note that an amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air through the metal board box. Furthermore, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air through the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box consisting of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the case. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of When the land and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case come into contact with each other, , the multiple lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal The metal cover body or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal pan-head screw, thereby efficiently dissipating the heat to the outside air. You can also do that.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via metal pan-head screws. Therefore, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used on a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, multiple lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) on the parent board. By screwing the and multiple lands of the child board at both ends of the metal support (spacer), electricity can be transmitted through the multiple lands of the parent board, the multiple lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). can be connected to each other. This allows the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board to be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 was housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 housing the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are also housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin. When the payout control board box 632 is configured to be made of conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations, and therefore, those made of conductive resin are used. Although it is not possible to do so, the board box that accommodates the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that accommodate various relay boards are configured to be made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. They may be fixed using the same method. In this way, the same noise suppression effect as the above-mentioned peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be achieved for the board box that accommodates the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that accommodate the various relay boards. can.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 3, near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500. An inter-board connector consisting of the special connector SCN1 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and an inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to a ball tank. By arranging it closer to the center of the tank rail 552, it can be placed away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 allows the metal powder of the game ball B to be transferred to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed on its lower side (the lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front). By arranging the above-mentioned inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B at the above-mentioned inter-board connector. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the inter-board connector is formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN4 is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). 1500 is installed, as shown in Figure 206, the area above the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it vertically long, so dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. The area of adhesion can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area above the board-to-board connector increases, so the area to which dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. can adhere increases significantly. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left and right direction, as shown in FIG. 206, and the top surface area of each connector is However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is Even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, in order to prevent dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. from adhering to each electrical terminal, the direction in which the inter-board connectors are arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, as described above, are determined. is selected.

In the above embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a special connector (or socket), and the peripheral control board 1510 is also equipped with a special connector (or plug) corresponding to the socket. A special connector) can be provided. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, multiple types of video signal formats are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, so the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a special connector that becomes a plug (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is equipped with a special connector that becomes a socket (or a special connector that becomes a plug). special connectors).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or in combination in any of the holes 1501e, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) does not fall into the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling onto various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 will be connected to the peripheral control board box 1505 through this ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters into the interior of the peripheral control board box 1505, causing electrical damage caused by the foreign matter falling to various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the top side of the cover 1501e. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, lower side, and right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. Note that the reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) falls into the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles will occur due to foreign objects.

[8. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. has been done. The main control board 1310 is capable of controlling gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the performance, and includes a peripheral control section 1511 that can control various performances during the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control section The effect display control section 1512 is capable of controlling the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the effect display device 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B, etc., and a launch control unit 633b that can control the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. There is.

[8-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that can control the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The surface opposite to the front side of the main control board 1310 facing the rear surface (that is, the rear surface) may be referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game has a green coating film (hereinafter referred to as "green paint film") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface), although detailed illustrations are omitted. ) forms a green resist layer and controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, as well as when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs such as a main control program that controls game operations that will be executed later, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various sensors. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of power outage or instantaneous power outage in the main control MPU 1310a; It is equipped with Note that the main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided in the main control board 1310.

The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a RAM clear switch 1310f, various connectors, etc. A through-hole with a land on the mounting surface into which the constituent DIP type electronic components are mounted and through which various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted, and a through hole with a land on the mounting surface through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted. A hole is formed, and a green resist layer is formed with a solid green resist over the entire area except for the land on the mounting surface side and the through hole. Furthermore, on the back side (solder side) of the main control board 1310, solder side lands corresponding to the through holes are formed, and a solid green resist is applied to the entire area excluding the solder side lands and through holes. A green resist layer is formed. The land on the mounting surface, the through hole, and the land on the solder surface are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the solder surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the solder side wiring pattern. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 into through holes having lands on the mounting surface side, the back surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the inserted through holes is inserted. The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the main control board 1310 by soldering the protruding various terminal pins and the solder surface land. The state will be as follows. In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (that is, a green resist layer formed by a solid green resist). However, the land on the mounting side, the through hole, and the land on the soldering side are not covered with green paint at all. There are multiple rows of game balls installed across from each other, and the game balls are polished and heated to a high temperature, which is then supplied to the pachinko machine 1.The heat emitted from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to the game balls, which create a closed space called an island facility. In order to prevent the main control board 1310, which is an important board that controls the progress of the game, from being affected by heat and going out of control due to the high internal temperature, the lands, through holes, and solder on the mounting side are The copper foil portion of the surface-side land is exposed.This can improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the main control board 1310 and contribute to preventing thermal runaway of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. After extracting all the values, extract one value within the predetermined numerical range again, and quickly extract the other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch 1310f, attributes of the surface side electronic components such as the part number of the surface side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface side electronic components are placed (and , may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) The front side markings are green. It is a white paint that is easily noticeable against the background, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, so it is placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player. Further, the RAM clear switch 1310f included in the main control board 1310 is also arranged in a position where it is difficult for the player to see because the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b receives various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground of the main control board 1310), and various signals are externally connected to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with various signals for output to the board, etc., and a reset function that does not have a reset terminal. It consists of a main control output circuit without a reset function, and a main control output circuit without a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, when the main control output circuit with reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by resetting the main control system, the main control output circuit with a reset function outputs signals based on that information. is configured as a circuit in which no output is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, in a main control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the signals based on that information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

The first starting port sensor 3052 detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, the gate sensor 2801 detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A second starting hole sensor 2401 detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, a general winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the first big winning hole 2005, and a first big winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the first big winning hole 2005. Mouth sensor 2402, second big winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second big winning hole 2006, out hole sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B accepted in the out hole 2010, first sub out hole A first sub-outlet sensor 2403 detects the game ball B received in the second sub-outlet 2011, a second sub-outlet sensor 3054 detects the game ball B accepted in the second sub-outlet 2012, and detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. to be detected are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby causing the main control output circuit with a reset function to drive the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, a drive signal can be outputted from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., and the drive signal can be output to a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, and first special The respective drive signals are output to the symbol display, the first special reservation number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reservation number display, the round display, etc.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that the payout control board 633 By outputting various information related to the game (gaming information) and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, the main control with reset function can be activated. A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are non-operating. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and Detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters the ball frequently. , Detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big prize winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since game balls B do not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches that have a shorter lifespan than proximity switches. is used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without a reset function, so that the main control output circuit without a reset function sends various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633. Send various commands as serial data to the When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. Various commands are sent as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages (+24 VDC, +12 VDC, and +5 VDC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored in the RAM clear switch 1310f when the push operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f on the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, an operation signal ( RAM clear signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and this is used as a trigger to completely erase (clear) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. It looks like this. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without a reset function, and is also output from the main control output circuit without a reset function to the payout control board 633.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V DC and +24V DC from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of power outage or momentary power outage of +12V DC and +24V DC. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V DC and +24V DC, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is sent to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to the input terminal, main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. is input. In addition, the power outage notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600 in addition to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and is further transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame 3 via the interface board 635. The information is input to various boards etc. attached to the . Note that the power outage warning signal may be configured so that it is not input to each of the various boards attached to the door frame 3.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e applies power to two power lines: a power line to which +12V DC is supplied (+12V power line) and a power line to which +24V DC is supplied (+24V power line). By monitoring each voltage, signs of power outages such as power outages or instantaneous power outages can be grasped more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. is now possible.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is provided on the main control board 1310 as described above, and is supplied with +12V DC and +24V DC from the power supply board 630. Since signs of +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage are monitored, it may be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630 instead of the main control board 1310. In this way, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e does not need to be provided on the main control board 1310, so the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is not required every time the game board 5 is manufactured, which can contribute to cost reduction of the game board 5.

[8-2. Payout control board]
In addition to controlling the payout of game balls B, the payout control board 633 that controls the firing and ball feeding of game balls B is a payout control board that is removably attached to the rear side of the transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. It is housed in the board box 632, and for the purpose of explanation, the surface opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front (that is, the surface that is the rear side) is shown. It may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633" on which electronic components are mounted. The payout control board 633 that controls the payout etc. of the game balls B has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid coating") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). A green resist layer is formed by a dispensing control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding dispensing, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs firing control. An error canceling device having a firing control section 633b that performs ball feeding control, an error LED indicator 633c that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and a press operation section that cancels the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. A switch 633d is provided.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633, DIP type electronic components constituting a dispensing control section 633a, a firing control section 633b, an error LED indicator 633c, an error release switch 633d, various connectors, etc. are mounted. Through-holes are formed that have lands on the mounting surface through which various terminal pins of DIP-type electronic components are inserted, and through-holes that have lands on the mounting surface through which DIP-type electronic components are not inserted. A green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist over the entire area except for the through holes. Furthermore, on the back side (solder side) of the payout control board 633, a solder side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and a solid green resist is formed in the entire area excluding the solder side land and the through hole. A green resist layer is formed. The land on the mounting surface, the through hole, and the land on the solder surface are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633, and the soldering surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the dispensing control board 633. It is electrically connected to the solder side wiring pattern. When various terminal pins of DIP type electronic components are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 into through holes having lands on the mounting surface side, the back surface of the dispensing control board 633 corresponding to the inserted through holes The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the output control board 633 by protruding from the solder side land formed on the solder side (solder side), and by soldering these protruding terminal pins and the solder side land. The state will be as follows. In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are covered with a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (that is, a green resist layer formed by a solid green resist). However, the land on the mounting side, the through hole, and the land on the soldering side are not covered with green paint at all. There are multiple rows of game balls installed across from each other, and the game balls are polished and heated to a high temperature, which is then supplied to the pachinko machine 1.The heat emitted from the pachinko machine 1 is also added to the game balls, which create a closed space called an island facility. In order to prevent the payout control board 633, which is an important board for controlling the payout of game balls, from going out of control due to the influence of heat due to the high temperature inside, the lands, through holes, and The copper foil portion of the land on the solder surface side is exposed.This increases the heat dissipation efficiency of the dispensing control board 633 and contributes to preventing thermal runaway of the dispensing control board 633.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch 633d, attributes of the surface side electronic components such as the part number of the surface side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface side electronic components are placed (and , may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) The front side markings are green. It is a white paint that is easily noticeable compared to the other colors, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The pressing operation part of the error release switch 633d is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that accommodates the payout control board 633. Since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player. Furthermore, since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is also placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player.

[8-2-1. Payout control section]
A payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls a game media payout operation that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input to the payout control MPU633aa, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs including a payout control program to control, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. a dispensing control input circuit 633ab, a dispensing control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a dispensing motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, It is equipped with

The payout control MPU 633aa includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and its operation ( It also has a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors the system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, since information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab receives various signals based on the information from its various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground of the payout control board 633), and various signals are externally input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function that is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with various signals for output to the board, etc., and a reset function that is not provided with a reset terminal. It consists of a payout control output circuit without a reset function, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function. The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, when the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by the payout control system reset, the payout control output circuit with a reset function outputs signals based on the information. is configured as a circuit in which no output is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, in the payout control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signals based on the information are not reset. It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

In addition, a detection signal from a door frame release switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from a main body frame release switch that detects opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are transmitted to the dispensing control input circuit. 633ab, it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received via the payout control input circuit 633ab at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa using a serial data method. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a payout control output circuit without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted from the circuit to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function, thereby driving the payout control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with a reset function to the error LED indicator 633c.

The error LED display 633d is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633. Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game ball is "ball gummy" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it is notified that the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. When the count switch error occurs (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591), the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error". (specifically, that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls B based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. When the pachinko machine 1 is disconnected, it is notified that the CR is not connected (the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of game balls B that has not yet been paid out is a predetermined number) 2) has been reached).

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as prize balls from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is connected to the game hall (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls B, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer The computer is designed to prevent malfunctions or breakdowns, and the main control board 1310 allows the game to proceed from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and controls payouts, etc. Abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can control the performance, and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance, thereby preventing malfunctions or breakdowns. By grasping the number of game balls B actually paid out as prize balls by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., the hall computer determines the payout information (so-called , ball hitting information) and the players' games.

A ball lending request signal for game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is sent to the payout control MPU 633aaa via a CR unit input/output circuit (not shown). It is designed to be input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal It is inputted and displayed on the ball rental display section of the rental operation unit 220.

The payout control board 633 is directly supplied with various voltages (+24 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU 633aa in addition to the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the built-in RAM for payout control is such that when the push operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa. There is.

[8-2-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various sensors related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on this firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the button is pressed is input to the firing control input circuit, and then input to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 182, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

[8-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). ), a green resist layer is formed, and as shown in FIG. It has the functions of the above-mentioned effect display control unit 1512 that can control the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the control unit 1511, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, A peripheral control IC 1510a in which a sound source, a SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and performances, and a peripheral data ROM An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520 can be transferred and stored, and a slide-type volume adjustment capable of adjusting the volume. It includes a switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power generation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). ing. Examples of the various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

A peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b, an SDRAM 1510c, a volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown), various connectors, etc. are configured on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A surface mount (SMD) type electronic component is mounted, and the various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type electronic component are soldered to pads and through holes with lands on the mounting surface side (that is, various terminals of the electronic component). A through hole (with a land on the mounting surface side through which the pad is not inserted) is formed, and a green resist layer is formed with a solid green resist in the entire area excluding the pad, land on the mounting surface side, and the through hole. . Further, on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510, a back side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and a green resist layer is formed with a solid green resist in the entire area except the back side land and the through hole. has been done. The land on the mounting surface, the through hole, and the land on the back surface are electrically connected. The mounting side land is electrically connected to the mounting side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting side) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back side land is electrically connected to the back side wiring pattern formed on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510. connected. Various terminals of a surface mount (SMD) type electronic component are placed on pads formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the various terminals and pads are soldered to form a surface mount (SMD) type electronic component. type of electronic component is fixed to the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (in other words, a green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist). However, in addition to the pads, the lands on the mounting side, the through holes, and the lands on the back side are not covered with the green coating at all.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes various control information (peripheral information) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as part of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored from a power outage). data) to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the transfer speed between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is 2 Gbps, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed. . The control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and a plurality of image data on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs to be mounted, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., various types provided in the door frame 3 and game board 5. This is drive data, etc. for driving and controlling the movable performance body.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and proceeds with the production. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads out various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out to control the drawing of images on the effect display device 1600, and to control the lighting modes of various LEDs in accordance with various effects. Various performances are performed by controlling the flow of music, sound effects, and other sounds that match the various performances.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generates drawing data for drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. control to output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. Note that when the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes able to accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it notifies the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a by outputting a V blank signal.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is generated by reading sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc. are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played. Note that when the sliding volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and includes the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, and the top side speaker. 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, an acoustic signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is output. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes booting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads out the read schedule data. According to the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, various game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the full color LEDs, monochrome color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 are stored. It is read from various serial I/O ports and sent to each decoration board of the game board 5 via the performance drive board 1720, and various drive motors and various drive solenoids provided for various performance units provided on the game board 5. Various game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to game board side electrical drive sources such as Electric drive sources on the door frame side, such as the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the frame 3 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 (including the drive solenoid if the drive solenoid is provided on the door frame 3 side). Outputs various door frame side drive data for outputting drive signals to the door frame 3, and outputs lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the full color LEDs, monochrome color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Various kinds of door frame side light emission data for this purpose are read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I/O ports.

Detection signals from various detection sensors provided in various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit. has been done. In addition, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 The detection signals from the peripheral control IC 1510a are received (input) to various serial I/O ports (or may be various parallel I/O ports) of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that convey the rotational state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

Note that the peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[9. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 212 to 213. FIG. 212 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 213 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 212. First, the power supply board will be explained, and then the backup power supply, the power supplied to each control board, etc., and the method of fixing the fuses will be explained. Note that the board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and are the same ground (GND).

[9-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 95, 96, etc. is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island equipment of the game hall. It is inserted. In the island equipment of a game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are grouped together and AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to one transformer. For example, in an island facility in a game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is installed for each group. Since a system is adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to each transformer (by a total of five transformers), a transformer having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on. When is turned off, the AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in the ON state, and when a clerk or other person in charge of the game hall starts business, the power switch 630a is turned on (turned on) by turning on a breaker installed in the game hall. The power of the pachinko machines 1 installed in a plurality of rows in the equipment is turned on all at once. Then, after the game hall clerk or other staff closes business hours, they turn off (turn off) the breakers installed in the game hall, thereby simultaneously shutting off the power to the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows on the island equipment of the game hall. conduct. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows in the island equipment of the game hall, when turning on or turning off the power to each pachinko machine 1 individually, for example, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When turning off the power switch 630a and then turning it on again after maintenance is completed, the pachinko machine 1 that has experienced some kind of trouble must be operated by a clerk at the game hall, etc. to solve the problem. For example, a staff member may turn off the power switch 630a, and then turn on the power switch 630a again when the trouble has been resolved.

As shown in FIG. 212, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to the power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, and a power supply. It includes a creation circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power supply (AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC 24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is connected to the interface board via the power supply board 630 regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off. 635, and from this interface board 635 is supplied to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC 24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b via fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the power switch 630a, and the noise is suppressed in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. removed. The AC 24V from which noise has been removed is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from alternating current to direct current (AC-DC conversion)) to become a direct current power source. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and the power factor correction circuit 630d generates DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with the power factor improved. be done. The generated +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power generation circuit 630f. When the voltage supplied to the power supply destruction circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply destruction circuit 630g causes the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to flow a large current that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current (predetermined cutoff current for each) to melt them and disconnect them from the island equipment of the game hall. This is to electrically cut off the supplied AC 24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current) flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 melt, and AC24V is supplied to the subsequent unit via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. cut off.

The power generation circuit 630f to which the smoothed +35V is supplied includes a +5V power generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power generation circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power generation circuit 630fb generates +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power generation circuit 630fc generates +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply system created by the power supply board 630 to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, the power supply system created by the power supply board 630 to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system created by the power supply board 630 is created. The power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied becomes a +24V power supply line.

[9-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310 (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), and capacitor BC1 supplies payout control in payout control board 633. Backup power is supplied to a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "RAM with built-in payout control") built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a.

+5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes a +5V power line in the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, and is applied to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is also applied to the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the power supply terminal. +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V from +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source that becomes a control power source for the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board side generated +5V") is supplied to the main control board side generated +5V power supply in the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h. The line is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 (+5V created on the main control board side) are electrical. They are not connected to each other and are independent.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 633, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the power supply of the RAM with built-in payout control, which is the forward direction, due to the diode PD0. Current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected so that +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is returned to the output control board 633, and then from the output control board 633 again to the power supply base plate 630. This connection method allows +5V to be supplied and charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa and the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control. The stored contents of the payout control built-in RAM are held.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in main control in the forward direction by the diode MD0. , and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 has an electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g (+5V created on the main control board side) is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, +5V generated on the main control board side is supplied to enable charging. As a result, the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 633, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g becomes +5V. (+5V created on the main control board side), the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with the main VBB to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM. The contents of the built-in RAM are retained.

[9-3. Power supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the power supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the power supplied mainly to the payout control board and the power supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively created by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, are as shown in FIG. Of these three types of power, two types of power, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. In addition, three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively created by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are sent to the interface board 635. At the same time, it is also supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. via the interface board 635.

Note that the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, which are supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., melt down due to overcurrent flowing to each of these power lines. A +5V fuse (not shown), a +12V fuse (not shown), and a +24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for potential drops by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as will be described later. When the power outage notice signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the payout control MPU 63aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process, which will be described later. The payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to stop the payout process (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls). I will do it.

Therefore, when a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the main control board 1310 constituting the main board , when the dispensing control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. have a +12V power line or a +24V power line. Due to electrical trouble for some reason to the relay board 104, door frame main relay board 105, etc., leakage current or short circuit may occur, causing the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the door frame relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame relay board 105, etc. are blown. be able to. As a result, a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage warning signal is controlled by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. There is no need to output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process which will be described later.

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 213, through +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, and +24V fuse SF24, 1720 respectively. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 via the +12V fuse SF12, and also to the effect display device 1600 via the +12V fuse SF12 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. has been done. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 relays +12V supplied via the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device.

The +5V fuse SF5 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the production drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) of the +5V power line peripheral control board. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +5V power line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +5V fuse SF5 melts and the current is supplied to the subsequent circuit via the +5V fuse SF5. Cut off the +5V power line.

The +12V fuse SF12 connects the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510 to subsequent boards such as the performance drive board 1720 and various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance by taking into consideration the current used in the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used in subsequent devices such as the production display device 1600 via the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current. Current can flow up to the upper limit (cutting current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse SF12 melts and the current is supplied to the subsequent circuit via the +12V fuse SF12. Cut off the +12V power line.

The +24V fuse SF24 has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used in subsequent boards such as the production drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is +24V. Current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) on the power line peripheral control board. In addition, when providing a +24V system driver circuit for an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) using +24V in the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity of the +24V fuse SF24 is set as the capacity of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line. The current used by itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the effect drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 are set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +24V fuse SF24 melts and the current is supplied to the subsequent circuit via the +24V fuse SF24. Cut off the +24V power line.

The +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, and the +24V fuse SF24 are the sources where the +5V power line, +12 power line, and +24V power line are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to subsequent boards such as the production drive board 1720. Since it is a fuse, it draws a large current and may generate heat, so it should be placed away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a to prevent failures due to thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the effects of this heat generation. Preferably, near the connector to which +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635 is supplied (especially near the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which the +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635 is connected) ) is preferably located.

The peripheral control board 1510 has a control function that creates 3.3 V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3 V") as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the peripheral control IC 1510a from +12 V supplied via the +12 V fuse SF12. A power generation circuit 1510z is provided. The +3.3V generated by the control power generation circuit 1510z is applied to the peripheral control IC 1510a (CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA, which are integrated on one semiconductor chip as the peripheral control IC 1510a) via the control power supply fuse SF3. controller, various I/O interfaces, etc.), and is also supplied to the peripheral control data ROM board 1520, which is a local power source for the peripheral control board 1510. The +3.3V generated by the control power generation circuit 1510z becomes the +3.3V power line in the peripheral control board 1510 via the control power supply fuse SF3, and also becomes the +3.3V power line in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The control power generation circuit 1510z is supplied via a +5V power line supplied via a +5V fuse SF5 and/or a +24V fuse SF24, except for a +12V power line supplied via a +12V fuse SF12. Even if an abnormal current flows to the +24V power line and it blows out, it is possible to create +3.3V, which is a local power source that serves as the control power source for the peripheral control IC 1510a, from +12V from the +12V power line. The control IC 1510a does not stop and continues to operate, and if the +24V fuse SF24 is blown, it will be difficult to drive the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid), but the production will continue to progress. can do.

In addition to +3.3V, the control power generation circuit 1510z uses a plurality of control power supplies corresponding to each device, such as the control ROM 1510b and SDRAM 1510c of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as local power supplies, in addition to +3.3V. (For example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.) may be created. In this case, the control power supply fuse SF3 will be provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, +1.5V fuse for +1.5V). For +1.25V, a +1.5V fuse is provided, and it becomes a +3.3V power line through the +3.3V fuse, and a +1.5V power line through the +1.5V fuse, and +1 It becomes a +1.25V power supply line via a .25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse SF3 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power supply line. Its capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cutting current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +3.3V power supply line peripheral control board flows through the control power supply fuse SF3, the element part of the control power supply fuse SF3 melts and the current flows through the control power supply fuse SF3. Cut off the +3.3V power line to the subsequent units. Note that when the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to multiple control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, a +1 .25V and +1.25V fuses are respectively provided), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance by taking this current and When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the power line peripheral control board flows, the element portion of the control power fuse SF3 provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies melts, and the blown control power fuse The power supply line of the control power supplied to the subsequent device via SF3 is cut off.

Note that the control power supply fuse SF3 is the source fuse of the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a, etc., and the current flowing through it is large and may generate heat. In order to prevent failures due to thermal shutdown built into the peripheral control IC 1510a, it is preferable to place it away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a, and in the vicinity of the control power generation circuit 1510z (especially when +3.3V is generated). It is preferable that the terminal be placed near a terminal supplied as a +3.3 power supply line.

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and are predefined. If a current that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current (each predetermined cutoff current) flows, it will melt, and unlike resettable fuses, once it blows, even if the current decreases, the power line will not be disconnected to subsequent fuses. It is an electronic component that cannot be supplied. Note that the +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, the +24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead-type fuses instead of the SMD-type chip fuses. Further, as the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

Of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, which are supplied to the performance drive board 1720, +5V is supplied to the input buffer circuit 1720a etc. via the +5V fuse EF5, and +24V is supplied to the game input buffer circuit 1720a etc. via the +24V fuse EF24. The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 drives and controls the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the board 5, and +12V is supplied to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 via the +12V fuse EF12. It is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 that performs drive control, and is also supplied to a plurality of decorative boards included in the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5").

The +5V fuse EF5 has a capacity preset in the +5V power line of the performance drive board 1720, taking into account the current used by the performance drive board 1720 itself, and the +5V power line performance drive board allowable current upper limit (cutting current ) current can flow up to When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of +5V power supply line production drive board allowable current flows, the element part of +5V fuse EF5 melts and the voltage is supplied to the subsequent circuit through +5V fuse EF5. Cut off the +5V power line.

The +12V fuse EF12 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720, and the current used by the performance drive board 1720 itself and the current used by subsequent boards such as each decorative board of the game board 5 via the performance drive board 1720. , the capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the +12V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit (cutting current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of +12V power supply line production drive board allowable current flows, the element part of +12V fuse EF12 melts and the voltage is supplied to the subsequent circuit through +12V fuse EF12. Cut off the +12V power line.

The +24V fuse EF24 has a capacity preset in the +24V power line of the performance drive board 1720, taking into account the current used by the performance drive board 1720 itself, and the +24V power line performance drive board allowable current upper limit (cutting current ) current can flow up to When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line production drive board flows, the element part of the +24V fuse EF24 melts and the voltage is supplied to the subsequent circuit through the +24V fuse EF24. Cut off the +24V power line.

Note that +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, and +24V fuse EF24 are fuses that supply +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line, and are the main +5V fuse SF5 and +12V in peripheral control board 1510. Although the current flowing is smaller than that of the SF12 fuse for 12V and the SF24 fuse for +24V, the current is large and may generate heat. In order to prevent failures due to shutdown due to the function, it is preferable to place it away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit 1720c2, and near the connectors to which +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied (especially, It is preferable that the power source is placed near a terminal connector to which a power line to which +5V, +12V, and +24V is supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 is connected.

The input buffer circuit 1720a receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. The signal is output to the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V driver circuit 1720c2. Specifically, the input buffer circuit 1720a is supplied via a +5V fuse EF5 to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V is applied is electrically connected to one end of a resistor that is grounded (GND), and removes noise that has entered multiple wiring (harness). This makes it possible to improve noise tolerance.

The +24V driver circuit 1720c1 includes a driver IC that drives the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter referred to as "a fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1") that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. It is mainly composed of +24V supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is determined by taking into account the current used in the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 in the +24V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (blocking current) for the game board side drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current for the game board drive solenoid flows, the fuse element provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 blows out, causing the +24V driver to The +24V power line supplied to the subsequent circuit via the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c1 is cut off.

The +12V driver circuit 1720c2 includes a driver IC that drives the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter, provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. (sometimes referred to as "fuse"). +12V supplied via the +12V fuse EF12 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 takes into account the current used in the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 in the +12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutoff current) for the drive motor on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive motor flows, the fuse element provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 melts and the +12V system driver The +12V power line supplied to the subsequent circuit via the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c2 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the fuses provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, and the fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are of surface mount type. (So-called SMD type) chip fuse, which will melt if a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (respectively predetermined breaking current) flows.Unlike a resettable fuse, once blown, the It is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. In addition, SMD type chip fuses are used as +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, +24V fuse EF24, fuses provided in +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, and fuses provided in +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of production drive board 1720. Alternatively, a lead type fuse may be used. In addition, the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1, and the fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are of SMD type or lead type. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may also be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

The +12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is supplied to a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") provided on the game board 5 via a +12V fuse DF12. ) is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as turning on, turning off, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can flow a constant current to various LEDs, etc. of the game board 5, and sets the maximum current of the current to flow to the various LEDs, etc. of the game board 5. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. Note that if the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit equivalent to the input buffer circuit 1720a described above, an input buffer circuit equivalent to the input buffer circuit 1720a described above is provided in the preceding stage of the LED constant current drive circuit. It may be provided.

The +12V fuse DF12 has a capacity preset in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5, taking into account the current used by each decorative board of the game board 5, Current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current on the game board decoration board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse DF12 melts and the voltage supplied to the subsequent circuit via the +12V fuse DF12 is cut off. Cut off the +12V power line.

Note that the +12V fuse DF12 is a fuse that supplies the +12 power line, and although the current that flows is smaller compared to the original +12V fuse SF12 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse EF12 on the production drive board 1720. Since the current is large and may generate heat, it is preferable to place it away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit so as not to damage the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board due to the influence of this heat generation. It is preferable to place it near a connector to which +12V from the effect drive board 1720 is supplied (particularly near a terminal connector to which a power line to which +12V from the effect drive board 1720 is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse DF12 on each decorative board of the game board 5 is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). It melts when current flows through it, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it melts, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. Incidentally, as the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as the +12V fuse DF12 for each decorative board of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

The +12V supplied to the effect display device 1600 is supplied to the +12V fuse PF12 as a first stage fuse, which becomes the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, and then to the +12V fuse PF12a1, which serves as the first rear stage fuse, which becomes the fuse of the first branch system. and +12V fuse PF12a2 as a second rear-stage fuse serving as a fuse of the second branch system. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the first latter-stage fuse is supplied to a liquid crystal panel power supply generating circuit 1600z that generates a liquid crystal panel power supply to be supplied to the liquid crystal panel. Note that the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z supplies the generated liquid crystal panel power to not only the liquid crystal panel but also the backlight and drive circuit. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as the second rear-stage fuse is supplied to the backlight and drive circuit. Note that +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 is supplied to the backlight and drive circuit, and may also be supplied to the liquid crystal panel.

The +12V fuse PF12, which serves as the main fuse, has a capacity set in advance by taking into account the respective currents used in the effect display device 1600 in the +12V power supply line of the effect display device 1600, and the main allowable current upper limit ( Current can flow up to the cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the source allowable current flows, the +12V fuse PF12, which serves as the source fuse, blows out the element portion of the +12V fuse PF12, and the subsequent power is supplied via the +12V fuse PF12. Cut off the +12V power line to the

The +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, is the current used in the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z in the +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. , the current used in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc., are preset, and the current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (cutting current) of the first branch system. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of permissible current of the branch first system flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, melts and the +12V fuse PF12a1 is disconnected. Cut off the +12V power supply line supplied through the

The +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, is used in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. in the +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the production display device 1600. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the current to be applied, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (blocking current) of the second branch system. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of permissible current of the branch second system flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12a2 becomes the fuse of the second branch system, and the element part of the +12V fuse PF12a2 blows out. Cut off the +12V power supply line supplied through the

The +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2 are fuses that supply the +12 power line, and when compared with the original +12V fuse SF12 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse EF12 on the production drive board 1720, they flow less. Although the current is small, the current is large and may generate heat. For example, precautions must be taken to prevent the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the production display device 1600 from being damaged by the effects of this heat generation. It is preferable to place it away from the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600, and near the connector to which +12V from the liquid crystal output board 1530 is supplied (especially the liquid crystal output It is preferable that the power supply line is placed near a terminal connector to which a power line to which +12V from the board 1530 is supplied is connected.

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 of the production display device 1600 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and each has a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each If a current exceeding a predetermined cut-off current (predetermined cut-off current) flows, it will melt, and unlike resettable fuses, once it melts, it is an electronic fuse that cannot supply power to the subsequent circuit even if the current decreases. It is a part. Note that the +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 may be lead type fuses instead of the SMD type chip fuses. Further, as the +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the door frame relay board 105 from a door frame side drive board (not shown) provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3"). ) and the multiple decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") are each supplied with the power they need, and A corresponding fuse (not shown) is provided on the board, respectively.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 is connected to a +24V electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) in addition to a fuse (not shown) corresponding to a power supply (for example, a +5V fuse, a +24V fuse, a +12V fuse). There are also fuses provided in a +24V system driver circuit that controls drive, and fuses that are provided in a +12V system driver circuit that drives and controls a +12V system electrical drive source (for example, a drive motor). The fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply has its capacity set in advance by taking into account the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Upper limit of allowable current for each power line drive board on each side (e.g., door frame side +5V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutting current), door frame side +24V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +12V power line Current can flow up to the drive board allowable current upper limit (blocking current). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply are the upper limit of allowable current of each power line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of allowable current of +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of allowable current of +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +12V power line drive board allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of a fuse (not shown) that corresponds to the power supply melts, and the power is supplied via the fuse (not shown) that corresponds to the blown power supply. Cut off the power line to the following parts.

The fuse installed in the +24V driver circuit takes into account the current used by the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. Its capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (blocking current) for the door frame side drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid flows, the fuse element provided in the +24V driver circuit will melt and the +24V driver circuit will The +24V power line supplied to the subsequent unit via the provided fuse is cut off. The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit takes into account the current used by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V system driver circuit in the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. Its capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive motor (blocking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows, the fuse element provided in the +12V driver circuit melts and the fuse installed in the +12V driver circuit melts. Cut off the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent unit via the provided fuse.

The capacity of each fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is preset in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3, taking into account the respective current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3. Therefore, current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) on the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of permissible current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows, the element part of the fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 will melt. Then, the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent parts through the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is cut off.

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is provided in the door frame 3 via a +12V fuse (not shown). Supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive motor that is an electrical drive source (for example, the drive motor of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button elevation drive motor 367) The +12V system driver circuit mainly consists of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.The +12V driver circuit fuse connects the door frame 3's +12V power line to the +12V power supply line of the drive board. The current used in the target drive source (drive motor) and +12V system driver circuit is taken into account and its capacity is preset, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) for the door frame side drive motor. +12V When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows through the fuse of the system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit melts and the power is supplied via the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit. Cut off the +12V power supply line to subsequent units.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +12V driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) is input, and this input Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured to provide +5V power to multiple wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wiring (harness) By removing intruding noise, noise tolerance can be improved. In place of +5V supplied to this resistor, +12V supplied via a +12V fuse can provide the same effect (that is, improved noise resistance).

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, the door frame 3 The voltage is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided for this purpose. The +24V system driver circuit mainly consists of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. ing. +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse for the +24V driver circuit has a predetermined capacity, taking into account the current used in the +24V power supply line of the drive board, the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and the +24V driver circuit. This setting allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid (cutting current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid flows through the fuse of the +24V driver circuit, the element of the fuse of the +24V driver circuit will melt and the voltage will flow through the fuse of the +24V driver circuit. Cut off the +24V power line to the subsequent units.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +24V driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted) has a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer (not shown), as described above. A control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from a peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is inputted. , removes noise from the input control signal and outputs it to the +24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit applies +5V to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and each drive board of the door frame 3. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wiring (harness) It is possible to improve noise tolerance by removing noise that has entered the device. Instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor, if +24V or +12V is also supplied via the +24V fuse, the same effect (that is, the noise immunity improvement).

For example, if one decorative board, a plurality of decorative boards, or all of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the door frame 3 Controls various light emission such as turning on, turning off, blinking, and gradation lighting of multiple LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of door frame 3, etc."). The current is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can flow a constant current to various LEDs, etc. of the door frame 3, and sets the maximum current of the current to flow to the various LEDs, etc. of the door frame 3. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is set in advance by taking into account the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board, and the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side decorative board ( Current can flow up to the cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current on the door frame side decorative board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the voltage is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +12V power line to the subsequent unit.

Note that among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, one decorative board (for example, the left side upper decorative board 402a that constitutes the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame 3) is an LED constant current drive circuit. is not provided, and the LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative board of the door frame 3 (for example, the left side lower decorative board 402b that constitutes the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame 3) When the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on itself is controlled, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative board. In addition, if the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit equivalent to the input buffer circuit provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 described above, the LED constant current drive An input buffer circuit corresponding to this input buffer circuit may be provided before the circuit.

In this embodiment, each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and the current exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). Unlike a resettable fuse, once a fuse blows, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. Note that each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side may be a lead type fuse instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Moreover, as each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

[9-3-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 633aa and the like. This payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the player's games by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in any way by the payout control board 633.

[9-3-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and generates +5V which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In this embodiment, +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and +5V generated on the main control board side generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured so that the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, Also, the +5V generated by the main control board side generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side), and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and also to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510, the interface board 635, and the door frame relay board 105, as shown in FIG. Then, it is inputted to the effect display device 1600 etc. via the liquid crystal output board 1530.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, thereby applying power to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, Of the three types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are used for various types of power supplies such as the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect drive board 1720, as described above. Supplied to the board. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on the various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on the various boards. Further, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. are at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a +12V fuse SF12 and a +24V fuse SF24. In addition, a +12V fuse EF12 and a +24V fuse EF24 are provided (mounted, mounted) on the effect drive board 1720.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, both the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V is the power source monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and +12V is provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510. The power supply fuse SF12 and the +12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the production drive board 1720 are at the same potential, and the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 +24V, a +24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and a +24V fuse EF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the production drive board 1720. They are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the above-mentioned As described above, the drive motor (for example, the drive motor of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button elevation It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor 367), and among the drive boards of the door frame 3, one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all drive boards require +24V. In this case, as described above, the voltage is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electrical drive source (for example, a drive solenoid, a drive motor) provided in the door frame 3 via a +24V fuse (not shown). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V, which is the power source monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 are connected to +12V fuse SF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the production drive board 1720 of the game board 5, +12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3. A +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) is at the same potential, and +24V is the power source monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. A +24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +24V fuse EF24 provided (mounted, mounted) on the performance drive board 1720 of the game board 5. and a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are at the same potential.

[9-4. How to fix the fuse]
Next, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and each fuse provided on the effect display device 1600. A method of fixing each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side and each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side will be explained.

The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are composed of support terminals of a transparent glass tube with metal ends. Support terminals at both ends of the tube are removably attached to support fittings (also referred to as fuse holders), not shown, which are soldered to the power supply board 630, and fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including fuse FUSE3 (FIGS. 214 and 215) If the fuse (see ) blows, it can be replaced with a new fuse. On the other hand, +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720 EF12, +24V fuse EF24, a fuse provided in +24V driver circuit 1720c1, a fuse provided in +12V driver circuit 1720c2, +12V fuse DF12 provided in each decorative board of game board 5, and effect display device 1600. The provided +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2, and each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and are square chip types. There are ceramic types, mold types, etc., and they are soldered directly to the board.

In this way, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630 is removable, and if a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (each predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuse and it blows, it is replaced with a new fuse. However, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and each fuse provided on the effect display device 1600. , and the fuses installed on the door frame 3 side are chip fuses that are directly soldered to the board, so if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit (respectively predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuse and it melts, , cannot be replaced with a new fuse.

Note that the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are composed of support terminals having metal ends of a transparent glass tube. It is possible to visually confirm through a transparent glass tube whether the element parts of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are blown. . On the other hand, +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720 EF12, +24V fuse EF24, a fuse provided in +24V driver circuit 1720c1, a fuse provided in +12V driver circuit 1720c2, +12V fuse DF12 provided in each decorative board of game board 5, and effect display device 1600. The provided +12V fuse PF12, +12V fuse PF12a1, and +12V fuse PF12a2 and each fuse provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, so they are square chip types. In any type of chip fuse, such as a ceramic type, a ceramic type, or a molded type, it is not possible to visually confirm from the external appearance of the chip fuse whether or not the element portion disposed inside the chip fuse is blown.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 included in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a circuit diagram illustrating the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board.

The island equipment of the game hall has a transformer (not shown) that converts the 100V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC100V") commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V") power supply for the gaming machines. The voltage is stepped down. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of 24 V AC, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the game hall, 24 V AC is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 receives various power supplies from AC 24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V"), DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), Hereinafter, various DC power sources such as "+5V") are created and supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 214, the circuits of the power supply board 630 include a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. It is mainly composed of a circuit 630h.

AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, transparent glass tubes with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) are connected. (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and the power is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a Class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, AC24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (sometimes referred to as "L side")) is connected to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. 24V AC line 2 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2" (sometimes referred to as "N side") ) is input via fuse FUSE2, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2). Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When an employee such as a clerk at the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. When the supply starts, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 starts being supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when an employee such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC24V1 is applied to various circuits on the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power to the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

Please note that the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, and the staff such as the game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the power to the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and are used to remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal of a frame ground board (not shown) disposed near the external terminal board 558 shown in FIG. 86 via a power ground wire (not shown).

The frame ground board has a mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (ground terminals are provided in this embodiment) are mounted, and is horizontal when viewed from the front. The terminal cover 551k is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the board accommodating portion, and covered by a terminal cover 551k shown in FIG. In other words, the frame ground board is housed in the space formed by the board housing section and the terminal cover 551k. Note that since the terminal cover 551k is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground board accommodated in the space formed by the board accommodating portion and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from outside the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. Varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorption element (surge absorber) that removes noise that cannot be removed by capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

AC24V1 outputted from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also inputted as AC24VA to the power line connector DCN2, The AC 24V2 outputted from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input as AC24V to the power line connector DCN2. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbances. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via an interface board power line (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and a CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown), and supplies 24VAC and 24V to the CR unit (not shown).

The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is input directly to the drain terminal of FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of FETQ1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into a DC power supply by switching by FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode of the Schottky barrier diode D2. They are output from terminal 2, respectively. Note that the types of packages of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are each fixed to one heat dissipation fin (not shown). The radiation fins are soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and are input to the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. The signals are outputted from the respective terminals and inputted to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

The DC power supply whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and is also input directly to the drains of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. are input to each terminal. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit is inputted to the gate terminals of FETQ3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminal and drain terminal of FETQ3 and Q4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of power supply board 630 via peripheral circuit 630da.

The DC power supply whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses the generation of harmonics and improves the power factor by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da, and is connected to the cathode terminals of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Each output is output from 2. The package types of FETQ3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 are the same as the package types of FETQ1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F mentioned above), and They are each fixed to one heat dissipation fin. The heat dissipation fin is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

The DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e includes a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). These plurality of electrolytic capacitors have their negative terminals electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and their positive terminals each input a DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by a power factor correction circuit 630d. be done. The smoothing circuit 630e smoothes (smoothes) the pulsating current from the DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. In the embodiment, a transparent glass tube (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), which has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is used. The voltage is supplied as +24V from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 through the power supply board 630. The power line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the +24V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1. Fuse FUSE3 is a glass tube fuse for +24V power line (DC power line), and when a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current) flows, the element part of fuse FUSE3 It blows out and cuts off the +24V power supply line to the subsequent unit via fuse FUSE3.

[10-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC power from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates +12V and +5V from the input DC power, respectively. The power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the generated +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and also outputs the created +5V from the +5V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to the inside of the pachinko machine 1. Supplied to each board. The power line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +12V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +5V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1. This becomes the power line.

The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching by FETQ3, Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by controlling output of a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are inputted to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output a power failure circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power failure circuit 630g.

The plug of the power cord (not shown) was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than +24V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power supply generation circuit 630f determines that the magnitude of the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value: in this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 that is input to the AC-DET terminal. (in this case, it is set to about 50V), a power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the power supply is destroyed. By flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt.

A GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is electrically connected becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply breakdown circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of resistor 25, and the other end of resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of resistor R24, one end of capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor R25, one end of which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5, and the other end of the resistor R25, which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of resistor R25, the other end of resistor R24 and the other end of capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of.

In the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, when a gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via the resistor R25, FETQ5 is activated and the source terminal is connected from the drain terminal of FETQ5. A large current flows toward the FETQ5 (overcurrent flows between the drain and source terminals of FETQ5), which destroys the FETQ5 and maintains the short mode state in which the drain and source terminals of the FETQ5 are electrically connected. be done. Although the package type of FETQ5 is the same as that of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F mentioned above), FETQ1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, each has a fixed heat dissipation fin (specifically, FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2). There are heat dissipation fins (not shown) to which are fixed, respectively, and heat dissipation fins (not shown) to which FETs Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are respectively fixed. It is placed in a position where it cannot be used. Specifically, FETQ5 is arranged between each radiation fin, and is not fixed to each radiation fin at all. The purpose of this is to absorb the heat and cool it through each radiation fin so that FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when FETQ5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (an overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5), the FETQ5 will generate heat in a short period of time. This is because it contributes to being destroyed.

In other words, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines that the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 that is input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50V.), a gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and source terminal of FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained, and since the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f, the power switch 630a is When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETQ5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g to the power generation circuit 630f. By flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal, a large current flows through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing one or both of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt, destroying only the power supply board 630 and causing the power cord plug to become unusable. Even if the machine is mistakenly plugged into a power outlet with a power supply voltage of AC100V, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 can be reliably prevented from being destroyed.

In addition, the power cord plug was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for gaming machines. If FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed by being inserted, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with unblown ones, and connect the power cord plug to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet, FETQ5 of the power destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, power switch 630a, noise suppression circuit 630b, and rectifier circuit 630c are Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through FET Q5, which is in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a large current flows to the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing the fuses to fail. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will blow out again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the power cord plug must be connected to the island equipment of the game hall. Even if the machine is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

Note that the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are removably attached to support fittings (also referred to as fuse holders), not shown, which are soldered to the power supply board 630, so that if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 blow out, It can be replaced with a new fuse.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of capacitors BC0 and BC1. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is connected to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 211. It is electrically connected to the main VBB, which serves as a backup power line to the RAM. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is connected to the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the payout VBB, which serves as a backup power line to the payout control built-in RAM of the MPU 633aa.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the power line (that is, the +12V power line) supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is connected to the payout control board 633, Then, the +5V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310 and is created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line is not electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f as the main VBB and is independent. Through the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It holds various information that is supplied to the RAM and stored in the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power line) is connected to the payout control board. 633, and is supplied to the capacitor BC1 provided in the power supply board 630 as a payout VBB through the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. It holds various information that is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a and stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

In contrast, the power to the pachinko machine 1 may be cut off (this also includes cases in which the power to all pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the circuit breaker in the game hall), power outage, or instantaneous power outage. If this occurs, the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 cannot generate +5V from the power line (that is, the +12V power line) supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge occurs because the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 prevents the supply to the power supply line supplied from the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 (that is, the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side). Various information supplied as VBB to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 and stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (this includes cases where the power to all pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall), or a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. When this happens, +5V from the power line (that is, +5V power line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC1. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is caused by the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633, which prevents the supply to the power line (that is, the +5V power line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the discharge occurs as a payout VBB of the payout control board 633. Various information that is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the control unit 633a and stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

In other words, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including when the power to all the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall), or a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. When the capacitors BC0 and BC1 are discharged, various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is held as the main VBB, and payout control is performed as the payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the board 633 is held.

In this embodiment, the power supply board 630 includes the fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) and the fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2). and a fuse FUSE3 serving as a glass tube fuse for a +24V power line (DC power line). As a result, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of a sensor to which +12V is supplied) When used, a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply alternative sensor)) and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors) (or when using a sensor supplied with +24V instead of a sensor supplied with +12V, this sensor supplied with +24V (+24V power substitute sensor)) and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310. The fuses corresponding to the power supply line (+24V, the same potential (+24V)) supplied to Fuse FUSE2, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2) provided on the board 630, and a glass tube fuse for the +24V power line (DC power line (DC power line)), which is provided on the power supply board 630. FUSE3 is compatible with +24V power supply among the power lines supplied to a specific load among the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the production side board, and the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510. The lines include fuse FUSE1, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and fuse FUSE2, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2), which is provided on the power supply board 630. , the fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for the +24V power line (DC power line) provided on the power supply board 630, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 which is a chip fuse, and the production drive board 1720. +24V fuse EF24 is compatible.

Note that if the power supply board 630 is not provided with the fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for the +24V power line (DC power line (DC power line)), that is, the power supply board 630 is not provided with the fuse FUSE3 for the +24V power line (DC power line 1). When a fuse FUSE1 serving as a glass tube fuse and a fuse FUSE2 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) are provided, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 ( Among the electrical drive sources and various sensors, a sensor that is supplied with +24V (or a sensor that is supplied with +24V in place of a sensor that is supplied with +12V, a sensor that is supplied with +24V (a +24V power alternative sensor) )) and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of a sensor to which +12V is supplied) When using this +24V sensor (+24V power supply alternative sensor)) and the power supply line (+24V, which is supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310), the same potential (+24V The fuses corresponding to )) are a glass tube fuse FUSE1 for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Among the power lines supplied to a specific load among the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the production side board and the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510, , the +24V power line serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Fuse FUSE2 corresponds to +24V fuse SF24 of peripheral control board 1510 and +24V fuse EF24 of production drive board 1720, which are chip fuses.

In this embodiment, for the +12V (+12V power line) created by the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, as described above, the +12V power line (DC power line 2) is connected to the power supply board 630. ) is not provided with a glass tube fuse for +12V. As a result, loads electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors), and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (an electrical The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12V, same potential (+12V)) supplied to the drive source, the sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is , a fuse FUSE1 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a fuse FUSE2 serving as a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Compatible.

In addition, for the +12V (+12V power line) created by the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, there is a +12V fuse on the power supply board 630 that serves as a glass tube fuse for the +12V power line (DC power line 2 (DC power line 2)). If a glass tube fuse is provided and +12V is supplied from the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 via this +12V glass tube fuse, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electrical A drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and a main control board 1310 The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12V, the same potential (+12V)) supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e in preparation for this is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630. Fuse FUSE1 is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2) provided on the power supply board 630, and fuse FUSE2 is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. ), and a glass tube fuse for +12V, which is a glass tube fuse for Among the power lines supplied to the load, the +12V power line is connected to fuse FUSE1, which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and AC24V2 (AC power line 1) provided on the power supply board 630. 2), a +12V glass tube fuse that serves as a glass tube fuse for the +12V power line (DC power line 2 (DC power line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630, and a chip fuse. The +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board, and the +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 are We will take action.

In addition, "a specific load on the production side" refers to a load that has a higher probability of failure than other loads among multiple loads on the production side, or that when a failure occurs, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 has a large influence on the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, loads that flow a large amount of current, loads that generate heat, loads that operate a movable body, and loads that move vertically or horizontally due to the operation of a movable body. Examples include loads that oppose the resulting wiring (harness).

A load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor that is supplied with +24V among various sensors (or a sensor that is supplied with +24V in place of a sensor that is supplied with +12V) is a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply alternative sensor)), a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or +12V is supplied) If a sensor to which +24V is supplied is used instead of a sensor supplied with +24V, the power supply to be supplied to the sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power substitute sensor), the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. If the fuse FUSE3, which is a glass tube fuse (glass tube fuse) on the power supply board 630 that corresponds to the line (+24V and the same potential (+24V)), melts (breaks), the ability to proceed with the game will be impaired. On the other hand, if the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the +24V fuse EF24 of the performance drive board 1720, which are chip fuses on the production side, melt (break). For example, although the game machine may be damaged due to a malfunction in which the +24V electric drive source of the game board is not activated, if a jackpot game condition that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of game balls will not be affected. Therefore, damage (stress) to the players can be kept to a minimum.

Note that a +12V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 for the +12V (+12V power line) created by the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power supply for the power supply board 630 is generated via this +12V glass tube fuse. When supplying +12V from the circuit 630f, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (an electrical drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and a dispensing control board 633 and an electrical The power supply line (+12V, the same potential (+12V)) If the +12V glass tube fuse of the power supply board 630 corresponding to +12V fuse SF12 of peripheral control board 1510 which is a chip fuse, +12V fuse EF12 of production drive board 1720, +12V fuse DF12 of each decoration board of the game board, and +12V fuse PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of production display device 1600. If it is fused (burned out), it will be a malfunction for the game machine due to, for example, a problem where the game board's +12V electric drive source is not activated or various LEDs on the game board or door frame are not lit. When a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of game balls is not affected, so that damage (stress) to the player can be kept to a minimum.

In this embodiment, as described above, the alternating current power (AC24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off. From this interface board 635, the balls are supplied to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the pachinko machine via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside of 1, and supplies 24VAC and 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In this embodiment, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is provided with glass tube fuses (not shown) that are compatible with AC24VA and AC24V, respectively (or unillustrated glass tube fuses that are compatible with only one of AC24VA and AC24V). Glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to AC 24VA and AC 24V from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via glass tube fuses provided on the interface board 635.

In addition, in this embodiment, the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600 are provided with an overcurrent protection circuit (so-called OCP). (abbreviation for Over Current Protection)) may be installed.

Further, in this embodiment, a +5V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 for +5V (+5V power line) created by the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power is supplied via the +5V glass tube fuse. +5V from the power generation circuit 630f of the board 630 may be supplied.

Next, countermeasures against commercial power voltage are taken in case the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island equipment of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally inserted into a power outlet with commercial power voltage (AC 100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment") will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows a configuration of commercial power supply voltage countermeasures according to the second embodiment. Note that in FIG. 215, the same reference numerals are given to members that perform the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 214 (hereinafter referred to as "commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment"). expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of commercial power supply voltage countermeasures according to the first embodiment and the configuration of commercial power supply voltage countermeasures according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, resistors R25, R24, and capacitor C22, as described above, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is configured from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via resistor R25, FETQ5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 are overloaded). As a result, the FET Q5 is destroyed by the current (current), thereby maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and source terminal of the FET Q5 are electrically connected.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, and the circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, as described above. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c, as well as being input to the diode D5, The signals are input to the anode terminals of D6, output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is inputted to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is directly inputted to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. be done.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is omitted for the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. To briefly explain this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall is connected to both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (AC24V1), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). AC24V2)), but according to tests conducted by the applicant, no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. By inputting the data as is, costs are reduced.

Further, the configuration for countering commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment employs the same power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures for commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. To briefly explain this, this is because, regarding the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably disconnect/connect both the L side and N side of the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in that the power switch 630a is connected to the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected/connected at the same time.

Furthermore, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. In between, it is electrically connected to one side of a micro-gap type arrester AL1. The other end of this microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5. The micro-gap type arrester AL1, when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") enters the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall due to a lightning strike, surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) that is temporarily generated by turning the power switch 630a ON/OFF is connected to the ground connection terminal DCN5. By flowing the surge current to the frame ground FG2, the surge voltage is limited and the surge voltage is prevented from being applied to the power switch 630a. Furthermore, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 may be installed on a frame ground board (not shown) that is placed near the external terminal board 558 shown in FIG. 86 by the operator. If you forget to electrically connect the ground terminal (island equipment ground) and the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, electromagnetic noise can be removed from the island equipment of the game hall as a security. The noise resistance can be increased by guiding the noise to the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V and removing it.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and the choke coil. In addition to L1, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g' includes a surge absorber SA1, and the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power supply breakdown circuit. 630g' and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power breakdown circuit 630g' has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, the surge absorber SA1 One end is electrically connected to the L side (AC24V1) of 24V AC via the power switch 630a, and the other end is electrically connected to the N side (AC24V1) of 24V AC via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and breaks down, resulting in a short circuit and short circuit mode.

Although a varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used here. A silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage that rises more steeply than a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has the features of very fast response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Note that since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional one should be used, and one with a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, should be selected.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1, and , are electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the No. 3 (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are electrically connected to the ground (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i to be described later. Thereby, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and its characteristics are that the vertical axis represents the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis represents the AC voltage.As the AC voltage value increases, the resistance value decreases. Therefore, a capacitor is selected that has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacitance decreases, and that will not be destroyed even if a commercial power supply voltage of 100 V AC is applied.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to a smoothing circuit 630e, then input to a power supply generation circuit 630f, and also input to a relay drive circuit 630i. When receiving the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e, the relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the No. 1 terminal of the relay RL1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is caused by insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i (relay drive Since the coil of relay RL1 is not operating (due to insufficient +24V power supply from circuit 630i), relay RL1 cannot be turned on (in other words, relay RL1 remains OFF). ), input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via thermistor TH1 and choke coil L2 without passing through relay RL1 while the No. 2 (COM) and No. 3 terminals of relay RL1 are in a non-conducting state. be done. As a result, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1, and when this DC starts flowing to the thermistor TH1, the resistance Although the current flowing through thermistor TH1 gradually increases the temperature of thermistor TH1, the resistance value of thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, causing a weak current to flow through the load following thermistor TH1. A strong current flows through the load.

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the coil of relay RL1 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state by the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (+24V power supply from the relay drive circuit 630i), the relay RL1 By turning ON, the No. 2 (COM) terminal and the No. 3 terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified DC power is output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is split between the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1, and passes through the choke coil L2 to the power factor correction circuit 630d. is input. As a result, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is applied between the terminals 2 (COM) and 3 of the relay RL1 (in other words, the contact The current flowing through the thermistor TH1 decreases and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, causing the 2nd (COM) and 3rd terminals of the relay RL1 to decrease. The current flowing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As mentioned above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is When the current flows through the thermistor TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases, so that the current flowing to the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1 becomes stronger. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases. If you use this function, the power cord plug will not be plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and will instead be connected to the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for gaming machines. If it is incorrectly plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will significantly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the thermistor TH1 rises in temperature, and a large current will flow through the surge absorber SA1, causing a surge. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows to the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1, which is in the short mode state in the noise suppression circuit 630b, causing the fuse FUSE1 to close. It will melt. Additionally, if the fuse FUSE1 blows out while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, the elements of the surge absorber SA1 will scatter and the surge absorber SA1 will It can prevent it from being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 will be destroyed. This can be reliably prevented.

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, an AC-DET terminal is used for monitoring the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration does not become complicated.

In addition, the power cord plug was not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and was mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for gaming machines. If the surge absorber SA1 that is inserted and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is destroyed, replace the fuse FUSE1 with one that is not blown, and connect the power cord plug to the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island equipment in the gaming hall. Even if you plug it into an AC 24V power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 that makes up the power breakdown circuit 630g' has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse that was replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1, causing fuse FUSE1 to blow out again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 that constitutes the power supply breakdown circuit 630g' is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 that constitutes the power supply breakdown circuit 630g' is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is inserted into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island equipment of the gaming hall, the game cannot be started.

In the embodiment described above, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a power supply destruction circuit 630g are provided on one board, the power supply board 630. , various electronic components, etc. were provided, but it can also be configured to be provided separately on two boards. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes power line connectors DCN1, DCN2, ground connection terminal DCN5, fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, power switch 630a, noise suppression circuit 630b, and wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes diodes D5 and D6, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply generation circuit 630f, a power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and a choke coil L2, as shown in FIG. , fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. Wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are transmitted to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also input to the anode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It happens. Note that various DC power supplies such as +24V, +12V, +5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 215 can be configured by being divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power line connectors DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the micro-gap arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply board 630B, which are mainly composed of the connector A, are shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. Wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are transmitted to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Note that various DC power supplies such as +24V, +12V, +5V, etc. created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit, production drive board circuit]
Next, the main control board 1310, the circuit of the payout control board 633, the circuit of the production drive board 1720, etc. shown in FIG. 211 will be briefly explained with reference to FIGS. 216 to 224. FIG. 216 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 217 is a circuit diagram of the motor drive circuit, FIG. 218 is a circuit diagram showing the main control solenoid drive circuit, and FIG. 219 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 220 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control board, FIG. 221 is a circuit showing the payout motor drive circuit, and FIG. 222 is a circuit diagram showing the production control solenoid drive circuit. FIG. 223 is a circuit diagram showing the production control motor drive circuit, and FIG. 224 is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be explained, followed by the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the circuit of the production drive board. Note that the wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of various boards will also be explained as appropriate.

[11-1. Main control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power for the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. In the +12V to +5V generation circuit 1310g, +5V is generated as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control board 1310. This local power source +5V has the same potential as +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 216, +5V as a local power source serving as a control power source for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generation circuit 1310g is first inputted to the main control filter circuit 1310h. This main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND), and removes noise components from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), so that it first generates a ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). has been removed and smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when an instantaneous power outage occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which is transferred to the VDD terminal after the instantaneous power outage occurs. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has one end electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by capacitor MC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and also to the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0, whereas the main control MPU 1310a The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the power supply board 630 via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3052, a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2401 , the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the second big winning hole sensor 2601, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1111, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. are the main control. Each is input to an input circuit 1310b.

Detection signal from gate sensor 2801, detection signal from general winning hole sensor 3051, detection signal from first starting hole sensor 3052, detection signal from second starting hole sensor 2401, detection from first big winning hole sensor 2402 The detection signals from the second big prize opening sensor 2601 and the magnetic sensor 1111 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. This vacant input terminal PA7 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and output via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the control board 633. This input port PB is made up of 8 bits like the input port PA. Furthermore, in addition to a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e being input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB (not shown), detection signals from other sensors are also input to the input port PB through the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are input to the respective predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its predetermined output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c. The main control solenoid is output to the nine-time detour circuit 1310d.

Note that detection signals from other sensors may not be input to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, but may be input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC, and input terminals that become vacant terminals in the port PC. Similarly to input terminal PA7 of input port PA, it is electrically connected to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, is composed of 8 bits.

[11-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be explained. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here as an example.

The main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input, as shown in FIG. (that is, the +12V power supply line), and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3.Transistor MTR0 In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side (provided on the main control board 1310). This is a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, which is electrically different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the other end of the connected resistor MR5, and the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the signal input to one of them (MIC10A) The input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

[11-1-2. Motor drive circuit under control of main control board]
Next, the motor drive circuit under the control of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The game board may be provided with a member that distributes the game balls that have entered the ball entry section (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the downstream side using a distribution piece that swings like a wiper. . An example of an electric drive source for operating such a distribution piece is a stepping motor, which is a drive motor. This drive motor is driven by a motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310. The rotational motion of the rotating shaft of the drive motor is converted into a wiper-like swinging motion by the distribution piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Here, a first distribution drive is used to distribute game balls that have entered a ball entry section (not shown) provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5 to a downstream path using a first distribution piece that swings like a wiper. A description will be given of the drive circuit of the motor and the drive circuit of the second sorting drive motor that further distributes the game balls sorted by the first sorting piece to a downstream route using a second sorting piece that swings like a wiper. do.

The motor drive circuit 1310v includes a drive circuit 1310va for the first distribution drive motor and a drive circuit 1310vb for the second distribution drive motor. The drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor can mutually switch between the operating voltage and the stop voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 according to the rotational state of the first distribution drive motor. The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m that can drive the first distribution drive motor, and the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n that can drive the first distribution drive motor. The drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor can mutually switch between the operating voltage and the stop voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 according to the rotational state of the second distribution drive motor. The second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310p that can drive the second distribution drive motor, and the second distribution drive motor drive IC 1310q that can drive the second distribution drive motor. Since the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor and the drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor are the same circuit, the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor will be explained here, and the drive circuit 1310va of the second distribution drive motor will be explained. The motor drive circuit 1310vb may be expressed in parentheses following the reference numeral referred to in the description of the first distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310va.

The first sorting drive motor always swings the first sorting piece like a wiper, and the second sorting drive motor always swings the second sorting piece like a wiper. must be driven at all times. However, if the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven, the first and second distribution drive motors generate excessive heat, causing the first and second distribution drive motors or the first and second distribution drive motors to be driven. There is a risk that a malfunction or failure may occur in the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs, and the rotational movement of the rotation shaft of the drive motor may be caused by a wiper-like oscillating movement by the distribution piece through a gear mechanism (not shown). Therefore, if a problem occurs in the gear mechanism for some reason and it becomes difficult to rotate, the distribution drive motor of the first and second distribution drive motors that has a problem with the gear mechanism and becomes difficult to rotate will be replaced. Due to overload and excessive heat generation, there is a risk that a malfunction or failure may occur in the distribution drive motor or the distribution drive motor drive IC that drives the distribution drive motor. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first and second distribution drive motors are driven to swing the first and second distribution pieces like wipers, the operating voltage is used. , When driving the second distribution drive motor to stop the first and second distribution pieces, the voltage switching circuit that uses the stopping voltage is controlled, and the current flowing to the first and second distribution drive motors is controlled. By using a polyswitch as a resettable fuse to protect the first and second distribution drive motors and the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs that drive the first and second distribution drive motors, the first and second distribution drive motors are protected. The heat generated by the constant driving of the first and second distribution drive motors is suppressed.

[11-1-2a. First and second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit]
The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly includes a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. has been done. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50 (MR60) and the other end of a resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of resistor MR50 (MR60) is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of main control MPU 1310a via main control output circuit 1310c as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 1.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is connected to a D-type flip-flop for voltage switching of the first distribution piece (not shown as a line that transmits a signal called voltage switch 1) (shown as a line that transmits a signal called voltage switch 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for switching the voltage of the second distribution piece. The input terminal of this first distributed segment voltage switching D type flip-flop (second distributed segment voltage switching D type flip flop) is connected to the first distributed segment voltage switching output terminal (second distributed segment voltage switching output terminal) of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the output terminal (output terminal for switching the two divided voltages).

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. A gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to a source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via a resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is connected to a +12V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 (that is, a +12V power line)) and electricity. connected. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). . The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and It is electrically connected to the power line (that is, different from the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa. The other end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of Zener diodes MD51, MD52 (MD61, MD62), and supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). It is electrically connected to the connector terminal as a +12V-U (+12V-D) power line.

[11-1-2b. First and second distribution drive motor drive IC]
The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) includes four chipped NPN type Darlington transistor elements and four diode elements built into the same package. Among the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), and the base terminal 8 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66). Terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the terminal of the connector as a U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line) through which a current for exciting /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which a current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is connected as a U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) through which a current for exciting /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. Electrically connected to the terminals of the connector.

The other ends of the resistors MR54 to MR57 (MR64 to MR67) are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of a resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, instructs the start and stop of excitation of φ1 of the first distribution drive motor. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) (D-type flip-flop for φ1 of the second distribution drive motor, not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal MPD0 (MPD4). has been done. The input terminal of this D-type flip-flop for φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (D-type flip-flop for φ1 of the second distribution drive motor) is the output for φ1 of the first distribution drive motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (the φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, is connected to the MPD1 (MPD5 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) (D-type flip-flop for /φ1 of the second distribution drive motor, not shown). There is. The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is connected to the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor at a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (/φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

One end of the resistor MR56 (MR66) is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor. The line for transmitting the signal is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) (D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the second distribution drive motor, not shown). The input terminal of this D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (D-type flip-flop for φ2 of the second distribution drive motor) is the output for φ2 of the first distribution drive motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (the φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, is connected to the MPD3 (MPD7 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (not shown) (the D-type flip-flop for /φ2 of the second distribution drive motor, not shown). There is. The input terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is connected to the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor at a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (/φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

The first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n (1310q) has four built-in diodes.The first and second diodes are arranged as a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged as a pair. and is placed inside the package.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. has been done. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. has been done. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert back electromotive force generated when excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is stopped into heat. By removing the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors are protected.

The +12V-U (+12V-D) power line that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is connected to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common) of the connector of the motor. The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line), through which the current that excites φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows, connects the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) through the connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the sixth pin φ1 of the connector. The U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line), through which the current that excites /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows, is connected to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the second pin /φ1 of the connector of the two-distribution drive motor. The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line), through which the current that excites φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows, connects the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) through the connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the fifth pin φ2 of the connector. The U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line), through which the current that excites /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows, is connected to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminal and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to /φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the two-distribution drive motor.

MPD0 to MPD3 instruct to start or stop excitation for φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor, and start of excitation for φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the second distribution drive motor. When the oscillation drive data MPD0 to MPD7, which is 8-bit information including MPD4 to MPD7 instructing to stop or stop, is output from the main control MPU 1310a, The signals are input to base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the first distribution motor drive IC 1310n and base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q, respectively. The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) starts when the system of the main control board 1310 starts (main control side power-on processing described later is performed and main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later is started. ), the first distributed drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) changes the operating voltage or stop voltage according to the swing drive data MPD0 to MPD3 (MPD4 to MPD7) from the main control MPU 1310a in port output processing. A current is applied to excite φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) using the switched voltage.

Here, the operation of the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. The first distributed drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) operates when the system of the main control board 1310 is started (main control side power-on processing described later is performed and main control side timer interrupt processing (port output (process) is started), when the logic of the signal voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output processing is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, The voltage of the +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is pulled up to +12V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) to drive the first distribution. +12V is supplied to the motor (second distribution drive motor) as an operating voltage via a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a power line of +12V-U (+12V-D). Note that the voltage is not supplied from the +12V-U (+12V-D) power line to the +5 power line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the logic of the signal voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as a stop voltage logic which is an inversion of the logic of the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. Then, when the +12V from the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is cut off, the voltage of the power supply line +12V-U (+12V-D), which supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), is switched to the diode MD50. (MD60) to the +5V side, +5V is applied to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as a stopping voltage via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) to +12V-U (+12V-D ) is supplied as a power line.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage will be briefly explained. Power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V×voltage V÷resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage of +12V is 144/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage of +5V is 25/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage of +12V is more than 5 times (5.76 = 144/25) compared to the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage of +5V, so the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. becomes. This also applies to the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

In other words, even if temperature rise is a problem when driven by a single power supply (continuous drive) using +12V, which is the operating voltage, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving with +5V, which is the stop voltage. .

The package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n (1310q) consists of first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). Absorbing heat generation and heat generation by the first to fourth diodes that convert back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) into heat, This absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island equipment of the game hall is installed in a row facing away from other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment of the game hall is high due to the heat emitted from the power supply boards and various control boards of the pachinko machines.

Therefore, even if the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first distribution drive motor drive When the temperature around the IC1310n (1310q), that is, the outside air, is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so heat is stored in the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n (1310q). It happens. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) increases and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors There is a risk of transistor failure.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first distribution By energizing φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as consecutively as possible, φ1, φ2, /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) , /φ2 is stopped, and the back electromotive force that occurs when the excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is stopped. The number of times power is converted into heat and removed by the first to fourth diodes can be reduced. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small level, which can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

In this embodiment, a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60) is used in the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) without using a relay. This is because a time lag occurs in relays and there is large variation in performance between relays, making it difficult to accurately control the distribution operation.

[11-1-2c. Polyswitch]
Here, a polyswitch will be explained as a resettable fuse. The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as a +12V-U (+12V-D) power line via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). Polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature.The resistance value increases rapidly from a certain temperature and the main body generates heat.This heat lowers the conductivity and interrupts the current, causing the main body to When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns to normal. If this is used, the current flowing to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), which is the load, is restricted and the current flowing to the first distribution drive motor, which is the load, is reduced. (second distribution drive motor) can be protected. Fuses can be used to limit the current flowing to the load. Although this fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing when an overcurrent flows, it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent someone from illegally modifying the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game and acquiring illegal game balls. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. It is caulked with screws, etc. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. In this case, if a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310 and the fuse blows, the caulked portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the caulked part of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. becomes unable to do so.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is employed as an element that limits overcurrent, similar to a fuse. With this, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike a fuse, the polyswitch itself will not be destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. ) can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the caulked portion.

The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a main body shaped like a rectangular parallelepiped, and has a lead shape in which two leads protrude downward from the bottom surface. As mentioned above, in the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between element resistance and element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a certain temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat reduces conductivity and causes current to flow. When it is shut off and the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and it returns to normal. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by Polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), the two leads of Polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) are arranged vertically to reduce the thickness of the body of Polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). The decreasing surface can be in the vertical direction, making it easier for the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) to be convected upward.

In addition, since a large current flows through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), there are terminals for supplying power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), and each phase of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2) is arranged near a connector having terminals for exciting the magnets (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2). This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise caused by the current to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) on other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

In addition, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), it protects the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) from overheating. be able to.

In this embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor in the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the second distribution drive motor. Although one switch MPS60 is dedicated to the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the collector terminals 2, 4 of the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs 1310n, 1310q It may be configured such that one polyswitch is provided between each of the motors 9 and 11 and the corresponding terminals of the connectors of the first and second sorting drive motors.

Further, in this embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor in the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor. Although one switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distributed stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the switch MPS60 is supplied to the first and second distributed stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. It may be configured such that one common polyswitch is provided exclusively for each of the +12V and +5V motor power supplies, or the +12V and +12V polyswitches are respectively supplied to the first and second distributed stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p. One common polyswitch may be provided exclusively for the motor power supply only.

For example, when driving a stepping motor as another drive motor together with the first distribution drive motor (the first distribution drive motor is driven by the first distribution drive motor drive IC1310n, the other drive motors are driven by the other drive motors). In the case of driving by a drive IC), the motor power supply supplied to the first distribution drive motor and the other drive motors can be configured by switching the motor power supply to the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the common polyswitch for the first distribution drive motor and the other drive motors is the polyswitch MPS50, and via this polyswitch MPS50, the motor power supply of +12V or +5V is applied to the first distribution drive motor and the other stepping motors. Each is supplied.

Further, in this embodiment, unipolar stepping motors are used as the first and second distribution drive motors, but bipolar stepping motors may be used instead. In this case, one polyswitch is dedicated to each terminal to which motor power supplies of +12V and +5V are supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In addition, in this embodiment, the polyswitch employed as a resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor or the like.
However, even if a ceramic PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) element or a bimetal is used as a resettable fuse, the same effect as the polyswitch described above can be achieved.

[11-1-3. Main control solenoid drive circuit]
Next, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d includes a starting port solenoid 2415, which is a drive solenoid, as an electric drive for moving (actuating) the second starting port door 2414 to open and close the second starting port 2004, and a first winning port. The first attacker solenoid 2418, which is a drive solenoid, serves as an electric drive for opening and closing the first prize opening 2005 by moving (activating) the door 2417, and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which is a drive solenoid, is used to move (operate) the second prize opening door 2611 to open and close the first prize opening 2005. The second attacker solenoid 2612, which is a drive solenoid, is electrically driven to open and close the two major winning openings 2006.

Drive solenoids such as the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are activated by the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. is driven by. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d mainly includes a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the drive solenoid.

As described above, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are activated by the main control solenoid drive circuit of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. 1310d, and like the first and second distribution drive motors described above, the system of the main control board 1310 starts up when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (main control side power-on processing described later). It is not always driven after the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing), which will be described later, is started. However, while driving the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacking solenoid 2612, for some reason, the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacking solenoid 2418, and second attacking solenoid 2612 generate excessive heat. As a result, a malfunction or failure occurs in the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, second attacker solenoid 2612, or the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612. In addition, there is a risk that the mechanism for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, the mechanism for opening and closing the first grand prize opening 2005, and the mechanism for opening and closing the second grand prize opening 2006 may be malfunctioning, making them difficult to move (difficult to operate). ), the defective solenoid among the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612 that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) is overloaded and generates excessive heat, causing the defect. There is a risk that malfunctions or failures may occur in the solenoid that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) or the solenoid drive IC that drives the solenoid. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612 are driven.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the current flowing to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacking solenoid 2612 is limited using a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. By protecting the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the second attacker solenoid 2612, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second Heat generated by driving the attacker solenoid 2612 is suppressed.

[11-1-3a. Drive solenoid drive IC]
One end of the polyswitch MPS40 is electrically connected to a +24V power line (that is, a +24V power line created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f). The other end is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD45 and MD46, respectively, and is connected to the connector as a power line SOL+24V that supplies power to the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612. electrically connected to the terminal.

The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da has four chipped NPN Darlington transistor elements and four diode elements built into the same package. Among the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR45, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the resistor MR46. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR47.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an S-SOL line through which a current for exciting the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows, and the collector terminal 2 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor 4 is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D1-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the terminal of the second attacker solenoid 2612. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D2-SOL line through which current for exciting the coil flows.

The other ends of the resistors MR45 to MR47 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, one end of the resistor MR45 is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, and the other end of the resistor MR45 receives a signal MPC0 that instructs the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 to start or stop excitation. This line is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for the coil of the starting port solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of this D-type flip-flop for the coil of the starting port solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the starting port solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR46, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, is a line that transmits a signal called MPC1 that instructs the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 to start or stop excitation. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for the coil of the first attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the first attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the first attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

One end of the resistor MR47 is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the output terminal for the coil of the second attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to ground (GND).

Note that the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), whereas the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da. It is not connected to the outside.

The drive solenoid drive IC1310da has four built-in diodes.The first and second diodes are arranged as a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged as a pair in the package. It is located.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD45.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD46.

Among the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are activated when excitation to the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 is stopped. The first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it.

A power line SOL+24V that supplies power to the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612 connects the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and It is electrically connected to each connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612. The S-SOL line through which the current that excites the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the starting port solenoid 2415 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). A D1-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the first attacker solenoid 2418 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). A D2-SOL line through which a current that excites the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown).

The system of the main control board 1310 is started (the main control side power-on processing described later is performed and the main control side timer interrupt processing (port output processing) described later is started), and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Accordingly, in the port output process, the main side drive solenoid, which is information from MPC0 to MPC2, instructs to start or stop excitation of the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. When the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 are output from the main control MPU 1310a, they are inputted to the base terminals 1, 5, and 8 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da through the corresponding D-type flip-flops and each resistor, respectively. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da excites the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 according to drive data MPC0 to MPC2 for the main side drive solenoid from the main control MPU 1310a. Pass current.

[11-1-3b. Polyswitch]
Here, a polyswitch will be explained as a resettable fuse. The +24V power line (that is, the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f is connected to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The polyswitch MPS40 is supplied as a power supply line of SOL+24V via the polyswitch MPS40.The polyswitch MPS40 has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature, and the resistance value increases rapidly from a certain temperature, causing the main body to generate heat. The conductivity decreases and the current is cut off, and when the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns to normal.Using this, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second By limiting the current flowing to the attacker solenoid 2612, it is possible to protect the starting port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, and second attacker solenoid 2612, which are loads.A fuse can be cited as an example of a device that limits the current flowing to the load. Although this fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing when an overcurrent flows, it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent someone from illegally modifying the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game and acquiring illegal game balls. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body form a sealing mechanism. The caulking part is caulked by, for example, a one-way screw. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. In this case, if a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310 and the fuse blows, the caulked portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the caulked part of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. becomes unable to do so.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is employed as an element that limits overcurrent, similar to a fuse. With this, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike fuses, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the attack solenoid 2418 and the second attack solenoid 2612 can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the caulked portion.

[11-1-4. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 2192, the main control board 1310 has two types: +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and +24V from the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630. voltage is supplied via the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. 633, the payout control MPU 633aa, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, etc. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later and stops the progress of the game. However, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process to be described later, stops the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), and The control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information, and the performance display device 1600 ensures that the main control MPU 1310a can complete the main control side power-off process and the payout control unit power-off process by the payout control 633aa. In order to cut power consumption, an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight is turned off and the progress of the performance is stopped.

Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will first be described, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failures or momentary power failures, the monitoring of +12V power failures or momentary power failures, and the output of a power failure notice signal.

[11-1-4a. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 219, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, have one end connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310). In addition to the resistor MR20, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line (which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line)) It is electrically connected to the terminal and +5V is applied to the main control board side, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is connected to a +24V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630f of the power generation circuit 630f) (that is, a +24V power supply It is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitoring voltage V1") of the +12V power supply line (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitoring voltage V1") with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is The monitoring voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as "+12V monitoring voltage V2") of the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the creation circuit 630f and the reference voltage Vref. It is used for comparison.The +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 2nd terminal, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the positive terminal No. 5, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal No. 6 of MIC21B.The results of these comparisons are applied to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 is equipped with two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment.The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is , one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Ripples are removed and smoothed by the MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1-4b. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 219, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the +24V power line (created by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 is electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, +24V power line), and the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end. The other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND).The positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to a certain No. 3 terminal is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23.The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are as follows. , +24V is monitored when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The voltage V1 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side. At the same time, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. . Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal generated on the control board side is pulled up to the +5V side and the logic becomes HI, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4c. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end connected to the +12V power line (created by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f), as shown in FIG. The other end of the resistor MR24 is electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +12V power line), and the other end of the resistor MR25 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end. The other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND).The positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to a certain No. 5 terminal is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25.The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are as follows. , +12V is monitored when the voltage starts to drop from +12V and reaches the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The voltage V2 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so one end is created on the main control board side. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal generated on the control board side is pulled up to the +5V side and the logic becomes HI, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4d. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are each electrically connected to the ground (GND), so they are clock input terminals. There is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or momentary power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is connected to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The applied +5V generated on the main control board side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts is in a state where it is not electrically connected to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal inputted from the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310c. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, its logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. A signal output from the terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is transmitted to the main control output circuit. It is output from 1310c to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. The non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is connected to the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A). ) is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

A circuit made up of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to the input terminal of port PB.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is input.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal is of an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 via the resistor MR30. electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected to the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. The circuit 633ab includes a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line (that is, the +12V power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa shown in FIG. 211.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is transferred to the main control board side by the resistor MR32. By being pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor MTR21 turns ON, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR32, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. . As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 633.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the previous stage transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is of an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply line (power source It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the power line (that is, +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f, and is shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510. The logic is the same as the peripheral power outage warning signal inputted to the peripheral power outage warning signal, whereas the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is sent to the delivery control board 633 as the power outage warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the output has two transistors, one at the front stage and the other at the rear stage. The logic is the inverse of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control output circuit 1310a through the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a on the board 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a transistor of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected. The collector terminal of the MTR 23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). has been done. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310a is implemented in Between the boards with the payout control board 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, main The power outage is predicted by the logic of the power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using, for example, +12V, which is a DC power source higher than +5V, which is the control power source of the control MPU 1310a, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this way, the power line (that is, the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is connected to the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310, as described above. 1310b, the motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 212, and the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. control power generation circuit 1510z, +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 213, LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 213, effect display device shown in FIG. The power is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. In other words, in addition to the main control board 1310, the +12V power line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, etc. Even if the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, for example, due to electrical trouble for some reason to the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, the control power generation circuit If an overcurrent flows to the 1510z, the potential of the +12V power supply line may drop, or if the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the presentation display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the presentation display device 1600, the backlight, or the drive circuit is electrically damaged for some reason. Due to a problem, an overcurrent may flow to either the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600, resulting in a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line, or the effect drive When the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the board 1720 (or when the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is on standby) ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit 1720c2, causing the +12V power line to become damaged. Due to a drop in potential or some electrical trouble to the LED constant current drive circuit on the decorative board of the game board 5, overcurrent flows to the LED constant current drive circuit on the decorative board of the game board 5, causing the +12V power supply line to drop. The potential of In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 that supplies the +12V power line from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. If a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble in the wiring pattern being formed or the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, etc., the +12V voltage will be increased due to overcurrent. The potential of the power supply line may drop. Then, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which causes the main control MPU 1310a to perform main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

Further, as described above, the power line (that is, +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f is connected to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the main control board In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, the payout control board 633 (the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the production drive shown in FIG. It is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the board 1720. In other words, in addition to the main control board 1310, the +24V power line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, etc., so the main control board 1310 and the payout control board that constitute the main board 633 is operating normally, when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the production drive board 1720 (or the +24V system of the game board 5 When the electric drive source (drive solenoid) is waiting to be driven), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V driver circuit of the game board 5 When an overcurrent flows to 1720c1, the potential of the +24V power supply line drops. In addition, leakage may occur due to some electrical trouble in the wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, the production drive board 1720, etc., or the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. If a current is generated or a short circuit occurs, the potential of the +24V power supply line will also drop. Then, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which causes the main control MPU 1310a to perform main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[11-1-5. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[11-1-5a. Overcurrent protection to +12V power line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power supply line, as shown in FIG. The effect display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse SF12 that can flow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current, and the effect display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse PF12 that can flow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse PF12a1 that can flow current up to the upper limit of allowable current of the branch first system as a fuse for the branch first system that branches from the +12V fuse PF12 into two systems, and the +12V fuse PF12 is installed in the effect display device 1600. A +12V fuse PF12a2 is provided as a fuse for the second branch system that branches into two systems, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system, and the +12V power line is installed on the production drive board 1720 to the upper limit of allowable current of the production drive board. A +12V fuse EF12 that can flow a current is provided, and a fuse that can flow a current up to the upper limit of allowable current of the game board drive motor is provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 on the performance drive board 1720, and each decorative board of the game board 5 Of these, a +12V fuse DF12 is installed on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, which allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current on the game board side decorative board (regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit). (A +12V fuse DF12 may be provided to all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power line is supplied, which allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the game board decorative boards.) It should be noted that +12V supplied via +12V fuse PF12a1 as a fuse of the first branch system is used to generate a liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z, and this liquid crystal panel power supply is used to power the liquid crystal panel and back of the production display device 1600. Since the power is supplied to the lights and drive circuit, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 are supplied with a liquid crystal display made from +12V, which is supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the fuse of the first branch system. A panel power supply and +12V supplied via a +12V fuse PF12a2 as a fuse of the second branch system are supplied.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the control power generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of +12V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current flows to the control power supply generation circuit 1510z due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to melt. . In this way, the +12V fuse SF12 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse SF12 is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current. By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The progress of payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued without performing processing when the control unit power is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel power supply of the performance display device 1600 is generated in the +12V power supply line of the performance display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z due to an electrical trouble to the circuit 1600z for some reason, the +12V fuse of the first branch system of the production display device 1600 flows. The fuse PF12a1 is designed to blow out. In addition, in this embodiment, due to an electrical trouble for some reason with the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit of the effect display device 1600, the +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as a fuse for the second branch system is When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply, the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system of the production display device 1600, is blown. , and due to some electrical trouble with the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600, a branch is caused to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. of the effect display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the two systems flows, the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the branch second system of the effect display device 1600, is blown. In addition, in this embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and +12V, which is the fuse of the second branch system. Among the fuses PF12a2, a fuse whose capacity is larger than that of any of the fuses and whose capacity is smaller than the combined capacity of both fuses is selected in advance. Therefore, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the source fuse, is one of the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, in the +12V power supply line. Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, if the overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the upper limit of the primary allowable current, the fuse may blow. Note that the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the production display device 1600, is the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system. In the case where the main fuse PF12 for +12V is the same as the one in which If an overcurrent flows and one of the +12V fuses PF12a2, which is a fuse for +12V, blows, if the overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the upper limit of the main allowable current, it will blow. In some cases, if an overcurrent flows through the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, and both fuses blow, the fuse will blow out. In this way, the effect display device 1600 is equipped with the +12V fuse PF12 which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 which is the fuse of the second branch system. Since the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse, the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the second branch system, will blow out due to overcurrent. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The payout control unit in the power-on process can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the power-off process.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the +12V system driver circuit of the performance drive board 1720 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720. When the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the 1720c2 (or while waiting for the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to be driven), If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V A fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to each decoration board of the game board 5 in addition to the +12V driver circuit 1720c2. The capacity is preselected based on the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 and the upper limit of allowable current of each decorative board of the game board 5 on the game board side.

The +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to drive, so the effects of the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 are limited. Among the lighting effects of various LEDs by the game board 5, the lighting effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over the effects by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. It has become. Therefore, each decorative board of the game board 5 is designed such that the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 is blown out earlier than the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 is blown out. The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 of the performance drive board 1720 are selected in advance, and the capacity is determined in advance by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 of the performance drive board 1720 is set in advance so that the light emission performance of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 can be continued with priority over the performance.

In a case where the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is continued with priority over the effect by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 is , the capacity of each decorative board of the game board 5 is larger than the capacity selected for use up to the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side, and the selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 If the +12V fuse EF12 is selected in advance to be smaller than the sum of Even if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of permissible current of the game board side drive motor flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 blows. However, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line production drive board, it may melt. For example, as the capacity of the +12V fuse EF12, the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to be used up to the maximum allowable current of the game board side decorative board, and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. If the same capacity is selected in advance, the +12V fuse EF12 is used when each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board 5. , an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive motor flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 melts. However, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line production drive board, it may melt.

It should be noted that among the effects by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emitting effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 Contrary to the case where the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect by each decorative board of the game board 5, the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized. 5, when continuing the performance using the +12V electric drive source (drive motor), each decoration on the game board 5 is The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 on each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 are set in advance so that the +12V fuse DF12 on the board is blown out first. At the same time, the effect is driven so that the effect using the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 can be given priority and continued over the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 on the board 1720 is set in advance.

In addition, due to an overload or electrical trouble to the 12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720 for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the 12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720, and the +12V system electric drive source (drive In order to stop both the performance by the motor) and the light emission performance of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the performance drive board 1720, The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect driving board 1720 is set in advance to be less than or equal to the capacity of the smaller fuse among the capacities of the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5.

In this way, by providing the +12V fuse EF12 on the production drive board 1720 and providing the fuse on the +12V driver circuit 1720c2, the +12V fuse EF12 and the fuse of the +12V driver circuit 1720c2 will melt due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power outage notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the process when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5. The +12V fuse DF12 of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the boards causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side to flow through each LED of the game board 5 and the decorative board of the game board 5. Then, the +12V fuse DF12 on the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. In addition, a +12V fuse DF12 is provided for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied, regardless of the presence or absence of an LED constant current drive circuit, which allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the game board side decorative board. In this case, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decorative boards of the game board 5 due to the +12V fuse DF12 on all the decorative boards on the game board 5, The +12V fuses DF12 on all decorative boards of the game board 5 are designed to melt. In this way, the +12V fuse DF12 is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse DF12 is installed when the overcurrent exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side decorative board. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the current must be applied to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power line is supplied up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side.) When providing a +12V fuse DF12 that can flow, install the +12V fuse DF12 on all decorative boards of the game board 5 so that the +12V fuse DF12 will be blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current on the game board side decorative board. ), the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and There is no need to output to the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the payout control unit, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, and the effect drive board 1720 , in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5, electrical connection to the peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, effect display device 1600, effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. due to some reason Due to such troubles, leakage current or short circuits may occur, causing damage to the peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, effect display device 1600, effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the +12V fuses SF12, PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2, EF12, and DF12 provided on each board, the voltage is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not need to output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the main control side, which will be described later. It is possible to continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the power-on process, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) without doing so. Note that if a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to electrical trouble to the liquid crystal output board 1530 for some reason, an overcurrent will flow to the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be damaged. Since the overcurrent also flows through the peripheral control board 1510, which is the upper board, the +12V fuse SF12 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will blow.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit on the board (or when the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven). ), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor may be applied to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V system driver circuit. When the voltage flows, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) or +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the current flows and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit blows, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side, it will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit, so that the +12V fuse and the +12V driver circuit fuse are blown due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this implementation system, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows to each LED of the door frame 3 or the decorative board of the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the board. , the +12V fuse on the decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. In addition, when installing a +12V fuse that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side for all decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse on all the decorative boards of the door frame 3, the door frame The +12V fuses on all the decorative boards in No. 3 are designed to blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is fused due to an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decorative board. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, current must be passed to all decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied up to the upper limit of allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side. When installing +12V fuses, install +12V fuses on all decorative boards of the door frame 3 so that the +12V fuses will melt due to an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current on the door frame side decorative board. ), suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc. In the line, due to electrical trouble for some reason to each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., leakage current or short circuit occurs, and the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are By suppressing the drop in the potential of the supplied +12V power line, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process, and the payout control MPU 633aa can be The progress of payout (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued without performing time processing.

[11-1-5b. Overcurrent protection to +24V power line]
In addition, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +24V power line, as shown in FIG. A +24V fuse SF24 that can flow current up to the upper limit is provided, and a +12V fuse PF12 that can flow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current is provided in the effect display device 1600 as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. 1720 is provided with a +24V fuse EF24 that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current of the production drive board 1720, and also allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive solenoid to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 on the production drive board 1720. We have a fuse that can do this.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or the peripheral If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current flows due to some electrical trouble to the production drive board 1720, etc., which is a subsequent board of the control board 1510, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 flows. is designed to melt. In this way, the +24V fuse SF24 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse SF24 is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The progress of payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued without performing the control unit power-off processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the +24V system driver circuit of the performance drive board 1720 is connected to the +24V power line of the performance drive board 1720. When the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the 1720c1 (or while waiting for the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 to be driven), If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V A fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown. The +24V fuse EF24 is designed to blow if the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 blows, but an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of +24V power line performance drive board allowable current. In this way, by providing the +24V fuse EF24 on the production drive board 1720 and providing the fuse in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1, the +24V fuse EF24 and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit 1720c1 will melt due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power outage notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the process when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the production drive board 1720, etc. 1510, an electrical problem with the performance drive board 1720, etc. for some reason may cause a leakage current or a short circuit, resulting in an overcurrent in the peripheral control board 1510, the performance drive board 1720, etc. When the voltage flows, the +24V fuses SF24 and EF24 provided on each board are blown out, thereby suppressing a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power failure warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a performs main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the game without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. (dispense operation) can be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is connected to the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V driver circuit on the board (or when the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven) ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid may be applied to the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V system driver circuit. When the voltage flows, a fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid to the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the current flows and the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit blows, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, it will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit, so that the +24V fuse and the +24V driver circuit fuse are blown due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each of the door frame 3 If an electrical problem with the drive board, etc. for some reason causes leakage current or short circuit, and an overcurrent flows to each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, each board will Since the provided +24V fuse is blown, a decrease in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is This eliminates the need for the power outage warning signal to be output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a continues the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing, which will be described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. I can do it.

[11-2. Payout control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power source of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The backup power supplied to is supplied as voltage VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 220, +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The output control three-terminal filter PIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and its No. 2 terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , +5V with noise components removed is output from its No. 3 terminal. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND). has been removed and smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, when an instantaneous power outage occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, after the instantaneous power outage occurs. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). Note that the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (In this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)) has been selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 can connect the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off. The respective charges are applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the instantaneous power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by capacitor PC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and also to the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the power supply board 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0, whereas the payout control MPU 633aa The diode PD0 prevents the supply voltage VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, through the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are each input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are as follows. They are respectively input to input terminals PA0 to PA5 of input port PA of payout control MPU 633aa via payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. These vacant input terminals PA6 and PA7 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

A dispensing power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. Detection signals from the sensors are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the input terminals that are vacant are input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA. , PA7, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal.

[11-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be explained. Since the payout control input circuits 633ab are the same circuit, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure notice signal, which is the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described as an example. .

As shown in FIG. 220, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the dispensing power outage notice signal, which is the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, has one end connected to a +12V power supply line (the power supply line in the power supply board 630). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40, which is electrically connected to the power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line), and is connected to the other end of the resistor PR40 via the resistor PR41. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 6330. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to a +5V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 (that is, +5V power line)). The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa.

[11-2-2. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the payout motor drive circuit 633ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 221. The payout motor drive circuit 633ad is a circuit that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89 in response to a control signal from the payout control MPU 633aa. When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 rotates, the payout blade 589 shown in FIG. 89 rotates, and game balls can be paid out as prize balls.

The dispensing motor drive circuit 633ad has a voltage switching circuit 633ada that can mutually switch between an operating voltage and a stop voltage for excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 according to the rotational state of the dispensing motor 584. and a dispensing motor drive IC 633adb that can drive the dispensing motor 584.

During the acceleration period from when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped to rotating at a constant rotational speed, and during the deceleration period from when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is from rotating at a constant rotational speed to stopping, high torque is applied. In order to prevent step-out, it is necessary to apply a high voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. High torque is not required when rotating at a rotational speed of . Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped or rotating, when a high voltage is applied to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 for excitation, the dispensing motor 584 is The generation of heat may cause a malfunction or failure of the dispensing motor 584, so it is necessary to suppress the generation of heat.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the acceleration period from when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped until it rotates at a constant rotational speed, and from when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is from a state where it is rotating at a constant rotational speed until it stops. During the deceleration period, +12V is used as the operating voltage, which is a high voltage. During this period, the voltage switching circuit 633ada is controlled to use +5V as a stop voltage, which is a lower voltage than the operating voltage, and a polyswitch is used as a resettable fuse to control the current flowing to the dispensing motor 584. By restricting and protecting the dispensing motor 584 and the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb that drives the dispensing motor 584, heat generation of the dispensing motor 584 is suppressed.

[11-2-2a. Voltage switching circuit]
The voltage switching circuit 633ada mainly includes a transistor PTR50, a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, a diode P50, and a polyswitch PPS50 as a resettable fuse. The base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR50, and the other end of a resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to ground (GND). The other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via a payout control output circuit 633ac as a line for transmitting a voltage switching signal.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to the output terminal of a voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a voltage switching signal. The input terminal of this voltage switching D type flip-flop is electrically connected to the voltage switching output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 via a resistor PR52. A gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 via a resistor PR53. The source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a +12V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 (that is, +12V power line)). has been done. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD50, which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch PPS50. The anode terminal of the diode PD50 is electrically connected to a +5V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 (that is, +5V power line)). . The other end of the polyswitch PPS50 is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes PD51 and PD52, respectively, and is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the dispensing motor 584.

[11-2-2b. Dispensing motor drive IC]
The dispensing motor drive IC633adb has four chipped NPN type Darlington transistor elements and four diode elements built into the same package. Among the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR54, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the resistor PR55. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR56, and the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR57. electrically connected.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the Hφ1 line through which a current for exciting φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows, and the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the H/φ1 line through which the current that excites the /φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the current that excites the φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the H/φ2 line through which the current that excites /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows. It is connected to the.

The other ends of the resistors PR54 to PR57 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via a payout control output circuit 633ac. Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, receives a signal HPD0 that instructs to start or stop excitation of φ1 of the dispensing motor 584. As a transmission line, it is electrically connected to the output terminal of a φ1 D type flip-flop of a payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the D type flip-flop for φ1 of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ1 of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

One end of the resistor PR55 is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D type flip-flop for /φ1 of a dispensing motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the dispensing motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ1 output terminal of the dispensing motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, is shown as a line that transmits a signal PPD2 that instructs to start or stop excitation of φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for φ2 of the payout motor 584 that does not operate. The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR57, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, serves as a line for transmitting a signal PPD3 that instructs to start or stop excitation of /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for /φ2 of a dispensing motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the dispensing motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ2 output terminal of the dispensing motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the dispensing motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to ground (GND).

The dispensing motor drive IC633adb has four built-in diodes.The first and second diodes are arranged as a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged as a pair in the package. It is located.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD51.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD52.

The first to fourth diodes convert back electromotive force generated when excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped into heat and remove it. It protects the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor.

A power supply line called MOTH+12V that supplies power to the dispensing motor 584 is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common) of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 through the terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). connected to. The Hφ1 line through which the current that excites φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the sixth pin φ1 of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). The H/φ1 line through which the current that excites /φ1 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the second pin /φ1 of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). The Hφ2 line through which the current that excites φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the fifth pin φ2 of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). The H/φ2 line through which the current that excites /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the first pin /φ2 of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 via a terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown).

When the payout control MPU 633aa outputs payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD7, which is 8-bit information including HPD0 to HPD3, which instructs to start or stop excitation of the payout motors 584 φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2. , the above-mentioned corresponding D-type flip-flops, and respective resistors to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb, respectively. When the system of the payout control board 633 is activated (when the process at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is started), the payout motor drive IC 633adb controls the power supply of the payout control unit based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. According to the payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD3 from the payout control MPU 633aa in the port output process of the process, the payout motor 584 is operated at the voltage φ1, /φ1, φ2 with the voltage switched to the operating voltage or the stop voltage by the voltage switching circuit 633ada. , and /φ2.

Here, to briefly explain the operation of the voltage switching circuit 633ada, when the system of the payout control board 633 is started (when the payout control unit power-on process (port output process) described later is started), the port output When the voltage switching signal logic from the payout control MPU 633aa in the process is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned off, and the voltage of the power line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is changed by the field effect transistor PF50. By being pulled up to the +12V side, +12V is supplied to the dispensing motor 584 as an operating voltage via the polyswitch PPS50 as a power line called MOTH+12V. Note that the power is supplied from the MOTH+12V power line via the diode PD50 to the +5 power line (the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 (that is, the +5V power line) Never.

On the other hand, when the logic of the voltage switching signal from the dispensing control MPU 633aa is output as a stop voltage logic which is an inversion of the logic of the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned on and the +12V generated by the field effect transistor PF50 is output. By being cut off, the voltage of the power supply line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the dispensing motor 584 is pulled up to +5 V via the diode PD50, and +5 V is applied to the dispensing motor 584 as a stop voltage via the polyswitch PPS50. It is supplied as a power line called MOTH+12V.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage will be briefly explained. Power consumption W can be calculated using Ohm's law: voltage V×voltage V÷resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage of +12V is 144/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage of +5V is 25/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage of +12V is more than 5 times (5.76 = 144/25) compared to the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage of +5V, so the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. becomes. This also applies to the dispensing motor 584.

In other words, even if a temperature rise becomes a problem when driven by a single power supply using an operating voltage of +12V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving using a stop voltage of +5V.

The package of the dispensing motor drive IC633adb generates heat by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584, and φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584. It absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ2 into heat, and releases the absorbed heat to the outside air (around the payout motor 584). Since the island equipment of the game hall is installed in a row facing away from other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment of the game hall is high due to the heat emitted from the power supply boards and various control boards of the pachinko machines.

Therefore, even if the package of the dispensing motor 584 absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the temperature around the dispensing motor 584, that is, the outside air, increases. In this state, the efficiency with which the absorbed heat is released to the outside air decreases, so heat is stored in the package of the dispensing motor 584. Then, if the temperature of the package of the payout motor 584 becomes high and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, there is a risk that the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors will malfunction. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the dispensing motor 584 is driven to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 is continued as much as possible. By doing this, the number of times the excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped is reduced, and when the excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped. It is possible to reduce the number of times the back electromotive force generated in the first to fourth diodes is removed by converting it into heat by the first to fourth diodes. Thereby, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small level, which can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the dispensing motor 584. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the voltage switching circuit 633ada does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) PF50. This is because a time lag occurs in relays and there is large variation in performance between relays. By using a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, the dispensing operation can be accurately controlled.

[11-2-2c. Polyswitch]
Here, a polyswitch will be explained as a resettable fuse. The operating voltage or stopping voltage is supplied to the dispensing motor 584 via a polyswitch PPS50 as a power line called MOTH+12V. Polyswitch PPS50 has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature.The resistance value increases rapidly from a certain temperature, and the main body generates heat.This heat reduces the conductivity, cuts off the current, and cools the main body. The conductivity returns to normal, and by utilizing this, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584, which is a load, by limiting the current flowing to the payout motor 584, which is a load. Fuses can be used to limit the current flowing to the load. Although this fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing when an overcurrent flows, it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the Pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent someone from illegally modifying the important payout control board 633 that controls the payout operation of game balls to players and acquiring illegal game balls. Therefore, the dispensing control board 633 is housed in a dispensing control board box 632 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are attached to a one-way crimped portion, which is a sealing mechanism, for example. It is caulked with screws, etc. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The dispensing control board box 632 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like of the caulking part using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the dispensing control board box 632, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. In this case, if a fuse is mounted on the dispensing control board 633 and the fuse blows, the caulked portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the caulked part of the payout control board box 632 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game cannot be played. becomes unable to do so.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is employed as an element for limiting overcurrent, similar to a fuse. With this, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike fuses, the polyswitch itself will not be destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it, and the payout motor drive IC 633adb that drives the payout motor 584, which is the load, can be protected, and there is no need to destroy the caulked part. There is no

The polyswitch PPS 50 has a main body shaped like a rectangular parallelepiped, and has a lead shape in which two leads protrude downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch PPS50, in the relationship between element resistance and element temperature, the resistance value increases rapidly from a certain temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and interrupts the current. When the body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns to normal. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool down the heat generated by the Polyswitch PPS50, the two leads of the Polyswitch PPS50 are arranged vertically, so that the surface where the thickness of the main body of the Polyswitch PPS50 is reduced is in the vertical direction. This allows the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch PPS 50 to be easily convected upward.

In addition, since a large current flows through the polyswitch PPS50, it should be placed near a connector that has a terminal that supplies power to the dispensing motor 584, a terminal that excites each phase of the dispensing motor 584 (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2), etc. It is located in This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise caused by the current to the payout motor 584 with respect to other electronic components mounted on the payout control board 633.

Moreover, since the polyswitch PPS50 can limit the current flowing to the payout motor 584, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584 from overheating.

Note that although a unipolar stepping motor is used in this embodiment, a bipolar stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, one polyswitch is dedicated to each terminal to which motor power supplies of +12V and +5V are supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In addition, in this embodiment, the polyswitch employed as a resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor or the like.
However, even if a ceramic PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) element or a bimetal is used as a resettable fuse, the same effect as the polyswitch described above can be achieved.

[11-3. Production drive board circuit]
+5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 +24V is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635, and is then supplied to the production drive board 1720 via the +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, and +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510. are supplied to the effect driving board 1720 itself as well as subsequent boards such as each decorative board of the game board 5 via the +5V fuse EF5, +12V fuse EF12, and +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720. A +5V power line, a +12V power line, and a +24V power line.

As described above, the +24V power line supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, which is the production control solenoid drive circuit, and is supplied to the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720. As described above, the +12V power line supplied via the +12V power line is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, which is the performance control motor drive circuit, and to each decorative board of the game board 5. Here, as circuits of the effect drive board 1720, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 will be explained first, and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 will be explained.

[11-3-1. +24V driver circuit]
The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 drives and controls the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5. As the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, the backs provided in the third back front left decoration units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The front left drive solenoid 3717 (total of three back front left drive solenoids 3717) and the third back front right decorative unit 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the back front right production unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. There is a back front right drive solenoid 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817).

As shown in FIG. 222, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is connected to the back front left drive solenoids 3717 (total of 3 A driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the back front left drive solenoid 3717), and a back front right drive solenoid provided in the third back front right decoration units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back front right production unit 3800 of the back unit 3000, respectively. 3817 (a total of three back and front right drive solenoids 3817). Since the driver IC 1720c1a1 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 are the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c1a1 will be described here, and the driver IC 1720c1a2 may be expressed in parentheses following the reference numeral referred to in the description of the driver IC 1720c1a1.

[11-3-1a. +24V driver IC]
The back front left drive solenoids 3717 (a total of three back front left drive solenoids 3717) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, The back and front right drive solenoids 3817 (a total of three back and front right drive solenoids 3817) provided in the third back and front right decoration units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back and front right production unit 3800 are configured to operate when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. The system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is performed and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing) described later is started), and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is driven sometimes and not always. However, while driving the three rear front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three rear front right drive solenoids 3817, there is a risk that a malfunction or failure will occur in the driver IC 1720c1a1 and driver IC 1720c1a2 for some reason. In addition, the mechanism for opening and closing the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left direction unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, the back front right direction of the back unit 3000 If a problem occurs in the mechanism for opening and closing the plurality of shutters 3832 of the shutter unit 3830 provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the unit 3800, and it becomes difficult to move (difficult to operate), the three back Among the front left drive solenoid 3717 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the solenoid that has a malfunction and is difficult to move (difficult to operate) becomes overloaded and generates excessive heat, causing the solenoid and the driver that drives the solenoid to There is a risk that the IC will malfunction or break down.

If such a malfunction or failure occurs, the three rear front left drive solenoids 3717 or the rear front left drive solenoid or rear If an overcurrent flows to the driver IC that drives the front left drive solenoid, or if a malfunction or failure occurs among the three rear front right drive solenoids 3817 or the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three rear front right drive solenoids 3817, The potential of the +12V power supply line decreases due to excessive current flowing to the driver IC that drives and controls the front right drive solenoid and the rear front right drive solenoid. Then, as described above, this +12V power line is +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and this +12V is applied to the Since these are also supplied to the control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. The main control side power off process in the main control side power on process is performed to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process to be described later and pays out. (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) will be stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back and front left drive solenoids 3717 includes three back and front left drive solenoids 3717 and three back and front left drive solenoids 3717 in the +24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A fuse is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the left drive solenoid 3717, and the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back and front right drive solenoids 3817 has a fuse in the +24V power line of the production drive board 1720. A fuse is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back front right drive solenoids 3817.

+24V fuse EF24a1 which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three back and front left drive solenoids 3717 (+24V fuse that is a fuse that is provided in the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives and controls the three back and front right drive solenoids 3817) One end of the EF24a2) is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. The other end of the +24V fuse EF24a1 (+24V fuse EF24a2) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED50, ED51 (ED52, ED53), and the three back and front left drive solenoids 3717 (three It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) that supplies power to the back front right drive solenoid 3817).

The driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) includes four NPN type Darlington transistor elements and four diode elements, which are chipped, in the same package. Among the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER50 (ER53), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER51 (ER54), and the base terminal 8 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER52 (ER55). Terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which a current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810A among the 3817, The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710B among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which a current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810B among the 3817, The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710C among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Out of 3817, it is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as the LL-SOL line (LL-SOL) through which current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) provided in the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. .

The other ends of the resistors ER50 to ER55 are electrically connected to an effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, and a connector between the effect drive input circuit (not shown) and the effect drive board 1720, and between the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board. It is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness, connector of the peripheral control board 1510) that electrically connects the board to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, one end is connected to the first NPN type The other end of the resistor ER50 (ER53) electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the Darlington transistor is connected to the back front left drive solenoid provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. 3717 (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810A) transmits a signal SPD0 (SPD3) that instructs to start or stop excitation of the coil. It is electrically connected as a line to the output terminal of the production drive input circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720.The input terminal of this production drive input circuit is connected to a predetermined line of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. electrically connected to the output terminal of the output port.

To briefly explain the effect drive input circuit (not shown), the effect drive input circuit includes the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 216, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. The circuit is the same. One end of the input terminal of the effect drive input circuit is a +12V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720). The other end of the first resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR2 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR40 in FIG. 220) is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied through the It is electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor (corresponds to the transistor MTR0 in FIG. 216 and transistor PTR40 in FIG. 220) through two resistors (corresponds to the resistor MR3 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR41 in FIG. 220). ing. In addition to the second resistor, the base terminal of the transistor is connected to a third resistor (resistor MR4 in FIG. 216, resistor PR42 in FIG. 220) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720. ) is electrically connected to the other end. The emitter terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the effect drive board 1720. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor is a +5V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and connected via the +5V fuse EF5 of the production drive board 1720). The fourth resistor (corresponding to resistor MR5 in FIG. 216 and resistor PR43 in FIG. 220) is electrically connected to the other end of the fourth resistor (corresponding to resistor MR5 in FIG. 216 and resistor PR43 in FIG. A non-inverting buffer IC that constitutes the input buffer circuit 1720a (the non-inverting buffer IC includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and inverts the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the non-inverting buffer circuits A) (corresponds to the MIC 10 in FIG. 216 and the PIC 40 in FIG. 220). The output terminal of the non-inverting buffer circuit A of the non-inverting buffer IC constituting this input buffer circuit 1720a becomes the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit.

One end of the resistor ER51 (ER54) is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. SPD 1 instructs to start and stop excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B) prepared for It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 as a line for transmitting the signal (SPD4). The input terminal of this effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

One end of the resistor ER52 (ER55) is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor. SPD 2 instructs to start and stop excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C) prepared for It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 as a line for transmitting the signal (SPD5). The input terminal of this effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the lines for transmitting signals SPD0 to SPD5 are separate lines, and are electrically connected to output terminals of predetermined output ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that is, to different output terminals. .

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to ground (GND).

Note that the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), whereas the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2). ) is not connected to the outside.

The driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) has four built-in diodes.The first and second diodes are arranged as a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged as a pair in the package. located within.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED50.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC1720c1a1 (driver IC1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED51.

Among the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are activated when the excitation to the coils of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) is stopped. The first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it.

A power line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) that supplies power to the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) connects the three back It is electrically connected to each connector of the front left drive solenoid 3717 (three rear front right drive solenoids 3817). Among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810A) The LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line), through which current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817), connects the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 to the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 through the terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). The connector and electricity of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the three back front left decoration units 3710A (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810A among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). connected. Out of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710B (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B) The LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line), through which current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817), connects the back front left drive solenoid 3717 to the back The connector and electricity of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the three back front left decoration units 3710B (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) connected. Out of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710C (out of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is installed in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C) The LL-SOL line (RL-SOL line), through which current flows to excite the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817), connects the back front left drive solenoid 3717 to the back front left drive solenoid 3717 through the terminal of the connector and wiring (not shown). Back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the three back front left decoration unit 3710C (back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) Second attacker solenoid It is electrically connected to the 2612 connector.

Whether the system of the peripheral control board 1510 has been started (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is performed and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing) described later is started) and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the motor and solenoid drive process, depending on whether the When drive data SPD0 to SPD5 for a certain drive solenoid is output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, it is outputted to the driver IC 1720c1a1 ( The signals are input to base terminals 1, 5, and 8 of the driver IC 1720c1a2), respectively. The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) controls the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) according to drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. A current is applied to excite the coil.

[11-3-1b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +24V driver IC]
The +24V fuse EF24a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a1, generates heat when a large current called an overcurrent flows to the three rear front left drive solenoids 3717 or the driver IC1720c1a1 that drives the three rear front left drive solenoids 3717. Therefore, near the driver IC1720c1a1 (especially near the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC1720c1a1) or the connector connected as the SOLL+24V power line, LU-SOL line, LC-SOL line, or LC-SOL line mentioned above. It is preferable to arrange it near (particularly near the connector of the terminal to which the SOLL+24V power line is connected). In addition, the +24V fuse EF24a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c1a2, generates heat due to a large current flowing into the driver IC1720c1a2 that drives the three back and front right drive solenoids 3817 and the three back and front right drive solenoids 3817. Therefore, it is connected near the driver IC 1720c1a2 (especially near the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a2) or as the above-mentioned SOLR+24V power line, RU-SOL line, RC-SOL line, or RC-SOL line. It is preferable to arrange it near the connector (particularly near the connector of the terminal to which the SOLR+24V power line is connected).

[11-3-2. +12V driver circuit]
The +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. The +12V electric drive source (drive motor) for the game board 5 includes the rear rear drive motor 3126 in the rear rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 137(a) and (b), and the rear rear drive motor 3126 in FIG. 158(a). The back lower left drive motor 3205 in the back lower left production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 in the back lower middle producing unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 shown in b), the back lower middle producing unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 162(a) 170(a) and 170(b). The back up/down drive motor 3429 in the back upper production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The back left rotation drive motor 3525 of the back left decoration unit 3520 in the back rear left production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 178(b), The back rear left lift drive motor 3554 in the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 of the back rear right decoration unit 3620 in the back rear right production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 185(b), There is a rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the rear rear right presentation unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 185(a) and (b), and there are a total of 12 drive motors (hereinafter referred to as "game board ).

As shown in FIG. 223, the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back rear drive motor 3126 and the back lower left drive motor 3205 in correspondence with each of the drive motors on the game board 5 side. driver IC1720c2a2 to drive and control the back lower right drive motor 3255, driver IC1720c2a4 to drive and control the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, driver IC1720c2a5 to drive and control the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352, A driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the top front rotation drive motor 3425, a driver IC 1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up and down drive motor 3429, a driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back top and rear rotation drive motor 3454, and a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525. a driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, a driver IC 1720c2a10 that drives and controls the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, a driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. It consists of IC1720c2a12. Since the total of 12 driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are all the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c2a1 will be mainly described here, and the description of the driver ICs 1720c2a2 to driver ICs 1720c2a12 may be omitted.

[11-3-2a. +12V driver IC]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the system on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later is performed, and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing (described later) is activated. and solenoid drive processing) is started and a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is not constantly driven. However, when driving the drive motor on the game board 5 side, there is a risk that a malfunction or failure may occur in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 for some reason, and the mechanism operated by the drive motor on the game board 5 side may If a problem occurs in the drive motor on the game board 5 side and the drive motor becomes difficult to operate, the drive motor on the game board 5 side that has a problem and becomes difficult to operate becomes overloaded and generates excessive heat. There is a risk that a malfunction or failure will occur in the driver IC.

When such a malfunction or failure occurs, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motor on the game board 5 side and the drive motor in which the malfunction or failure has occurred are controlled. When an overcurrent flows to the driver IC, the potential of the +12V power supply line decreases. Then, as described above, this +12V power line is +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and this +12V is applied to the main board that constitutes the main board in addition to the production drive board 1720. Since these are also supplied to the control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. The main control side power off process in the main control side power on process is performed to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power off process in the payout control unit power on process to be described later and pays out. (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) will be stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motors on the game board 5 side include the drive motors on the game board 5 side and the drive motors on the game board 5 side in the +12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720. Each of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is provided with a fuse to cut off overcurrent flowing to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12.

Specifically, the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back and rear drive motor 3126 has an overcurrent flowing to the back and back drive motor 3126 and the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back and back drive motor 3126 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a1 is provided to cut off the back lower left drive motor 3205, and the driver IC1720c2a2 that drives and controls the back lower left drive motor 3205 is provided with a A +12V fuse EF12a2 is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a2 that controls the drive, and the driver IC1720c2a3 that controls the drive of the back lower right drive motor 3255 is connected to the back lower right drive motor in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. 3255 and the driver IC 1720c2a3 that controls the back lower right drive motor 3255. A +12V fuse EF12a4 is provided in the +12V power supply line to cut off overcurrent flowing to the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 and the driver IC 1720c2a4 that drives and controls the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333.

In addition, the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 is connected to the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 and the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a5 is provided to cut off the flowing overcurrent, and the driver IC1720c2a6 that controls the drive of the back top and front rotation drive motor 3425 is provided with a +12V fuse EF12a5 that cuts off the flowing overcurrent. A +12V fuse EF12a6 is provided to cut off overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a6 that drives and controls the front rotation drive motor 3425, and the driver IC1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up/down drive motor 3429 is provided with a , a +12V fuse EF12a7 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the back up/down drive motor 3429 and the driver IC1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up/down drive motor 3429, and the driver IC1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back up/back rotation drive motor 3454. A +12V fuse EF12a8 is provided in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720 to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the back top/back rotation drive motor 3454 or the driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back top/back rotation drive motor 3454.

In addition, the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is connected to the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a9 is provided to cut off the flowing overcurrent, and the driver IC1720c2a10 that drives and controls the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is connected to the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a10 is provided to cut off the overcurrent flowing to the driver IC1720c2a10 that drives and controls the left lift drive motor 3554, and the driver IC1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is connected to the +12V power line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a11 is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 and a driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and a driver that drives and controls the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654. The IC1720c2a12 is provided with a +12V fuse EF12a12 that cuts off an overcurrent flowing to the rear right lift drive motor 3654 and the driver IC1720c2a12 that drives and controls the rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. There is.

One end of the +12V fuse EF12a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear drive motor 3126, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a1 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOT1+12V that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126. One end of the +12V fuse EF12a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a2 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED61, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOT2 +12V that supplies power to the rear left rotation drive motor 3525. Ru. Driver IC1720c2a3 to driver IC1720c2a11 have a similar circuit configuration, and one end of +12V fuse EF12a12, which is a fuse provided in driver IC1720c2a12 that drives and controls the rear right lift drive motor 3654, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. There is. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a12 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED71, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power line called MOT12+12V that supplies power to the rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Ru.

The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are equipped with a 4-channel low-side driver, an overcurrent protection section, a short circuit protection section, a thermal shutdown section, a low voltage lockout section, a diode that clamps the turn-off transient voltage generated by an inductive load, a serial interface, etc. The circuits are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the driver IC 1720c2a1 at the first stage to the driver IC 1720c2a12 at the final stage. The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 receive information from the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information from the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information based on thermal shutdown (indicating the state of being shut down due to overheating). status information) and information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) can be read via the serial interface.

Terminal 14 (SDATIN terminal) of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data input terminal, and terminal 15 (SDATOUT) of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data output terminal. The drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is transmitted to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring ( harness), the connector of the effect drive board 1720, the above-mentioned effect drive input circuit (not shown), and the resistor ER60, and when it is first input to the terminal 14 of the first stage driver IC1720C2a1, the drive motor drive which is serial data is sent from the terminal 15. The data signal SDAT is outputted and input via the resistor ER64 to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a2 which is the subsequent stage of the first stage driver IC 1720c2a1.

The driver IC 1720c2a2 outputs the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data, from its 15 terminal to the driver IC 1720c2a3, which is a driver IC in the subsequent stage. Then, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data output from the 15 terminal of the driver IC1720c2a11, which is the driver immediately before the driver IC1720c2a12, which is the last stage driver, is transmitted to the last stage, which is the last stage driver, through the resistor ER82. It is input to the terminal 14 of the stage driver IC 1720c2a12. In this way, the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data, is sent from the first-stage driver IC 1720C2a1 to the last-stage driver IC 1720C2a12, which are electrically connected in a daisy chain.

Note that since the driver IC 1720c2a12 is the final stage driver IC, there is no subsequent stage driver IC. Therefore, the 15th terminal (SDATOUT) of the final stage driver IC 1720c2a12 is not connected to the outside.

In addition, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, includes drive data for driving the drive motor on the game board 5 side as well as internal information of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. There is a command (status information acquisition data) for checking the status using status information. The status information includes information from the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current status), information from the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information due to thermal shutdown (status indicating the status of shutdown due to overheating). information) and information from the low voltage lockout unit (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 output status information as serial data from a terminal 16 (FAULT), which will be described later.

Terminal 13 (SCLK terminal) of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial clock signal input terminal. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. harness), is input to the performance drive board 1720 via the connector of the performance drive board 1720. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal input to the performance drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the aforementioned performance drive input circuit (not shown). For example, the drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal branched through a production drive input circuit (not shown), is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC1720c2a1 via the resistor ER61, and is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC1720c2a2 via the resistor ER64. 13, and is inputted to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a12 via the resistor ER83. In other words, the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are electrically connected in parallel, unlike the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, to which daisy-chained serial data is input.

Note that the resistors ER60 to ER83 function as damping resistors that reduce signal reflection on a path for transmitting the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data. This is because among the input terminals of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are the terminals to which signals related to serial communication are input, and the signal transmission speed is faster than other input terminals. It is. Note that there is no problem in providing damping resistors to other input terminals, such as terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) and terminal 8 (ENBL terminal), which will be described later. For example, if a collective resistor (resistance array) is a component that is used in common on multiple boards, if terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are each mounted with a surface mount type resistor (SMD type resistor). The number of components can be reduced compared to , and the use of collective resistors (resistance arrays) may be advantageous in terms of packaging density.

Terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a latch signal input terminal. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected to the connector of the peripheral control board 1510, and the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect drive board 1720. ), is input to the performance drive board 1720 via the connector of the performance drive board 1720. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal input to the performance drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminals 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the aforementioned performance drive input circuit (not shown).

Terminal 8 (ENBL terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an enable signal input terminal, and in this embodiment is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720. The terminals 8 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are pulled down internally, but by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 When the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, is input to the terminal 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, when the logic thereof is input permission logic (for example, HI), the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a clock signal, is input to the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. Based on the motor clock signal SCLK, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data input to the terminal 14 of each of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is taken in, and the taken in serial data is converted into parallel data to be output to the output terminal described later. Output from 3, 4, 6, 7. On the other hand, when the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, is input to the terminal 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 and the logic thereof is a logic that does not permit capture (for example, LOW), Based on the drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is the clock signal input to the terminal 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, the drive data signal SDAT for the drive motor, which is serial data input to the terminal 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is not respectively captured. , maintain the current output state (that is, maintain the state that was previously captured, converted, and output from output terminals 3, 4, 6, and 7).

The terminal 9 (RESET terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a reset signal input terminal, and in this embodiment is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the effect drive board 1720. By electrically connecting the reset signal input terminal to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the production drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can be unintentionally damaged due to disturbances such as noise. This prevents it from being reset.

Terminal 5 (GND terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a ground terminal, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the performance drive board 1720.

Terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a power input terminal, a connector of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the production drive board 1720, It is electrically connected to the +12V power line supplied through the connector of the production drive board 1570 and the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720, and the +12V fuses EF12a1 to 2 are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, respectively. It is also electrically connected to one end of the EF12a12. The other ends of the +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are the fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, respectively, are electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively, as described above, and are connected to the game board 5. They are electrically connected to the terminals of the connector as power lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12 that supply power to the side drive motors.

Terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal that outputs a clamp voltage, and is electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively.

The terminal 3 (OUT1 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is the output terminal to the load 1, and is used as the terminal of the connector as MOT1-A to MOT12-A through which the current that excites the A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. electrically connected.

Terminal 4 (OUT2 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is the output terminal to the load 2, and is used as the terminal of the connector as MOT1-B to MOT12-B through which current flows to excite the B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side. electrically connected.

The terminals 6 (OUT3 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 3, and are connected as MOT1-/A to MOT12-/A connectors through which current flows to excite the /A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side. electrically connected to the terminals.

The terminals 7 (OUT4 terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals to the load 4, and are connected as MOT1-/B to MOT12-/B connectors through which current flows to excite the /B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side. electrically connected to the terminals.

Terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

Terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

The terminal 16 (FAULT terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a serial data output terminal, and contains information from the overcurrent protection section (status information indicating the current state), information from the short circuit protection section (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), Status information that includes information from thermal shutdown (status information indicating a shutdown state due to overheating) and information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) are output as error signals 1 to 12, which are serial data. Error signals 1 to 12, which are serial data output from the terminals 16 (FAULT terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are input to the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the production drive board 1720 and are calculated. The result of this calculation is converted into serial data and the driver circuit error signal is electrically connected between the effect drive output circuit (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720, the connector of the effect drive board 1720, and the board between the effect drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the connecting wiring (harness) and the connector of the peripheral control board 1510.

A driver circuit error signal, which is serial data, is input to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). As described above, error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect drive board 1720, so the peripheral control IC 1510a calculates the status included in the driver circuit error signal. Although it is not possible to individually determine the status information of which driver IC among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production drive board 1720 based on the information, the status information is for the driver IC group of driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production drive board 1720. It is possible to judge whether or not a malfunction has occurred, and to notify the error by using the various performance devices (various LEDs and performance display device 1600) provided on the game board 5 and the various performance devices (various LEDs and performance display device 1600) provided on the door frame 3. This can be done by controlling the button unit 360).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the error signals 1 to 12 are calculated by the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the effect driving board 1720, the peripheral control IC 1510a is operated by the driver. Based on the status information included in the circuit error signal, it is not possible to individually determine the status information of which driver IC among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production driving board 1720, but instead of this, the error signal A circuit configuration may be adopted in which the error signals 1 to 12 can be input to the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this way, based on the status information included in the driver circuit error signal, it is possible to associate the status information with the driver IC among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production drive board 1720, so it is possible to understand which driver IC is associated with the status information. It is possible to determine whether a problem has occurred.

[11-3-2b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +12V driver IC]
The +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are the fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are connected to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 because a large current called an overcurrent may flow to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, which drive the drive motors on the game board 5 side, and generate heat. - Near the 1720c2a12 (especially near the terminal 1 (VM terminal) and terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 - 1720c2a12) or the above-mentioned power supply line MOT1+12V - MOT12+12V, MOT1-A line - MOT12-A line, MOT1- Near the connectors connected as the B line to MOT12-B line, MOT1-/A line to MOT12-/A line, and MOT1-/B line to MOT12-/B line (especially when the power lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12V are connected) It is preferable that the terminal be placed near the connector of the terminal.

[11-3-3. Copper foil surface on the surface of the board on which the fuse is mounted (fuse mounting surface)]
The copper foil surface on the front surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted will be explained. As shown in FIG. 213, the fuses include +5V fuse SF5 of peripheral control board 1510, +12V fuse SF12 of peripheral control board 1510, +24V fuse SF24 of peripheral control board 1510, and control power supply fuse SF3 of peripheral control board 1510. , +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, +5V fuse EF5 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 ( +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12 shown in FIG. 223), +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720, fuses provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the effect drive board 1720 (+24V fuses EF24a1, EF24a2 shown in FIG. 223) In addition to the +12V fuse DF12 on each decorative board of the game board 5, there are +12V fuses and +24V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3, and +12V fuses on each decorative board of the door frame 3.

Each of these fuses in this embodiment is of a surface mount type (so-called SMD type), and is mounted on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of each board. A production in which the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 and the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear drive motor 3126 among the fuses provided in the +12V driver IC 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are mounted. The copper foil surface on the front surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the drive board 1720 will be explained, and the method for selecting each fuse will be explained.

[11-3-3a. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the production drive board where the +12V fuse is mounted]
The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 on which the +12V fuse EF1 is mounted has a circular shape into which each terminal of the connector (lead type connector) is inserted, as shown in FIG. 224(a). A plurality of copper foils for connector soldering (so-called "lands") having a shape are arranged in two rows in the vertical direction. Among the multiple connector soldering copper foils, the power supply terminal is allocated to the topmost left terminal, No. 1 terminal, right side, No. 2 terminal, and below the No. 1 terminal, No. 3 terminal and No. 2 terminal are allocated. A GND terminal (ground terminal) is assigned to the No. 4 terminal below, and control signals are assigned to other terminals (not shown). The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 has a vertically long surface for mounting a +12V fuse EF12 near the No. 2 terminal assigned as a power supply terminal among the plurality of copper foils for connector soldering. Among a pair of rectangular copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb (so-called "pads"), the copper foil for fuse soldering on the connector side EF12xpa is arranged so that it is connected to the land of the No. 1 terminal. A connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa is formed to electrically connect the land of the second terminal and the copper foil EF12xpa for fuse soldering.

The connector is inserted into the copper foil for connector soldering and soldered on the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the production drive board 1720, and a pair of terminals of the +12V fuse EF12 are inserted into the copper foil for fuse soldering EF12xpa. , EF12xpb and soldered, the longitudinal direction of the connector and the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12 are arranged perpendicularly to each other.

Among the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb, a plurality of through holes EF12t are formed in three rows along the vertical direction in the vicinity of the copper foil for fuse soldering EF12xpb that is away from the connector. The vertical distance and horizontal distance of the through-holes EF12t, which are formed in three rows, are compared with the vertical distance and horizontal distance of the copper foil EF12xpb for fuse soldering. Both are about twice as big. This through hole EF12t is electrically connected by a hole (copper plated hole) that penetrates both sides (the front surface (fuse mounting surface) and the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive board 1720, On the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720, there is a copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t. It is formed as an island that is not electrically connected to the copper foil area formed on the non-fuse mounting surface (1720y).

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 electrically connects the copper foil for fuse soldering EF12xpb, which is away from the connector, and the through hole EF12t, of the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb. A subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb is formed to connect and supply a +12V power line to a plurality of subsequent electronic components (not shown) and subsequent boards (each decorative board of the game board 5).

The line width Pw2 of the subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb is larger than the line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa, and in this embodiment, it is formed approximately twice as large. The connector soldering copper foil to which the connector side wiring pattern 1720 If the wiring pattern through which the current to supply the line flows is routed in the production drive board 1720 with a thin line, there is a risk that the wiring pattern will be burnt out within the capacity selected for the +12V fuse EF12. Therefore, in this embodiment, since it is difficult to ensure a large line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa, one of the plural connector soldering copper foils is A +12V fuse EF12 is placed near the second terminal assigned as a power supply terminal.

The +12V fuse EF12 must not be blown by an inrush current when the power is turned on or by the use of a normal steady current, but it must be blown by an overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12t is that the temperature of the subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb rises due to the current flowing through the +12V power supply line, but in order to prevent the +12V fuse EF12 from blowing out as the temperature rises due to normal use, the through hole is plated with copper. The surface area is increased by the hole and the copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) formed on the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the effect driving board 1720 for cooling.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 is coated with a resist liquid of a predetermined color, except for the copper foil for connector soldering, the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa and EF12xpb, and the through-hole EF12t. Then, the orientation of the electronic component, part number, pin number, etc. are printed using silk-screen printing using paint in a predetermined color. The color of the resist solution and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, and blue, and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3b. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the production drive board on which the fuse provided in the +12V driver IC is mounted]
Among the fuses provided in the +12V system driver IC 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 is mounted with the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear drive motor 3126. As shown in FIG. 224(b), a branch wiring pattern 1720xpc branched from the above-described subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb that supplies the +12V power supply line has a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction for mounting the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1. Among the pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (so-called "pads"), the copper foil for branch side fuse soldering EF12a1xpa is arranged such that the copper foil for branch side fuse soldering EF12a1xpa and a VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd that electrically connects the VM terminal copper foil VMp (so-called "pad") having a rectangular shape long in the left and right direction on which the terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. is formed. In addition, on the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720, there are wiring copper foils (so-called "pads") for each terminal, in addition to the VM terminal and VCLAMP terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a1, as well as other terminals. each formed.

In addition, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is a copper foil VCLAMPp for the VCLAMP terminal (so-called "pad") having a rectangular shape long in the left and right direction on which the terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. , a copper foil for an anode terminal ED60ap (so-called "pad") having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction on which the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted, a copper foil for the VCLAMP terminal VCLAMPp, and a copper foil for the anode terminal ED60ap. A wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal which is connected to the VCLAMP terminal is formed. The line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe is the same as the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd.

In addition, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the effect drive board 1720 is located away from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc (that is, electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc) among the pair of copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb for fuse soldering. A plurality of through-holes EF12a1t are formed in the vicinity of the branch-side copper foil for fuse soldering EF12a1xpa and the other copper foil for fuse soldering EF12a1xpb, arranged in two rows along the left-right direction. The horizontal and vertical distances of the through-holes EF12a1t, which are formed in plurality in alignment, are both about 100% compared to the horizontal and vertical distances of the copper foil for fuse soldering EF12a1xpb. About one size larger. This through hole EF12a1t is electrically connected by a hole (copper-plated hole) that penetrates both sides (the front surface (fuse mounting surface) and the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the effect drive board 1720, On the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the production drive board 1720, there is a copper foil region (not shown) having a rectangular shape that covers the through hole EF12a1t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12a1t (a through hole is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t described above). A copper foil area different from the copper foil area having a rectangular shape (not shown) that covers the hole EF12t is electrically connected to another area (a copper foil area formed on the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720). It is formed as an unconnected island.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 is located away from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc of the pair of copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb for fuse soldering (that is, the branch electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc). copper foil for fuse soldering EF12a1xpb, through hole EF12a1t, and copper foil for cathode terminal having a vertically long rectangular shape on which the cathode terminal of Zener diode ED60 is mounted. In order to electrically connect the ED60kp (so-called "pad"), the copper foil VCLAMPp for the VCLAMP terminal, and the copper foil ED60ap for the anode terminal to supply a power line called MOT1+12V that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126. A motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is formed.

A pair of terminals of the +12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 are placed and soldered to a pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb, respectively, and the anode terminal and cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 are connected to the copper foils for anode terminal. When placed and soldered on the foil ED60ap and the copper foil ED60kp for cathode terminals, the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12a1 and the longitudinal direction of the Zener diode ED60 are arranged perpendicularly to each other.

As described above, the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc is branched from the above-mentioned subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb that supplies the +12V power supply line, and its line width Pa1w1 is larger than the line width Pw2 of the above-mentioned subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb. Although it is small, it is formed larger than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the branch-side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa. The line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc may be larger, the same, or smaller than the line width of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa described above, but the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd The width is larger than the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe. Although the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd and the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe are the same, they are thinner than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc.

The line width Pa1w2 of the motor-side wiring pattern 1720xpf is larger than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 1.5 times larger. The wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal and the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal, which are supplied with a +12V power line, have thin line widths, but the line width of the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is thicker than that of the motor side wiring. This is because the pattern 1720xpf supplies the power line MOT1+12V that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126, and the amount of current flowing therein is large.

Note that the +12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC1720c2a1 must not be blown out by an inrush current when the power is turned on or by the use of a normal steady current, but must be blown out by an overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12a1t is that the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf has a current of MOT1+12V power supply line that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126, so the temperature rises. In order to prevent the +12V fuse EF12a1 from blowing out, there is a copper-plated penetrating hole and a rectangular copper foil area (not shown) formed on the back surface (non-fuse mounting surface) 1720y of the effect drive board 1720. Cooling is performed by increasing the surface area by adding a copper foil region (not shown) having a rectangular shape and a copper foil region different from the copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t.

In addition, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720 has a pair of copper foils for soldering the connector, a pair of copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and a through hole EF12t, as well as a pair of copper foils for soldering the fuse. Copper foils EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb, through holes EF12a1t, copper foils ED60ap for anode terminals, copper foils ED60kp for cathode terminals, copper foils VMp for VM terminals, copper foils VCLAMPp for VCLAMP terminals, wiring copper foils for each terminal, except for the prescribed copper foils. A colored resist liquid is applied, and the orientation of the electronic component, part number, pin number, etc. are printed using silk-screen printing using a predetermined colored paint. The color of the resist solution and the color of the paint include, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, and blue, and are used in appropriate combinations.

[11-3-3c. How to select the capacity of each fuse]
Here, a method for selecting each fuse will be briefly explained. Fuses must not be blown by inrush current when the power is turned on or by normal use of steady current, but must be blown by overcurrent. However, fuses have other electronic components mounted around them, resulting in high packaging density. Even if the temperature around the fuse is the same, the temperature of the fuse itself in the high density state is higher than the temperature of the fuse itself in the low density state. Become. For this reason, it is preferable that the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at a pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. Therefore, in this embodiment, the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at a pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. For example, when an electronic component is mounted as a heating element around a fuse mounted on a board and the selection is made based on the relationship between the rated current ratio (%) and the ambient temperature (°C), the fuse ambient temperature is used as the ambient temperature. Use the temperature at the fuse terminals instead. If this selection method is used, for example, if the capacity of a fuse is selected using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature, it may not be possible to select the fuse when the fuse terminal temperature is used as the ambient temperature. This is a risky selection. In addition, whether the selection is made using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature or the selection is made using the fuse terminal section as the ambient temperature, the selection result must be that the selection is acceptable. is more preferable.

In addition, among the capacities of each fuse, the capacity of the +5V fuse SF5, which is the main fuse of the +5V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +5V fuse mounted on the production drive board 1720, which is the subsequent board. Compared to this, the +5V fuse, which is the largest and is mounted on the succeeding board, has a smaller capacity than the fuse mounted on the previous board, and multiple fuses are mounted on the succeeding board. In this case, among the same subsequent boards, the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than that of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the last-stage fuse. It is larger compared to

For example, in a +5V power supply line, when four fuses are installed on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacitance is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +5V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse. The capacity may be the same as that of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +5V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1 The capacity may be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +5V power line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse, and the final stage fuse capacity. It may be smaller than or the same as the combined capacity of the fuses. In addition, in the +5V power supply line, if the capacity of the first stage fuse is made larger than the sum of the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, the second middle stage fuse capacity, and the final stage fuse capacity, the damage to the board will increase. The board itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

In addition, among the capacities of each fuse, the capacity of the +12V fuse SF12, which is the main fuse of the +12V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the following board: the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, and the game board 5. Compared to the capacity of the +12V fuse mounted on each decorative board in preparation for In some cases, the fuse capacity is smaller than that of the previous board on which the fuse is mounted (hereinafter the same applies), and if multiple fuses are mounted on the subsequent board, the capacitance of the fuse on the same subsequent board , the capacitance of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacitance of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and the capacitance of the first-stage fuse is larger than the capacitance of the final-stage fuse.

For example, in a +12V power supply line, when four fuses are installed on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacitance is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +12V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse. The capacity may be the same as that of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +12V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1 The capacity may be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +12V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is equal to the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse, and the final stage fuse capacity. It may be smaller than or the same as the combined capacity of the fuses. In addition, in the +12V power supply line, if the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than the sum of the first middle stage fuse capacity, second middle stage fuse capacity, and final stage fuse capacity, the damage to the board will increase. The board itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

In addition, among the capacities of each fuse, the capacity of the +24V fuse SF24, which is the main fuse of the +24V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +24V fuse mounted on the production drive board 1720, which is the subsequent board. Compared to this, the +24V fuse, which is the largest and is mounted on the succeeding board, has a smaller capacity than the fuse mounted on the previous board, and multiple fuses are mounted on the succeeding board. In this case, among the same subsequent boards, the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than that of the fuse mounted on the previous board, and the capacity of the first-stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the last-stage fuse. It is larger compared to

For example, in a +24V power line, if four fuses are installed on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacitance is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the previous first stage fuse. It may be smaller than the capacity of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is smaller than the capacity of the first stage fuse. The capacity may be the same as that of the second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is larger than that of the last stage fuse, and the first middle stage fuse has a larger capacity than the last stage fuse. The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than that of the previous first stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse is the same as the capacity of the first stage fuse, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1 The capacity may be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the previous second middle stage fuse. For example, in a +24V power supply line, if four fuses are provided on the same subsequent board, the capacity of the first stage fuse is equal to the capacity of the first middle stage fuse, the capacity of the second middle stage fuse, and the final stage fuse capacity. It may be smaller than or the same as the combined capacity of the fuses. In addition, in the +24V power supply line, if the capacity of the first-stage fuse is larger than the sum of the first-middle-stage fuse capacity, second-middle-stage fuse capacity, and final-stage fuse capacity, the damage to the board will increase. The board itself may catch fire due to overcurrent.

[12. Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative board included in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. FIG. 225 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical connection of each decorative board provided in the door frame, FIG. 226 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 227 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board including two constant current drive circuits. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be explained, and the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit and the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be explained.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, including the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the center upper plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, and the side The side window interior decoration part 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are respectively arranged, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate Below the center upper decoration 312a, a plate lower left decoration 281, a lower right plate decoration 286, and a lower plate center decoration 312b are arranged, respectively.

Behind the plate left upper decorative body 271, a plate left upper decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of a long and thin strip extending from side to side along the plate left upper decorative body 271 is arranged. The display is decorated with light emitting light using full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decoration body 276, an upper right plate decorative substrate 278 formed in the shape of a long and thin strip extending from side to side along the upper right plate decoration body 276 is arranged. The light emitting decoration is performed using full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, five LEDs). Behind the plate center upper decorative body 312a, a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape is disposed along the plate center upper decorative body 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 provide light emitting decoration.

The door frame left side decorative body 404 has a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b, which are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404 at the rear thereof. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full color LEDs are mounted on each of the left side upper decorative board 402a and the left side lower decorative board 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative board 402a 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and 10 pieces on the lower left side decorative board 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in plural rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind the side window interior decoration parts 410b are side windows formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. A window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 are used for light emitting decoration. The door frame right side decorative body 419 has a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 behind it. A door frame right side decorative board 418 consisting of (4 pieces on the right side lower decorative board 418b, 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative board 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a door frame top center decoration board 455 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decorative board 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the left side of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is disposed, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 457 are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Light-emitting decoration is provided by full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, 11 LEDs are placed on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 pieces are placed on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 pieces are placed on the door frame top right decorative board 457).

Behind the plate lower left decorative body 281, a plate lower left decorative board 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the plate left lower decorative body 281 is arranged, and a plurality of plates are mounted on the plate left lower decorative board 283. The lighting is decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the plate lower right decorative body 286, a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the plate right lower decorative body 286 is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) are mounted to decorate the area. Behind the plate center lower decorative body 312b, a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape is arranged along the plate center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 provide light emitting decoration.

Note that the performance operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the performance operation ring decoration board 352 formed in the form of a circular ring divided into front and back parts, as described above. The performance operation ring decorative board 352 includes a front decorative board 352a formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a rear decorative board 352b formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having the shape of a semicircular arc on the rear side. , is composed of. The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the light-emitting decoration is performed by 9 pieces).

In this way, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip. As a result, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the upper center decorative board 314, the upper left side decorative board 402a, the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the side upper left decorative board 273, upper left decorative board 278, upper left decorative board 402b, and lower left side decorative board 402b are arranged on various decorative bodies and decorative parts of the door frame 3. Window interior decoration part decorative board 413, right side upper decorative board 418a, right side lower decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate lower left decorative board 283, the door frame side decorative boards such as the bottom right decorative board 288, the bottom center decorative board 316, the front decorative board 352a, and the back decorative board 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 225.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives light emission data, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, and is serially outputted from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1, and light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input independently. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 630 is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line via an interface board 635, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the pan unit relay board of the pan unit 200 shown in FIG. 214, and is also input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the pan unit relay board 214, are connected to the bottom left decorative board 283, the bottom right decorative board 288, and Each is input to the operation section relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the plate lower left decorative board 283, are input to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. In other words, the plate lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridging board that transmits the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273. The board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate are electrically connected. The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the plate lower left decorative board 283, which serves as a bridging board, respectively (not shown). An input connector is provided, and an output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate. A connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative board 273 that is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the final stage after the lower left decorative board 283) has an illustration of the lower left decorative board 283. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are output from output connectors not shown, are respectively input.

The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the plate, are respectively input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate. In other words, the plate lower right decorative board 288 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decorative board 278. The lower decorative board 288 and the upper right decorative board 278 are electrically connected. The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the plate lower right decorative board 288, which serves as a bridging board. In addition, outputs (not shown) are provided for outputting the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate. A connector is provided for the On the other hand, the upper right decorative board 278, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the final stage after the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board 278. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288. There is.

The first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300, are connected to the upper decoration board 314 of the center of the plate, and the center of the plate. It is input to the lower decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the production operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the front decorative board 352a are respectively input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a becomes a bridging board that transmits the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. The rear decorative board 352b is electrically connected in a daisy chain state. The first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the operation section relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 are input to the front decoration board 352a, which serves as a bridging board, respectively. In addition, an input connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. A connector for output that does not work is provided. On the other hand, a rear decorative board 352b that is electrically connected to the front decorative board 352a (that is, the final stage after the front decorative board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) respectively outputted from are input.

Here, for example, a brief explanation will be given of the plate lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input. The plate lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dispersion circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current to flow to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It mainly consists of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 283c take charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

The +12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the lower left decorative board 283 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power line via the +12V fuse SLLDF12, which is an LED constant current drive circuit 283a mounted on the bottom left decorative board 283 of the dish, and six full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the bottom left decorative board 283 of the dish. It is supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6.

Furthermore, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dispersion circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x that can flow a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to flow a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decorative board 283. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 273c take charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

The +12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power supply line via the +12V fuse SLUDF12, which is an LED constant current drive circuit 273a mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, and 6 full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. It is supplied to suLED1 to suLED6.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side decorative board 402. 402b, and the side window inner decoration part decorative board 413, the lower right side decorative board 418b of the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Each is entered.

+12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the left side upper decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457. has been entered.

The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. There is. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. , the door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top center decorative board 455 are electrically connected. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridging board has the second serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, +12V, and ground ( Input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the signals (GND), and the second serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the top center decorative board of the door frame. Output connectors (not shown) are provided for outputting to the respective terminals 455 and 455. In addition, the door frame top center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the downstream part of the door frame top right decorative board 457) has an illustration of the door frame top right decorative board 457. Input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the second serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) respectively output from output connectors that are not shown are input. Output connectors (not shown) are provided for outputting the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively.

The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. There is. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. , the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 that is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative board 455 (that is, the final stage after the door frame top central decorative board 455) has a For input (not shown), the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455. Only a connector is provided.

Here, for example, the left side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is inputted. To briefly explain the lower side decorative board 402b, the lower left side decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, and allows a constant current to flow through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It mainly consists of a sink (suck) type constant current drive circuit 402bax that can perform a constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax causes a constant current to flow through the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decorative board 273, and A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx that can flow a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and the left side. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative board 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx controls the circuit board on which it is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b) based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 on the upper left side decorative board 402a.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 402bc take charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left side decorative board 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the board (lower left side decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transmitted to the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the board on which it is mounted (lower left side decorative board 402b), as well as to the subsequent board. The heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current across the board (lower left side decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted and to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board. has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative board 402b and the upper left side decorative board 402a is always required. The operator who performs this work is careful not to touch the connector on the left side lower decorative board 402b, the connector on the left side upper decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative board 402b, or the heat dissipation circuit 402bc on the left side upper decorative board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the lower left side decorative board 402b and the upper left side decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, as well as static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components caused by

Note that, as described above, the left side upper decorative board 402a receives +12V from the left side lower decorative board 402b and the ground (GND), and also applies a constant current to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Each line that flows is input. As described above, the left side upper decorative board 402a includes a heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402ac not only has the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, but also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is a surface mount type fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power line via the front-stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1, which is a chip fuse, and the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba mounted on the lower left side decorative board 402b and the 8 multicolor light emitting devices mounted on the lower left side decorative board 402b are capable of emitting light. The light is supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs. The +12V input to the lower left side decorative board 402b is supplied to the above-mentioned front +12V fuse LLDF12a1 and to the rear +12V fuse LLDF12a1, which is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the lower left side decorative board 402b. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, which becomes a +12V power supply line via the fuse LLDF12a2, is mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the hdLED9, which is two full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, is mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b. , hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a.

[12-1-3. Luminescence data]
Here, to briefly explain the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 that are serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying the light emission mode, and are the data for specifying the light emission mode. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is specified among the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[12-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an overview of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 226. In this embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the bottom left decorative board 283 of the plate will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and can set the maximum current of the current to be passed to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is used for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, the light emission mode of up to eight full-color LEDs can be controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 using one constant current drive circuit. is now possible.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. It mainly consists of

[12-2-2. Linear power supply]
As described above, the +12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate is a surface mount type fuse that is soldered and surface mounted to the lower left decorative board 283 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power supply line via a +12V fuse SLLDF12, which is a chip fuse. The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that receives +12V from the +12V power supply line and can create and supply an internal power supply Vreg (+5V in this embodiment) used within the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section. 283xi, and this internal power supply Vreg powers the reset section 283xb, data line buffer 283xc, clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi. is now able to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 via various boards, but independently creates +5V DC as an internal power supply Vreg. It is used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. This is because if you use the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 via various boards, this +5V power line will be used by routing electrical wiring, so the +5V power supply line that supplies +5V will be used. As the length becomes longer, it becomes easier for noise to penetrate. In this case, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED will flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 via various boards is not necessary for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise resistance is extremely high compared to the +5V power supply line. A configuration is adopted in which +5V is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg from the +12V power supply line in the linear power supply 283xa of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

In this way, in this embodiment, by using the internal power supply Vreg only within the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg. This makes it possible to stabilize the internal power supply Vreg. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, which can contribute to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 caused by external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Furthermore, input electrical wiring for the +5V power line and external transmission electrical wiring are unnecessary, contributing to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-3. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current drive section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi start operating.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. There is. For example, if a line that transmits a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal increases, making it easier for noise to enter. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the constant current drive circuit 283x will be reset due to the influence of the external noise and the LED will turn off. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for a reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST. did.

In this way, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, but only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, thereby making it possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset due to external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to preventing unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. In addition, input electrical wiring and external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are unnecessary, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-4. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") that transmits serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side). This circuit is capable of inputting serial data, shaping the waveform of a signal transmitting the serial data, and outputting the shaped signal to the outside of the logic processing section 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side). This circuit is capable of receiving a clock signal from the input circuit, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the waveform to the outside of the logic processing section 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across multiple boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line become longer, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x can be reduced. A configuration is adopted in which the waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and subsequent boards.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the lengths of both the data line and the clock line become long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[12-2-5. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify individuals) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. It is now possible to do so.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not something that is set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[12-2-6. Oscillator, logic processing section]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x that has been shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input to the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, gradation information is taken in from this serial data, and control is performed to set the gradation degree in the output channel in the PWM section 283xh based on a signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information is taken in. On the other hand, if the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and the setting is made in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents.

[12-2-7. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel from turning off to turning on (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from gradation level 0 (zero) to gradation level 127. The gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control section (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM section 283xh individually includes PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control sections) corresponding to output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8. ing. When the gradation level is set, these PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi to flow a current that corresponds to the set gradation level.

[12-2-8. Constant current drive section]
The constant current drive section 283xi operates one constant current driver (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation level is set in the PWM gradation control section 1 to PWM gradation control section 24 provided in the PWM section 283xh. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED elements that make up the full color LED. In other words, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes constant current drivers 1 to 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 (ie, 24 constant current drivers).

Constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit red (R) light that constitute the full color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light that constitute the full color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line and receives +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to constant current driver 8), so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24), so that the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

Constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 each absorb a constant current flowing to an individually set red (R) LED element that constitutes a full color LED, thereby converting the red (R) LED element that constitutes a full color LED. can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 each absorb a constant current flowing to the individually set green (G) LED elements that make up the full color LED, thereby converting the green (G) LED elements that make up the full color LED. can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 each draw a constant current flowing to the individually set blue (B) LED elements that make up the full color LED, thereby converting the blue (B) LED elements that make up the full color LED. can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, 8 full-color LEDs, with individually set constant currents. This makes it possible to turn off the light, turn it on at one gradation level, blink at one gradation level, etc.

[12-2-9. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit red (R) that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and output channels LG1 to LG1. Resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G), which configures the full-color LED in the eight output channels up to LG8, and configures the full-color LED in the eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive section 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 included in the constant current drive section 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 included in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[12-3. Decorative board equipped with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative board including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. Here, a decorative board including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. Note that the above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 226 and 227, for convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are indicated by the same reference numerals.

[12-3-1. Decorative board equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distributed circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT1, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, which is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , clock signal SCLK1 are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. has been done.

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 connects the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 to the plate unit 200. It is input via the unit relay board 214. As described above, the +12V input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate is a surface mount type fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the lower left decorative board 283 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power supply line via a +12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse. +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, which constitutes the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and the green (G) It is also input to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to constant current driver 22). Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a selects a signal from the light emission data SDAT1 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are individually controlled and lit in a controlled manner so as to match the captured tone information.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

Note that the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the top left decoration of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). +12V and ground (GND) are input to the board 273, and are also input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate via the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate. This prevents noise that has entered the data line and clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the subsequent board, the upper left decorative board 273. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

As described above, the +12V input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate is a surface mount type fuse that is soldered and surface mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power supply line via the +12V fuse SLUDF12, which is a chip fuse. +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the green (G) It is also input to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to constant current driver 22). Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a selects a signal from the light emission data SDAT1 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lit in a controlled manner so as to match the captured tone information.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

In addition to the lower left decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273, the lower right decorative board 288, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper right decorative board 456 are used as decorative boards equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit. , and a door frame top right decorative board 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. Equipped with ~hdLED10 and a heat dispersion circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT2, which is the second serial system on the door frame side, which is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , clock signal SCLK2 are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. has been done.

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. . As described above, the +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is soldered to the surface of the left side lower decorative board 402b as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. It becomes a +12V power supply line via the front-stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1, which is a mounting type chip fuse. +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element that constitutes hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, It is also input to the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively. Furthermore, as described above, the +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is a surface mount type chip fuse that is soldered and surface mounted to the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 and to the left side lower decorative board 402b. It becomes a +12V power supply line via the rear-stage +12V fuse LLDF12a2. +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, which constitutes hdLED9 and hdLED10 among hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the green (G) and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively, and constitute five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a. , the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In this embodiment, as described above, a single constant current drive circuit can individually control the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full-color LEDs to control the light emission mode. It is now possible to control it. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission mode of eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two The light emission mode of the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board, across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are It is electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and drives full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) through heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~LB8 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 17 ~ constant current driver 24) are electrically connected.

Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 have cathode terminals of red (R) LED elements that constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and drives the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (the above-described constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the red ( The cathode terminal of the LED element R) is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative board 402a and the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above) and constitute the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are, respectively, Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-mentioned constant current driver The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, which are electrically connected to the constant current driver 11 to constant current driver 15) and which constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, are connected to the heat dispersion resistors huRb1b to 15 on the left side upper decorative board 402a, respectively. huRb5b, and electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the left side lower decorative board 402b. has been done. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the second serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba receives data from the light emission data SDAT2 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is captured, and out of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and lighted to match the captured gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives data from a door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the luminescence data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set to 10. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to dim and light, and the left side lower decorative board 402b becomes the subsequent board. Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled to dim and turn on.

As mentioned above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink (suck) type, so it sinks the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and also Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is a substrate following the lower side decorative board 402b. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is a subsequent board to the left side lower decorative board 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the left side upper decorative board 402a Heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in It is now possible to do so.

Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the battery, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

In addition to the left side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window inner decorative part decorative board 413, and a right side decorative board 402b. There is a lower decorative board 418b and a door frame top center decorative board 455.

In addition to the left side upper decorative board 402a, there is a right side upper decorative board 418a as a decorative board that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[13. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 228 to 233. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 228, and FIG. 230 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, and error processing. Display processing will be explained.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept game balls, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

[13-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then performs a random number circuit at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

Note that in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on, or when the main control side power-on process described later, various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU are The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as numerical values and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the main control MPU does not clear the specified area, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is obtained from the built-in non-volatile RAM by the main control MPU. The ID code is extracted, and based on the extracted ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and this derived fixed value is It has a mechanism to be set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), and here, it completely erases information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. It operates as a RAM clear switch function. In this determination, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is to be cleared and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Note that since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not pressed. The person who does this will turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and turning it ON. This is performed based on the key being turned on and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Note that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation display of the set values 1 to 6 at the time of the ON operation. The value is set to 1 when display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when changing settings or confirmation display is not permitted. Note that the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510, so the payout control board 633 ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no power outage warning signal input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not the value 1, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1. , and determines whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined that various information is to be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S29, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After turning the machine 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, power on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 to enter this routine again. Main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 in the above-mentioned step S16A. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. , and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change processing of step S37, which will be described later, the step described below is performed. In the process of S38, by clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error"). ``How to cancel'').

An alternative method to this first RAM error release method is to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and leave the setting key cylinder at its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation section of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines in step S14 described above that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is activated due to the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Therefore, in the determination of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the same as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are cleared except for a specific area, so that the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error release method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device) and then returned to normal state.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is present, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined setting value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, settings switch button, and error release switch), and here, the settings switch button is used to select and switch setting values. It operates as a function of Every time the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined If the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area will be deleted from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. and clear it (step S38). Here, the main control MPU performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area where setting values are stored, an out port 2010, a first sub out port 2011, and a second sub out port provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. 2012, and a dedicated area for counting out balls, in which the result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected by 2012 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out pitch counting area stores the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the The result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected through the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU controls when erasing various information based on the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 has been operated. If the values do not match, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is retrieved, and the retrieved ID code is An initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the above-mentioned initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, we will use the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and starting time measurement again, the main control MPU (system) can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among the various information, the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on are sent. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination at step S54, when the main control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal is input, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, a random number that is not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) is updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an input of a power outage warning signal. If the power outage warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including gaming information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the special monitor, etc. It stops (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing, and then executes the main control side power-on processing again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM will be It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination in step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that if the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, when the game hall is closed) , etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall must press the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation section. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes are made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can erase (clear) game backup information from the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch, game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the island equipment of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the main control side is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time waiting process of step S22, the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express their intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently available must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is being input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when the main control board 1310 is restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power to the main control MPU is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can complete the calculation, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the power failure processing on the main control side can be restarted without updating at all. The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is continued. If you do this repeatedly, you will not be able to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination We have adopted a mechanism that can avoid updating various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as sent information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415, and information instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415, and information instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to reserve the command to be transmitted at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418. When the first big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member or when the second attacking solenoid 2612 is driven and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened by the opening/closing member, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. When the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 detects a momentary power outage or a power outage based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. By restoring the gaming state immediately before the occurrence, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, and the first big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The second big prize opening 2006 will transition from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. In other words, for example, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005, it is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the big winning hole 1 count tells the number of game balls that entered the first big winning hole 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 sends the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 will display the first big winning slot 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number of game balls played can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 so that the first jackpot 2005 opens and closes when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is finished. The main prize is the big prize opening 1 closure display command that instructs the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds). The control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and closes the first jackpot. 2005 is changed from the state where it is closed by the opening/closing member to the state where it is open (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the first grand prize opening 2005). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed to notify the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that communicates to If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the 2004 is in a state where it is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the start port solenoid 2415 is started to close and the movable piece is closed. A transition will be made to a state in which the secondary start port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the information in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 to restore the first prize opening 2005 from the state where it is closed by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (in other words, what round is this? Although it is not possible to display (a screen showing the above) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is a jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven and the first jackpot 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. A screen informing the player that the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state of winning (for example, ``You have won the jackpot. The jackpot is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the jackpot.'' screen) on the display area of the production display device 1600 to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball is placed in the first prize winning slot 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state is such that the game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then When the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to a screen ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the effect display device 1600 (a screen that tells the player the message "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port"). This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device for the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is The above-mentioned low-level information is included in the information that instructs when clearing is to be performed, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be explained when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) ), it is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state in which a game is played.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 230 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, each consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, a detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame release switch, detection signals from the main body frame release switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a , a signal from the setting switch button, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described later. , is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when this switch input processing is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is checked from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, first sub out opening sensor 2403, and second sub out opening sensor 3054, magnetic sensor 1111, Detection signals from 2404, 2602, and 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame release switch, detection signals from the main body frame release switch 4b, signals from the setting key switch 1311a, It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. .

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone vacant terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been applied is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, it displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small prize symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the exit sensor 3053 is inputted to the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected through the out port 2010 provided, the value 1 is added to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected through the out port 2010. (increment) calculation is performed, and the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is input, and the game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned on the game board 5 is transferred to the first sub-out port sensor 2403. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011. When a detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned on the game board 5. performs an operation of adding (incrementing) a value of 1 to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out port sensor 3053 detects the game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port sensor 2403 detects the game balls collected by the first sub out port 2011, and When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation is performed to add the value 3 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012. It is stored in an area dedicated to counting out pitches in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and also sets the output of a lighting signal to be displayed on a special monitor, and stores it as output information in an output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU determines that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. For each, a ball retrieval command is created to convey that fact, and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535) and the value of the recovered ball counter is further added (incremented) by 1, the main control MPU The value of the counter overflows and becomes the value 0, and an operation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. has been reached, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check is performed to confirm the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is calculated based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, the gate section 2003, Based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the first big winning hole 2005. This counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. There is. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to inform the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio waves have been emitted during the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display notifying that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, fraud using a magnet ( Hereinafter, it is determined that a "magnet goto" (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when the jackpot game state is not detected, the detection from the first big winning hole sensor 2402 or the second big winning hole sensor 2601 is performed. When a signal is being input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006), when an abnormal winning occurs in the big winning hole, it is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection; When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame release switch detects that the main body frame release switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 due to the input of the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the launch permission signal is set such that the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery"), and takes out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and stores it in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3052, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2401. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the first big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the round of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp of the display unit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and when the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set, Set the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator lights up, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or turn it on in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. It sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and is stored in the main control as normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The second section and the third section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization performance are created, and the transmission information described above is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output information is set to output a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. is stored in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing the information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them in the above-mentioned sending information storage area as sending information, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. A movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 when in the jackpot game state, and for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 that opens and closes, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display. Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as an information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting slot prize information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633, and firing permission logic or firing stop logic (launch disallowance logic) Outputs the launch permission signal set to the payout control board 633, and displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012. It outputs a display signal to a special monitor, and outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, when a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2005 is detected, the big winning hole 1 corresponding to the big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402) (count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display. Various commands classified into various commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into other categories (for example, the main control board 1310 generates prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal to that effect is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information. main prize ball count information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific history (for example, when the number of game balls collected at the exit 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10 balls) There is a ball retrieval command that tells you that each time the setting value is reached, a setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed, and a setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed. ), a setting key ON operation command that indicates that setting values stored in a setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM are to be confirmed, etc. are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main serial transmission port built in the control MPU is capable of at least transferring the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completing the transmission as main serial data from the transmission shift register. It is now possible to do so. When powering on the Pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the transmission is made at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Furthermore, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the peripheral control board 1510. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the outlet 2010, the first sub-outlet 2011, and the second sub-outlet 2012 for each received ball recovery command, and calculates the number of game balls (not shown). The ball recovery information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (updated with the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012) (information that associates the date and time). Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the game hall's business hours have ended without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (i.e., the output port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011) Ball collection information that associates the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned backup function for storing game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to output. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 229, the main control board 1310 uses the main control internal RAM Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which make up the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 229, the power-on state command classified as power-on By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[13-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 231 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed as a setting value, and in this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination at step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, in the determination in step S208, when the main control When the MPU determines that the setting change permission lamp 1310z is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the setting switching button is operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is being input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while determining that the setting switching button is not being operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not being input. It is determined that the

In the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU performs a calculation to add (increment) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222 ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether the setting switching button is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switch button has been operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and performs the determination of step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. If it is determined that this is the case, the process returns to step S216, and each time the setting switch button is operated, the set value is updated by adding 1 until the enter key is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. , and if the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value that was updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the OK key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of .

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S226 again and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting value from being changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[13-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 232. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, detects the detection from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move against the outer frame 2. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no setting value, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU determines the setting value obtained in step S356 (in other words, in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value has been confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, which allows display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to perform a rotation operation on the rotary operation section 302 and a press operation on the press operation section 303 in a state in which the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is resumed. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[13-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 232), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 233 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU displays an error message that is the main routine after power is restored in step S400. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 230 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 231, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 232) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the system also adjusts the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff" by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the volume is forcibly set to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is a process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 237. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control section timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[14-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 234 to 236. . When this payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area; Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match. When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various judgment times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This ensures that various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. For example, if the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, output the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible can be outputted from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. and determine whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not, using the current fullness and out of balls check processing to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this fact is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the out-of-ball judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball judgment time is reached, check whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information that conveys the fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, where the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. In step S548, port output processing is performed. In step S550, port input processing is performed. performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control section timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[14-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 234 to 236.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 237 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority order of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 238. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 238. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game effects are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), it returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 are controlled based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation The rotation direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the rotation operation section 303 and the like are set. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303), and the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out), to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first brightness specification value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. , etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, a predetermined position of the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress is displayed with a first brightness specified value to a 31st brightness value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that there is only one level, and it is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values mentioned above. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness and brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) adjusts the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can control the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, it is possible to use the LED as direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship.

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame The system is such that priority can be given to performances using performance sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes the various commands issued. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, and the grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 are analyzed, and currently, Recognize which game state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the voltage is changed from 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the sound source is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from here. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It looks like this.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the rotary operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board in the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotational operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC are Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is amplified to the master volume value. The volume of the sound coming from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually adjusted to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 amplify the volume up to the master volume value, and serialize this amplified performance sound and output it as audio data, and use it as notification sound. For this purpose, the volume is adjusted based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track being used and the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track being used. The maximum volume without depending on The amplified notification sound is amplified to a master volume value corresponding to the volume of the sound coming from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of the fraudulent activity against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is Combines the sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track embedded with the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound. , the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared to the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is as described above. The process is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the sub-board volume that was adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. The volume value is set again as the volume value (at this time, if the volume of the performance sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the sub volume of the adjusted performance sound is The sound is set to a volume value), and is output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity on the machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame. 4, but this muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. 462, when the sound stops flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but after the notification sound starts playing, it continues for a predetermined period of time. The flow starts again from the point at which the sound generation schedule data has progressed up to the elapsed point.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the IC's sound source. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an employee such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or a fraudulent act by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 1, and in step S1010, 1ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. 239. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 238 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 238. In order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 238. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control section steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[15-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 238. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 240 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 238. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupts executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit (Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotational direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the production operation section 301, the volume of production sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 is controlled. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 238, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the performance by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the state of progress of the performance by the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main circuit serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 241 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, one byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control block power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving processing. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal is inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 238 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage notice signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will first start the process using the first starting port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 243. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the mode suggests a "5R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode suggests a "2R jackpot" Then, a process is executed to control opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the first big winning hole 2005, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. Then, the time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches "0", but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0". Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 254 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuates. On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. 244, In step S241, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. At the same time, the command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passing process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of retained memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is regarded as a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot. A peripheral control installed in the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. You will be able to understand IC.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the first variable pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is received, the preset data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as a process in step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special retention number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the production display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 1). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2004 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the number of second pending memories is reduced. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2004 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball enters the ball.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read out first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as shown in FIG.

In addition, the said 1st special symbol process flag is operated in the said main control side power-on process (refer FIG. 274) so that it may indicate that the said 1st special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 248, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process in step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process regarding the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 250(A) shows that the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) The system includes a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game is in a low probability time saving state) and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time saving state). . In the low probability hit judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the setting value is 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3. The first special random number wins the jackpot with a probability of 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 5, 1/279 if the set value is 6, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is a loss determination value. In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process, in the low probability hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, and when the setting value is 2. 1/309 if the setting value is 3, 1/299 if the setting value is 4, 1/289 if the setting value is 5, 1/279 if the setting value is 6, and 1/269 if the setting value is 6. The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are a loss. That is, the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than that of the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This is considered to be a more advantageous situation for the player. Furthermore, the hit determination table at high probability is configured such that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased ten times as compared to the hit determination table at low probability.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, when it is determined that the winning is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating no reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table in the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. Closes after the first grand prize opening 2005 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and after the end of the jackpot game state, a special symbol (first special Until the fluctuating display of the symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the fluctuating display will be shorter than usual, and the special lottery result will be drawn with a higher probability than usual in a high probability time saving state. 15R guaranteed variable jackpot to control 2. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol , 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times,
3. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuate display is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R 2R jackpot that is controlled to a non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state ends;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, the mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is as follows:
in particular,
1. Closes after the second grand prize opening 2006 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special Until the fluctuating display of the symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the fluctuating display will be shorter than usual, and the special lottery result will be drawn with a higher probability than usual in a high probability time saving state. 15R guaranteed variable jackpot to control 2. The second grand prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special symbol , 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times,
3. The second grand prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R 2R jackpot, which is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state ends;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R jackpot. 92 judgment values are distributed in the case where . That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed for a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed for a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R In the case of a jackpot, eight judgment values are distributed. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number yields a jackpot, there is a 46% probability that it will be a 15R variable jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 4% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. . In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This creates an advantageous situation for the player.

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if it is determined to be a 5R jackpot, the 5R jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads the small hit flag in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set (step S324) when the jackpot flag is not set in step S131. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball into a small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006. First small hit 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control the small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006. One of the two types of second small winnings is determined as a jackpot.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed in the case of the first small win. That is, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% probability that the first small win will be won and the second small win will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be a first small win, and a 90% probability that it will be a second small win.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a second small winning symbol, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. .

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a loss when neither the jackpot flag nor the small win flag is set (step S327). Then, after the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery results (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) are selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R time-saving jackpot is specified, the 5R time-saving jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot is specified, the 15R probability-variable jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be the same odd-numbered symbol among the symbols ``0'' to ``9''). combination). In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined to be a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of jackpots have occurred after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, twice) occurs, the time-saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 252, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined variation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers, and the variation random numbers read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, the variation pattern table during reach in this example is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the fluctuation random number with the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variable display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter where the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state control (time saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time shortening state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 253, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 254, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time saving control (control in the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. A waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (a time for displaying a message indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. The jackpot game is controlled so as to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Execute control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time-saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time-saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. Also, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, jackpot start commands (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is completed, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first grand prize opening 2005 (opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 2, 5, or 15 times) and opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2006 (for example, the opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2005) After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is closed twice and 5 times. (opening/closing control repeated 15 times) is reset (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying, etc. that the small winning game is to be started) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) 2 small winning start command) is set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ) to open and close the second big prize opening 2006 according to the type of small win (for example, open/close control that repeats an opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed 2 or 9 times) Reset when exiting. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stops displaying) until the next special symbol variable display starts in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot game state based on the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop varying and display becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol stops is a jackpot symbol, or based on the fact that the next round is started. control to open the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006, and after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are placed in the first grand prize opening 2005. When the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that the player has won a prize, or after the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when ten game balls are placed in the second big winning hole 2006. Big winning hole opening process to close when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that a prize has been won (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of a round in which the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is sent. At the end of the round in which the first jackpot 2005 or the second jackpot 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game performance according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a circuit board equipped with an LED used as a display section having an important function will be described. In this example, the display section that has important functions includes information related to the player's interests (for example, special lottery results, types of jackpots and small wins, whether or not there is a specific jackpot (probable jackpot, 15R jackpot, etc.), high probability Indicates whether status control is being executed, whether time saving control is being executed, etc.). In addition to the above, there are also LEDs that display information related to the profits of players and gaming parlors, as well as display parts that have circuit boards equipped with LEDs that display important information related to the progress of the game. The display section may have the following.

As shown in FIG. 256, in this example, a dot matrix display 7000 as a display section having an important function is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400. Further, as shown in FIG. 257(A), the dot matrix display 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have light-transmitting properties, and a substrate 7200 provided inside the case 7100. , a plurality of LEDs 7001 arranged and mounted on the front surface (front side) of the board 7200, and a predetermined color (white in this example, light blue, The connector 7002 has a connector 7002 (which may be of other colors such as yellow or green), and a translucent film 7300 attached to the surface (front) side of the case 7100. Note that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and an LED bare chip enclosed in an LED package is directly mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface). . In addition to white, the colored opaque resin may be black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are each divided into different systems, so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually and independently controlled to emit light. Thereby, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be displayed by causing a predetermined LED 7001 among the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. In addition, light-emitting decorations are provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and control light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, For the back-back right rotation decoration body 3610, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back top-front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top-front decoration body 3421, the back front left decoration body 3713, the back front right decoration body 3813, etc., a predetermined number of Light emission is controlled for each group consisting of (two or more) LEDs, and by emitting light from multiple LEDs included in this group, a specific area of the light-emitting decoration (or the entire light-emitting decoration may be used). (or even just a part of it) is designed to emit surface light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light based on the lottery results of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and predetermined characters are displayed. Display symbols, shapes, etc.

In addition, a part of the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of the surface cover part 7110 described later) (such as a part corresponding to the penetration part 7110a) is semi-transparent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass shape). A transparent film 7300 that is colored and opaque (black in this example) is attached to the portion , so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually confirmed through the transparent film 7300 . Note that without attaching the transparent film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the film may be attached to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member, and the film may be printed on the surface of this decorative member. A dot matrix display 7000 may be arranged at the rear so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized through another decorative member. Further, although the light-transmitting film 7300 may not be provided on the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the light emitted from the LED 7001 as a light source can be made visible through the light-transmitting film 7300. Since the LEDs 7001 can be prevented from being directly visible and the players will not feel dazzled, and the multiple LEDs 7001 can be made to emit surface light individually using the translucent film 7300, when the multiple LEDs 7001 emit light, the light source can be made less noticeable.

In this example, the light-emitting decorative bodies (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorative bodies 3440) are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene (PP), transparent polyethylene terephthalate (PET), etc.). , back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration body 3813 etc.) and controls the light emission in relation to the variable effect to cover a specific area of the light-emitting decoration (a part that covers the LED mounting surface (front surface, front) of the circuit board (the surface (front) of the light-emitting decoration). )) The circuit board on which the surface-emitting LED is mounted has the highest reflection efficiency so that the light emitted by the mounted LED is reflected on the surface of the circuit board (front surface, LED mounting surface) to increase the efficiency and improve brightness. A high white insulating paint is applied to form a white insulating film (solid white resist, white resist layer) (white resist processing is performed).

On the other hand, the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 that are provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example and which cause a plurality of LEDs 7001 to emit light from each other is mounted is coated with a black insulating paint that has the lowest reflection efficiency. A black insulating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist processing is performed). As a result, although the efficiency with which the light emitted by the dot matrix display 7000 is reflected on the surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, LED mounting surface) is reduced, it is reflected directly from the LED 7001 in the forward direction (LED irradiation direction, front direction of the substrate 7200). Interference between the emitted light and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward is suppressed, so that the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clearly seen. In this way, in this example, a white insulating film is normally formed (resist treatment) to increase the brightness in order to increase the reflection efficiency of the circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted. A circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs, each of which has an important function and whose light emission is controlled, is mounted, in this example, the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 of the dot matrix display 7000 is mounted, is not connected to another circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted. The color of the insulating film (resist) that is formed on the circuit board makes it possible to determine the role of the LED mounted on the circuit board. There is. In other words, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board mounts an LED having an important function.

In this way, in this example, a circuit board that is used to improve the brightness of a light-emitting decoration, such as a circuit board installed in a light-emitting decoration that controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs for each group in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect, is used. A white insulating film is formed (resist treatment) to clearly emit light from each of the multiple LEDs 7001 mounted, such as on the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs individually. In order to form a black insulating film (resist treatment) on the substrate 7200 that is desired to be visually recognized, on the circuit board provided in the light-emitting decoration, the reflection efficiency of the light irradiated by the mounted LED is increased and when the LED emits light. Since a decrease in the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be suppressed, the effect of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 can be improved. In addition, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, reflection of light is suppressed to prevent interference between the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 directly forward and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward. Not only can this be suppressed, but also the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly seen by comparing it with the LED mounting surface on which the black insulating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000 that is individually controlled to display important information related to the progress of the game (for example, special lottery results), and a predetermined number of LED units (groups of a predetermined number of LEDs) are used. A circuit board installed in a light-emitting decoration that does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may display it rarely) and a circuit board that is controlled to emit light (every day) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may be displayed rarely). By changing the color of the LED mounting surface of the circuit board (to enhance the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 (to improve the performance effect, etc.)), it can be mounted on a defective circuit board. It is easy to determine whether a light-emitting means such as an LED displays important information, and to determine the control unit of the LED (whether it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs or individually). Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the light-emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly respond to the problem, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in this example, the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed is housed in the case 7100 made of a colored opaque white resin that does not have light-transmitting properties. That is, for the substrate 7200 on which the insulating film of black color (not limited to black but also dark colors such as green and purple) with low reflection efficiency is formed, the insulating film of black color (not limited to black but also dark colors such as green and purple) with high reflection efficiency is formed. By housing the case 7100 in a case 7100 (which may be a light color such as light blue), the case 7100 increases the reflection efficiency of light emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 from other circuit boards on which LEDs are mounted. be able to. On the other hand, the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 is formed with a black insulating film (not limited to black, but may be dark colors such as green or purple) with low reflection efficiency, so that the board 7200 cannot be mounted on the board 7200. Interference between the lights of the LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and the individual lights can be clearly seen.

In addition, a translucent film 7300 is attached to a part of the surface (front) side of the case 7100, and a part of the translucent film 7300 is non-translucent and opaque black. Since the white case 7100 is exposed without the translucent film 7300 attached to the side and back (rear) sides of the case 7100, the pachinko machine is exposed to the circuit board placed behind and on the side of the case 7100. The light emitted toward the front of the aircraft 1 can be reflected with high efficiency to increase the brightness, thereby increasing the production effect.

Furthermore, in this example, a light-colored connector 7002 (having a light-colored housing) is arranged on the back surface of the board 7200 (the surface on which the LED is not mounted). As described above, since a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface), the light-colored connector 7002 is connected to the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface). , front surface) increases the reflection efficiency on the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface), and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 interferes, making it impossible to clearly see the light emission from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. There is a risk. A light-colored connector 7002 is not placed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, and the back surface of the substrate 7200 (on which no LED 7001 is mounted) is placed. By arranging it on the non-LED mounting surface, interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and light emission from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly seen. Further, the dark-colored connector 7002 (having a dark-colored housing) may also be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the board 7200 on which no LED is mounted. It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a black insulating film (resist) is formed. By placing the dark-colored connector 7002 on the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) where the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200. Even if mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 will not be excessively affected. You can prevent it from improving.

In addition, it is not limited to connectors, but also bright-colored (some parts may have different parts) electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits), etc. ) may not be placed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) where a dark insulating film is formed, but may be placed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted; in this case Also, improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 can be suppressed. In addition, dark-colored electronic components (such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs, The constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit) etc.) may also be placed on the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, and for dark electronic components, a dark (black in this example) insulating film ( It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a resist (resist) is formed. By placing dark-colored electronic components on the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) where the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and to place dark-colored electronic components Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 will not be excessively affected. You can prevent it from improving.

In addition, light-emitting decorations that control light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) and a circuit board provided in the door frame 3 and on which an LED is mounted. (Back front left decorative board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of back upper direction unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back lower right direction unit 3250 Back bottom right decorative board 3253, back bottom left decorative board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left A white insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) on which the LED is mounted (decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc.). In these circuit boards, the dark-colored connector (having a dark-colored housing) may be mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the circuit board where no LED is mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed and increase the brightness of the LED, thereby improving the presentation effect. Furthermore, the light-colored connector (having a light-colored housing) may also be placed on the back side of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, and the light-colored connector 7002 may be placed on the back side of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted. It may be arranged on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the circuit board on which the film (resist) is formed. By arranging the light-colored connector 7002 on the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) where the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the reduction in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200. Even if the connector 7002 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively reduced. It can be done.

In addition, it is not limited to connectors, but also dark-colored electronic components (such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, LED driver ICs (constant current drive circuits), etc.) may be placed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being placed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) where a light-colored insulating film is formed. Also, a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 can be suppressed. In addition, electronic components (such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers) with bright colors (some of which may have parts that are different from bright colors (silver metal parts, transparent resin parts, etc.)) IC (constant current drive circuit), etc.) may also be placed on the back side of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) where the LED 7001 is not mounted, and for light-colored electronic components, a white insulating film (resist) may be placed. It may be mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 to be formed. By placing light-colored electronic components on the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface) where the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200. Even if electronic components are mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively reduced. It can be done.

Note that in the above example, the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 is coated with black insulating paint to form a black insulating film, but the dot matrix display 7000 The paint is not limited to black insulating paint, as long as the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided in the case 7100 can be clearly seen, for example, purple, dark blue, deep green, etc. A dark-colored insulating film is formed by applying a dark-colored insulating paint (solid-coated dark-colored (purple, dark blue, deep green, etc.) resist, dark-colored (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist layer). You may also do so. However, a circuit board that is coated with black insulating paint to form a black insulating film has a lower reflection efficiency than a circuit board that is coated with a dark insulating paint other than black and a dark insulating film is formed. Therefore, circuit boards that have a black insulating film formed by applying black insulating paint are better than circuit boards that have a dark insulating film formed by applying a dark-colored insulating paint other than black. Interference between the light emitted directly forward from the LED 7001 and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward can be suppressed, and the light emitted from each of the LEDs 7001 can be clearly seen. Further, it is sufficient that the dark insulating film described above is formed at least on the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (LED mounting surface), and the An insulating film different from the dark-colored insulating film (for example, a light-colored insulating film coated with a light-colored insulating paint such as white) may be formed. That is, the color of the insulating film may be the same on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the circuit board, or the color of the insulating film may be different between the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the circuit board. good. Furthermore, the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is not limited to the one formed by applying an insulating paint (solid coating) (resist), but also the insulating film formed by applying an insulating paint (solid coating). It may also include a layer formed (first layer) and a layer (second layer, outermost layer) formed by silk printing an insulating paint on this layer. In this case, the types (components) and colors of the insulating paints for the first layer and the second layer may be different. For example, the first layer may be dark colored (for example, black or green), and the second layer The layers may be light-colored (for example, white), or the first layer may be light-colored and the second layer may be dark-colored.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257(B), the case 7100 includes a front cover part 7110 on the front surface side of the board 7200 and a back cover part 7120 on the back side of the board 7200. The substrate 7200 is sandwiched between the cover portion 7120 and housed inside the case 7100. In addition, the surface cover part 7110 that covers the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 (the front surface (front surface) of the board 7200) has a predetermined thickness (approximately 5 mm in this example), and has a thickness corresponding to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200. A cylindrical penetration part 7110a is formed as shown in FIG. The front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 are brought into close contact with each other without any gaps to make them strong (difficult to remove, and the board 7200 cannot be removed unless at least a part of the board 7200 such as the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 is destroyed due to welding or the like). The substrate 7200 is fixed (attached) to the front cover portion 7110 by attaching the substrate 7200 to the surface cover portion 7110 in an irreversible attachment state, etc. As a result, the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200 are arranged in separate penetration parts 7110a, and irradiation is emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. Since light is prevented from leaking to other penetration parts 7110a or the back surface (rear surface) side of the substrate 7200, interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed, so that light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be The light can be emitted individually from the penetration portion 7110a, making it easier to identify the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 individually. For example, even if the first LED and the second LED of the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light in different colors, the emitted light color of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be changed by suppressing the mixing of these colors. Since they can be individually identified, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 from being conveyed to the player as being different from the original information. Furthermore, by firmly attaching the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120, it is possible to maintain a close contact state between the substrate 7200 and the front cover part 7110, and to prevent interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. There is less risk of damaging the suppressing function.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, there is also information such as an area indicating the part number of the LED and the position where the LED is placed near each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. A notation section (also called an information display section (including symbols and characters)) indicating attributes of the LED (which may also include the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED) ) is a white insulating paint that is easily noticeable against black (it is not limited to white, but may also be a bright color with high reflection efficiency (e.g. yellow)) on a solid black insulating film (resist). is silk-printed. In this example, the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is divided so that the silk-printed notation part is included in the penetration part 7110a. Specifically, one LED is disposed in the through-hole 7110a, and an inscription printed on silkscreen near this one LED and indicating the part number of this LED, etc. ( The notation part may be arranged so that all of it fits within the penetration part 7110a, or a part of the notation part may be arranged so that it fits inside the penetration part 7110a). As a result, the area inside the penetration part 7110a (the area where one LED 7001 is arranged) on the board 7200 is affected by the marking part silk-printed with white insulating paint with the highest reflection efficiency and placed inside the penetration part 7110a. Since the reflection efficiency can be increased and the reduction in brightness within the through-hole 7110a can be further suppressed when the LED 7001 emits light, the light emitted by the single LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Furthermore, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is coated with a black insulating film (resist) that has the lowest reflection efficiency, so the area outside the penetration part 7110a maintains a low reflection efficiency state. Therefore, even if light from the LED 7001 disposed inside the penetrating portion 7110a leaks out of the penetrating portion 7110a, this light can be prevented from being diffused. In this case, reduce the proportion of the notation occupying the area outside the through-hole 7110a on the board 7200 as much as possible (most of the inscription is within the through-hole 7110a, and a portion slightly protrudes outside the through-hole 7110a). The effect of preventing light diffusion can be further enhanced.

In addition, the above-mentioned circuit board has through holes (through holes that penetrate the circuit board in the front-rear direction to connect the wiring pattern on the front side (front side, LED mounting side) and the wiring pattern on the back side (non-LED mounting side)). A plurality of holes (connecting holes) are formed. This through hole penetrates the circuit board in the front and back direction, so light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the circuit board (front surface, LED mounting surface) is not reflected by the through hole and passes through the back surface of the circuit board. There is a risk that the light will leak to the side (the side where the LED is not mounted) and the brightness will decrease. In this example, in the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, no through hole is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a). With this configuration, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the board 7200, It is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the LED 7001, and it is also possible to suppress interference between each of the LEDs 7001 and make the light emission of each LED 7001 clearly visible. .

Note that a black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, but no marking part is formed on this insulating film (on the resist). You can do it like this. With this configuration, only an insulating film (resist) of the same color is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 from being improved by the marking portion. In addition, by not improving the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, an insulating film of black (or a dark color other than black such as green, blue, or purple) with the lowest reflection efficiency ( It is possible to suppress light interference on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which a resist (resist) is formed, and to suppress light from diffusing from the LED 7001 disposed inside the penetration part 7110a to the outside of the penetration part 7110a. The light emission of each LED 7001 corresponding to the above becomes clear, and the light emission state of each LED 7001 can be easily identified.

In addition, if the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200 is not silk-printed with insulating paint to form a marking part, the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the board 7200 is printed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). If a black insulating film (resist) is formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back side), a color with higher reflective efficiency than black (e.g. white If a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the non-LED mounted surface (back side), colors with lower reflection efficiency than white (e.g. yellow, green, light blue, yellow-green, blue, purple, etc.) , light blue, yellow-green, blue, purple, black, etc.)) may be silk-printed with insulating paint to form the markings, or the LED mounting surface (front, front) of the board 7200 may be foil-cut (wiring pattern). It is formed by forming letters, figures, symbols, etc. in the wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the copper foil is formed (copper plane), and then removing the surrounding copper foil. The marking portion may be formed by the color (formed electrically insulated from electronic components) of the insulating film formed on the substrate 7200 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Dark colors such as black and green) are different from dark colors (if a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark insulating paint such as blue, purple, green, etc.), and a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200. In such a case, the marking portion may be formed by silk printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with a dark-colored insulating paint such as black, blue, or purple.

That is, only an insulating film (resist) of the same color (black in this example, but dark colors such as green, purple, and blue may also be used) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. A marking portion having a color different from that of the insulating film may not be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. With this configuration, it is possible to equalize the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and suppress the improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Since it becomes possible to suppress light interference, the light emission of each LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be made clear, and thereby the individual light emission state can be easily identified. In addition, the part numbers of the LEDs mounted and the areas indicating the positions where the LEDs are placed are displayed on the markings formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) or the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) of the board 7200. It becomes easy to understand the attributes of the LED.

In addition, depending on the color of the insulating paint used to form the marking part, there are cases in which the marking part is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board, and The case where the marking section is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) may be different from the case where the marking section is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface). For example, in a circuit board where a dark-colored (e.g., black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), the insulation film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) The marking portion may be formed by silk printing on the film (resist) with an insulating paint of a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) that is different from the color of the insulating film (resist). , even if the marking part is formed by silk-screen printing with bright-colored (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface). good. In addition, in a circuit board on which a light-colored (white) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), The marking part may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint of a bright color (for example, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist), or the marking part may be formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back side). ) The marking portion may be formed by silk printing with a dark-colored (black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) formed on the insulating film (resist). This adds advantageous characteristics to the circuit board depending on the intended use of the circuit board (whether the circuit board is intended to improve reflection efficiency or to suppress light interference by suppressing reflection efficiency). It is possible to enhance the production effect and information transmission effect. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back upper front Rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) Circuit boards (back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, back Back lower right decorative board 3253 of lower right presentation unit 3250, back lower left decorative board 3203 of back lower left presentation unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, etc.) A light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), and On this insulating film (resist), insulating paint is applied in a light color (yellow in this example, but light colors other than yellow such as light blue or yellow-green) that are different from the color of the insulating film (white in this example). The notation is formed by silk printing.

That is, the light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and back rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.). circuit board (back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, back lower right Back lower right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door A light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. Silk is applied to the film with insulating paint in a light color (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) that is different from the color of the insulating film (resist) so as not to reduce the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). The notation part is formed by printing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) from decreasing due to the marking part, and it is possible to increase the brightness of the light irradiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the performance effect. . Note that it is desirable to use yellow insulating paint as the light color for forming the marking section. Yellow is the color that has the closest reflection efficiency to white, so by forming the markings with yellow insulating paint, we can suppress the decline in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board, and the markings can also protect the LED components. Identifies the attributes of the LED, such as the number and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed (which may also include the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the LED, and the model of the LED) You will be able to do this.

In addition, a circuit board installed in a conventional pachinko machine 1 in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and a marking part is formed on this insulating film (resist) by silk printing with black insulating paint. In contrast, in a circuit board on which a marking part is formed by silk printing using a light-colored insulating paint such as yellow, light blue, or yellow-green, the marking part becomes less noticeable when placed in the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and back rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top and front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3, with the LED mounting surface of each circuit board facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (pachinko machine In pachinko machines 1, which have uniform shapes and decorations according to a predetermined theme, the LEDs are formed on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board. Attributes of the LED, such as the part number of the LED that is unrelated to the game being played, and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed (in addition, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED, If information such as the model number is visually recognized by the player, the sense of unity and worldview of the pachinko machine 1 may be disrupted, which may reduce interest in the game. In the above example, the markings are less conspicuous than the circuit board provided in the conventional pachinko machine 1, so the attributes of the LED such as the part number of the LED unrelated to the game and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed are displayed. (In addition, information such as the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included.) This makes it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED, and the model of the LED. It becomes possible to suppress a collapse of the world view and a decline in interest in games.

Note that white and yellow have similar reflection efficiencies and the difference in visual characteristics (contrast) is small, so a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and a When a yellow insulating paint whose reflection efficiency is close to that of white is used for the marking portion formed, the effect of suppressing the decline in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is enhanced compared to when other color combinations are used. In addition to this, when installed in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to make the markings less noticeable, thereby increasing the effect of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and back rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3, and controls the light emission in relation to the variable effect, so that the specific light emitting decoration can be set. A bright color (yellow, light blue, yellow The marking part may be formed in green (green, etc.), the marking part may be formed by cutting out foil, or the marking part may be formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back side) without forming the marking part on the LED mounting surface. The marking portion may be formed in a color different from the white of the insulating film (not limited to a bright color) or by cutting out foil. Further, the notation section may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" etc. is formed for one LED), or it may be formed for each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" etc. are formed for a plurality of LEDs.) With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of light emitted from dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs. In addition, efficient light emission can be realized by suppressing the loss of light emission caused by non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 is white (not limited to white, but also bright colors with high reflection efficiency (for example, The reflection efficiency may be improved by setting the color to yellow). FIG. 258(A) shows a front view and an AA sectional view of a circuit board (board 7200 in this example) in Modification 1, and FIG. 258(B) shows a circuit board in Modification 2 (board 7200 in this example). A front view and an AA sectional view are shown. As shown in FIG. 258(A), as a substrate 7200 of Modification Example 1, a first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed by applying black insulating paint to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of a base material 7201. At the same time, a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form a back side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then the base material on which the first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed 7201 (LED mounting surface, front surface) corresponding to the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a), a second conductive film 7201 is silk-printed with white insulating paint from above the first conductive film 7200A. It may be formed by forming a conductive film 7200B and mounting one LED 7001 in the center of each second conductive film 7200B (after mounting the LED 7001, a second insulating film 7200B is formed around the LED 7001). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 258(B), as a substrate 7200 of Modification Example 2, white insulating paint is applied to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of a base material 7201 to form a first conductive film 7200A (resist). After forming a back side conductive film 7202 (resist) by applying white insulating paint to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the base material 7201, a first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. Silk printing is performed on the first conductive film 7200A with black insulating paint except for the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) on the surface of the base material 7201 (LED mounting surface, front surface). The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by forming the second conductive film 7200B, and one LED 7001 may be mounted in the center of each first conductive film 7200A (resist) (the second insulating film 7200B is formed after mounting the LED 7001). ).

That is, in FIG. 258(A), a black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white conductive film is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. A second conductive film 7200B is formed. Further, in FIG. 258(B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white conductive film 7200B is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. 1 conductive film 7200A is formed.

In this way, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to It is possible to improve the reflection efficiency of the area (inner area of the penetration part 7110a where the LED 7001 is arranged). As a result, when the LED 7001 emits light, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in brightness within the through-hole 7110a and clearly see the light emitted by one LED 7001. It is now possible to maintain a state of low reflection efficiency around the area, and even if light from the LED 7001 placed inside the penetration part 7110a leaks outside the penetration part 7110a, this light is prevented from being diffused. can.

In this case, the above-mentioned notation may not be silk-printed, or the notation may be silk-printed on the back surface of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted (LED non-mounted surface), A light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency, such as white or yellow, is used on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the surface. The marking portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow or other color may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the area corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The markings may be silk-printed using a light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency.

Note that on the surface of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (front surface, LED mounting surface), the proportion occupied by dark colors with low reflection efficiency (black in this example, black) is larger than the proportion occupied by bright colors with high reflection efficiency (white in this example). The ratio of colors other than green, blue, purple, etc.) is higher. Therefore, on the entire surface of the board 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted (front surface, LED mounting surface), interference between the lights of the LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and the individual lights can be clearly seen.

Further, in the above example, a through hole is not formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000. A through hole may be formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and at least the hole on the LED mounting surface side of this through hole may be closed with the above-mentioned white second conductive film 7200B. In this case as well, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the board 7200. It is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the LED 7200, and it is also possible to suppress interference between each of the LEDs 7001 and make the light emission of each LED 7001 clearly visible. can.

In addition, by housing the board 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed in the case 7100 made of a colored opaque white resin that does not have light-transmitting properties, it is possible to separate the pachinko machine from other circuit boards on which LEDs are mounted. Although the case 7100 is configured to increase the reflection efficiency of light irradiated toward the front of the substrate 1, a region of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a has a high reflection efficiency. By forming the white insulating film, the transparent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetration part 7110a. Even when a case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed from the penetration part 7110a without the attachment of the substrate 7300, the reflection efficiency can be improved by the substrate 7200 exposed from the penetration part 7110a formed in the case 7100. The light emitted from other circuit boards on which LEDs are mounted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 can be reflected with high efficiency, increasing the brightness and improving the performance effect. .

Furthermore, instead of forming a marking part on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the board 7200, the marking part may be formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), or the marking part may be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the board 7200. , front surface) with foil cutout (a cutout that is formed by forming letters, figures, symbols, etc. in the wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and then removing the surrounding copper foil. (The wiring pattern forming the foil cutout is formed electrically insulated from the electronic components), or the marking part may be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200. A dark color different from the color of the insulating film formed on the substrate 7200 (dark color such as black or green) (if a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark colored insulating paint such as blue, purple, green, etc.) If a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a marking part is formed by silk printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with an insulating paint of a dark color such as black, blue, or purple. You may also do so. Note that when forming a marking portion on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200, a predetermined color (white, yellow, black, The markings may be formed by silk printing with an insulating paint of green color, etc., or by foil cutting (the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the wiring pattern made of copper foil can be used to form letters or figures). (The wiring pattern that forms the foil cutout is electrically insulated from the electronic components) to form the notation part. You can do it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to equalize the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and a decrease in reflection efficiency is suppressed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the substrate 7200. This makes it possible to increase the brightness, and in the area outside the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, improvement in reflection efficiency is suppressed and light interference can be suppressed.

Further, the board 7200 is housed in the case 7100 with the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) in close contact with the surface cover part 7110, and the light irradiated from the LED disposed inside the penetration part 7110a is directed to the outside of the penetration part 7110a. Since it is difficult to leak onto the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface), the area where you want to improve the reflection efficiency and the area where you want to improve the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front) of the same board 7200 is suppressed to suppress light interference. This makes it possible to coexist a region that is contradictory to the desired region, which not only increases the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200, but also suppresses interference between the LEDs 7001 and the LED 7001. Individual light emissions can be clearly seen.

Note that the color of the insulating film formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the same color as the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). An insulating film of a bright color (black in this example, but blue, green, purple, etc. other than black may also be used) is formed on the non-LED mounting surface (back side) of the board 7200. The insulating film may also be formed in a color such as yellow or yellow.

In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 are set to have a higher brightness than normal (normal brightness: a brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, which will be described later, and a brightness higher than normal). : Brightness higher than the brightness that reflects the brightness adjustment result by the player, maximum brightness of the brightness range in which the player can adjust the brightness, brightness higher than the brightness range in which the brightness can be adjusted by the player (brightness adjusted by the player) Even under certain conditions, such as when the light emission is controlled to a high brightness (high brightness that cannot be set with Since the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually identified, important information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 can be recognized. In addition, under the above-mentioned specific conditions, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, the back The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, the back bottom left of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. Since some of the plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) provided on the game board 5, such as LEDs mounted on the decorative board 3203, are turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. This makes it easier to determine the light emitting states (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the dot matrix display 7000. In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light with higher brightness than usual, and the decorations (movable decorations (movable decorations (back lower middle rotating decorations 3310) provided on the game board 5) , back top-rear rotating decorative body 3440, back back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, and back movable decorative body 3110), back front left decorative body unit 3710, back top direction unit 3400, back front Light-emitting means provided in decorations that do not display important information (excluding the function display unit 1400 that displays important information) such as the right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, etc. (LED) may be turned off, and the LEDs serving as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000 may be controlled to emit light while maintaining the normal brightness ( For example, if you want to draw attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600 (such as when super reach or an error condition occurs), in this case, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced, so the dot matrix display This makes it easier to determine the light emitting states (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the device 7000.

In addition, since all the light from the LED 7001 provided in the penetration part 7110a can be emitted from the front of the penetration part 7110a without leaking outside the penetration part 7110a, the brightness inside the penetration part 7110a is reduced. can be suppressed. Note that not only the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 but also the substrate 7200 are firmly attached to the front cover part 7110 (difficult to remove, irreversible and cannot be removed without destroying at least part of the front cover part 7110 and the substrate 7200 due to welding, etc.). In this way, the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 can be protected by the surface cover part 7110, so that there is no possibility that the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 will be damaged due to mischief or the like. is suppressed.

Further, a part of the back cover part 7120 that covers the back surface (rear surface) on which the connector 7002 of the board 7200 is mounted has an opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002 that is mounted on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200. It is formed. Note that, as described above, since the board 7200 is fixed to the front cover part 7110 in close contact with the front cover part 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the through part 7110a, the back surface (rear surface) of the board 7200 is ) side is suppressed, and the light from the LED 7001 is prevented from leaking from the opening 7120a formed in the back cover portion 7120 and exposing the connector 7002.

As mentioned above, in this example, the light-emitting decoration body provided with the LEDs that control light emission in connection with the variable effect is formed of a translucent resin, and emits surface light by the light emitted from the LEDs. . On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 is a colored opaque white that does not have translucency (it may be other than white as long as it is opaque and does not have translucency; for example, it may be black, dark blue, deep green, etc.) The light from the LED 7001 can be seen only from the penetration part 7110a, and the light from the LED 7001 cannot be seen from other parts of the case 7100. . In addition, the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in close contact with each other without any gaps, so that light leakage from the joint between the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 is prevented. suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 that is individually controlled to display important information related to the progress of the game (for example, special lottery results) is made of a non-transparent resin. A light-emitting decorative body that accommodates a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted, which are formed by a method such as the above, and whose light emission is controlled in units of a predetermined number of LEDs (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and which do not display important information related to the progress of a game. is made of a transparent resin, etc., so it is difficult to determine whether the defective LED or other light emitting means displays important information, and whether the LED control unit (controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs) This makes it possible to easily determine from the appearance whether the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game is malfunctioning, and it becomes possible to respond quickly if a malfunction occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered by welding or the like, so that the board 7200 cannot be taken out from inside the case 7100 without destroying at least a part of the case 7100. It has become. Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and after opening the main control board box 1320 by destroying one of the plurality of sealing mechanisms, the destroyed sealing mechanism The main control board box 1320 can be closed using one different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of this example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and even once a part of the case 7100 is destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to its original state. There is. In this way, since the substrate 7200 is protected by being enclosed in the case 7100, which cannot be taken out (exposed) without destroying at least a portion of it, the LED 7001, which has an important function, is physically destroyed. can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light-emitting decoration body (inner side of the back) that accommodates a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted that are controlled to emit light in units of a predetermined number of LEDs (each group of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game. Rotating decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421 , back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are formed to be removable (reversible) with screws, etc., so that the circuit board can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decoration. It has become. As a result, electronic components (such as LEDs) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 that houses the circuit board on which the LEDs displaying important information are mounted are difficult to be physically destroyed, and important This prevents information from disappearing, and makes it possible to immediately replace the light-emitting decoration that houses the circuit board on which the LED that does not display important information should a malfunction occur in the electronic component (LED, etc.). ing.

In addition, in the dot matrix display 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a preset constant brightness, and when the production operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, press operation section 303) is operated. However, you cannot adjust the brightness, which will be described later. This makes it possible to keep the brightness of the LED 7001, which has an important function, constant, and to reliably convey important information such as information related to the player's interests. Note that the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the above-mentioned specific conditions uses the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side of the door frame LEDs provided on the side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457; (The LED provided on the decorative board 314 may also be included.) Similarly, the light emission may be controlled without turning off the light.

Further, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 may be turned off. When the drive motor 3352 rotates the lifting arm 3357 to move the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440 is moved to an appearance position lower than the back upper front decoration 3421. When moving the back-rear-left rotating decoration 3510 to the first appearance position or second appearance position to the right of the back-front left presentation unit 3700, the back-rear-right rotation decoration 3610 is moved to the back-front right presentation. When moving to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the unit 3800, and by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the lock by the lock member 3134 is released and the rear rear movement is performed. When the decoration 3110 is dropped from the retreat position to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top presentation unit 3400 are The mounted LED, the LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right production unit 3250, The LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200 may be turned off. In front of the effect display device 1600, there are movable decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, and back rear movable decoration 3110). ), by turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the effect performed by the movable decorative body displayed in front of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. can be prevented from interfering with In this case, the dot matrix display 7000 may be continuously controlled to emit light without being turned off. Thereby, even under specific conditions, important information such as information relating to the interests of the player can be displayed, and the player etc. will not be disadvantaged.

In this example, an error condition occurs, such as detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch, not only when a specific reach effect is executed, but also when the back front The LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the left decoration unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, the back front right decoration of the back front right decoration unit 3810. LED mounted on the board 3814, LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, LED mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the decorative bodies (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back up and back rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back movable decorative body 3110), Even when turning off at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3, The LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, when an error condition occurs, for example, at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are turned off during normal operation. Notifies that an error condition has occurred (for example, door frame 3 is open) by controlling the light emission in a different error mode (for example, flashing light at higher brightness and for a shorter time than usual). Or, the effect display device 1600 displays a message to notify that an error has occurred (e.g., "An abnormality has occurred!"), or outputs an audio message indicating that an error has occurred (e.g., "The door is open."). .'', ``Please remove the ball.'', etc.), while controlling the light emission of the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 without turning it off, if a variable effect is being executed. Not only can interruption of the game be suppressed, but also the update display (fluctuating display) of the dot matrix display 7000 can be continued, thereby preventing anxiety and distrust that the special lottery results will not be displayed. can.

Note that whether or not to turn off the dot matrix display 7000 may be changed depending on the type of error state (degree of urgency). When a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (an act such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed) ), when a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the tray 202 is full of game balls B), a detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is input. is input (an error in which there is a low possibility that the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a, etc.), the dot matrix display 7000 is provided. By controlling the light emission of the LED 7001 without turning it off, the progress of the game is not interrupted, and errors that seriously affect the game (serious errors: when a radio wave irradiation is detected, when a magnet is detected, when a second When the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input when the starting opening 2004 is not open, the first big winning opening sensor 2402 or the second big winning opening is activated when the starting opening 2004 is not open and the detection signal is input from the second starting opening sensor 2401. If a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2601 is input, which is likely to be an error in which there is a high possibility of a goofing act, the dot matrix display 7000 can be controlled to turn off, so that it can be detected while the variable effect is being executed. Even if there is an error, the variable performance may be interrupted or terminated.This allows the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 to be varied depending on the degree of error, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor. You can choose not to give it.

In addition, in the case of an error state, depending on the type of error state, a display notifying that the error state has occurred on the effect display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed in the state at the time of the error. Either one of the notification by controlling the light emission and the notification of the occurrence of an error state by audio output may be executed, or any combination of the two may be executed. You may also choose to execute all of them. For example, if a minor error that has a small effect on the game occurs, the effect display device 1600 will display a message notifying the user that an error has occurred, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 will emit light in the same manner as when the error occurs. A serious error that has a serious impact on the game occurs by either one or a combination of two of the following: notification by control and notification that an error condition has occurred by audio output. In this case, the effect display device 1600 displays a display to notify that there is an error state, the LED provided in the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light in the manner in which the error occurs, and the error is output by audio. It may also be possible to perform all of the above, including notification that a condition has occurred.

Furthermore, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As a result, compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs control based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems (such as displaying content different from the content originally displayed). , it is possible to avoid putting disadvantages on players and the like. Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control routine processing approximately every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. In order to do this, the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 are updated in a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and the dot matrix display 7000 displays content that is different from the original content, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) to the original display content. It can be changed and will not cause any disadvantage to players, etc. That is, the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (high importance) outputs a control signal at a shorter cycle than the light emitting decoration that does not display important information (low importance), and the light emitting means ( Since the lighting mode of the LED (LED) is updated, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 (lighting mode of the LED 7001) that displays important information, it can be immediately changed to the normal display content. This light can prevent different contents from being displayed and disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the There is a risk that a communication error will occur and a problem will occur in the information shown by the dot matrix display 7000 (emission state of the LED 7001), but in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, so the peripheral Compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, problems are less likely to occur in the information shown by the dot matrix display 7000 (emission state of the LED 7001), which is disadvantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the light-transmitting film 7300 is attached to the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 257(A), the translucent film 7300 is made of a semi-transparent sheet, and the area around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the case 7100 is printed with opaque black (limited to black). First, the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is colored in a color (such as a dark color) that makes it easier to see the light emitting state, so that no light is transmitted. On the other hand, the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is not printed in black, but is in a translucent state with light-transmitting properties, and emits light from the surface by the light emitted from the LED 7001. As a result, when the LED 7001 is made to emit light and the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a emits surface light, the area around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a appears dark like a shadow, and the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a appears dark. By contrasting the area with the surroundings of the area corresponding to the penetration part, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface emission (emission state of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200) in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a, and the dot matrix display 7000 displays various information. By being able to clearly display characters, symbols, figures, etc., it is possible to reliably convey important information such as information related to the player's interests. Further, by providing a region that does not transmit light between each of the surface-emitting regions corresponding to the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light emitted from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, and Even if light of different colors is emitted from each of the penetration parts 7110a, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the emitted light of various colors and make the individual colors clearly visible. Since it is possible to identify each region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a that emits light from the surface as a separate light emitting region, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed. Note that, without providing the light-transmitting film 7300, at least the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 itself is formed of a dark-colored resin such as black, thereby making it easier to see the light emitted from the penetration portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light. In this case as well, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, so that important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be displayed. can be conveyed reliably.

Note that the front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) and back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 described above are divided into a first region and a second region by predetermined virtual lines, and the substrate The LED 7001 may be mounted only on one of the first region and the second region on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, or the LED 7001 may be mounted on only one of the first region and the second region on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. A dark-colored (black in this example) insulating film with low reflection efficiency is formed not only on one region where the LED 7001 is mounted, but also on the other region where the LED 7001 is not mounted, of the first region and the second region. You can do it like this. For example, as shown in FIG. 259, a board 7200 on which a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) is defined by a virtual line X as a mounting area on which an LED 7001 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface). , and an unmounted area where the LED 7001 is not mounted on the front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface).

Furthermore, the connector 7002 may be arranged in an unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the board 7200, and in this case, a virtual line in the unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounted surface) of the board 7200 The connector 7002 may be placed near the end on the side far from X. As described above, the board 7200 is housed in the case 7100, and an opening 7120a is formed on the back side of the case 7100 (back cover section 7120) to expose the connector. Even if light enters into the case 7100 through the opening 7120a, since the opening 7120a is formed at a position away from the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted, the light enters into the through-hole 7110a and hits the player. It is possible to suppress recognition of incorrect information. In addition, a black insulating film with low reflection efficiency is formed not only in the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface) but also in the unmounted area where the LED 7001 is not mounted. Even if light entering the case 7100 from the portion 7120a passes through the through hole 7003 formed in the board 7200 and reaches the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface), the black color formed in the unmounted area The insulating film can suppress the reflection of light and prevent it from entering the mounting area. This can prevent light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and causing the player to perceive incorrect information.

In addition, since the connector 7002 is arranged in an unmounted area near the end of the board 7200 farthest from the mounting area, and an opening 7120a is formed in the part of the case 7100 that corresponds to the connector 7002, it is possible to access the board 7200 from outside the case 7100. The incident light can be suppressed from reaching the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface) through the through hole 7003 formed in the mounting area of the substrate 7200.

In addition, in the above example, bright colored electronic components are not mounted on the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface), but the unmounted area of the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, front surface) is bright. It may also be one that mounts colored electronic components. In this case, a light-colored electronic component is provided at a position away from the LED 7001, and a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200 around this light-colored electronic component. Therefore, even if light is reflected by light-colored electronic components, further reflection is suppressed by the black insulating film formed in the unmounted area on the surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface, surface), and the mounting It is possible to suppress light from entering the area, thereby suppressing light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and causing the player to recognize incorrect information.

[Example of production using a dot matrix display]
Next, an example of presentation using the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 256, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. It also displays important information related to the progress of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 260, when performing a variable effect on the effect display device 1600 based on a starting prize at the first starting port 2002 and a starting winning at the second starting port 2004, the dot matrix display Also at 7000, the display contents are updated (variably displayed). Then, a predetermined mode is displayed when a predetermined period of time (variable time) has elapsed since the start of updating the display contents on the dot matrix display 7000.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 261(A) and 261(B), information related to wins and losses, such as "jackpot" and "loss," is displayed as the variable time elapses. In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from a light-emitting decoration etc. which is provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect, and is different from a light-emitting decoration body etc. that is provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and which controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect. , second special lottery result) (at least, it is sufficient if it displays different contents depending on whether it is a jackpot or a loss). That is, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is determined from the light emission mode of a light-emitting decoration, etc., which is provided with a circuit board mounting an LED and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect. While it is said to be difficult, it is difficult to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000. is considered possible. In addition, if some conditions are met (for example, when executing a jackpot confirmation effect that notifies you that a jackpot is confirmed before deriving the special lottery result), a circuit board on which an LED is mounted is installed. The light emission may be controlled so that the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can be determined from the light emission mode of the light-emitting decoration, etc., which is controlled to emit light in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect. However, in the dot matrix display 7000, it is possible to always determine the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200, not only under specific conditions. Even if a malfunction occurs in the light emitting mode of a light emitting decoration such as a light emitting decoration that is equipped with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect, the special lottery result ( Since the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be discriminated, no disadvantage is given to the players.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 displays the jackpot type (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 2R jackpot) during the jackpot gaming state. Note that it may be possible to display a message to that effect when the time is short, or to display a message to that effect when the state is in a high probability state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game is played in which the game ball aims to enter the second starting port 2004 during time saving (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as probability variable state)). (so-called "right-handed hitting") is now practiced. In addition, when the time is shortened, the second starting port 2004 is opened more frequently, and the starting prize (first starting port 2002) is opened more frequently than in normal times (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state). This makes it easier for the game ball to win, and the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004, resulting in an advantageous situation for the player. However, if the player does not play a game aiming at hitting the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting") when the time is short, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 261(C), when the time is short, the player plays a game aiming at the game ball entering the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting"). "Right hit →" is displayed as a notification. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to enjoy an advantageous state even though the time is short, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from a light-emitting decoration, etc., which is provided with a circuit board mounting LEDs and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating performance, and is capable of displaying important information related to the game. It is supposed to be done. Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted is an insulating film of a different color from the circuit board provided on the light emitting decoration etc. and on which the LEDs are mounted. is formed (resist processing), so when you visually check the LED mounting surface of the LED, you can tell whether it is a circuit board on which an LED is mounted to display important information related to the game based on the color of the LED mounting surface. can be easily determined.

In this example, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, but it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the areas inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and allows structures and movable objects to be provided to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects.

By the way, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game balls B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 for paying out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side. A unit 560 is provided. Further, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A dispensing device 580 that dispenses game balls B one by one through the dispensing device 580, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, and a door frame that directs the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600. 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

In addition, the game balls B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are easily charged as they move downstream while rubbing against each other, and when electrostatic discharge occurs from the game balls B, nearby There is a possibility that a malfunction may occur in the light emitting means (LED etc.) arranged. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 directly controls the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game. Since the lighting state) is updated, even if there is a problem with the display content on the dot matrix display 7000 due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the display can be immediately updated to the correct content, and the display can be updated to the correct content for players etc. It is designed not to cause any disadvantage.

In this way, the area near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is susceptible to noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but in this example, the area near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is By updating the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 in a short period of time (4 ms), areas susceptible to noise, for example, a front view of the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The dot matrix display 7000 can be placed even in the upper left area or the lower left area when viewed from the front. That is, even if the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is placed in an area susceptible to noise, it can display without causing any disadvantage to the player.

According to the above embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back top and rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418 of the door frame, the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame), The LEDs provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. ), dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means are divided into separate systems for each light emitting means and the first light emission is controlled individually. means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400), and a second light emitting means (light emitting decoration body (back bottom center rotating decoration) which is divided into separate systems for each predetermined number of light emitting means and whose light emission is controlled in units of a predetermined number. Body 3310, back top and back rotating decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top and front rotation decoration 3410, back top and front decoration 3421, back LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418 of the door frame, and the LEDs provided in the door frame 3). LEDs provided on the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the plate center upper decorative board 314. )), and the color of the mounting surfaces of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. By looking at the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board, it is possible to determine the control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the board. A circuit board (board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided in the function display unit 1400) on which the light-emitting means that plays a role is mounted, and other circuit boards (light-emitting decoration (back side center rotating decoration) 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back back left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front The circuit board provided on the left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the circuit board on which the LED mounted on the door frame 3 is mounted (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side of the door frame Decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, and also includes plate upper left decorative board 273, plate upper right decorative board 278, and plate center upper decorative board 314. It may be something. )) By making the mounting surfaces of and have different colors, it is easier to determine whether the malfunctioning light emitting means is an important light emitting means or not, and it is possible to quickly respond if a problem occurs in the progress of the game. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Further, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it possible to distinguish the special lottery result, the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it difficult to distinguish the special lottery result, and the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it difficult to distinguish the special lottery result, and the first light emitting means is mounted on a circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. The mounting surface of the circuit board is a special color (black) that is different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, so the light emitting means in which the defective light emitting means plays an important role It becomes easy to determine whether or not it is.

A first board case (case 7100 that accommodates the circuit board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box that accommodates the function display board of the function display unit) that accommodates the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted; A second board case that accommodates the circuit board on which the means are mounted (upper left decoration 271 of the tray unit 200, upper right decoration 276 of the tray, upper center decoration 312a of the production operation unit 300, upper left side decoration 312a of the door frame left side unit 400) Door frame left side decoration body 404, door frame right side decoration body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decoration body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421 , Back front left decorative body 3713, Back front right decorative body 3813, Back bottom left rotation decoration 3201, Back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, Back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, Back top front rotation decoration 3410, Back top front Decorative body 3421 etc.), and the first board case is formed of a non-transparent material (a case 7100 housing the board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit). A first display part (through-hole 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of the box housing the function display board) capable of determining the light emitting state of the first light-emitting means. The second board case has a second main body portion formed of a translucent material (a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper portion of the production operation unit 300). Decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decorative body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decorative body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, 3410, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, etc.), it can be determined whether the light emitting means is a control unit of the light emitting means or a light emitting means that plays an important role depending on the presence or absence of translucency of the board case. becomes easier.

The first board case becomes a state where the circuit board can be removed by destroying a part of the first board case, and the second board case becomes a state where the circuit board can be removed without destroying a part of the second board case. Since the circuit board cannot be removed without destroying a part of the first board case, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means, which plays an important role, from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, it is easy to physically replace light emitting means of low importance.

First light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear Right rotation decoration body 3610, rear movable decoration body 3110, back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). The LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top) The LED provided on the right decorative board 457 may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate), and the first light emitting means. The first circuit board to be mounted (light-emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110) , back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top and front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), a circuit for mounting an LED provided in the door frame 3 Boards (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the upper left side of the plate) It may also include the decorative substrate 273, the upper right decorative substrate 278, and the upper decorative substrate 314 in the center of the dish. 7000, a function display unit 1400), and a second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted (a board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided in the function display unit 1400), A white insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a dark insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. Therefore, the reflection efficiency of the first circuit board increases, and a decrease in brightness when the first light emitting means emits light can be suppressed. Furthermore, since a dark-colored insulating film is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light-emitting means that individually controls light emission is mounted, reflection is suppressed and the individual light-emissions are controlled by contrasting with the mounting surface of the dark-colored insulating film. It can be clearly seen.

A suppressing member that suppresses interference between the colors of light emitted by each of the plurality of light emitting means of the second light emitting means (each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the penetration part 7110a of the case 7100 and the LED insertion hole of the box housing the function display board). ), diffusion and interference of the emitted light colors are suppressed, making it easier to individually identify the emitted colors of the plurality of light emitting means.

The board case further includes a board case (a case 7100 that accommodates the board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box body that accommodates the function display board of the function display unit) that accommodates the second circuit board, and the board case has a plurality of light emitting means. There is a display part (through-hole 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole in the box housing the function display board) that allows you to determine the light emitting state, and a dark-colored display auxiliary part (the case 7100) that is formed around the display part. The transparent film 7300 is opaque and black around the area corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a, and the black function display sticker is black around the transparent part. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the light emitting means.

A game board 5 on which games are played, a frame (door frame 3) provided with a game window (door window 101a) disposed in front of the game board 5 to make the game board 5 visible, and the frame. A plurality of frame side light emitting means provided on the body (door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, which may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center decorative board 314), and the LEDs installed on the game board and the game window. A plurality of board-side light-emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510) , back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back-rear movable decoration body 3110, back top-front rotation decoration body 3410, back top-front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). When a predetermined specific condition is met, the plurality of frame side light emitting means emit light with higher brightness than usual, and at least the specific board side light emitting means among the plurality of board side light emitting means is provided. The device (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) emits light while maintaining the normal brightness, and the specific board-side light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LED elements) and the light emitting elements A light-emitting board to be mounted (substrate 7200, function display board) and a partitioning member for partitioning each of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the light-emitting board (penetrating portion 7110a of case 7100, LED of a box housing the function display board) Each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the through hole for the frame. Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high brightness, it is easy to determine the light emitting state of a specific board side light emitting means.

When a specific condition is met, a predetermined number of board-side light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (lower back Middle rotating decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the brightness inside the game window can be reduced, and it is possible to This makes it easier to determine the light emitting state of the board side light emitting means.

A dark color with low reflection efficiency is used around the area of the light emitting substrate that is divided by the dividing means and where the light emitting elements are arranged (around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the substrate 7200, and around the area corresponding to the function display board). Since the insulating film is formed, even if the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks out of the area divided by the partitioning member, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of light, and the dark-colored insulating film By contrasting the images, they can be seen more clearly.

A first light-emitting means (light-emitting decoration body (back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear rotation left rotation decoration body) which receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emission mode based on the received control signal. Decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. , which may also include LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper central decorative board 314 of the plate), which represent information of higher importance than the first light emitting means. and a second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) to obtain control signals, and since control signals are output at different cycles between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, when a malfunction occurs, In addition, it is possible to prevent both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means from emitting light in a light emitting manner different from the original light emitting manner.

A first light emission control means that outputs a control signal to the first light emission means (the part that controls the light emission of the light emitting decoration by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510), and a second light emission control means that outputs a control signal to the second light emission means. The second light emitting means is controlled at a shorter cycle than the first light emitting control means. Since a signal is output, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a problem in the information displayed by the second light emitting means.

The first light emitting control means controls the first light emitting means to emit light in a manner that makes it difficult to discern the special lottery result, and the second light emitting control means controls the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner that allows the special lottery result to be determined; By controlling the light emission in a manner that allows the results of the lottery process to be determined, the second light emitting means, which is more important than the first light emitting means, is controlled to emit light by outputting a control signal at a shorter cycle than the first light emitting means. , it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring in the information displayed by the second light emitting means and causing a disadvantage to the player.

A game control means (main control MPU of main control board 1310) that includes a first light emission control means and controls the progress of the game, and a second light emission control means that controls the performance based on commands from the game control means. The first light emitting means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emitting means is controlled by the performance control means. The occurrence of can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) that controls the progress of the game, and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, Function display unit 1400, light-emitting decorative body (back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top LEDs provided on the front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418 , the LEDs provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457; ), and the plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different circuit boards depending on the purpose (performance purpose, notification purpose of game status or special display result). , a first circuit board (substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, function provided in the function display unit 1400) on which a light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) used for the first application is mounted; display substrate), and a light-emitting means (light-emitting decoration body (back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, (back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back-rear movable decoration body 3110, back top-front rotation decoration body 3410, back top-front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LED, LED provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, and the top left of the plate. A second circuit board (light-emitting decoration body (lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 , back top/back rotation decorative body 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top/front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left A circuit board provided on the decorative body 3713, a back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), a circuit board on which an LED is mounted mounted on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decoration of the door frame) A board 418, a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, and also includes a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, and a plate center upper decorative board 314. It may be. )) The colors of the mounting surfaces are made different, so the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, by making a circuit board where you want to increase reflection efficiency a bright color and a circuit board where you want to suppress light diffusion a dark color, it is possible to suppress the transmission of erroneous information to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board is used to enhance the presentation effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board is used to display information related to the lottery results. By forming a dark insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board that displays predetermined information, it is possible to suppress light interference and to suppress notification of incorrect information.

A white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, a dark insulating film is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, and a second circuit board is provided with a light emitting means used to enhance the presentation effect. By forming a white insulating film on the surface of the first circuit board, it is possible to increase the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means, thereby increasing the brightness of the light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board when emitting light. The performance effect will be enhanced. On the other hand, by forming a dark insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board for displaying information related to the lottery results, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from each light emitting means from diffusing and interfering. The light emitting state of each light emitting means becomes clear, and information related to lottery results can be prevented from being misunderstood and transmitted.

A first circuit board, comprising a game board 5 in which a game area 5a on which game balls roll is formed on the front surface, and rail members (outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002) that partition the front surface of the game board 5. is placed in the inner area of the rail member, the second circuit board is placed in the outer area of the rail member, and a white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, so that the rail that attracts the player's attention is It is possible to enhance the performance effect by increasing the light reflection efficiency in the inner region of the member.

A plurality of light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration body 3510, back-rear clockwise rotation decoration 3610, back-rear movable decoration 3110, back top-front rotation decoration 3410, back top-front decoration 3421, back-front left decoration 3713, back-front right decoration 3813, etc.). and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, and the door frame top left decorative board 456). , and the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457, and may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate), dot matrix display device 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.), the plurality of light emitting means are divided into a plurality of light emitting units, and the plurality of light emitting units have a plurality of light emitting means that simultaneously emit light. The first light-emitting units (light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right Rotating decorative body 3610, rear movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board) 457, and may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper decorative board 314 of the center of the plate), and a plurality of light emitting means at the same time. a second light emitting unit (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) that can be identified for each light emitting state when the plurality of light emitting means are mounted; A first insulating film (a light-colored insulating film such as white) formed of a first insulating paint, and the electrical component formed on the first insulating film and mounted on the first circuit board. The notation that specifies the LED attributes (such as the part number of the LED, the area indicating the position where the LED is placed, etc.), the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the direction in which the LED is mounted (mounting direction), and the model of the LED. may include. ) (including those printed with foil or silk-printed with an insulating paint of a different color from the first insulating paint)), and the second insulating unit is provided with a plurality of light emitting means. The circuit board is characterized in that the notation portion is not formed on the surface of the circuit board, and only a second insulating film (a dark-colored insulating film such as black) made of a second insulating paint is formed. As a result, only the second insulating film made of the second insulating paint is formed without forming a marking part on the surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting unit is mounted, which allows the individual light emitting states to be visually recognized. Since the structure is configured so that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board is made uniform, for example, when only the second insulating film made of a light-colored second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, Uniform light emission can be achieved, and when only the second insulating film made of a dark-colored second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, light interference can be suppressed and the individual light emission states can be clearly seen. This makes it easy to identify individual light emission states.

Alternatively, the first insulating paint may be a light color, and the marking portion may be formed in a light color different from that of the first insulating paint. As a result, a coating film made of a light-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a marking part in a light color different from the light color of the insulating paint is formed on this coating film. It becomes possible to suppress a reduction in reflection efficiency on the surface of the board due to the notation, and it also becomes possible to specify the electrical component mounted on the first circuit board by the notation. This makes it possible to identify the electrical components mounted on the first circuit board without reducing the brightness of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board, thereby improving the effect of game performance. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Alternatively, the first insulating paint may be white and the marking portion may be yellow. As a result, the marking part is formed in yellow, which has a reflection efficiency close to the white color of the insulating paint formed on the surface of the first circuit board. It becomes possible to specify the electrical components mounted on the circuit board, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the brightness of light emitted by a plurality of light emitting means. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the game performance and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be dark-colored, and a dark-colored second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, while a coating film of dark-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, no marking part is formed, so that improvement in reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board due to the marking part is suppressed. becomes possible. This makes it possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the second circuit board and make the individual light emitting states clear, thereby making it easier to identify the individual light emitting states.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be black, and a black second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. As a result, while a coating film of black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the marking part is not formed, so that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed from being improved by the marking part. becomes possible. This makes it possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the second circuit board and make the individual light emitting states clear, thereby making it easier to identify the individual light emitting states.

Furthermore, a marking section for specifying the electrical component to be mounted on the second circuit board may be formed on the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. Since the marking portion is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board, it becomes possible to identify the electrical components mounted on the second circuit board while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board.

Further, the marking portion formed on the back surface of the second circuit board may be formed in a color having higher reflection efficiency than black. Since the marking part formed in a color with higher reflection efficiency than black is formed on the back side of the second circuit board where the light emitting means is not mounted, the marking part is formed in a color with higher reflection efficiency than black. It becomes possible to identify the electrical components mounted on the second circuit board, suppress the interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board, and clarify the individual light emission states. Identification can be facilitated.

In addition, a first circuit board cover that covers at least the surface on which the plurality of light emitting means of the first circuit board is mounted (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back Back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, and the left side of the door frame 3 inner lens 403, right side inner lens 415, etc.); and a second circuit board cover (surface cover part 7110) that covers at least the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. The circuit board case is formed of a material that has translucency in a portion corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board, and the second circuit board case is formed of a material that does not have translucency in a portion corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board. In addition to forming the second circuit board, the second circuit board may also include a display section that makes it possible to determine the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board. By forming the portion of the first circuit board case that corresponds to the surface of the first circuit board with a translucent material, light is emitted over the entire region of the first circuit board case that corresponds to the surface of the first circuit board. Can be decorated. In addition, a portion of the second circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board is formed of a non-transparent material, so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be determined from the display section. It is possible to suppress the interference of light from each of the light emitting means and to clarify the light emitting state of each individual light emitting means, thereby making it possible to easily identify the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display section of the second circuit board cover may include a suppressing means (each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape) for suppressing interference of light from each of the plurality of light emitting means. With this configuration, interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed, and the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually.

The second circuit board cover also covers a front cover part (front cover part 7110) that covers the front surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. It has a back cover part (back cover part 7120), houses the second circuit board, and is a part of the second circuit board cover (a part of one or both of the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120). The second circuit board may be made detachable by being destroyed. As a result, the second circuit board cannot be removed without destroying a part of the second circuit board case, which reduces the risk of impairing the function of suppressing light interference.

A gaming machine that performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a win based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and when the result of the lottery is a win, is controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs). A plurality of light-emitting substrates having a front surface on which is mounted and a back surface on which the plurality of light-emitting means are not mounted (the back-front left decorative board 3714 of the back-front left decorative body unit 3710, the back-top front decorative board 3422 of the back-top presentation unit 3400). , the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right presentation unit 3250, the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200, the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, board 7200 provided on dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400 The plurality of light emitting substrates include a dark light emitting substrate (dot matrix display 7000) in which an insulating film of dark color (black, green, navy blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint is formed on at least the surface of the plurality of light emitting substrates. 7200 provided in the function display unit 1400, etc.), and a light color in which an insulating film is formed with a light color (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint on at least the surface. Light emitting board (back front left decorative board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of back upper direction unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back lower right direction Back bottom right decorative board 3253 of unit 3250, back bottom left decorative board 3203 of back bottom left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc.), and the dark light emitting board has a connector (connector 7002) for connecting wiring to the dark light emitting board only on the back side of the dark light emitting board. ) is arranged, and the bright color light emitting board is characterized in that a connector for connecting wiring to the bright color light emitting board is arranged on the surface of the bright color light emitting board. With this configuration, there is no need to place a connector on the front surface of the light emitting board, where an insulating film made of dark insulating paint is formed, and by placing the connector on the back side, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light emitting board is uniform. This makes it possible to clearly see the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. This improves the presentation effect and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

Alternatively, a light-colored (white, light blue, yellow, yellow-green, etc.) connector may be used. By placing a bright connector on the back side of the dark light emitting board, it is possible to connect wiring to the dark light emitting board while suppressing the improvement in reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark light emitting board. By making the connector disposed on the surface of the bright color light emitting board bright, it becomes possible to connect wiring to the bright color light emitting board while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright color light emitting board.

Furthermore, a black insulating paint may be used as the dark insulating paint. Since an insulating film made of black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate, interference of light on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate can be suppressed. In addition, by arranging the connector on the back surface, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark light emitting board can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, a white insulating paint may be used as the light-colored insulating paint. An insulating film made of white insulating paint is formed on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting board, which improves the light reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright-color light-emitting board compared to circuit boards on which a conventional green insulating film is formed. be able to. In addition, by making the connector disposed on the surface a bright color, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright color light emitting board, and it is possible to increase the brightness of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means.

Alternatively, a white connector may be used. By placing a white connector on the back side of the dark light emitting board, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark light emitting board can be made uniform without having to be improved by the connector, making it possible to clearly see the light emitted by multiple light emitting means. . Further, by making the connector white, it becomes easier to identify the connector when a dark insulating film is formed on the back surface of the dark light emitting board. Further, since a white connector similar to the insulating film formed on the surface is disposed on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency of the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate due to the connector.

The device further includes a dark light emitting board case (case 7100) that accommodates a dark light emitting board, and the part of the dark light emitting board case corresponding to the surface of the dark light emitting board is formed of a non-transparent material. A display section (penetration section 7110a) that allows the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the dark light emitting board to be determined may be provided. A portion of the dark light emitting board case that corresponds to the surface of the dark light emitting board is made of a non-transparent material, so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be determined from the display section. It is possible to suppress the interference of light from each other and make the individual light emitting states clear, thereby making it possible to easily identify the light emitting states of each of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display section of the dark light emitting board case may include a suppressing means (each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the through part 7110a) for suppressing interference of light from each of the plurality of light emitting means. Interference of light on the surface of the dark light emitting substrate is suppressed, making it easier to individually identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

Moreover, the dark color light emitting board case may be in a state where the dark color light emitting board can be removed by destroying a part of the dark color light emitting board case. Since the dark light emitting board cannot be removed without destroying a part of the dark light emitting board case, there is less risk of the function of suppressing light interference being impaired.

A lottery means that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game control means that controls the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and a plurality of light emitting means that can emit light as the game progresses. (Light-emitting decorations (back lower and middle rotating decorations 3310, back top and back rotating decorations 3440, back left rotation decorations 3510, back right rotation decorations 3610, back movable decorations 3110, back top and front rotation decorations) 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), LEDs installed in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration LEDs provided on the substrate 402, door frame right side decorative substrate 418, door frame top center decorative substrate 455, door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and door frame top right decorative substrate 457, plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decoration A gaming machine comprising: a substrate 278, a dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.). , the plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different substrates depending on the purpose (e.g., whether to emit light from a surface to decorate the decoration body, display various hemorrhoid characters, symbols, figures, etc. by dot matrix display, etc.). Among the plurality of light emitting means, the first light emitting means is a first light emitting substrate (a substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a substrate 7200 provided in the function display unit 1400, which is provided in the function display unit 1400) having a black mounting surface with low light reflection efficiency. Among the plurality of light emitting means, the second light emitting means is provided on the second light emitting board (the back front left side of the back front left decorative body unit 3710) and has a white mounting surface with high light reflection efficiency. Decorative board 3714, back top and front decorative board 3422 of back top presentation unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right decorative board 3253 of back bottom right presentation unit 3250, back bottom left presentation Back bottom left decorative board 3203 of unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc.), and the first light emitting substrate is housed in a white case body (case 7100) with high light reflection efficiency. Thereby, although the first light emitting substrate does not increase the reflection efficiency of its own light emission, it can increase the reflection efficiency of other light emission.

Further, the first light emitting means mounted on the first light emitting board can display the lottery result of the lottery means in a light emitting manner, and the second light emitting means mounted on the second light emitting board can display the lottery result of the lottery means in a light emitting manner. The first light emitting means may be capable of executing a light emitting effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result in a light emission mode. By making the mounting surface of the first light-emitting board, which displays the lottery results in a light-emitting manner, black with low light reflection efficiency, interference of light on the mounting surface of the first light-emitting board is suppressed, and incorrect information is notified. can be suppressed.

[Countermeasures to prevent unauthorized use of important boards]
As mentioned above, in this example, the circuit board that implements the light emitting means that plays an important role that hinders the progress of the game, in other words, the importance level is increased by controlling directly related to the player's interests. A black insulating film is formed on the surface of the expensive circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, etc.), and important information related to the progress of the game is formed. Light-emitting decorations that do not display any information (it may be displayed rarely) (rear lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, rear movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) and others such as those provided on the door frame 3. In other words, a circuit board of low importance by performing control related to game performance that is not directly related to the interests of the player (in this example, the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the back upper and rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right The circuit boards provided on the decorative body 3813, etc., the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board A white insulating film is formed on the substrate surface of the substrate 457 (which may also include the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate right upper decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314).

Further, as described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, circuit boards of low importance (in this example, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, Left rotation decorative body 3510, back right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc. The circuit board provided in the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. The upper left decorative board 273 , the upper right decorative board 278 , and the upper center decorative board 314 may also be included. It's meant to be controlled.

That is, in this example, among the circuit boards on which the LEDs provided on the gaming board 5 and emitting light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, the circuit board directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, In other words, a black insulating film is formed on a highly important circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000), while a circuit board controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, in other words, Then, the less important circuit boards (in this example, the back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, the back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, the back rear left rotation decoration 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration 3610, the back rear movable decoration 3110, A white insulating film is formed on the circuit boards (circuit boards provided on the back top front rotating decoration body 3410, the back top front decoration body 3421, the back front left decoration body 3713, the back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). .

In this way, in this example, the circuit board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 and which emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. The insulation formed on the surface of the board determines whether it is a high-level circuit board or a low-level circuit board controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310. They can be easily identified by the color of the membrane. Therefore, if a circuit board is determined to be of high importance during the manufacturing process, etc., by conducting sufficient inspections on the circuit board, it will be possible to directly benefit players when installed in a gaming machine. It is now possible to suppress the occurrence of serious defects such as those related to the above. On the other hand, since it can be easily determined that the circuit board is a highly important circuit board, there is a possibility that unauthorized modification or the like may be performed on the highly important circuit board. In this example, by making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the circuit board is a highly important circuit board, it is difficult for the circuit board to be illegally modified.

Specifically, in the substrate 7200 provided in the above-described dot matrix display 7000, although a black insulating film is formed on the substrate surface (LED mounting surface), the above-mentioned through-holes are formed in the portion where the LEDs are mounted. Only a white insulating film is formed in the region corresponding to the portion 7110a (FIGS. 262(A) and 262(B)). Further, a white insulating film is formed on the back surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface on which the LEDs are not mounted). Note that, for convenience, FIGS. 262A and 262B show a state in which the transparent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100. Furthermore, the light-transmitting film 7300 is not limited to being attached to the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, and is not limited to being attached to the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 when the dot matrix display 7000 is installed in the pachinko machine 1. It may be attached to a transparent member (resin, glass, etc.) to be placed.

In this example, the area of the board 7200 that is visible through the penetration part 7110a and the opening part 7120a formed in the case 7100 is subject to control related to game performance that is not directly related to the interests of the player. Only a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to an insulating film formed on circuit boards of low importance is formed. In this way, for the area of the board 7200 that is visible through the penetration part 7110a and the opening part 7120a formed in the case 7100, only a white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to that of a circuit board of low importance is formed. By doing so, the transparent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetration part 7110a, or the transparent film 7300 is not attached. If a case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed through the penetration portion 7110a, even if the substrate 7200 is visible through the penetration portion 7110a or the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, the It is now possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a circuit board. However, on the surface of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (front surface, LED mounting surface), the black insulating film has a higher proportion than the white insulating film that is the same or very similar to the insulating film formed on the less important circuit board. occupies a higher proportion. Therefore, during the manufacturing process, it is possible to immediately identify a highly important circuit board by the color of the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the board 7200 is mounted, and sufficient inspection is performed. It becomes like this.

It should be noted that among the circuit boards on which the LEDs mounted on the game board 5 and that emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, all the circuit boards that are directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 are white. is not limited to those on which insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) are formed, but white on at least one of the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. It is sufficient that insulating films of different colors (for example, black or green) are formed. (The circuit board may include a combination of two or more of the following: a circuit board on which an insulating film is formed, a circuit board on which a green insulating film is formed, and a circuit board on which a white insulating film is formed). Furthermore, among the circuit boards on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and which emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, all the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 are equipped with a white color. The invention is not limited to those on which an insulating film is formed, and an insulating film of a color different from black (for example, white or green) on at least one of the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, the LED non-mounted surface (back surface (rear surface)) of the circuit board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 and that emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. An insulating film of a color different from white (for example, black or green) may be formed on the surface.

On the other hand, circuit boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 (at least the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, but the payout control board 633 These circuit boards may include other circuit boards such as , etc.), and are all highly important circuit boards, and in this example, insulating films of the same color (green) are formed. The main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 is made of transparent resin so that the main control board 1310 can be viewed from outside the main control board box 1320. Reference numeral 1520 is made of transparent resin so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized from the outside of the peripheral control board box 1520. Further, on the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, markings corresponding to the respective electronic components are formed on the mounting surface of the electronic components. In this way, for highly important circuit boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an insulating film of the same (very similar) color is formed, and the mounting surface of the electronic components is Since there are markings corresponding to each electronic component, it is easy to determine whether the circuit board is of high importance during the manufacturing process, and sufficient inspection can be carried out for circuit boards of high importance. In addition, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visible to the player when it is installed on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 after manufacturing, a plurality of An insulating film of the same or very similar color is formed on the circuit board, and markings corresponding to each electronic component are formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, so that the mounting surface of the electronic component is in a substantially similar manner (at least It is sufficient that an insulating film of the same or very similar color is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component. (Formation should be made on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.) Among the plurality of circuit boards placed in 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) is difficult to tamper with.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an insulating film of the same color (very similar color) is formed on the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the circuit board with high importance is formed. Although it is said that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a circuit board or a circuit board of low importance, a circuit on which an LED is mounted that is provided on the gaming board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1. For circuit boards, by making the insulating film different in color, it is possible to distinguish whether the circuit board is a highly important circuit board or a circuit board of low importance, but it is also possible to visually recognize it through the case (case 7100, etc.). By making the colors of the insulating films the same (very similar colors), it is difficult for the player to notice whether the circuit board is a highly important circuit board or a circuit board of low importance. Furthermore, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is also a circuit board on which an LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. Similarly, the color of the insulating film may be different, but if the case (main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.) is made opaque, even if unauthorized modification has been done, it will be difficult to discover. Therefore, the circuit board installed on the gaming board 5 and placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is coated with an insulating film of the same color (very similar color), and a transparent case ( It is desirable to accommodate the main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.).

Note that in the above example, a white insulating film was formed in all areas of the back surface of the board 7200 (non-LED mounting surface), but the invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that a white insulating film is formed in the area corresponding to the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002 (the area visible through the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002), and white does not mean white for other areas. Insulating films of different colors (for example, black, green, etc.) may be formed. In addition, if openings or penetrations are formed in addition to the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002, a white insulating film is also formed in areas corresponding to these openings and penetrations, and Even if the back side of the board 7200 (the surface on which the LEDs are not mounted) is visible through the parts or through parts, it is possible to control the board 7200 to ensure that it is a highly important circuit board by controlling the board directly related to the player's interests. It may be possible to do so without anyone noticing.

In addition, a color that is the same or very similar to an insulating film formed on a circuit board of low importance (in this example, white ) may be formed on a less important circuit board in a part of the vicinity area outside the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a while the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100. A white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film to be used may be formed in a predetermined form (for example, an arbitrary shape, symbol, character, notation, etc.). With this configuration, even if the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is shifted and the area of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a changes, the black insulating film can be made difficult to be seen. , it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is a highly important circuit board. Also,

Furthermore, as described above, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 is made of a colored, opaque, white resin that does not have light-transmitting properties. Furthermore, a translucent film 7300 whose area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is semitransparent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass shape) is attached to the surface (front) side of the case 7100. The board 7200 housed in the case 7100 cannot be directly viewed from the front side. This makes it easy to determine whether or not a circuit board is of high importance during the manufacturing process, and allows sufficient inspection of circuit boards of high importance. Among the highly important circuit boards installed on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the circuit board on which the LED that emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted is hidden, and the Since unauthorized modification is made difficult, the reliability of the gaming machine can be prevented from decreasing.

Note that at least the LED mounting surface (excluding at least the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a) of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 includes the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc. disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. An insulating film may be formed in a color (green) that is the same or very similar to that of a highly important circuit board. Among the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, at least the LED mounting surface of the circuit board on which the LED provided on the game board 5 and emitting light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. By forming an insulating film of a different color (white) from that of the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., it becomes easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process. This makes it possible to perform sufficient inspection on circuit boards with high quality.

Further, the case 7100 that houses the board 7200 may be made of a white resin that is the same as or very similar to an insulating film formed on a circuit board of low importance, so that the case 7100 is also It is possible to make the user recognize that it is the same as a circuit board, and to prevent the user from noticing that a highly important circuit board is housed therein.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a is covered with white insulating film that is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance. Since only the film is formed, even if the transparent film 7300 is peeled off from the case 7100 and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetration part 7110a, the substrate 7200 will not be housed in the case 7100. It is possible to make it difficult for people to notice that the board 7200 being displayed is a highly important circuit board.

Furthermore, no through hole is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000. As a result, the surface of the white insulating film formed over the entire surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) becomes smooth, so that the surface of the substrate 7200 can be coated through the penetration part 7100a. It is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the (front surface, LED mounting surface) from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a highly important circuit board. Note that a through hole is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the board 7200 (the area inside the penetration part 7110a), and the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a including this through hole is A white insulating film that is thicker than usual may be formed on the insulating film, and in this case as well, the surface of the insulating film can be made smooth, so the surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, It is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player who visually recognizes the LED mounting surface, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a highly important circuit board.

In addition, the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 is white (not limited to white, but also bright colors with high reflection efficiency (for example, The reflection efficiency may be improved by forming an insulating film (which may be yellow). For example, as shown in FIG. 258(A), a first conductive film 7200A is formed by applying black insulating paint to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a first conductive film 7200A is formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a. The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by painting (silk printing) the area (inner area of the penetrating portion 7110a) with white paint from above the first conductive film 7200A, or the second conductive film 7200B may be ), a white insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a first conductive film 7200A, and a region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (penetration part 7110a The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by painting (silk printing) all over the first conductive film 7200A with black paint except for the inner region) of the first conductive film 7200A.

That is, in FIG. 258(A), a black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white conductive film is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. A second conductive film 7200B is formed. Further, in FIG. 258(B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white conductive film 7200B is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. 1 conductive film 7200A is formed. In this way, a black insulating film (black first conductive film 7200A, black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and By forming a white insulating film (white second conductive film 7200B, white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to Since the reflection efficiency of the area inside the penetration part 7110a where the LED 7001 is arranged can be increased, the reduction in brightness inside the penetration part 7110a when the LED 7001 is emitted can be further suppressed, and the light emission by one LED 7001 can be clearly emitted. Since it is possible to maintain a low reflection efficiency around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200, it is possible to maintain a state of low reflection efficiency. Even if light leaks out of the penetrating portion 7110a, this light can be prevented from being diffused. In this case, the above-mentioned notation may not be silk-printed, or the notation may be silk-printed on the back surface of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted (LED non-mounted surface), A light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency, such as white or yellow, is used on the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the surface. The marking portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow or other color may be printed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in the area corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The markings may be silk-printed using a light-colored paint with high reflection efficiency.

According to the above embodiment, the gaming machine performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a win based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and when the result of the lottery is a win, the game machine is controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. , the main side board used for the progress of the game (the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc.), and the main board used for the execution of the performance. The sub-side boards used (peripheral control board 1510, back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, back front right of the back front right decoration unit 3810) Decorative board 3814, back bottom right decorative board 3253 of back bottom right presentation unit 3250, back bottom left decorative board 3203 of back bottom left presentation unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame A top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457) are provided, and the main side board is arranged such that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the gaming machine. A first main side board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), which is arranged so that its surface faces the front of the gaming machine, and is colored with a specific color that is not formed on at least the sub-side board. A second main side board (a board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided on the function display unit 1400) having a region, and the first main side board has an area for mounting electronic components. Information that specifies the type of the electronic component (such as the part number of the electronic component, the area indicating the position where the electronic component is placed, etc.) (In some cases, this may include the mounting direction) and the model of the electronic component. On the other hand, the second main board is characterized in that no information identifying the type of electronic component to be mounted is provided on the second main board. As a result, for the second main board, which is arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the front of the gaming machine, a colored area of a specific color (for example, a resist of a different color) that is not formed on the sub-board , silk, etc.), it becomes easy to determine whether the board is of high importance or not, and it is possible to prevent oversight of inspection of a board of high importance. Furthermore, if the existence of a highly important board is known to the player side, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out by taking advantage of it. By not forming a colored area of a specific color on the first main side board, which is arranged so as to face the game machine, it is difficult to distinguish between the first main side board and the sub side board, and the surface of the first main side board is arranged to face the front of the gaming machine. The second main board to be placed is not provided with information specifying the type of electronic component to be mounted. As a result, the first main side board is similar to the sub side board without having a colored area of a specific color, making it difficult to determine whether it is a highly important board or not, and the surface can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. For the easily visible second main side board, a colored area of a specific color is formed to make it easier to determine whether the board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, but to make it difficult to identify the type of electronic component. This makes it difficult to tamper with the second main board and prevents the reliability of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

Further, the first main board may have a function of performing a lottery to determine whether or not the lottery is a win based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and the second main board may have a function of displaying the lottery results. By holding a lottery to see if it is a hit or not, the first main side board, which has the highest importance, is the same as the sub side board without forming a colored area of a specific color, so the first main side board and the sub side board This makes it difficult to determine whether the board is a highly important board or not.

Further, the surfaces of both the first main side board and the second main side board are covered with a cover body (main control board box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.), and the second main side board The cover body (front cover part 7110) that accommodates the game machine is provided with an opening (penetration part 7110a) that opens toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the front plate surface of the second main board is covered by the cover body. At least a colored region (insulating film) of a color (black, etc.) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface that is outside the opening in the covered state, and Only a colored area (insulating film) of the same or very similar color (white, etc.) as the substrate color of the sub-side board is provided on the board surface that is covered by the cover body and is inside the opening. You can also do this. Even if the board surface of the second main board is visible from the opening toward the front side of the gaming machine, only a colored area that is the same or very similar to the board color of the sub-side board can be seen, so it is difficult to commit fraud. It is possible to make the person recognize that the board is of low importance and not to notice that it is an important board.

In addition, when the front side plate surface of the second main side board is covered with the cover body, a part of the near side of the plate side that is outside the opening is painted with a color that is the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub side board. A colored region (a colored insulating film formed of an arbitrary shape, symbol, character, notation, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the second main board housed in the cover body shifts and the area of the board surface that is inside the opening changes, the colored area that is different from the board color of the sub-side board will be difficult to see. .

The cover body that covers the front surface of the second main side board includes a front cover part (front cover part 7110) that covers the front side of the second main side board, and a back cover part that covers the back side of the second main side board. (back cover part 7120), the back cover part is provided with a back side opening (opening part 7120a) that opens toward the back side of the gaming machine, and the back side plate of the second main side board At least a colored area (insulating film) of a color different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate (black, etc.) is provided on the plate surface that is outside the opening when the surface is covered by the back cover part, and the second main When the back surface of the side board is covered by the back cover part, the board surface that is inside the opening has only a colored area that is the same or very similar to the board color of the sub-side board (such as white). It may be arranged so that it is provided. Even if the board surface of the second main board is visible through the opening toward the back of the gaming machine, only a colored area that is the same or very similar to the board color of the sub-side board can be seen, so it is difficult to commit fraud. It is possible to make the person recognize that the board is of low importance and not to notice that it is an important board.

A gaming machine that performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a win based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and when the result of the lottery is a win, is controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and is used to proceed with the game. The main side board (the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc.) and the sub-side board used for execution of the effect (peripheral Control board 1510, back front left decorative board 3714 of back front left decoration unit 3710, back upper front decorative board 3422 of back upper direction unit 3400, back front right decorative board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back lower right Back lower right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door a frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457), and the main side board is a first main side board (1) which is arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces toward the rear of the gaming machine. main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), and a second main side that is arranged so that its surface faces the front of the gaming machine, and that has at least a colored area of a specific color on the surface that is not formed on the sub-side board. The first main side board and the second main side board each have a case body (main control board). box 1320, dispensing control board box 632, case 7100, etc.), but the second main board is difficult to see from the outside when it is housed in the case body (main control board box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.). and the payout control board box 632 are transparent, while the case 7100 is opaque). According to the above configuration, the second main side board, which is arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the front of the gaming machine, has a colored area of a specific color (for example, a different By having a color resist, silk, etc.), it becomes easier to determine whether or not a board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent oversight of inspection of a board of high importance. . Furthermore, if the existence of a highly important board is known to the player side, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be carried out by taking advantage of it. By not forming a colored area of a specific color on the first main side board, which is arranged so as to face the game machine, it is difficult to distinguish between the first main side board and the sub side board, and the surface of the first main side board is arranged to face the front of the gaming machine. The arranged second main side board is housed in a case body so as to be difficult to see from the outside. As a result, the first main side board is similar to the sub side board without having a colored area of a specific color, making it difficult to determine whether it is a highly important board or not, and the surface is placed in front of the gaming machine. A colored area of a specific color is formed on the second main side board so that it is easy to determine whether or not it is a highly important board during the manufacturing process, while it is easily visible to players in the post-manufacturing state. Since the existence of the second main board is concealed and unauthorized modification thereof is made difficult, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from decreasing.

Further, the case body housing the second main side board may be formed in a color that is the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub side board. This makes it difficult for fraudsters to notice that the board is an important board.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board of the door frame 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457; 273, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the upper right decorative board 278 and the upper decorative board 314 in the center of the dish may also be adjustable. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, The brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the back rear decorative board 3114, back upper and rear decorative board 3452, back rear left decorative board 3522, and back rear right decorative board 3622 mounted on the movable decoration body can also be adjusted in brightness. Alternatively, the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable. It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LEDs (LEDs) cannot be adjusted.) The brightness of the LEDs (LEDs provided) can be adjusted in 5% increments over a range from 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is increased, and the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Furthermore, when adjusting the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer increases until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer decreases until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by drawing attention to the display content of the performance display device 1600, the button provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 It is possible to suppress the central button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 37, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330 from being visually recognized, and the connectors marked on these boards can be suppressed. Information such as the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged becomes difficult for players to see, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and improving the design. It is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in playing games, and a decline in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the special lottery result is not performed. LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated during normal operation when the LEDs mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 are turned off, the LEDs mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the surface of the outer button decoration board 377 are turned off. The center of the performance operation button unit 360 is controlled to emit light over a certain period of time by controlling the LEDs mounted on the LED mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. A button cover 375, an outer circumferential decorative lens 379, and a rotation operation part 302 of a production operation ring 330 are decorated with light. When the period in which the performance operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the performance display device 1600 disappears, and the LED of the performance operation unit 300 is turned off. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation section 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the press operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy a participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the production operation unit 300, the center button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the outer button decoration board 377 and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs mounted below the performance operation ring 330 The brightness of the LEDs mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the display cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the performance operation unit 300, which is located close to the player and tends to attract attention, cannot be adjusted in brightness, and is controlled to emit light at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 300 is decorated with light in the above-mentioned light emission mode during performance, it is always mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the performance operation ring decoration board 352 with a brightness above a certain level. It is possible to emit light from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the performance operation unit 300 (a situation where the performance operation unit 301 is operated such as when a player participation type performance or volume adjustment is being performed). The center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to see by the light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the components written on these boards can be made difficult to see. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and external lines where electronic components are arranged becomes difficult for players to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration of the design. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-described center button decorative board 376, outer button decorative board 377, and production operation ring decorative board 352, a white insulating film (resist) is used on the mounting surface of the LED, and a yellow insulating film is applied to the mounting surface. Information such as the number of pins of the connector, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and the outline of the electronic component (indication part) is silk-printed using paint. In this way, in this example, the markings are silk-printed using yellow insulating paint, which has little visual difference (contrast) compared to white, so it can be printed not only when the LED is on, but also when the LED is off. This information is also becoming difficult to identify.

Note that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbols displayed in a variable manner stop). It may be possible to always execute it except for a certain period (one or both of them, etc.), or it may be possible under certain conditions such as a period when the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It may be possible to execute the program only when the following is true. Further, the result of brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be reflected depending on the situation (such as whether a variable display is being performed or not). It may be possible to change between a case where the brightness adjustment result is reflected immediately and a case where the brightness adjustment result is reflected at a timing delayed from the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302.

In this example, brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed even when the door frame 3 is open. In addition, when the door frame 3 is open, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the LED mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of the back top direction unit 3400 are displayed. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203, movable decorations (lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LED provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (unable to light up), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example Then, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board 273, The plate upper right decorative board 278 and the plate center upper decorative board 314 may also be controlled to emit light.) are in a light emitting controlled state (lighting enabled state). That is, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 described above are turned off. , the brightness cannot be determined based on the light emitting states of these plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not open (the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back upper direction unit 3400 LED mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of , LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 , LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 The LEDs mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, the movable decorations (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration Control is not performed to turn off the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back clockwise rotation decoration 3610, and the rear movable decoration 3110). possible state). Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the brightness can be determined based on the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the above-described back front left decorative board 3714, back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative board 3814, back bottom right decorative board 3253, back bottom left decorative board 3203, back back decorative board 3114, back top and rear decorative board 3452, the rear left decorative board 3522, and the rear right decorative board 3622, white is used as the insulating film (resist) on the LED mounting surface, and the number of pins of the connector is marked with yellow insulating paint on the mounting surface. , information (indication section) such as the direction of the IC, part number, pin number, and outline where the electronic component is placed is silk-printed. Therefore, even if the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a non-lighting state, this information can be made difficult to identify.

[Brightness adjustment of LED mounted on specific board]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a circuit board on which an LED whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range (a dimmable LED) is mounted, and an LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emits light at a constant brightness (a non-dimmable LED). A circuit board to be mounted is provided. When adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED, the brightness can be adjusted using the light emission brightness of the non-dimming LED as an index.

Specifically, the back front left decorative board 3714, the back upper front decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814, the back lower right decorative board 3253, the back lower left decorative board 3203, the back rear decorative board 3114, the back upper and rear Decorative board 3452, back rear left decorative board 3522, back rear right decorative board 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, Back movable decorative body 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. A dimming LED is mounted, and a central button decoration board 376 and an outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and a performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. , the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400, etc. are equipped with non-dimmable LEDs.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the circuit board on which the non-dimming LED is mounted is provided at the upper left and upper right of the game board 5, and is provided below the game board 5 in the front frame 3. In other words, a non-dimmer LED is provided in each of the arbitrarily divided upper and lower regions of the game board 5. Therefore, when adjusting the brightness of a dimming LED, the light emission brightness of the non-dimming LED provided in the area to which the dimming LED belongs, that is, the non-dimming LED placed near the dimming LED, is used as an index. The brightness can be adjusted as follows. In addition, the non-dimmable LEDs mounted on the production operation ring decoration board 352, the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided on the function display unit 1400, etc. are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. However, at least one non-dimmable LED out of a predetermined number of mounted non-dimmable LEDs is turned on. Therefore, it can be reliably used as an index when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED.

In addition, in FIG. 263(A), attributes of the LED such as the part number of the LED and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed (in addition, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), (This may include the model of the LED.) is omitted. Furthermore, the marking section may be formed in a bright color (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) that is different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), or the marking section may be formed by cutting out foil. Alternatively, without forming a marking part on the LED mounting surface, the marking may be written in a color different from the white of the insulating film (not limited to a bright color) or without foil on the non-LED mounting surface (back side). It is also possible to form a section. Further, the notation section may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, "LED1" etc. is formed for one LED), or it may be formed for each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type). (For example, "LED1 to LED5" etc. are formed for a plurality of LEDs.) With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of light emitted from dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs. In addition, efficient light emission can be realized by suppressing the loss of light emission caused by non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, the LED mounting surface (surface ) includes a back front left decorative board 3714, a back upper front decorative board 3422, a back front right decorative board 3814, a back lower right decorative board 3253, a back lower left decorative board 3203, a back rear decorative board 3114, and a back upper and rear decorative board. Substrate 3452, back rear left decorative board 3522, back rear right decorative board 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back LEDs on the rear movable decorative body 3110, the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418, the top central decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456, the right decorative board 457, etc. A white insulating film (resist) is formed similarly to the mounting surface (front surface). In this way, it is mounted on the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330, and the brightness is adjusted. As for the non-dimmable LED, which serves as an indicator of adjustment, the light emission was controlled under the same conditions as the dimmable LED (mounted on the same or very similar white insulating film (resist)), so the comparison with the non-dimmable LED The difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

In addition, the LED mounting surface (surface ), back front left decorative board 3714, back top front decorative board 3422, back front right decorative board 3814, back bottom right decorative board 3253, back bottom left decorative board 3203, back back decorative board 3114, back top and rear decorative board 3452 , Back rear left decorative board 3522, Back rear right decorative board 3622, Back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, Back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440, Back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, Back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, Back movable LED mounting surfaces of decoration body 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, etc. By forming a white insulating film (resist) on the (surface), the reduction in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front) of these circuit boards is suppressed, and the light emitted from dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs is suppressed. Since the brightness of the LED can be increased, loss of light emission caused by dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs can be suppressed and efficient light emission can be realized.

Note that this is a circuit board on which non-dimmable LEDs are mounted and has the same functions as the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400, and on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). In this case, in place of the dot matrix display 7000 or the function display unit 1400, the luminance brightness of a non-dimmable LED mounted on a circuit board provided in the specific display may be provided. may be used as an index.

In addition, a specific board is provided on which both LEDs whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range (dimmable LEDs) and LEDs whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emit light at a constant brightness (non-dimmable LEDs) are mounted. You may also do so. For example, as shown in FIG. 263, a non-dimmable LED functioning as the specific indicator, a back front left decorative board 3714, a back upper front decorative board 3422, a back front right decorative board 3814, a back lower right decorative board 3253 , back lower left decorative board 3203, back rear decorative board 3114, back upper and rear decorative board 3452, back rear left decorative board 3522, back rear right decorative board 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 , back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, rear movable decorative body 3110, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame Both the top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the dimming LED that controls light emission in connection with the game production may be mounted on one circuit board.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263(A), a side view of a full-color LED with a white insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range. Both the dimmable type LED 1820 and the top view type non-dimmable LED 1830, which is a full-color LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emits light at a constant brightness, are placed on the same surface (on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed). The specific board 1800 to be mounted on the LED mounting surface, front surface, or front surface may be provided on one or both of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Further, the specific board 1800 has mounting holes 1810 for mounting at the four corners of the specific board 1800, and a plurality of through holes 1840.

Further, in the specific board 1800 of this example, each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and a dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of dimming LEDs 1820 and a non-dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of non-dimming LEDs 1830 are configured. The dimming LED group is arranged at a predetermined interval. Furthermore, the distance between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group is greater than the distance to the adjacent dimming LED 1820 in the dimming LED group or the distance to the adjacent non-dimming LED in the non-dimming LED group. are placed at a distance from each other. With this configuration, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

Furthermore, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, and each package is made of white resin. In this way, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under similar conditions, and the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under similar conditions. By comparing the brightness with the dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. In addition, in the above example, a side view type LED is used as the dimming LED 1820, while a top view type LED is used as the non-dimming LED 1830. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A side view type) may also be used. In this case, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be emitted under the same conditions, the brightness of the dimming LED after brightness adjustment is determined by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference in brightness from the dimming LED becomes clear, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Further, the type of package for the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be the same, and in this case, it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Note that in the above example, an LED package in which an LED bare chip is enclosed is used as the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package may be directly mounted on the specific substrate 1800. In this case as well, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be made to emit light under the same conditions, so the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment is determined by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference in brightness from the dimming LED becomes clear, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263(B), the front of the specific board 1800 has different decorations for the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. In this example, the word "chance" is formed by a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific board 1800 is mounted, and the other part is provided with an opaque first decoration part 1850, A partition member 1860 is provided in front of the area where the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 of the board 1800 are mounted, and passes through the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 so that each of the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 can be visually recognized. A translucent cover body 1870 is provided at the front.

In this way, in this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the specific board 1800, which is the same circuit board, but the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted with different decorations. and are divided by decoration. Moreover, since a partition member 1860, which is not provided in the dimming LED 1820, is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830, it is easy to understand that the non-dimming LED 1830 has a different function from that of the dimming LED 1820.

In addition, in this example, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the same board, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are arranged at a constant interval, but relatively close to each other. Therefore, it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

In addition, in this example, a partition member is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830, so that the light emission of each of the plurality of non-dimming LEDs 1830 can be visually recognized. Note that the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the specific board 1800 are controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. In addition, the non-dimming LED 1830 is also controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbol, similarly to the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000, and when the fluctuating display of the special symbol is stopped, the special lottery result The lighting may be displayed in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. As a result, the non-dimming LED 1830, which attracts the attention of players because it is lit and displayed in a light emitting manner according to the special lottery result, can be used as an indicator for brightness adjustment, and when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED 1820. By making it easier to imagine the brightness after adjustment, it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, in the specific substrate 1800 on which the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted, a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group. This through hole 1840 allows the light emitted from the LED to leak to the back surface (the surface on which the LED is not mounted) of the specific substrate 1800 without being reflected, thereby suppressing light reflection and interference. Since a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group in this way, the light emitted from the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is reflected or interferes with each other. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimmable LED 1830 can each have a brightness that corresponds to their individual light emission, and the dimming LED 1820 can be adjusted using the brightness that corresponds only to the light emission of the non-dimmable LED 1830 as an index. Since the brightness can be adjusted, the accuracy of comparison increases and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Furthermore, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed to have a smaller outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 (one through hole 1840 is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific board 1800). Since the proportion (area) occupied by one dimming LED 1820 or one non-dimming LED 1830 occupies (the proportion (area) occupied by one dimming LED 1820 or one non-dimming LED 1830), the light from the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is transmitted from the through hole 1840 to the back side of the specific board 1800 more than necessary. (LED non-mounted surface) can be prevented from leaking. Further, the number of through holes 1840 formed between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is larger than the number of dimming LEDs 1820 and the number of non-dimming LEDs 1830 mounted on the side of the through hole 1840. The number is increasing. In this way, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed with a smaller outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and the number of dimming LEDs 1820 mounted on the side of the through hole 1840 and the non-dimming LED 1820 are Since more through holes 1840 are formed than the number of LEDs 1830, while suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and non-dimming LED 1830, the number of through holes 1840 is larger than the number of dimming LEDs 1820 and non-dimming LED 1830. This makes it possible to prevent the brightness of the non-dimmable LED 1830 from decreasing.

Note that a hole different from the through hole 1840, such as a positioning hole of the specific board 1800 or the above-mentioned mounting hole 1810, may be formed between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. Further, the hole may be formed with a larger outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and in this case, the diameter of the hole is larger than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the side of the hole. Alternatively, a smaller number of holes may be formed. This prevents the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 from lowering more than necessary, while suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. be able to.

Further, a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or a structure having a predetermined thickness) is provided on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific board 1800 to separate part or all of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. This may realize suppression of reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. For example, as shown in FIG. 263(C), a resistor 1880 may be mounted between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific board 1800. Further, the resistor 1880 has a predetermined thickness and is mounted so as to protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific board 1800. In this way, the resistor 1880 is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and protrudes from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific board 1800, so that the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are integrated. Since the portion or the whole is separated, it is possible to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

In addition, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, a dark-colored three-dimensional object (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) may be used. It is also possible to provide different portions (for example, metal colors such as silver, transparent portions, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 263(C), a resistor 1880 having a black appearance may be mounted on the specific board 1800. In this way, by mounting the resistor 1880 having a dark appearance with low reflection efficiency between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the light emitted from the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is reflected. The effect of suppressing interference can be further enhanced. Furthermore, if a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or structure having a black appearance, which has the lowest reflective efficiency as a dark color, is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 The effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each can be maximized.

In addition, although we have shown an example of an electronic component in which a resistor 1880 is mounted, the same effect as above can be achieved if the electronic component is mounted on a circuit board such as a capacitor, diode, IC, LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), etc. It is possible to play. Furthermore, the number and manner of arrangement of these three-dimensional objects such as electronic components and structures are not limited to those described above. For example, a plurality of three-dimensional objects may be arranged at predetermined intervals between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. Or, a three-dimensional object with a larger outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 or non-dimming LED 1830 (ratio (area) occupied by one three-dimensional object on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front) of the specific board 1800 ≧ one dimming LED 1820 or 1 The ratio (area) occupied by one non-dimming LED 1830 may be one or more.

In addition, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, it is possible to make the LED mounting surface (front surface) It is also possible to arrange LEDs with a large protrusion (high height from the LED mounting surface to the outermost surface of the three-dimensional object), and by configuring in this way, each of the dimming LEDs 1820 and non-dimming LEDs 1830 The effect of suppressing reflection and interference of irradiated light can be further enhanced.

Further, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be distinguished by different colors or shapes of the packages of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, or the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be distinguished from each other. Dimming LEDs 1820 and non-dimming LEDs 1830 can be distinguished by different arrangement forms with the dimming LED 1830 group (such as arranging them in one vertical row as shown in FIG. 263(B) or arranging them in two diagonal rows). It may be possible to do so.

According to the above embodiment, the lottery means performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game control means controls the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, and is capable of emitting light as the game progresses. A plurality of light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least The LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, as well as the upper left decorative board of the plate. 273, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, the upper decorative board 314 of the center of the plate, etc.), the dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400, the performance display device 1600, etc.), and the player. A gaming machine is provided with a brightness adjustment means that can adjust the brightness of the light emitting means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (rotary operation section 302 of the production operation section 301) that can be operated, the first one of the plurality of light emitting means 1 Light-emitting means (light-emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back upper front Rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame LEDs provided on the left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457.In addition, the upper left decorative board of the plate 273, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper central decorative board 314 of the plate may also include LEDs. Among the means, the second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.) is characterized in that it is controlled to emit light at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means. In this way, since the brightness of the second light emitting means is constant, it can be used as a reference when checking the brightness of the first light emitting means.

Further, the second light emitting means may be arranged at a predetermined distance apart from the first light emitting means. By arranging the second light emitting means, which is controlled to emit light at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means, at a predetermined distance from the first light emitting means, the light emitted from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be controlled. Since the interference of the light emitted from the light emitting means is suppressed and the individual lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be visually recognized separately, it becomes easy to compare the brightness.

A through hole (through hole 1840) may be formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Since the through hole is formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, the reflection efficiency of the substrate surface between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be reduced, and light interference The brightness of the first light emitting means and the brightness of the second light emitting means can be easily compared.

The second light emitting means is partitioned with a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means (in this example, the word "chance" is marked with a translucent lens in front of the area where the dimming LED 1820 of the specific board 1800 is mounted). A first decoration part 1850 is arranged in which the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 are formed and other parts are opaque, and each of the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 is divided in front of the area where the non-dimmable LEDs 1830 are mounted on the specific board 1800, so that the individual light emission can be visually recognized. A penetrating partition member 1860 may be provided to allow this, and a translucent cover body 1870 may be provided in front of the partition member. Since the second light emitting means is partitioned with a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means, the second light emitting means serving as a reference can be easily identified by controlling the luminescence at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means. You will be able to do this.

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be mounted on the same light emitting substrate. Since the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted on the same light emitting substrate, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be provided at relatively close positions, and the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be set relatively close to each other. This facilitates comparison with the luminance of the light emitting means.

A white coating film may be formed on the surface of the light emitting substrate on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted. Since a white coating film is formed on the surface on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light emitting substrate can be increased, and the light emission by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be improved. Efficient light emission can be achieved by suppressing loss.

[Details of the main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 264 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 that controls game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 that can set gaming performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. A main control board box 1320 made of non-conductive resin is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when looking at the game board 5 from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left-right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area surrounded by the top side, right side, and bottom side from the left side to the right side, and the remaining one-fifth of the area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates the main body frame upper hinge part 310 and the main body frame lower hinge part 320 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side when viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is something. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front, and the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the rear right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. Since it is designed to be attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, the right side in front view becomes the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. In contrast, the setting change board 1311 has a white resist that is a different color from the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front (mounting side) and back (solder side) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is painted solid with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the point that a color different from that used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The main control board 1310 is a board of high importance for crime prevention because it controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, etc.) for game hall managers, game hall clerks, and other staff. There is a very high level of awareness about this. Therefore, there is no need to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310, distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, the setting change board 1311 is a board that has a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1, that is, it can set the game performance, so although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not important for crime prevention. There is extremely little awareness of the fact that it is an expensive board. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for boards, is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and a white color, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out compared to the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 also has high importance for crime prevention. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

Note that in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but it is not possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. If possible, yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc. may be used.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface), or it may be printed in one of black, blue, yellow, and red as silk printing. May be printed.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 includes a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a general winning hole sensor 3051, a first big winning hole sensor 2402, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). (electrical wiring).The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (reduces) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and connects the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1311. ). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that connector connections, which are inter-board connections, include connections that use normal connectors that do not have a floating mechanism, and connections that use special connectors that have a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket and plug fit together, The structure is such that there is no movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, special connectors with a floating mechanism consist of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb errors that occur during fitting (mating axis misalignment) by moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed into a square shape with the distance of one side being approximately one-fifth of the distance in the horizontal direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the board 1311 is shaped like a square. It is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and its lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. It is located on the right side of , and at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point where the vertical and horizontal center lines of the square setting change board 1311 intersect. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Further below, a special monitor 1310h is arranged, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side.

Note that the setting display 1310g is capable of displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, while the special monitor 1310h is capable of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. However, it is also possible to provide only the special monitor 1310h and have the function of displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and the function of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. good. In such a case, the special monitor 1310h displays the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state) or in a state in which confirmation display of the setting value is displayed (confirmation display state). In contrast to displaying the setting value, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed, excluding the change permission state and confirmation display state. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced and costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the setting key is set at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the metal setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 has been removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot when inserted into the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the setting keys will not interfere with the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted to prevent damage.

By turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and this setting key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311. is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming setting values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. As a result, a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be satisfied, in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation section of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated while operating the press operation section of the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Open the setting key switch 1311a, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a. Next, while operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). 2) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the push operation part of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. be done. Each time a person changing the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch. When the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). OFF setting key Rotate the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotational position of the cylinder to turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set values determined by changing the settings in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and changes the setting value from being displayed to hidden on the setting display 1310g. state, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the lit state to the off state.

A person who changes the setting value takes out the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. Complete the configuration change task.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. As a result, the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Open the main body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the RAM clear switch press operation section.

A person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values must first check that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 without operating the push operation part of the RAM clear switch. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if the person who wants to confirm the currently set setting value presses the RAM clear switch press operation section, this press operation will not be supported. The set value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting values completes the confirmation of the currently set setting values, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting values moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the initial position, which is the original position. Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must remove the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. to complete the confirmation display of the currently set settings.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are such that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. However, as mentioned above, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is When power is turned on to the machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on, thereby turning on the setting key, and pressing the RAM clear switch. It is necessary that the part has not been manipulated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are the conditions that apply when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is moved clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission conditions include ``When the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1 or when there is a power outage ( In contrast to the requirement that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch be operated when the power is restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous power outage), predetermined setting value display permission is required. The condition is that ``the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage).'' The difference is that

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. (such as a small winning symbol determination table, a normal time transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and is used in various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible), and an error message will be displayed to inform you of this. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[About the initial movement of the movable body when the power is turned on]
As mentioned above, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Among these, the main control board 1310 controls the gaming operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various performances during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sends information related to the control of game effects and information related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (where commands are stored) as various commands. By sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can also transmit information related to the control of game effects and information related to the status of the pachinko machine 1. can be grasped.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with various movable bodies on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Among these, as a movable body (main control board side movable body) whose operation itself is directly linked to the provision of profits to the player, for example, the second starting port door 2414 (starting port solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 , the first big winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid) for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006. 261) is assumed to be operated by a drive signal output from the main control board 1310. On the other hand, although the operation itself is not directly linked to the granting of profits to the player, there are movable bodies (peripheral control board side movable body) that operate during various effects during the game, such as the effect operation section 301, back top and rear rotating decorations, etc. Decorative bodies such as the body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative bodies 3451 are operated by drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510. Regarding such movable bodies, a movable body operated by the main control board 1310 (main control board side movable body) and a movable body operated by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control board side movable body) are respectively When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to perform an initial operation to check whether it operates normally.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body (main control board side movable body) operated by the main control board 1310 is performed only when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 265, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the above-described main control side power-on process are executed. In the wait time standby process in step S24, a standby time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots).

When powering on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU controls the setting key switch 1311a at timing t3. In step S37, the setting change process is performed, and the state shifts to a state in which setting values can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, the set values (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting change button, is pressed. Thereafter, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key was turned ON to the original position. By turning OFF, a state is entered in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs step S38, excluding specific areas (the above-mentioned setting value dedicated area and out ball counting area) out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM. After that, steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings (the time point at which various initial settings are completed is defined as timing t4).

On the other hand, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting change process of step S37 is not performed at timing t3, and the setting value is not changed to a state where the setting value can be changed (change permission state). However, since the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, during the period from timing t3 to t4, the main control MPU performs step S38 to clear a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. (The above-mentioned setting value exclusive area and out pitch count exclusive area) are cleared, and then steps S40 to S52 are performed to perform various initial settings.

After completing various initial settings at timing t4, among the movable bodies mounted on the game board 5, the movable bodies (main control board side movable bodies) that are operated by the drive signal output from the main control board 1310 are Start initial operation. Specifically, as the movable body on the main control board side, a second starting port door 2414 (starting port solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting port 2004, and a first large prize opening for opening and closing the first large winning port 2005. The initial operation of the second big winning opening door 2611 (second attacking solenoid 261) for opening and closing the winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) and the second big winning opening 2006 is started. These main control board side movable bodies are members that can each open and close, and in the initial operation of the main control board side movable bodies, the second starting opening door 2414, the first big winning opening door 2417, the second Each of the big prize opening doors 2611 performs a special operation that is different from the operation that appears during the normal game progress process. These operations end when timing t5 arrives. (The time point at which the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed is defined as timing t5).

When the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after completing the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side at timing t5, the state shifts to a state in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner (variable state). That is, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6 after completing the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side at timing t5, the variable display of the special symbol is started, A variation pattern command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state) during the period from timing t3 to t4. Regardless of whether or not the movable body on the main control board side performs the initial operation during the period from timing t4 to timing t5. As a result, when inspecting the pachinko machine 1 during manufacturing, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the movable body on the main control board side will operate, so the movable body on the main control board side will operate normally. It is possible to visually check whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is being used, which facilitates inspection during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1.

During the period from timing t4 to t5, the main control board side movable body performs a special operation that is different from the operation that appears during the normal game progress, and specifically, the second starting gate door The initial operation of 2414, the initial operation of the first big prize opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second big winning opening door 2611 are performed in this order (details of each initial operation will be described later). In this way, in the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, by operating each movable body in sequence, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not it is operating normally, and by making it difficult to overlook defects, the pachinko machine 1 The accuracy of inspection during manufacturing can be improved. Note that if emphasis is placed on shortening the inspection time during manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side may be performed in parallel at the same time. In such a case, the inspection of the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side can be completed early, and the game can be started as soon as possible (it is possible to display special symbols in a variable manner). (variable state)). In addition, when the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side are performed in parallel at the same time, the movable bodies on the main control board side may be moved within a specific area of the game area 5a (for example, within the center accessory 2500). It is preferable to arrange them in a concentrated manner (within the right area). As a result, even if the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side are performed in parallel at the same time, it is easy to confirm whether or not they are operating normally, making it difficult to overlook defects. The accuracy of inspection during manufacturing of the machine 1 can be improved.

Here, a specific aspect of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body performed during the period from timing t4 to timing t5 will be described. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first big winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second big winning opening door 2611 are performed by individual drive sources. Each initial operation is an opening/closing operation with a short opening of 1 second or less and a long opening of 3 seconds or more. In other words, each of the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first big winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second big winning opening door 2611 is first opened for 0.5 seconds, and then A combination operation is set for the initial operation, which is closed for 1 second and then opened for 3 seconds. Such a combination operation for the initial operation (operation of opening for 0.5 seconds and then opening for 3 seconds) is an operation that does not appear when the movable body on the main control board side operates during the game progress process. This makes it clear that the operation is not due to returning to the game (time-saving game or jackpot game) before the power outage, and can prevent misidentification during inspection work. In addition, regarding the individual operations of short release and long release, we will check whether or not they can be operated normally if they are made so that they can appear even when the movable body on the main control board side operates during the game progress process. This is preferable because it can improve the accuracy of the process.

In addition, regarding the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first big winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second big winning opening door 2611, it is possible to detect whether each initial operation is performed normally. You may also do so. In each initial operation, after moving from the initial position (closed state) to the operating position (open position), an operation is performed to return the operating position to the initial position. An initial position detection sensor is provided on each of the winning opening door 2417 and the second large winning opening door 2621, and when an abnormality in which the movable body does not return to the initial position is detected, the subsequent operation of the movable body is detected. It is also possible to maintain the state in which the game cannot proceed without performing this. This makes it possible to prevent defective products from being leaked and holes being damaged.

In addition, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is performed, but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first big winning port 2005, and the second big winning port Even if the game ball B enters a ball entrance such as the mouth 2006, it is treated as invalid, and after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, such a ball entrance is The entered game ball B is treated as a valid ball. Specifically, during the period from timing t4 to t5, "detection corresponding to each of the ball entrance openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006" is performed. A mode in which power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the sensor does not perform detection itself, a mode in which the detection sensor performs detection but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, , ``Detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but based on the detection signal, no detection signal or command is sent to other boards such as the payout control board 633. "A mode in which the output is not output", etc. Furthermore, after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, "detection is performed by the detection sensor, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the payout is performed based on the detection signal. This is a mode in which detection signals and commands can be output to other boards such as the control board 633.

In addition to the above, the game balls B are not put out from the payout device 580 during the period from timing t4 to t5, and after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, the game balls B are released from the payout device 580. This allows B to pay out. Also, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner (variable state), and after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, the special symbol is displayed. A transition is made to a state in which variable display can be performed (variable state). As a result, during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, even if the game ball B is entered illegally when the ball entrance is opened, the special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device 580 will not be displayed. Game balls B are not paid out, and illegal profits can be prevented.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the special monitor 1310h monitors the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out, calculates the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, and displays the calculation results. Regarding such a special monitor 1310h, during the period from timing t4 to t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance, regardless of whether or not the detection is performed by the corresponding detection sensor, It is controlled so that it is not added to the number or the number of payouts, and is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. After the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance, the detection sensor corresponding to each ball B is detected, and the number of balls entered and the payout are detected. It is controlled so that the information is added to the number and reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, even if a game ball B is entered illegally when the ball entrance opening is opened during the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, it will not be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. The reliability of information can be increased. It should be noted that for a few seconds after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, control is performed so that all the 7 segments and the like for displaying information on the special monitor 1310h are turned on. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to check whether the special monitor 1310 is operating the display normally.

In addition, during the period from timing t4 to t5, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not ejected from the ball launching device 540, and after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is ejected from the ball ejecting device 540. As a result, during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, although the ball entrance opens, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, so when the ball entrance is opened, the game ball B can be fired and entered. It is possible to prevent illegal profits from being obtained.

Furthermore, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. During the period from timing t4 to t5, detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and continues even after the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5. There is. As a result, during the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, if an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball B by using a magnet or applying vibration when the ball entry opening is opened, the illegal magnetism and Unauthorized vibrations can be detected and unauthorized acts can be prevented.

Next, control on the peripheral control board 1510 side will be explained. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, the peripheral control MPU starts a peripheral control unit power-on process. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S1000 and S1002 of the peripheral control unit power-on process described above are executed. In the initial setting process of step S1000, the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the transfer of various control information (peripheral data) Processing, etc. are performed (the time point at which the initial settings on the peripheral control board 1510 side are completed is defined as timing t2).

Note that the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initial setting process of step S1000 before timing t3, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, and at timing t2. After that, it is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). However, the completion of the initial setting process in step S1000 is before timing t3, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, but it is the time when the main control MPU completes various initial settings. It may be before timing t4.

After the initial setting is completed at timing t2, the standby screen 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during a period until the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. On the standby screen 1, for example, a message "Restoring" is displayed to notify that the game cannot be started. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, the standby screen 2 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the power-on command. On the standby screen 2, for example, by displaying a decorative stop symbol "123", it is notified that the machine is waiting for the start of symbol variation. Thereafter, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variable pattern command at timing t6, the effect display device 1600 starts variable display of decorative symbols (variable effect) based on the variable pattern command.

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the movable bodies that operate according to the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 The initial operation of the body (peripheral control board side movable body) has started. Specifically, the peripheral control board-side movable bodies include the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. The initial movement of the movable body has started. Each of these peripheral control board-side movable bodies is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position.In the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body, each movable body moves to the initial position (evacuation position). This includes checking whether the movable body moves normally from the position (position) to the operating position (appearance position), and accurate positioning so that the movable body waits at the initial position. After the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed, it is possible to perform a performance using the movable body. For example, if a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during symbol variation is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation pattern during symbol variation is sent. The movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at the timing of . However, if the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has not been completed at the timing when the movable body is operated based on the fluctuation pattern command, the initial operation is given priority and the movable body is controlled not to operate. ing.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side, if the movable bodies are not in the initial position, first, after returning the movable bodies to the initial position, The initial operation is started.

Furthermore, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after completing the initial settings at timing t2, but after completing the initial settings at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. If the peripheral control board 1510 has not received a power-on command for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes), the predetermined time has elapsed even though the power-on command has not been received. At that point, the display of standby screen 1 on the effect display device 1600 is shifted to the display of standby screen 2. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started. This is because out of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, only the power on the peripheral control board 1510 side is not supplied, and then when the power on the peripheral control board 1510 side is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is Even in such a case, when the power-on command is not received, when the power on the peripheral control board 1510 side is restored, a state is made in which a fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation pattern command can be started. It's for a reason.

In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the set value is The main control board 1310 enters a state in which settings can be changed (change permission state), but at the start of the change permission state, a setting change start command is sent from the main control board 1310 to notify that the change permission state is starting. It is being transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, the effect display device 1600 can notify that the change is permitted by, for example, displaying a message saying "Settings are being changed". It becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is not started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, but after that, when it receives the power-on command at timing t5. There is.

As mentioned above, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the main control board side movable body performs its initial operation during the period from timing t4 to t5, while the peripheral control board Regarding the side movable body, the initial operation is performed after timing t5. That is, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started. In this way, by sequentially performing the initial operation on the movable body on the main control board side and the movable body on the peripheral control board side, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not they are operating normally, and it is possible to inspect the pachinko machine 1 during manufacturing. can be facilitated.

In the above example, when the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510, but at timing t4, the main control MPU sends a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. A power-on command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial settings on the 1310 side are completed. In such a case, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t4, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started. In other words, the initial operations are started for the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body at the same time. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly transitioned to a state in which it can be operated based on the variation pattern command.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Here, only the parts that are different from the case where the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 266, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process. Then, during the period from timing t1 to timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the above-described main control side power-on process are executed. In the wait time standby process in step S24, a standby time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots).

When powering on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the setting key switch 1311a and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU controls the timing. At t3, steps S29 to S36 are performed to check the main control built-in RAM, and then a set value confirmation display process is performed in step S28, and a transition is made to a state in which a set value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state). . Thereafter, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key was turned ON to the original position. By turning OFF, the state shifts to a state where the setting value confirmation display is not performed (confirmation impossible state). After turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs steps S40 to S52 and performs various initial settings (timing t5 is the time point at which the various initial settings are completed).

On the other hand, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, the power switch 1311a is not set to ON, the RAM clear switch is not operated, and the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 is not performed at timing t3, and the state in which the set value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state) does not occur. During the period from timing t3 to t5, the main control MPU performs steps S29 to S36 to check the main control built-in RAM, and then performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings.

If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is not performed after various initial settings are completed at timing t5. When various initial settings are completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after completing various initial settings at timing t5, the state shifts to a state in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner (variable state). In other words, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6 after completing various initial settings at timing t5, the variable display of the special symbol starts, and the peripheral control board 1510 Send a variable pattern command to the target.

As mentioned above, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value can be changed (change permission state) during the period from timing t3 to t4. Regardless of whether or not the movable body on the main control board side performs the initial operation during the period from timing t4 to timing t5. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the timing t4 to t5 is determined regardless of whether or not the set value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state). period is not provided, and the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is not performed. That is, depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, whether or not the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is performed can be made different. As a result, for example, when inspecting the pachinko machine 1 after installing it on a game island, if you want to check whether the movable body on the main control board side operates normally, you can use the RAM clear switch when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The operator can select whether or not to perform the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side, thereby facilitating inspection of the pachinko machine 1.

Regarding the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. It is assumed that it will start at this point.

In addition, if the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the setting The state shifts to a state in which it is possible to display a value for confirmation (confirmation display state), but at the start of the confirmation display state, the main control board 1310 sends a confirmation display start command to notify that the confirmation display state is starting. It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the confirmation display state is in progress by displaying, for example, a message "Set value confirmation display in progress." becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is not started when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, but after that, when it receives the power-on command at timing t5. There is.

In the above, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is assumed to start when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, but at a timing before receiving the power-on command. That is, the process may be started when the initial settings on the peripheral control board 1510 side are completed at timing t2. Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 268. FIG. 267 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on, and FIG. It is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when is not operated. Here, only the parts different from FIGS. 265 and 266 will be explained below.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in this modification, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is started when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at timing t2. In other words, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started early without waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to receive the power-on command at timing t5. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly transitioned to a state in which it can be operated based on the variation pattern command.

[About the specific movement of the movable body during the predetermined number of symbol changes after changing settings]
In this embodiment, if the settings of the set values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the symbol fluctuation display for the predetermined number of times after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, the first At the start of the fluctuating display of symbols and the 100th fluctuating display of symbols, a suggestive effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed is executed. In this suggestion performance, a specific action is performed on a movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. In addition, if the settings of the set values have not been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestive effect may be executed at the start of the fluctuating display of symbols for a predetermined number of times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Therefore, specific operations are not performed on the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5.

First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 269 in which a specific operation of the movable body is performed in the first variable display of symbols after the setting values are changed when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 269 is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the first variable display of symbols after the setting value is changed when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In the following, first, a case will be described in which the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has already been completed at the time when the first variable display of symbols is started.

As explained above, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON by operating the setting key switch 1311a and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU At timing t3, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and the state shifts to a state where setting values can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set values (set values 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting change button, is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original position. By turning OFF, a state is entered in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). After turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side, initial operations of the movable body on the main control board side, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Sends the input command.

As shown in FIG. 269(A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed to a state where it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and the setting value is changed. In this case, when the power-on command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, a setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also sent. Thereby, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it can be recognized that the settings of the set values have been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

After transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the main control MPU shifts to a state (variable state) in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. In other words, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the variable display of the special symbol starts. At the same time, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation effect) of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern command in the effect display device 1600. ing.

After the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the first variable display of decorative patterns starts at timing t6, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is specified. I try to do the actions. Specifically, as a movable body mounted on the main body frame 4, a specific operation is performed on the production operation section 301, and in addition, as a movable body mounted on the game board 5, a back top and rear decoration body 3451 I am trying to perform a specific action on that. The production operation section 301 is a member that allows the button to move between an initial position (retracted position) and an operation position (projected position), and in a specific operation for the production operation section 301, the button moves to the operation position. After that, it returns to the initial position. In addition, the back top and rear decoration body 3451 is a member that can move between an initial position (retracted position) and an operation position (appearance position), and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 In the specific operation for 3451, the back top and rear decorative body 3451 moves to the operating position and then returns to the initial position.

On the other hand, if the setting values are not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, that is, if the setting value confirmation display is displayed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or if the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine When only the control built-in RAM is being cleared, or when the Pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (none of the settings changes, setting value confirmation display, and main control built-in RAM being cleared). In the case where no specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variable display of decorative symbols.

As mentioned above, if the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the values mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 will be changed at the start of the first variable display of decorative patterns. A specific action is performed on the movable object. For example, changes to the setting values are made by the hall administrator before the hall opens, so after the hall opens, it is important for players to know whether or not the setting values have been changed before playing. I can't. However, by starting the game and starting the first variable display of decorative symbols, it is possible to determine whether a specific action will be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, that is, the setting of the setting value. It is possible for the player to know whether or not a change has been made. Thereby, when the hall opens, it is possible to actively start the game in order to know whether or not the setting value has been changed.

In addition, regarding specific actions for the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, after the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the initial variation display of the decorative pattern is This is performed at the start of a predetermined number of variable displays of decorative patterns, including the start time. For example, in addition to starting the first variable display of decorative symbols, this is also performed at the start of the prescribed variable display of decorative symbols every 100 times. As a result, even if the game is not immediately after the opening of the hall, it is possible to know whether or not the setting value has been changed, and the game can be actively started.

Here, in the variation pattern, a variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and performance content to be executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation time are set. For example, if a variation pattern is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in which a production using a movable body is set during the variation display of a decorative pattern, the variation production As part of this, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, all the variation patterns are set so that the movable body does not move for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern. In other words, for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the movable body is restricted from moving based on the fluctuating pattern. If the settings have been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the predetermined number of decorative patterns starts to be displayed, the movable The specific motion on the body is not based on the variation pattern, but is performed at a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern. Does this indicate that when a specific action was performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, the settings were changed when the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1? , it is possible to recognize whether expectations are being suggested as part of a fluctuating effect based on the fluctuating pattern.

In addition, when performing a specific operation on a movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, the operation time of the specific operation is shorter than the operation time of the movable body based on the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that This restricts the movement of the movable body based on the variation pattern for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative design; By shortening the operation time of the specific operation at the start of the process, the limited time can be shortened.

In this example, after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the start of the predetermined number of variable displays of decorative patterns, A specific action is uniformly performed on a movable body, but as a modified example, it is possible to perform either a specific action A that suggests a set value or a specific action B that does not suggest a set value. You can also do this. Specifically, at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for a predetermined number of times, the peripheral control MPU obtains predetermined random numbers X and Y, and determines whether or not to execute specific action A (execution lottery). is performed based on the obtained random number value X, and specific action A or specific action B is performed based on the result of the execution determination. In addition, when determining the specific action A, select one of the specific action A1 that suggests a low setting value, the specific action A2 that suggests a high setting value, or the specific action A3 that suggests a setting value of 6 that is currently set. It is determined according to the set value and random value Y. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, the probability that the specific action A1 indicating a low setting value is higher than the specific action A2 (specific action A1: specific action A2 = 7: A performance is determined according to the value of the random number Y by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of 3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the high setting determines the specific action A2 that suggests the high setting value with a higher probability than the specific action A1 (ratio of specific action A1:specific action A2 = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random number Y with reference to the performance distribution table 1. In addition, when the setting value is 6, specific actions A1 to A3 are performed with a predetermined probability (specific action A1 :Specific action A2:Specific action A3=1:5:4 ratio)) A performance is determined according to the value of the random number Y with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 2. In other words, specific actions A1 and A2 may be output regardless of the current setting value, so one execution will not determine the low setting or high setting, but the specific action When A3 is output, it is determined that the currently set setting value is set value 6. In this way, when the specific action A is executed, the user can have expectations based on the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the specific action A.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are Although the movable body mounted on the movable body is not operated, it is sufficient that the movable body does not perform a specific motion, and may perform a non-specific motion that is different from the specific motion. Examples of non-specific actions for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 include the slight movement of the production operation section 301 from the initial position (movement to the extent that it does not move to the operating position), and For example, the decorative body 3451 may move slightly from the initial position (move to the extent that it does not move to the operating position). In this way, even if a non-specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, if the setting values are not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. , the difference from the specific operation is clear, and it can be clearly understood that the setting value has not been changed.

In addition, in this example, as a suggestive effect that suggests that the setting value has been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for a predetermined number of times, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, a specific action is performed on the movable body mounted in This may be done by outputting sound.

Regarding the above explanation of FIG. 269(A), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, at the time when the first variable display of symbols starts at timing t6, the peripheral control board has already Since the initial motion of the movable body has been completed, a specific motion can be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variable display of symbols. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(B), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the first variable display of symbols starts at timing t6, the peripheral control board side is movable. If the initial movement of the body has not been completed, no specific movement can be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variable display of symbols. In such a case, at the start of the variable display of symbols, which is started after the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 may I am trying to perform a specific action. For example, when the first variable display of symbols is started at timing t6, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has not been completed, but when the second variable display of symbols is started, the peripheral control board side If the initial movement of the movable body has been completed, a specific movement is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the second fluctuating display of the symbol. ing. As a result, if the setting values have been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a specific motion can be reliably performed, and information obtained from the specific motion can be prevented from being overlooked. can.

Regarding the above explanation of FIG. 269(A), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, A case will be described in which the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is being performed, but the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has been completed normally. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(C), if an abnormality occurs such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position during the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, the initial symbol change At the start of the predetermined number of variable displays of symbols, including the start of display, no specific action is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. However, in this example, as movable bodies that perform specific operations, there are the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and an abnormality may occur. If only one of the movable objects has failed, the specific action will not be performed on the movable object where the abnormality has occurred, but the specific action will be performed on the movable object that has successfully completed the initial movement. I have to. As a result, if the setting values have been changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to perform a specific action except for the movable object where the abnormality has occurred, and the information obtained from the specific action can be used. This can prevent you from missing out.

In addition, if an abnormality occurs such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position during the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, after the abnormality occurs, the movable body will not be used during symbol fluctuation. Even if a variation pattern in which a desired performance is set is transmitted, the movable body is not moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during symbol variation. However, the movement based on the fluctuation pattern will not be performed for a movable object that has an abnormality during the initial movement, and the movement based on the fluctuation pattern can be performed for a movable object that has successfully completed the initial movement. .

[About the standby position of the movable body after changing settings]
In this embodiment, if the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed, the movable body on the peripheral control board side returns to the normal standby state. However, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed, the movable body on the peripheral control board side It is designed to change to a position different from the normal standby position. In other words, if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting value is changed depending on the standby position of the movable body on the peripheral control board side when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed. A suggestion effect is being executed that suggests that a setting change has been made.

First, the case where the standby position of the movable body on the peripheral control board side changes when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side changes after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 is shown in FIG. Explain with reference to. FIG. 294 is a time chart showing the standby position of the movable body on the peripheral control board side when the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. . In the following, first, a case will be described in which the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has already been completed at the time when the first variable display of symbols is started.

As explained above, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON by operating the setting key switch 1311a and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU At timing t3, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and the state shifts to a state where setting values can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set values (set values 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch, which functions as a setting change button, is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original position. By turning OFF, a state is entered in which it is impossible to change the setting value (unchangeable state). After turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side, initial operations of the movable body on the main control board side, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Sends the input command.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed to a state where it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and the setting value is changed. In this case, when the power-on command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, a setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also sent. Thereby, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it can be recognized that the settings of the set values have been changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the movable body ( The initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has started. Specifically, the peripheral control board-side movable bodies include the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, etc. The initial movement of the movable body has started. Each of these peripheral control board-side movable bodies is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position.In the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body, each movable body moves to the initial position (evacuation position). This includes checking whether the movable body moves normally from the position (position) to the operating position (appearance position), and accurate positioning so that the movable body waits at the initial position.

When the initial operation of the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side ends, each of the movable bodies is returned to the initial position, and thereafter the movable bodies stand by at the initial position. However, certain movable bodies among the movable bodies on the peripheral control board side, in this case, the performance operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 mounted on the game board 5, and the back top and back Regarding the decorative body 3451, the specific movable The standby position of a specific movable body at the end of the initial movement of the body is made different. Specifically, if the setting value is not changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position A which is the initial position of the specific movable body (the normal standby position), but if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1, the specified The movable body operates to be located at one of standby positions B to D, which is different from the initial position of the movable body.

As described above, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position A which is the initial position of the specific movable body (normal standby position), and then a specific movable body waits at that standby position. For example, changes to the setting values are made by the hall administrator before the hall opens, so players should normally be able to check whether the setting values have been changed after the hall opens. It's impossible to know. However, before the start of the game after the opening of the hall, a specific movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is waiting at one of the standby positions B to D, which is different from the normal standby position. By checking whether or not the setting value has been changed, the player can know whether or not the setting value has been changed. Thereby, after the opening of the hall, if it is confirmed that the setting value has been changed, the game can be actively started.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on for Pachinko machine 1, the standby position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body is set to the initial position of the specific movable body. The standby position A (normal standby position) is different from the standby position A (normal standby position), but the standby position of the specific movable body is also changed according to the currently set setting value (the changed setting value). . In other words, the currently set setting value (the changed setting value) is suggested based on the standby position of a specific movable body. Specifically, when standby positions B to D are prepared as standby positions different from the normal standby position of a specific movable body, and the currently set values are set values 1, 3, and 5. In this case, the standby position B, which indicates that the set value is an odd number, can be determined. Further, when the currently set setting values are setting values 2, 4, and 6, it is possible to determine the standby position C, which indicates that the setting value is an even number. Further, when the currently set setting value is set value 5 or 6, it is possible to determine the standby position D, which indicates a high setting value. Note that when the currently set setting value is set value 5, the ratio of waiting position B to waiting position D is higher than that of waiting position D (standby position B: The random value is determined by the peripheral control MPU at the time of determining the standby position (at the start of the initial movement of a specific movable body) by referring to the production distribution table for setting value 5 determined by the standby position D = 7:3 ratio. A decision is made according to the obtained random value). Similarly, if the currently set value is 6, the ratio of the standby position C to the standby position D is higher (standby position C : Standby position D = ratio of 7:3) The peripheral control MPU A decision is made according to the random value (obtained in ). From this, it is not determined that the current setting values of standby position B and standby position C are low or high, but it is determined that standby position D is set to high. As a result, when a specific movable body is waiting at the standby position D, expectations can be expected based on the suggestion of a high setting value that can be ascertained from the standby position D.

In addition, among the specific movable bodies, the standby positions B to D of the performance operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 are set in the order of standby position B, standby position C, standby position D, The position is such that the amount of movement from the standby position (standby position) is large. Similarly, regarding the standby positions B to D of the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back up-and-back decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, the standby positions B to D are set in the order of standby position B, standby position C, and standby position D. It is located so that the amount of movement from position A (normal standby position) is large.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position B to D, which is different from the initial position of the specific movable body, is set. However, at the end of the initial operation of a specific movable body, the specific movable body may be operated to return to the initial position. In such a case, at the end of the initial motion of a specific movable body, after returning the specific movable body to the initial position, the initial motion of the specific movable body is It is assumed that the robot operates so as to be located at one of the standby positions B to D, which are different from the standby position.

In addition, in this example, as specific movable bodies, the effect operation section 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back top/back rotation decoration body 3440 and the back top/back decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 are listed. It is being Of these, the production operation unit 301 is mounted on the main body frame 4, so when it is located at standby positions B to D, which are different from the initial position, it is directed toward the outside such as customers who are not playing games. It is possible to greatly emphasize that the settings of the setting values have been changed. In addition, since the production operation section 301 is exposed so that it can be accessed from the outside, there is a possibility that the standby position could be improperly changed due to a prank, but since it is easy to recognize from the outside, the hall manager will notice. This makes it easy to prevent mischief from occurring. On the other hand, since the back top/rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top/back rotating decorative body 3451 are mounted on the game board 5, they cannot be contacted from the outside, and their standby positions can be improperly changed due to mischief. Never.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the production operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the performance operation unit 301 mounted on the game board 5 are used as specific movable bodies. Both the back top and rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 are operating so as to be located at one of standby positions B to D that is different from the initial position of the specific movable body. However, it may be possible to select only one of the standby positions B to D and operate the standby position B to D. In such a case, for example, compared to the case where only the standby positions of the back top and rear rotating decorations 3440 and the back top and back decorations 3451 mounted on the game board 5 change, A case where only the standby position of the production operation unit 301 changes may indicate a higher setting value. Furthermore, only the standby position of either one of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back top/rear rotation decoration 3440 and the back top/back decoration 3451 mounted on the game board 5 changes. It may be possible to suggest a higher set value when both standby positions change than when both standby positions change, so that the set value 6 is fixed when both standby positions change. You can.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the change in the setting value is detected by changing the standby position of a specific movable body. Although it is suggested, this method is not limited to movable bodies whose standby position can change, but can also be applied to movable bodies whose stopping modes can be varied, such as movable bodies that can rotate. good. In such a case, when the setting value is changed when the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the change from the normal stop mode suggests that the setting value has been changed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the main control MPU enters a state in which the special symbol can be displayed in a variable state (variable state ). In other words, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, the variable display of the special symbol starts. At the same time, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation effect) of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern command in the effect display device 1600. ing.

When the first variable display of decorative symbols starts at timing t6, a specific movable body located at one of the standby positions B to D operates to return to the initial position (normal standby position). Thereby, during the initial variable display of decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect using a specific movable body based on the variable pattern. It should be noted that the variation pattern includes a variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and performance contents to be executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation time. For example, if a variation pattern is sent as a variation pattern command sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in which a production using a movable body is set during the variation display of a decorative pattern, the variation production As part of this, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In the above, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at timing t6, the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Only at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the ball, a specific movable body located in one of the standby positions B to D moves to return to the initial position (normal standby position). On the other hand, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004, the specific movable body located at any of the standby positions B to D returns to the initial position (normal standby position). I'm trying not to go back. If the setting values are changed when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, the RAM is initialized (RAM cleared) and the game must be started from the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state). Therefore, the ball is not allowed to enter the second starting port 2004. Therefore, as the initial special symbol variation display, the special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 should not be performed, and there is no possibility that the ball entering the second starting port 2004 by fraud. It is possible that In such a case, even if the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the specific movable body does not return to its initial position (normal standby position) and remains in one of standby positions B to D. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to notice, and it is possible to deter fraudulent acts themselves.

Regarding the above explanation of FIG. 294(A), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and before the first variable display of symbols starts at timing t6, the peripheral control has already been performed. Since the initial operation of the board-side movable body has been completed, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position is different from the standby position A (normal standby position) that is the initial position of the specific movable body. It is located anywhere from B to D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(B), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the first variable display of symbols starts at timing t6, the peripheral control board side is movable. If the initial motion of the body is not completed, when the initial motion of the specific movable body is completed, the specific movable body is not located at any of the standby positions B to D, and the specific movable body is not located at the standby position, which is the initial position. It is positioned at A (normal standby position). For example, after the first fluctuating display of the symbol starts, if the specific movable body is located at any of the standby positions B to D at the end of the initial movement of the specific movable body, the fluctuating effect based on the fluctuating pattern will be displayed. However, by being located at the initial standby position A (normal standby position), such a misunderstanding does not occur.

Further, regarding the above explanation of FIG. 294(A), after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, A case will be described in which the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is being performed, but the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side has been completed normally. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(C), if an abnormality occurs such as the peripheral control board side movable body not returning to the initial position during the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, the specific movable body At the end of the initial operation, the specific movable body is not located at any of the standby positions B to D. However, in this example, the specific movable bodies include the production operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and the movable bodies in which the abnormality has occurred are If the movable body is located at one of the standby positions, the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred is not located at any of the standby positions B to D, whereas the movable body that has successfully completed the initial operation is located at any of the standby positions B to D. I'm trying to locate it. As a result, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a specific movable body, excluding the movable body in which an abnormality has occurred, will be located in one of the standby positions B to D. This makes it possible to prevent information obtained from the standby position of that particular movable body from being overlooked.

In the above, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is assumed to start when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, but at a timing before receiving the power-on command. That is, the process may be started when the initial settings on the peripheral control board 1510 side are completed at timing t2 (see FIGS. 267 and 268). Also in such a case, at the end of the initial operation of a specific movable body, one of the standby positions B to D that is different from the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position of the specific movable body It is assumed that the system will operate in such a way that it is located at As a result, the initial operation of the movable body on the peripheral control board side is completed at an early timing, so that the specific movable body can quickly shift to a standby state at any of the standby positions B to D.

[Restrictions on suggestive effects after an abnormality occurs]
In this embodiment, if the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches a predetermined number (6 times in this example). Then, a suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the setting value has been changed. This suggestion effect is executed using lamp light emission and audio output from a speaker. In addition to such a configuration, in this embodiment, if an abnormality is detected after the setting value is changed and before the suggestion effect is executed, the suggestion effect is not executed at the timing of execution of the suggestion effect. It's in control. The relationship between such suggestion effects and abnormality detection will be explained with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a time chart showing the relationship between suggestion effects and abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 295, if the setting value is changed at timing t1 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, then the game ball B is not accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by is a jackpot, it is counted as the number of jackpots. Then, at timing t3, when the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 6 times), a suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the setting value has been changed. . This suggestion effect not only suggests that the setting value has been changed by executing the effect according to the currently set setting value (the changed setting value), but also indicates that the setting value has been changed. It also suggests possible settings. Further, the suggestion performance is executed at the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the sixth jackpot) after the setting value is changed.

Further, in the suggestive effect, any of the suggestive effects A to C is executed as an effect according to the currently set setting value (the changed setting value). Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is made to determine which of the suggestion performances A to C to perform, but in the execution determination, a jackpot game based on a predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the sixth jackpot) When it is determined that it is the end point of , the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value One of effects C is determined according to the currently set setting value and random value X. Here, if the currently set setting value is set value 1 to 3, the probability that suggestion effect A that suggests a low setting value is higher than suggestion effect B (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B = 7: A performance is determined according to the value of the random number X by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of 3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the high setting determines the suggestion effect B that suggests the high setting value with a higher probability than the suggestion effect A (ratio of suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the performance distribution table 1. In addition, when the setting value is 6, the suggestion effects A to C are set at a predetermined probability (suggestion effect A : Suggestive effect B: Suggestive effect C=1:5:4 ratio) The effect is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the effect distribution table 2 for high setting. In other words, suggestion effects A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so it is not certain whether the setting is low or high, but when suggestion effect C is executed, , it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is setting value 6. In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed, the user can have expectations corresponding to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestion effect.

In addition, as the suggestion effect A that suggests a low setting value, effect data is used in which a sound "bee" is output from the speaker and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit blue light. As the suggestion effect B that suggests a high setting value, effect data is used in which the speaker outputs a sound of "beebee" and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit red light. Suggestive effect C that suggests the setting value 6 is effect data in which the speaker outputs the sound "bee beep" and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit light in rainbow colors. is used. In this way, by changing the audio output and lamp emission mode for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to understand what kind of setting value is being suggested.

On the other hand, if the setting values are not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, that is, if the setting value confirmation display is displayed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or if the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine When only the control built-in RAM is being cleared, or when the Pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (none of the settings changes, setting value confirmation display, and main control built-in RAM being cleared). (If not, even if the first special lottery result or second special lottery result that is subsequently drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 becomes a jackpot, It is not counted as the number of jackpots. In other words, even if the number of jackpots after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), the suggestion effect is not executed, and the currently set setting value is not suggested. do not have.

In addition, in this example, after changing the setting value, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 becomes a jackpot. When the player wins a small hit, it is counted as the number of jackpot hits, but when the player wins a small hit, it is not counted as the number of jackpot hits. Here, when the setting value is changed, the jackpot probability is changed, but the small win probability is not changed. For this reason, in the execution conditions of the suggestion effect, only jackpots that involve changes in setting values should be counted and included, and small hits that do not involve changes in setting values should be counted as the number of times. Therefore, it is not included in the execution conditions of the suggestive performance.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example uses various methods to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. Then, it monitors whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied, and if the magnetic sensor 2470 or vibration sensor 3005 detects it, it is determined that a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or applying vibration is being carried out. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will then enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, exit opening) illegally.

In addition, in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state), the game ball B that has flowed down the left side area of the gaming area 5a is allowed to enter the first starting port 2002 into which the ball can enter. On the other hand, the game ball B that has flown down the right side area of the game area 5a is not allowed to enter the second starting port 2004 into which the ball can enter. Therefore, in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving state), it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is being hit into the right area of the gaming area 5a, and the game ball B is flowing down the right area of the gaming area 5a. If it is detected that the game ball B is in the right area of the game area 5a in an attempt to illegally enter the second starting port 2004, an abnormality has occurred. We judge that there are.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a door frame release switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main body frame release switch that detects opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. . Even though the game is in progress, if the door frame release switch or main body frame release switch is detected, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, or the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 has been released, and there is a possibility that the ball may be entered into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 illegally, or a jackpot may be won illegally. It is determined that this is occurring.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the abnormality is notified to the outside using speakers, LEDs, etc. provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. In order to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred, abnormality notifications include outputting a warning message from a speaker and flashing LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and game board 5 with strong light. . Furthermore, the displayed content of the warning message varies depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects and determines that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message saying "Magnetism (vibration) has been detected" is output. In addition, if it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message will be output saying "Please return to left-handed hitting." are doing. Additionally, the door frame release switch and main body frame release switch are detected, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message ``The door is open'' is output.

Moreover, the abnormality notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected. However, if the abnormality is resolved before a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time when the abnormality was detected, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point. For example, if it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the gaming area 5a and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the game ball B will be flowing down the left side area of the gaming area 5a. When the error is returned to normal, the error is resolved and the error notification is terminated. In addition, if the door frame release switch or main body frame release switch is detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, or the main body frame is closed relative to the outer frame 2. 4 is closed, the abnormality is resolved and the abnormality notification is terminated.

If an abnormality is detected at timing t2, then at timing t3, even if the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 6 times), the suggestion effect is restricted from being executed. ing. In other words, if an abnormality is detected before the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 6 times) after the setting value is changed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the suggestion effect will be changed. Even if it is the execution timing, the suggestion effect is not executed. The cause of the detected abnormality is suspected to be fraudulent activity, but if such fraudulent activity is suspected, it is possible to obtain information on the settings that have been changed and the current settings. Since it is not possible to do so, it is possible to impose a penalty on fraudulent acts and to deter fraudulent acts themselves.

More specifically, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, an abnormality notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but the execution timing of the suggestion effect is determined during the execution of the abnormality notification. Even if it arrives, the suggested performance will not be executed. In other words, even if the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches a predetermined number (6 times in this example) while the abnormality notification is being executed, the abnormality notification is prioritized over the suggestion performance. It is possible to clearly indicate to the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when an abnormality is detected at timing t2, an abnormality notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but it is assumed that the timing to execute the suggestion effect has arrived after the abnormality notification ends. However, there is no suggestion. In other words, even if the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches the predetermined number (6 times in this example) after the abnormality notification ends, the setting value will not be changed by not performing the suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent information about the current setting values from being obtained.

In this example, if the abnormality detected at timing t2 is a specific abnormality, all of the suggestive effects consisting of audio output, lamp lighting, and effect display are restricted from being executed. If there is no specific abnormality, only a part of the suggested effect consisting of audio output, lamp lighting, and effect display is restricted from being executed. In other words, the extent to which the suggestive performance is restricted varies depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality. Specifically, if the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects it at timing t2, it is determined that a severe abnormality (specific abnormality) has occurred, and the sound output, lamp lighting, and production are performed. While the system is limited to not execute all of the suggestive effects consisting of displays, there are cases where it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a at timing t2, or when the door frame is detected. If the release switch or body frame release switch is detected, it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and only audio output is not performed among the suggested effects consisting of audio output, lamp lighting, and effect display. The lighting of the lamp and the effect display are limited to the following. Here, if the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects a problem, there is a very high possibility that fraudulent activity such as using a magnet or applying vibration is being carried out, so there is a serious abnormality. If it is determined that a (specific abnormality) has occurred, but it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a, the player simply plays the game. There is a possibility that the ball B was hit in the wrong area, or if the door frame release switch or main body frame release switch is detected, it is possible that the hall manager simply opened the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. As this is not necessarily due to fraud, it has been determined that a minor abnormality has occurred. In this way, when a serious abnormality occurs, there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, and by restricting not to execute all of the suggestive performances, fraudulent activity itself can be deterred.

In the above, depending on the type (degree) of the abnormality, some or all of the suggestion effects consisting of audio output, lamp lighting, and presentation displays are restricted from being executed. You may choose not to execute it. Furthermore, when an abnormality is detected, the mode of outputting a suggestive effect consisting of audio output, lamp lighting, and effect display may be suppressed. In this way, when the mode of outputting the suggestive effect consisting of audio output, lamp light emission, and effect display is suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice that the suggestive effect is being executed at the timing of execution of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this example, the suggestion effect is executed when the number of jackpots after changing the setting value reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 6 times). Before the number of jackpot hits reaches a predetermined number of times, the suggestion performance may be made possible to be executed every time a jackpot is hit after the setting value is changed. In other words, when the predetermined number of jackpots is 6, the suggestion performance may be made possible for each of the first to fifth jackpots. As the suggestive effect, any of suggestive effects A to C is executed according to the currently set setting value (the changed setting value). In order, a high setting value suggests a high level of expectation. Then, when executing the suggestion effect for each of the first to sixth jackpots, the suggestion effect is executed so that the level of expectation can be gradually increased for each of the first to sixth jackpots, At the sixth jackpot, a final suggestion effect is executed to suggest the expectation level, which is a high set value. Incidentally, in each of the first to fifth jackpots, among the suggestion effects A to C, suggestion effect C, in which it is determined that the currently set setting value is set value 6, is not executed. For example, if you want to execute suggestion C as the final suggestion at the 6th jackpot, for each of the 1st to 5th jackpots, suggestive effect A → Suggestive effect A → Suggestive effect A → Suggestive effect B → It is possible to execute the suggestions in the order of suggestion B. As a result, the final expectation level cannot be grasped before the number of jackpots reaches 6 after changing the setting value, so until the number of jackpots reaches 6, The game can be continued with anticipation.

In the above, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time there is a jackpot after changing the setting value, but if an abnormality is detected at timing t2, the suggestion effect is executed at the subsequent execution timing of the suggestion effect. It is restricted so that it does not occur. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is 6, it is possible to perform the suggestion effect for each of the 1st to 5th jackpots, but for example, between the 2nd and 3rd jackpots. If an abnormality is detected, the execution of the suggestion performance is restricted from the third and subsequent jackpots.

In addition, in this example, the suggestion effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the 6th time) after changing the setting value, but Now, it is sufficient if the suggestion effect is executed using the sixth (6th) jackpot as an opportunity. For example, when the jackpot result (stopped symbol) is displayed based on the predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the 6th time) after the setting value is changed, or the time when the jackpot result (stopped symbol) is displayed after the predetermined number of times (in this example, the 6th time) after the setting value is changed, , 6th) jackpot game may be in progress. In addition, when performing a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while the player is waiting) after the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the 6th jackpot) after changing the setting value, , The content of the demonstration (such as the lighting mode of a lamp) may be changed as a suggestion effect. Note that the demonstration is an effect that is started when a state in which no game is played continues for a predetermined period of time. As a result, if no game is being played after the end of the jackpot game based on the predetermined number of jackpots (in this example, the 6th jackpot after changing the settings), you can check the content of the demonstration. It is possible to ascertain whether the high set value indicates a high level of expectation, and if the high set value indicates a high level of expectation, it is possible to increase the player's desire to start playing the game. Note that the content of the demonstration that is being executed as a suggestive performance can be ended by, for example, operating the performance operation unit 301, and by checking the content of the demonstration, it is possible to determine whether the level of expectation, which is a high setting value, is high. If the hall manager does not want to know, by operating the performance operation section 301, the hall manager is prevented from knowing whether the expectation level, which is a high setting value, is high.

[About contact/non-contact with the handle and single button]
In this embodiment, the configuration regarding the handle 182 and the single button 193 includes a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the handle 182 is being rotated or not. The single button operation sensor 194 detects whether or not the single button 193 is being pressed during the rotation operation of the handle 182 and the single button 193.

First, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 182, etc., the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and It detects contact with That is, when the player touches the handle 182 etc., the handle touch sensor 192 detects it, whereas when the player does not touch the handle 182 etc., the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect it.

Further, the single button operation sensor 194 has a function of detecting whether the handle 182 is in a non-rotating state (non-rotating state) and a function of detecting whether the single button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated. It has a function to detect whether or not there is a person. In other words, when the handle 182 is not rotated or when the single button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is rotated, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the rotation of the handle 182. When the single button 193 is not pressed during operation, the single button operation sensor 194 does not detect it. Regarding the single-shot button 193, by pressing the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182. In addition, by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, signal paths when detecting the handle touch sensor 192 and the single button operation sensor 194 will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a diagram for explaining signal paths when the handle touch sensor 192 and the single button operation sensor 194 are detected.

The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the handle rear relay board 106. Then, upon receiving the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing control unit 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

Similarly, the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the handle rear relay board 106. Then, upon receiving the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the firing control section 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU selects the following four operation situations depending on the combination of whether or not the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and whether or not the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input. I know which one of them it is.

In the first operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input, the player is not in contact with the handle 182. First, it is determined that the player is not rotating the handle 182 and is not playing a game.

In addition, as a second operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182 while It is determined that the single-shot button 193 is not pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated, and that this is a normal operating situation in which the game ball B is to be fired.

In addition, as a third operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input, the player touches the handle 182 while Either the handle 182 is not being rotated, or the player is touching the handle 182 and pressing the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, and the player is not rotating the handle 182. It has been determined that this is a normal operating situation in which the launch is temporarily stopped.

Further, as a fourth operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182. The handle 182 is still rotating even though the player is not playing the game, and it is determined that this is an abnormal operating situation that would not occur in a normal game.

The main control MPU performs the above-described firing permission signal setting process (step S113) and sets the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted. It makes it possible. In this process, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is not input, it is possible to set the firing permission logic as the firing permission signal logic. On the other hand, even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, when the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input, the firing stop logic (which is an inversion of the firing permission logic) is used as the logic of the firing permission signal. (launch disallowed logic). In other words, when the handle 182 is touched and the single-shot button 193 is not operated, it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633, while the single-shot button 193 cannot be operated. Sometimes, a firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, regardless of whether the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input or not, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input, the firing permission logic is inverted as the logic of the firing permission signal. It is set to stop logic (launch not permitted logic). That is, when there is no contact with the handle 182, the firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633.

Then, when the firing control unit 633b rotates the handle 182 while receiving the firing permission signal, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. On the other hand, even when the handle 182 is touched, when the single-shot button 193 is operated, even if the handle 182 is rotated and the game ball B is attempted to be hit into the game area 5a, the firing permission signal is not received. For some reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit.

Furthermore, in a fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) in which the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, Since this is a period in which the firing permission signal is not received (a period in which the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect contact by the player), the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The main control MPU allows firing toward the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is not input. When outputting the launch permission signal, a launch permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that it is time to output the launch permission signal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines that during the period in which the firing permission command is being received, the player is in a state where the player is in contact with the handle 182 and is not pressing the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182; It is possible to understand that this is the second operation situation (normal operation situation) in which the game ball B is to be shot.

In addition, when the main control MPU is inputting the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, Although the firing permission signal is not outputted, at that time, a firing stop command is outputted to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to inform that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the player is in contact with the handle 182 but is not rotating the handle 182 during the period in which the firing stop command is being received. A third operating situation (normal operating situation) in which the single-shot button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated while touching the ball B, and the firing of the game ball B is attempted to be temporarily stopped. It is possible to understand that

In addition, when the main control MPU is not inputting the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU Although the launch permission signal is not output to the peripheral control board 1510, at that time, an abnormality occurrence command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that an abnormal operating situation has occurred. As a result, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182 during the period in which the abnormality command is being received, which is not normal in a normal game. It is possible to understand that this is the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) that cannot occur.

Regarding the above, the peripheral control MPU uses the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the LEDs provided on the main body frame 4, the game board 5, etc. to notify the outside of the abnormality during the period when it receives the abnormality command. I am trying to do this. Abnormality notifications include outputting a warning message from the production display device 1600 or speakers, or using LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 in order to notify the outside that an abnormal operation situation has occurred. It flashes a strong light. Further, as a warning message, a message saying "Please operate the steering wheel normally" is output. Here, if an abnormality command has been received, the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182, so the handle 182 must be rotated in some way. There is a high possibility that the players are making it appear as if they are playing a fixed game, and there is a possibility that they are trying to commit fraudulent activities during such a period. In this regard, in this example, it is possible to understand that this is a fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) that cannot occur in a normal game, and when such a fourth operation situation is recognized, By reporting an abnormality, it is possible to detect at an early stage the risk of attempting to commit fraud.

In addition, the main control MPU determines that during a period in which the firing permission command, firing stop command, and abnormality occurrence command are not received, the player is not in contact with the handle 182 and is rotating the handle 182. Therefore, it can be understood that this is the first operating situation in which no game is being played.

In addition, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value change is not permitted or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal. When it is determined that the value change is permitted or the set value is displayed for confirmation, the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic. In other words, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. . Therefore, even if you try to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball It is now impossible to type B.

In the above, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 while the setting value change is being permitted or while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. After the set value confirmation display is completed, it is possible to output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, but before the set value change permission or set value confirmation display is completed. If the user continues to touch the handle 182 from then until after the firing is completed, the firing permission signal is not outputted even after permission to change the set value or confirmation display of the set value is completed. In such a case, after permission to change the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value is completed, by releasing the hand from the handle 182 and touching it again, a firing permission signal can be output, and the handle 182 can be released. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by rotating it.

Furthermore, as described above in detail, the main control MPU determines that, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected. When this happens, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), it is determined that fraud has been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the launch permission logic. That is, when fraudulent activity is detected, a firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Therefore, when fraudulent activity is detected, even if you try to drive the game ball B into the gaming area 5a by rotating the handle 182, the firing solenoid 542 will not be driven and you will not be able to drive the game ball B. ing.

Note that while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not in contact. Similarly, when fraud is detected, even when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 Since the launch permission command is not output toward the target, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not in contact with the handle 182.

By the way, during the period in which the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 continues to be input, the firing permission command may continue to be output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU; When the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 switches from non-input to input, the firing permission command is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 switches from input to non-input, the firing non-permission command is output. You can. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can determine that the handle 182 is in contact during the period from receiving the launch permission command to receiving the launch non-permission command. Similarly, while the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is being input, the firing stop command is sent from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU while the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 continues to be input. Although the output may be continued, the firing stop command is output when the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 switches from non-input to input, and the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 changes from input to input. When switching to non-input, a firing non-stop command may be output. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU determines that the single-shot button 193 is being operated even though the handle 182 is in contact during the period from receiving the firing stop command to receiving the firing non-stop command. can be grasped.

(Production according to single button operation)
Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the single-shot button 193 is being operated while the handle 182 is in contact, depending on whether a firing stop command is input, and responds accordingly to the operation of the single-shot button 193. The performance is executed in response to the release of the single-shot button 193. Of these, first, the execution control of the effect according to the operation of the single button 193 will be explained with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first firing stop command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 272, the peripheral control MPU first determines that during the fluctuating display of symbols (decorative symbols), a highly anticipated reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as a reach effect after forming a reach. It is determined whether or not (step S2801). The peripheral control MPU controls effects based on a variation pattern determined on the main control board 1310 side, and effects based on the variation pattern include effects that do not form a reach (normal variation), effects that do not form a reach (normal variation), and effects that do not form a reach (normal variation). Examples include a performance in which a normal reach performance with a low level of expectation is subsequently executed, a performance in which a normal reach performance with a low level of expectation is executed after forming a reach, and then a super reach performance with a high degree of expectation is executed. Regarding these performances, the performance time is set to be longer in the order of the performance that does not form a reach, the performance that executes the normal reach performance, and the performance that executes the super reach performance.

In the process of step S2801, if it is determined that a reach effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as a reach effect after a reach formation, during the execution of the reach effect with a high degree of expectation, It is determined whether a firing stop command has been received (step S2802). In other words, it is determined whether or not the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B during execution of the highly anticipated reach effect. If it is determined that a firing stop command has been received during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, the player operates the single-shot button 193 to launch the game ball B during execution of the highly anticipated reach effect. is counted (added) to a firing stop count counter indicating the number of times the shot has been temporarily stopped (step S2803). Regarding this firing stop count counter, it is possible to count only once for one execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, and no matter how many times the single shot button 193 is operated or not operated, multiple shots can be stopped. There is no counting of times.

Following the processing of steps S2801 to S2803, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect (step S2804). If it is determined that it is the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, it is determined whether the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more (step S2805). In other words, for 10 executions of highly anticipated reach performances, whether or not the single shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the firing of game ball B during 5 or more highly anticipated reach performances. to judge.

In the process of step S2805, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the single button 193 is pressed as audio output from the speaker. A special sound A indicating that the number of times the firing of the game ball B has been temporarily stopped due to operation is outputted (step S2806). As the special sound A, a voice saying "How are you doing" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2805, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is not 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the single-shot button 193 is output as audio output from the speaker. is operated to output a special sound B indicating that the number of times the firing of game balls B has been temporarily stopped is small (step S2807). As special sound B, a voice saying "Let's do our best" is output. In addition, in the process of step S2807, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution is determined as the audio output from the speaker. Depending on the result of the determination, one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output.

Note that, regardless of whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, after the processing of steps S2806 and S2807, the value of the firing stop number counter is The value is being reset. After the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, the next highly anticipated reach performance will be set as the first highly anticipated reach performance, and a new firing stop counter will start counting. I am planning to do so.

Here, during execution of a reach performance with high expectations, since the performance time is long, there is a tendency for the ball to be held up due to the ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the number of balls reaches the upper limit (limit number of 4 balls), the number of balls held will not increase even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the player can play the game by operating the single button 193. The firing of ball B is temporarily stopped so that the number of balls held does not decrease. At this time, if the situation is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped by operating the single button 193. likely to stop. In other words, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reaching performance, the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Since the situation was easy and the number of balls held was difficult to decrease, it is highly likely that the player operated the single shot button 193 to temporarily stop the firing of game balls B, and to praise such a situation. A special sound A is output. On the other hand, if the situation is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is difficult for the hold to reach the upper limit, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will continue to be fired without operating the single button 193. is high. In other words, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reaching performance, the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Since the situation was difficult and the number of balls in possession was likely to decrease, there is a high possibility that the individual did not operate the single-shot button 193 and continued to fire game balls B, and a special sound was created to encourage such a situation. B is to be output.

In the process of step S2807, an execution determination (execution lottery) is made as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C to output. When it is determined that the value of the stop count counter is not 5 counts or more, the peripheral control MPU obtains a predetermined random value X, and a setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, a setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, One of the setting suggestion sounds C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value has a higher probability than setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound A performance is determined according to the value of the random number X by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of B=7:3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value is sent with a higher probability than setting suggestion sound A (ratio of setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random value X with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, setting suggestion sounds A to C are generated at a predetermined probability (setting Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = ratio of 1:5:4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the production distribution table 2 for high settings. . In other words, setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so a single output will not confirm the low or high setting. When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, the user can have expectations based on the setting value suggestion that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

Note that as the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, sound data in which a sound "bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, a "bee beep" is output from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, sound data that outputs the sound "Beep beep" is used from the speaker. In this way, by outputting different setting suggestion sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to understand what kind of setting value is being suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as a performance in response to the operation of the single button 193. Specifically, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, the single shot button 193 is operated to fire the game ball B. By outputting special sound A that suggests that the ball has been temporarily stopped too many times, the ball can be easily entered into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the number of balls in possession is difficult to reduce. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of game ball B. By outputting special sound B that suggests that the number of times the ball has stopped is small, it was difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the number of balls in possession was likely to decrease. can be understood. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to understand whether the gaming efficiency is good or not.

Further, the firing stop command will be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is in contact. In other words, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, if the handle 182 is not touched, the peripheral control MPU will not receive the firing stop command, so in the process of step S2802, the firing stop command is not received. There is no determination that this is the case, and no counting (addition) is made to the firing stop count counter. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the single-shot button 193 is being operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while touching the handle 182 and participating in the game. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the gaming situation obtained from the game.

In addition, in this example, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the single shot button 193 is operated to release the game ball B. In addition to outputting special sound B that suggests that the number of times that firing has been temporarily stopped is small, any of setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value is output. In this way, if it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is entered. There is a high possibility that the situation is such that it is difficult to hit the ball and the game efficiency is low, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, information regarding the currently set setting values can be known, so such game efficiency can be reduced. This can motivate the player to continue playing even under bad circumstances. Furthermore, if it is suggested that the currently set value is a high value, the player is likely to win, and this can particularly motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this example, at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reaching performance, it is determined whether the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more, and it is possible to output a special sound. However, regardless of whether the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach performance, after the 10th highly anticipated reach performance ends, a special It may also be possible to output sound.

(Production corresponding to release of single button operation)
Next, execution control of effects in response to release of the operation of the single button 193 will be explained with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second firing stop command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 273, the peripheral control MPU first determines that during the fluctuating display of symbols (decorative symbols), a highly anticipated reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as a reach effect after forming a reach. It is determined whether or not (step S2901).

In the process of step S2901, if it is determined that a highly expected reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as a reach effect after forming a reach, the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is executed. It is determined whether or not the number of balls held due to entering the ball has reached the upper limit (limit number) (step S2902). In addition, when the number of holds increases due to the ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or when the number of holds decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the symbols, a number of pending commands indicating the number of holds may be transmitted from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp the number of reservations. Then, if it is determined that the number of balls held by entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number), it is determined whether or not a firing stop command has been received ( Step S2903). In other words, it is determined whether or not the single-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B in a situation where the hold has reached the upper limit during execution of the highly anticipated reach performance. In addition, regardless of whether the single-shot button 193 is operated before the highly anticipated reach effect starts or after the start, it is determined that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. can do.

In the process of step S2903, if it is determined that the firing stop command has been received, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is set as the time during which a special effect described later can be executed when the firing permission command is received. The set operation waiting time is started (step S2904). Here, when executing a reach effect with high expectations based on the fluctuation pattern, the effects are executed in the order of fluctuation start → reach formation → reach effect with low expectations → reach effect with high expectations, but the operation The waiting time is set to be shorter than the production time of the highly anticipated reach production. Further, after the operation waiting time has started, when a firing permission command is received, the operation waiting time ends. On the other hand, if the launch permission command is not received after the start of the operation waiting time, the operation waiting time will end when the predetermined time has elapsed, but before the predetermined time elapses, the When the performance ends, the operation waiting time also ends. In addition, during the operation waiting time, it is monitored whether the state in which the firing stop command is being received is switched to the state in which the firing permission command is being received. In other words, in a situation where the hold has reached the upper limit during execution of a reach effect with high expectations, after temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball B by operating the single button 193, if the reach effect with a high expectation is also executed, During execution of the performance, it is monitored whether the operation of the single shot button 193 is released and the firing of the game ball B is resumed.

In addition, in the process of step S2904, when the operation waiting time starts, a promotion effect for promoting the release of the operation of the single button 193 is started as an effect executed during the operation waiting time. As a promotional effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display an image that says ``Maybe something will happen if we resume firing?''. As a result, even if the single-shot button 193 is being operated, it is possible to grasp that it is requested to release the operation of the single-shot button 193 and restart firing of the game ball B.

Following the processing of steps S2901 to S2904, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not an operation waiting time is occurring (step S2905). If it is determined that an operation waiting time is occurring, if the state is switched from receiving a launch stop command to receiving a launch permission command during the operation waiting time ( Step S2906), as a special effect, an execution determination (execution lottery) is made as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value will be output, and the execution determination will be made as the audio output from the speaker. Depending on the result, one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output (step S2907). In other words, when the operation of the single shot button 193 is released and the firing of the game ball B is resumed during the operation waiting time, a special effect is executed.

Here, during execution of a reach performance with high expectations, since the performance time is long, there is a situation where the number of balls held due to entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 tends to increase, When the number of balls reaches the upper limit (limit number of 4 balls), the number of balls held will not increase even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the player can play the game by operating the single button 193. The firing of ball B is temporarily stopped so that the number of balls held does not decrease. At this time, if the situation is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped by operating the single button 193. likely to stop. In other words, if there is an operation waiting time during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, the situation is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and it is difficult for the ball to decrease. Therefore, it is highly likely that the single-shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B. On the other hand, if no operation waiting time occurs during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, the situation is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the number of balls held decreases. Since the situation was easy, it is highly likely that the game ball B continued to be fired without operating the single-shot button 193.

In addition, if the single-shot button 193 is operated during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect and an operation waiting time occurs, the number of balls held will not decrease, but for the hole side, the single-shot button 193 may be operated. It is preferable to release the button and have the game ball B continue to be fired. In this regard, if the operation of the single button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time, the user can be guided to cancel the operation of the single button 193 by executing a special effect.

In the process of step S2906, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed to determine which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output. When it is determined that the setting value has been set, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value One of C is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value has a higher probability than setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound A performance is determined according to the value of the random number X by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of B=7:3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value is sent with a higher probability than setting suggestion sound A (ratio of setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random value X with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, setting suggestion sounds A to C are generated at a predetermined probability (setting Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = ratio of 1:5:4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the production distribution table 2 for high settings. . In other words, setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so a single output will not confirm the low or high setting. When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, the user can have expectations based on the setting value suggestion that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

Note that as the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, sound data is used in which a "bee" sound is output from the speaker, and as the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, a "bee beep" is output from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, sound data that outputs the sound "Beep beep" is used from the speaker. In this way, by outputting different setting suggestion sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is being suggested.

As described above, in this example, when the single-shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated, and when the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released during the operation waiting time, a special effect is executed. ing. In other words, a special performance is executed as a performance according to the operation status of the single button 193. Specifically, if it is determined that the single-shot button 193 has been operated during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, an operation waiting time is generated, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is activated. It is possible to understand that the situation is such that it is easy to enter the ball and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession. On the other hand, when it is determined that the single button 193 is not operated during execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, no operation waiting time is generated. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether the gaming efficiency is good or not depending on whether or not the operation waiting time occurs. Further, if it is determined that the operation of the single button 193 has been released during the operation waiting time, the user can be guided to release the operation of the single button 193 by executing a special effect.

Further, the firing stop command will be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the single button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is in contact. In other words, even if the single-shot button 193 is operated, if the handle 182 is not touched, the peripheral control MPU will not receive the firing stop command, so in the process of step S2802, the firing stop command is not received. There is no determination that this is the case, and no counting (addition) is made to the firing stop count counter. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the single-shot button 193 is being operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while touching the handle 182 and participating in the game. It is possible to improve the accuracy of information such as the gaming situation obtained from the game.

In this example, when it is determined that the operation of the single button 193 has been released during the operation waiting time, setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value are played as a special effect. Which is output? In this way, if the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled while the operation waiting time is occurring, the firing of the game ball B will be restarted, and although there is a high possibility that the number of balls held will decrease, the setting suggestion sound will not be output. Since the player can know the information regarding the currently set setting value, the user can be motivated to restart the shooting of the game ball B even if there is a possibility that the number of balls in possession may decrease. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high value, the player is likely to win, and this can particularly motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this example, during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, on the condition that the number of balls held due to entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number), When the single button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated. As a result, the number of balls held by entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 will reach the upper limit (limit number) between the start of symbol fluctuation and the start of the highly anticipated reach effect. It is possible to create a desire to do so. In addition, during execution of a highly anticipated reach effect, if the number of balls held by entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 has not reached the upper limit (limit number), the single shot button 193 is operated. When this occurs, an operation waiting time may be generated. Then, when the operation of the single button 193 is released during the occurrence of such an operation waiting time, a non-special effect (a fake special effect) may be performed. As a non-special effect, a setting non-suggestion sound that does not suggest the currently set setting value may be output, such as a "pi-pi-pi" sound (sound different from the setting suggestion sound) from a speaker.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, during the operation waiting time, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released, and the operation of the single-shot button 193 is canceled. Even if it is determined that the single-shot button 193 has been released during the operation waiting time, the special effect will not be executed after the highly anticipated reach effect ends. It is also possible to perform a performance.

(Production according to handle operation)
Next, execution control of effects in response to contact with the handle 182 will be explained with reference to FIG. 274. FIG. 274 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a firing permission command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 274, the peripheral control MPU first selects a performance that includes a highly anticipated reach performance (for example, a super reach performance) as a reach performance after a reach formation, during a variable display of symbols (decorative symbols). It is determined whether or not it is being executed (step S3001).

In the process of step S3001, if it is determined that a reach effect that includes a highly anticipated reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is being executed as a reach effect after forming a reach, whether a firing permission command has been received or not. It is determined whether or not (step S3002). As described above, a performance including a reach performance with a high degree of expectation is a performance based on a variation pattern in which a normal reach performance with a low degree of expectation is executed after formation of a reach, and then a super reach performance is executed. If it is determined that a launch permission command has been received during execution of a performance that includes a reach performance with high expectations, a contact time counter indicating the time of contact with the handle 182 is counted. (addition) (step S3003).

In the process of step S3303, during the execution of a performance that includes a reach performance with high expectations, only the time during which the firing permission command is received is counted, and the time during which the firing stop command is received is not counted. do not have. In other words, during execution of a performance that includes a highly anticipated reach performance, if the player is in contact with the handle 182 and has not operated the single-shot button 193, and is in a state where the game ball B can be fired. , when the contact time counter is counting, but the game ball B is in contact with the handle 182, but the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single button 193. In this case, the contact time is not counted by the contact time counter and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. Additionally, if the single-shot button 193 is temporarily operated while in contact with the handle 182 during execution of a production that includes a highly anticipated reach production, after the operation of the single-shot button 193 is released, Counting for the contact time counter is restarted.

Following the processing of steps S3001 to S3003, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is the end of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance (the end of a highly anticipated reach performance) (step S3004). . If it is determined that it is the end of the performance including the highly anticipated reach performance, it is determined whether the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (step S3005).

In the process of step S3005, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated reach performance, the sound is output from the speaker to the handle 182. A special sound A indicating that the contact time is short is output (step S3006). As the special sound A, a voice saying "How are you doing" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3005, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated reach performance, the handle 182 is output as audio output from the speaker. A special sound B indicating that the contact time is long is output (step S3007). As special sound B, a voice saying "Let's do our best" is output. In addition, in the process of step S3007, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value should be output, and the execution judgment is made as the audio output from the speaker. Depending on the result of the determination, one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output.

Here, when executing a performance including a reach performance with high expectations based on the fluctuation pattern, the performances are executed in the order of fluctuation start → reach formation → reach performance with low expectations → reach performance with high expectations. However, the predetermined time is set to be longer than the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the highly expected reach performance (the end of the low expected reach performance).

In addition, during execution of performances including reach performances with high expectations, because the production time is long, there is a tendency for the ball to be held up due to entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. When the number of balls that are held reaches the upper limit (the maximum number of balls is 4), the number of balls that are held does not increase even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the single shot button 193 is operated. to temporarily stop the firing of game balls B so as not to reduce the number of balls held. At this time, if the situation is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold is likely to reach the upper limit, and the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped by operating the single button 193. likely to stop. In other words, if the contact time with the handle 182 is less than the predetermined time, excluding when the single button 193 is operated, the ball is likely to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the ball is held Since it was difficult to reduce the number of game balls, it is highly likely that the single shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the firing of game balls B, and special sound A was output to praise such a situation. It is said that On the other hand, if the situation is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is difficult for the hold to reach the upper limit, and there is a possibility that the game ball B will continue to be fired without operating the single button 193. is high. In other words, if the contact time with the handle 182 is longer than the predetermined time, excluding when the single-shot button 193 is operated, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the ball is held Since the player was in a situation where the number of game balls was likely to decrease, there is a high possibility that the game ball B was continued to be fired without operating the single shot button 193, and a special sound B is output to encourage such a situation.

In the process of step S3007, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed to determine which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is to be output. When it is determined that the value of the time counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined time, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X, setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, and setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value. , the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value has a higher probability than setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound A performance is determined according to the value of the random number X by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of B=7:3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value is sent with a higher probability than setting suggestion sound A (ratio of setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random value X with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, setting suggestion sounds A to C are generated at a predetermined probability (setting Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = ratio of 1:5:4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the production distribution table 2 for high settings. . In other words, setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so a single output will not confirm the low or high setting. When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, the user can have expectations based on the setting value suggestion that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

Note that as the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, sound data is used in which a "bee" sound is output from the speaker, and as the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, a "bee beep" is output from the speaker. As the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, sound data that outputs the sound "Beep beep" is used from the speaker. In this way, by outputting different setting suggestion sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is being suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect depending on the contact time with the handle 182. Specifically, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is less than a predetermined time at the end of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, it is suggested that the contact time to the handle 182 is short. By outputting special sound A, it is possible to understand that the situation is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the situation is such that it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the performance including the highly anticipated reach performance, special sound B indicating that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. By outputting , it is possible to understand that the situation is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the number of balls held is likely to decrease. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether the gaming efficiency is good or not.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of a performance that includes a reach performance with high expectations, only the time during which the launch permission command is received is counted, and the time during which the launch stop command is received is not counted. . In other words, during execution of a performance that includes a highly anticipated reach performance, if the player is in contact with the handle 182 and has not operated the single-shot button 193, and is in a state where the game ball B can be fired. , when the contact time counter is counting, but the game ball B is in contact with the handle 182, but the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single button 193. In this case, the contact time is not counted by the contact time counter and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball B can be fired while in contact with the handle 182, and the accuracy of information such as the game situation obtained from the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193 can be confirmed. can be increased.

In addition, in this example, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time at the end of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, it is suggested that the contact time on the handle 182 is long. In addition to outputting special sound B that indicates the setting value, any of setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the currently set setting value is output. In this way, if it is determined that the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is entered. There is a high possibility that the situation is such that it is difficult to hit the ball and the game efficiency is low, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, information regarding the currently set setting values can be known, so such game efficiency can be reduced. This can motivate the player to continue playing even under bad circumstances. Furthermore, if it is suggested that the currently set value is a high value, the player is likely to win, and this can particularly motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this example, at the end of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, it is determined whether the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined time, and it is possible to output a special sound. However, regardless of whether or not the value of the contact time counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined time at the end of the performance that includes the highly anticipated reach performance, after the end of the performance that includes the highly anticipated reach performance, a special It may also be possible to output sound.

Furthermore, in this example, during execution of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, it is possible to output a special sound by determining whether the contact time with the handle 182 is longer than a predetermined time. However, during execution of a performance including a reach performance with high expectations, the number of times the handle 182 is touched and the number of times the hand is released from the handle 182 is counted in a situation where contact with the handle 182 and non-contact are repeated. It may be possible to output a special sound by determining whether the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times. For example, when the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number during execution of a performance including a highly anticipated reach performance, if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Since this is a difficult situation, there is a high possibility that the game ball B is repeatedly launched and stopped many times, and a special sound B is output to encourage such a situation. Also, based on both the result of determining whether the contact time to the handle 182 is longer than a predetermined time and the result of determining whether the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. It may also be possible to decide which of the special sounds A and B to output.

[About the common aspects used in the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance]
Next, the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first pending memory number changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command (first pending number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the first pending memory number is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the second pending memory number is set based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. When the change occurs, a command (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) for instructing the second pending memory number is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to set the second pending memory number. It is designed to be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in addition to displaying the lottery results for which the start of suggestion is pending on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701, it also displays the lottery results for which the suggestion is currently being executed. The pending memory is also displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a pending memory display 1702 during execution. As a result, the final display mode of the suspension notice performance and set value suspension suggestion performance, which will be described later, can be displayed in the execution suspension memory display 1702, and with this configuration, the suggestion of the lottery result can be executed. Since it is possible to attract attention to the suspension notice performance and set value suspension suggestion performance until the time when the game is to be held, and to create expectations for a jackpot or a high set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, it is determined that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. When a preliminary judgment command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the start of suggestion is suspended based on the preliminary judgment command corresponding to the lottery result. By changing the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to execute a pending preview performance that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation at the time of execution of the suggestion of the lottery result. It looks like this.

In this example, the first pending memory number specified by the first pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending memory number specified by the second pending number storage command, and the second pending memory number specified by the advance determination command. Peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not there will be a pending notice performance, depending on the preliminary judgment information (loss, small hit, jackpot, etc., or information that can notify the type of jackpot such as probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot). and a pending notice determination table for determining a pending notice pattern type when executing a pending notice performance.

Then, when a decision is made to execute the pending notice performance and the type of pending notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the performance display device 1600 are changed from normal to normal. Display in a different display mode (in this example, a different display color than usual). In this example, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when a pending notice is to be executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or rainbow color. do. Furthermore, the display modes of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color.

In addition, when the lottery result is identified as a jackpot as preliminary judgment information, a pending notice pattern with a high probability of a jackpot expectation (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined as the final pending display mode with a high probability, and the preliminary judgment When the information indicates that the lottery result is a loss, the final pending display mode is determined with a high probability of a pending notification pattern that has a low expectation of jackpot (for example, blue). When a mode with a high expectation of a jackpot is displayed, the player's expectation of a jackpot gaming state increases.

In addition, in the hold notice pattern, the effect display device It is set how the display mode of the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 displayed in 1600 will change. In addition, in the suspension notice pattern, the display mode of the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in the reverse order from the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the jackpot expectation level does not decrease), and each time the lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) ), the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the display mode becomes a mode with high expectation of jackpot. is set to . Therefore, even if the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with low expectation of a jackpot, the suggestion of the lottery result that is the target of the pending notice is not started. Until the end, there is still a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the pending display with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the suspension notice pattern, it is not necessary to display the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 in white (basic color) and then change them in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color, but in the middle. (For example, the first pending memory display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002.) , changes to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display modes (for example, when the first pending memory display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts) It is also set so that when the first pending storage display 1700d is moved to the first pending storage display 1700c, the color changes from white to rainbow color. For this reason, even if there are few chances (number of reservations) for the display format of the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1701 to change, the first reservation memory display 1700 and the second reservation memory display 1700 are displayed in a display format with a high expectation of a jackpot. This allows a pending storage display 1701 to be displayed. In addition, even if the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, and the first It is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the start timing of the hold notice performance (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a different manner than usual) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The first pending memory display 1700a to 1700d can be moved not only at the timing of displaying the memory display 1700 or the second pending memory display 1701, but also at subsequent timings (for example, when the suggestion of a lottery result ends and the next lottery result starts). It is also started when the As a result, even if the suspension notice performance is not executed, it is possible to draw attention to the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 with anticipation until the end.

Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to execute a setting value suspension suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, the second starting port is detected. Since the preliminary judgment command was received from the main control board 1310 based on the arrival of a game ball in 2004, the start of suggestions has been suspended based on the currently set setting values in response to lottery results. By changing the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the production display device 1600, it is now possible to execute a setting value pending suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. There is.

In this example, the currently set setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU, but at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a fluctuation pattern command, The current set value is also stored in the peripheral control MPU by being sent as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. However, information regarding the currently set setting value (setting value information) is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and the fact that a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port It may be included in the preliminary determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402.

In this example, the first pending storage number specified by the first pending storage number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending storage number specified by the second pending storage number command, and the currently set The peripheral control board 1510 creates a setting value retention suggestion determination table for determining the presence/absence of setting value retention suggestion performance and the type of setting value retention suggestion pattern when executing the setting value retention suggestion performance, depending on each setting value. We are prepared.

Then, when a decision is made to execute the setting value suspension suggestion performance and the type of setting value suspension suggestion pattern to be executed is determined, the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 are displayed on the performance display device 1600. is displayed in a different display mode than usual (in this example, in a different display color than usual). In this example, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when a pending notice is to be executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or rainbow color. do. Furthermore, the display format of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 is the expectation level for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (the expectation level for the high setting value) in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. is set to be high.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the setting value holding suggestion pattern is set to a high value (for example, red or rainbow color) as the final holding display mode, in which the expectation level for the high setting value is high (for example, red or rainbow color). A set value hold suggestion pattern determined based on probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 3 or 4, the final hold display mode is a mode (for example, green) in which the expectation level for a high set value is medium. is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1 or 2, the setting value suspension suggestion is such that the final suspension display mode is a mode with the lowest expectation for the high setting value (for example, blue). By determining the pattern with a high probability, when a mode with high expectations for the high set value is displayed as the final pending display mode, the player's expectation level for the high set value increases.

In addition, in the set value retention suggestion pattern, each time a lottery result suggestion (fluctuating display of decorative symbols (fluctuating display of special symbols)) is performed while the set value retention suggestion effect is being executed (every time the retention is extinguished). , it is set how the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 will change. In addition, the setting value suspension suggestion pattern includes a display format of the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600, which is reversed from the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow color. It is set so that the order does not change in the order of is consumed), the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or It is set to be a highly anticipated mode. Therefore, even if the first pending memory 1700 and the second pending memory 1701 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which expectations for a high set value are low, the lottery result that is the target of execution of the setting value pending suggestion effect is Until the suggestion starts, there is a possibility that the mode of the pending display changes to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the pending display with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the setting value retention suggestion pattern does not necessarily require displaying the first retention memory display 1700 and the second retention memory display 1701 in white (basic color) and then changing them in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color. , starts from an intermediate display mode (for example, the first pending memory display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002) ), the display mode changes to the next display mode without passing through the intermediate display mode (for example, when the first pending memory display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result is finished and the next lottery result is displayed. It is also set so that when the first pending storage display 1700d is moved to the first pending storage display 1700c in response to the start of the first pending storage display 1700c, the color changes from white to rainbow color. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display format of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 to change, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in a manner with high expectations for the high setting value. This allows a second pending storage display 1701 to be displayed. Further, even if the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in a manner with high expectations for the high setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next. It is possible to draw attention to the display modes of the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value retention suggestion effect (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a different manner than usual) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Not only at the timing of displaying the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701, but also at subsequent timings (for example, when the suggestion of the lottery result is finished and the next lottery result is started, the first pending memory display 1700a to d (e.g., when moving the machine). As a result, even if the setting value suspension suggestion effect is not executed, the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 can be made to attract attention to the end with anticipation.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pending preview performance that suggests the level of jackpot expectation and the set value pending suggestion performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 have the same performance content (same mode). It allows you to control the display. Specifically, in the pending notice performance that indicates the expectation level of a jackpot, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in blue, green, red, or rainbow color based on the pending notice pattern. On the other hand, in the setting value holding suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, the first holding memory display 1700 and the second holding memory display 1701 are displayed as a holding notice based on the setting value holding suggestion pattern. It is possible to display in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, which are the same modes as those based on patterns. As a result, when the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 are displayed in a manner different from the normal mode (white which is the basic color), it is possible to indicate the expectation of a jackpot during the execution of the pending notice effect. It is not possible to determine whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested while the setting value holding suggestion effect is being executed, and it is difficult to determine whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested while the setting value holding suggestion effect is being executed. can. For example, when the lottery result shows a loss (when the result of the fluctuating decorative pattern display shows a loss pattern) even though it is displayed in rainbow colors as the final pending display mode, the hold The player does not believe that the execution of the advance notice performance suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high, but that the execution of the setting value suspension suggestion performance suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value. You can make a good guess.

It should be noted that while the suspension preview performance is executed based on the prior determination information, the setting value suspension suggestion performance is not based on the prior determination information. That is, while the pending preview performance can be executed by obtaining the pending lottery results in advance, the set value pending suggestion performance can be executed without obtaining the pending lottery results in advance.

Furthermore, in this example, if it is determined to execute only one of the execution determination of the suspension notice performance and the execution determination of the set value suspension suggestion performance, the determined performance is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute both the execution judgment of the suspension notice effect and the execution determination of the setting value suspension suggestion effect, the upper mode (blue → green → red →Execute the effect set in the higher order of rainbow colors). As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the expectation level of a jackpot is being suggested during the execution of a pending notice performance or whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested while the setting value suspension suggestion performance is being executed. people can have as many expectations as possible. In addition, in the case where it is determined to execute both the execution judgment of the suspension notice performance and the execution determination of the setting value suspension suggestion performance, if the final suspension display mode is the same, either production will be executed. For example, the pending notice effect may be executed with priority. In addition, if it is determined to execute both the execution judgment of the pending notice performance and the execution judgment of the set value suspension suggestion performance, one of the performances may be executed with priority, for example, the pending notice performance may be executed with priority.

Further, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion performance is set lower than that of the reservation notice performance. In other words, the pending notice performance is executed based on the advance determination information, and when a lottery result is suggested based on the pending memory that is executing the pending notice performance, the contents of the pending notice performance are reset. , Since the content of the setting value suspension suggestion performance continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, by setting the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion performance to be lower than the reservation notice performance, It is possible to prevent the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

In addition, in this example, all the modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are used in common as the mode of displaying the pending display in the pending notice performance and the setting value pending suggestion performance, but only some of the formats are used in common. May be used in common. In other words, there may be a mode that can appear exclusively as a mode of displaying a hold for either the hold notice effect or the setting value hold suggestion effect, or the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect. There may be a mode that can appear exclusively as a mode of pending display for each of the suggestion effects. For example, if it is possible to change the final hold display mode to a rainbow color only for hold notice effects, when the final hold display mode changes to rainbow color, the hold display will change to a rainbow color. It can be determined that the execution of the preview performance suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high. In addition, if it is possible to change to a rainbow color as the final hold display mode only for the setting value hold suggestion effect, when the final hold display mode changes to a rainbow color, By executing the setting value suspension suggestion effect, it can be determined that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value.

Furthermore, in the hold notice performance, it is possible to display the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on the hold notice pattern. In the setting value suspension suggestion effect, the first suspension memory display 1700 and the second suspension memory display 1701 are displayed in blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, which are the same modes as those based on the suspension notice pattern, based on the setting value suspension suggestion pattern. Although it is possible to display in any of the colors, these common aspects are displayed on the effect display device 1600 using the same image data. In addition, each of the reservation notice pattern and the set value reservation suggestion pattern, each time a lottery result suggestion (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed (every time the reservation is extinguished). It is set how the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the production display device 1600 will change, but by making these production patterns common, the pending preview production Regardless of whether the setting value suspension suggestion performance or the setting value suspension suggestion performance is executed, the manner of the suspension display may be changed based on a common performance pattern.

In addition, in the reservation notice performance, a performance (first performance) that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot is executed by changing the appearance of the reservation display based on the reservation notice pattern, whereas in the setting value reservation suggestion performance, Based on the setting value suspension suggestion pattern, a performance (second performance) that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by changing the mode of the suspension display in the same way as the suspension notice performance. Separately, a third performance may be executed that indicates the expected level of jackpot and also indicates the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. For such a third effect, the first pending memory number specified by the first pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending memory number specified by the second pending number storage command. , the pre-judgment information instructed by the pre-judgment command (loss, small hit, jackpot, etc., and may also be information that can notify the type of jackpot such as probability-variable jackpot or normal jackpot) and the currently set setting value. Depending on each, a set performance pattern is determined based on how the mode of the hold display changes. Then, when the preliminary determination information specifies that the lottery result is a jackpot and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a high setting value (for example, 5 or 6), the final pending display mode is a highly expected mode. (for example, red or rainbow color) with a high probability, the preliminary judgment information specifies that the lottery result is a loss, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a low setting value (for example, 1 or 2). The mode with the lowest expectation level (for example, blue) may be determined with a high probability as the final pending display mode. In addition, the preliminary determination information specifies that the lottery result is a jackpot (it may be a specific jackpot such as a variable jackpot), and that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a predetermined setting value or more (for example, 3 or more). Only when specified, it may be possible to determine a specific mode (for example, rainbow color) as the final pending display mode. In such a case, when a specific mode is displayed as the final pending display mode, not only is it confirmed that the lottery result is a jackpot and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops at the jackpot symbol, but also the pachinko machine 1 Since it is determined that the set value of is equal to or higher than the predetermined set value, it is possible to particularly increase the motivation to continue playing the game even after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, specific performance examples of the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 shows a specific example of a suspension notice performance and a setting value suspension suggestion performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 275(A), the lottery results for which the start of suggestion is pending are displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701, and while the suggestion is being executed. It is also possible to display on the performance display device 1600 the pending memory corresponding to the lottery result that is currently being executed as the pending memory display 1702. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the first pending memory number increases, and one first pending memory display 1700 is added and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, if it is decided to execute either the hold notice performance or the set value hold suggestion performance, the performance pattern of the determined performance (hold notice pattern or a setting value suspension suggestion pattern), the aspect of the first suspension storage display 1700 that is additionally displayed can be displayed in one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

Then, each time a suggestion of a lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed (every time the suspension is extinguished), the first suspension memory display 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600 and As the second hold memory display 1701 moves, it is possible to change its display mode based on the effect pattern of the effect that has already been determined (either the hold notice pattern or the set value hold suggestion pattern). .

As shown in FIG. 275(B), while the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is being executed, an execution pending memory display 1702 is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Suppose that is displayed in rainbow colors. At this time, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbols (FIG. 275(C)). On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, a loss pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop pattern of the decorative patterns (FIG. 275(D)).

As mentioned above in detail, as a pending notice performance, when the preliminary judgment information specifies that the lottery result is a jackpot, the final pending display mode is a mode with high expectation of a jackpot (for example, red or rainbow color). A pattern is determined with a high probability, and when it is determined that the lottery result is a loss based on advance judgment information, a pending notice pattern with a low expectation of jackpot (for example, blue) is determined with a high probability as the final pending display mode. ing. In other words, when the ongoing pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color when the pending preview performance is executed, there is a high possibility that the lottery result is a jackpot. From this, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops at the jackpot symbol, the suspension notice performance and the set value suspension suggestion performance are Among these, it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that the player was executing a pending notice performance that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

On the other hand, as a setting value suspension suggestion effect, regardless of whether the lottery result is specified as a jackpot or a loss as preliminary judgment information, if the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the final suspension will be applied. As the display mode, a setting value hold suggestion pattern that has a high expectation level for a high setting value (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with high probability, and when the setting value of pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final setting value is determined. As a typical hold display mode, a set value hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability in which the expectation level for a high set value is medium (for example, green), and the set value of Pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. Sometimes, a set value hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability as the final hold display form in which the level of expectation for the high set value is lowest (for example, blue). In other words, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color when the setting value suspension suggestion effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is high; It does not involve the possibility that the result is a jackpot. From this, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops at a losing symbol, the suspension notice performance and the set value suspension suggestion performance are Among them, it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that a setting value suspension suggestion performance suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the lottery results, and the performances based on the fluctuation pattern include a performance that does not form a reach (normal fluctuation), and a normal reach performance with low expectations after the formation of a reach. Examples include a performance that executes a normal reach performance with a low expectation level after formation of a reach, and then a super reach performance with a high expectation level. These performances are set so that the expectation level of a jackpot increases in the following order: a performance that does not form a reach, a performance that executes a normal reach performance, and a performance that executes a super reach performance. In other words, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color when the pending preview performance is executed, there is a high possibility that the lottery result is a jackpot, and it is a reach with a high expectation of a jackpot. There is a high possibility that the performance will be executed. Therefore, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and a reach effect with high expectation of jackpot is executed, it is possible to determine whether the hold preview effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. , it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that the player was executing a pending notice performance that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

On the other hand, when the setting value suspension suggestion effect is executed, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color, the possibility that the setting value is high is high, but It is not concerned with the possibility that the result is a jackpot, and it is not concerned with the possibility of executing a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. From this, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and a reach effect with high expectation of jackpot is not executed, the hold preview effect and the setting value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Among these, it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that a setting value suspension suggestion performance suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value is being executed.

In addition, in the hold preview performance, only when the lottery result is a jackpot, rainbow colors may be allowed to appear as the final hold display mode. In such a case, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops at a losing symbol, the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestion effect are displayed. Among them, it is determined that a setting value suspension suggestion performance suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high setting value has been executed. Further, in the setting value suspension suggestion effect, only when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, a rainbow color may be allowed to appear as the final suspension display mode. In such a case, when the execution pending memory display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the fluctuating display of decorative symbols stops at a losing symbol, the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestion effect are displayed. Although it is not possible to ascertain which of the above was executed, if the setting value suspension suggestion performance was executed, it is confirmed that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, which increases the expectations of the players. Can be done.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to change the mode of the hold display for both the hold notice performance and the setting value hold suggestion performance, but it is not limited to the hold display, and displays other than the hold display may be targeted. Even in such a case, by making it possible for a common aspect to appear between the performance that suggests the level of jackpot expectation and the performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to In this case, it becomes impossible to determine whether the indication indicates the expectation level of a jackpot or the set value of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the effects that suggest the expectation level of a jackpot or the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to those that are executed using the display of the effect display device 1600, but may also be performed using audio from a speaker or light emitted from a lamp. It may be something that is executed.

In addition, when a reservation notice performance or a setting value reservation suggestion performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, after displaying on the effect display device 1600 an operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The jackpot expectation level and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested in response to the operation of the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300. In addition, the same operation instruction image may be used when maintaining the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value and when further increasing the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation level and the suggested set value are increased by the performance that is a precursor to the execution of the pending suggestion performance (the performance that displays the operation instruction image), and the rotation of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 becomes impossible. It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303.

Further, during a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while the player is in a waiting state), it may be possible to select whether or not there will be a reservation notice performance or whether there will be a setting value reservation suggestion performance. This makes it possible to execute performances that match the player's tastes, and even for players who do not want suggestions about their jackpot expectations or the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a suspension notice performance and a setting value suspension suggestion performance can be executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being suggested.

In addition, explanations regarding the manner suggested by the reservation notice performance and setting value reservation suggestion performance (such as the fact that the manner suggesting the jackpot expectation level and the manner suggesting the setting value of Pachinko machine 1 are common) are provided. It may be executed during a demonstration (demonstration effect performed while the player is in a waiting state) or when suggesting a lottery result (during a variable display of decorative symbols). Thereby, when the setting value suspension suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the expectations for the jackpot from being mistakenly recognized as a jackpot expectation and from increasing excessively.

In addition, during execution of the time saving state or variable probability state, a hold notice effect is executed based on the advance judgment information instructed by the advance judgment command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002. Instead, it may be possible to execute only the hold notice effect based on the advance determination information instructed by the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. . In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the variable probability state, only the setting value holding suggestion effect is displayed in relation to the first holding memory 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. may also be executed. Thereby, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is possible to create expectations for the setting value suspension suggestion performance.

[About special monitor information]
Next, the special monitor 1310h will be explained with reference to FIG. 264. A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which the game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entry holes, the winning hole which is the object of paying out the prize ball by entering the ball is a plurality of winning holes (in this case, four) that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the gaming area 5a. The general winning opening 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the gaming area 5a, and a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at a gate part. 2003, the second starting port 2004 becomes capable of accepting the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing through the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A second grand prize opening 2006 is provided in which game balls B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of the game ball B.

In addition, among the plurality of ball entry ports, an exit port for collecting game balls B that did not enter the winning hole is provided at the lower end of the gaming area 5a, and discharges the gaming balls B from within the gaming area 5a. It is provided with an out port 2010, and a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 that are provided midway in the vertical direction within the gaming area 5a and discharge the gaming ball B from within the gaming area 5a.

In addition, among the game balls B fired into the gaming area 5a, the games that enter the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006 The ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051, the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and is detected by the out hole 2010 and the first sub out. The game ball B collected by the opening 2011 and the second sub-outlet 2012 is detected by the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, and the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and these detection signals are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. and is input to the main control MPU.

The main control MPU is configured to control the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry openings (winning openings, out openings) provided in the gaming area 5a that is sectioned on the gaming board 5 (the number of entering balls), that is, the number of balls that have entered the gaming area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from the ball is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls by entering the ball, and the number of game balls B that did not enter the winning hole are collected. The number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth is counted as the number of balls entered.

In addition, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (number of payouts) that are paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 game balls B for entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) correspond to the winning hole from which the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball. It is predetermined in advance to pay out a certain number of game balls B, and when the ball is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole that is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, the number of balls of the predetermined number of game balls B is determined. , is counted as the number of payouts.

Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is (number of balls put out/number of balls entered) x 100. For example, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is too high, there is a possibility that the balls are only entering the winning holes where prize balls are paid out by entering the ball. By monitoring the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball is being entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only in the low probability non-time saving state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls), The number of game balls B put out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is counted and reflected on the display on the special monitor 1310h. In the low probability time saving state (time saving state) and the high probability time saving state (probability variable state), since balls enter the second starting port 2004 frequently, the number of game balls B put out from the payout device 580 increases, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches tends to increase. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered will increase or not depends on the period of time in a low probability time saving state (time saving state) or a high probability time saving state (probability variable state). By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range, provided there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the special monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. ) and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) may be displayed.

Regarding the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, each time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 60,000 balls, a new ball is input. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches that have become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In the specifications of such a special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time of calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls, at least the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) ( Until the number of balls entered (the number of balls entered) reaches 1,000 balls, the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered may be restricted. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of newly entered balls, the situation where balls enter the winning hole which is the target of paying out prize balls due to entering balls continues, and the ratio of the number of entered balls to the number of entered balls continues to be higher than the standard value. The ratio of the number of paid out balls becomes high, or the situation where the ball continues to not enter the winning hole where the prize ball is to be paid out due to the ball entering, the ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls becomes lower than the standard value, etc. Bias is more likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the information obtained from the special monitor information command is judged to be unreliable, and the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is judged to be unreliable. It is sufficient to decide not to execute it.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, respectively. However, the detection sensors corresponding to each outlet may not be provided on the game board 5 side, but may be provided on the main body frame 4 side. Such a modification will be explained below.

First, as a first modification, the game ball B that enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball ejection port 629 provided on the main body frame 4. It is possible to provide a frame-side out-exit sensor that can detect game balls B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which are discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). It will be done. When this frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, the number of game balls B detected by the frame-side out-port sensor is counted as the number of balls entered.

In addition, in the above, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 are also passed through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection passage of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the passage 610c and being ejected from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. (the island equipment side of the game hall), and not only the game balls B hit into the game area 5a, but also the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are also discharged to the frame side. It has a configuration that can be detected by the outlet sensor. Here, considering the purpose of ascertaining the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be calculated as follows. It is strongly desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in a configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the game ball B is placed upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor and separately. A ball removal detection sensor is provided, and the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and the game ball B detected by the ball removal detection sensor is It is desirable to configure the system so that the number B is subtracted from the number of balls entered. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are detected by the ball removal detection sensor, subtracted from the number of balls entered, and then detected by the frame side out-port sensor. The number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially prevented from being reflected in the number of entered balls. Note that this form is applicable when the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 when the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the action of ejecting the ball from the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side out port sensor can perform the detection itself, but when the game machine 1 is energized and the game is played downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. When the ball B is ejected (when the action of ejecting the ball from the dispensing device 580 is performed), or when the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejecting passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 while the gaming machine 1 is not energized. This solves the problem that occurs when the game machine 1 is energized during the ball removal (when the ball is removed from the payout device 580). In addition, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a and the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are routed through separate passages to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 without merging them. It may be configured such that the ball is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall, and only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side out-port sensor. With such a configuration, there is no need for a configuration in which the number of game balls detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the number of balls entered.

Next, as a second modification, the game ball B that entered the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls by entering the ball, and the game ball B that did not enter the winning hole are collected at the out hole. The ball B and the ball B are discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall) through separate paths without merging, and the winning ball is the object of paying out the prize ball when the ball enters. A first frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the first path after the game ball B that entered the mouth merges with the game ball B that did not enter the winning slot. A second frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game balls B passing through the second passage after the game balls B that have entered the out-port for collecting the balls merge together is provided. It will be done. When this first frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the first passage, the second frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the second passage. At times, the respective detection signals are input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the winning hole where the prize ball is paid out by the ball entering, when the joined game balls B pass through the first path, the first The frame-side out port sensor detects the game ball B, and after the game ball B enters the out port, which collects the game ball B that did not enter the winning hole, the joined game ball B enters the second ball. When passing through the passage, the second frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, and calculates the number of game balls B detected by the first frame-side out-port sensor and the number of game balls B in the second frame. Game balls B detected by the side out-port sensor are counted as the number of balls entered.

[About production control based on special monitor information]
In this example, the special monitor 1310h not only displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, but also uses the information obtained from the special monitor 1310h to judge the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 1 and reflect it in the content of the performance. I'm letting you do it. Effect control regarding information obtained from such special monitor 1310h will be explained with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special monitor-related effect processing executed in the peripheral control section steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 270, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 (step S2701). The special monitor information command is a command indicating the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, which is equivalent to the information output to the special monitor 1310h. In addition, the special monitor information command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board every time the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (input opening, out exit) reaches 100 balls. 1510.

In the process of step S2701, if it is determined that a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side, it is determined whether the special monitor information command has been received for the 10th time or later since the power was turned on. (Step S2702). In other words, a special monitor information command is sent every time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input and exit openings) reaches 100, so the game After the start of the game, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered at least the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) has reached 1000 balls. If it is determined that the special monitor information command has been received for the tenth time or later since the power was turned on, steps S2703 to S2708 are performed.

In the process of step S2703, as information obtained from the special monitor information command, it is determined whether the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is greater than or equal to a first abnormal value or less than or equal to a second abnormal value. .

In the process of step S2703, if it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not greater than the first abnormal value and not less than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is , it is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to a first specified value (step S2704). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is greater than or equal to the first specified value, a special sound A is output as an audio output from the speaker, indicating that the number of balls paid out is large compared to the number of balls entered ( Step S2705). As the special sound A, a voice saying "How are you doing" is output.

In the process of step S2704, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than the first specified value, it is determined whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second specified value. A judgment is made (step S2706). Then, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than the second specified value, a special sound B indicating that the number of balls paid out relative to the number of balls entered is small is output as audio output from the speaker ( Step S2707). As the special sound B, a voice saying "How are you doing" is output. In addition, in the process of step S2707, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C that suggest the currently set setting value is to be output, and the execution is determined as the audio output from the speaker. Depending on the result of the determination, one of setting suggestion sounds A to C is output.

Here, the first specified value and the second specified value are the values assumed by the game designer regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered when the game is played normally. Using the reference value as a reference, the first specified value is set so that the ratio is greater than the reference value, and the second specified value is set so that the ratio is smaller than the reference value (the first Specified value>Reference value>Second specified value). In other words, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is greater than or equal to the first specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is higher than the standard value, so the number of payouts will be higher than expected by the player designer. The number of balls has increased, and it can be understood that the situation was such that it was easy for the ball to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out the prize ball. On the other hand, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than the second specified value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is lower than the standard value, so the number of payouts is lower than expected by the player designer. The number of balls has decreased, and it can be seen that it is difficult for the ball to enter the winning hole where the prize ball is to be paid out by entering the ball.

Furthermore, regarding the first abnormal value, the value is set so that the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value (first abnormal value>> (first specified value>reference value). In other words, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is greater than or equal to the first abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value, so the number of payouts The number of balls has increased more than expected, and it is suspected that the balls are being illegally entered into the winning slots that are intended to pay out prize balls. On the other hand, for the second abnormal value, the value is set so that the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is much smaller than the standard value or the second specified value (standard value > second specified value). value >> second abnormal value). In other words, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is less than or equal to the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value, so the number of payouts The number of balls has decreased more than expected, and the nails near the winning holes that pay out prize balls when the ball enters are bent to prevent balls from entering those winning holes. is suspected.

In addition, in the execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C to output, when a special monitor information command is received, the peripheral control MPU obtains a predetermined random value X, and selects a low setting value. One of the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a high setting value, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound C suggesting a setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value has a higher probability than setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound A performance is determined according to the value of the random number X by referring to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of B=7:3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value is sent with a higher probability than setting suggestion sound A (ratio of setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3:7). A performance is determined according to the value of the random value X with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, setting suggestion sounds A to C are generated at a predetermined probability (setting Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = ratio of 1:5:4) The production is determined according to the value of the random number X with reference to the production distribution table 2 for high settings. . In other words, setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so a single output will not confirm the low or high setting. When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, the user can have expectations based on the setting value suggestion that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

Note that as the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, the sound data in which the speaker outputs a sound of "bee" is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, the sound data of a "bee" is output from the speaker. ” is used as the sound data, and as the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data is used that causes the speaker to output the sound “beebeebee”. In this way, by outputting different setting suggestion sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is being suggested.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. Specifically, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is greater than or equal to the first specified value, a special sound A indicating that the number of balls paid out relative to the number of balls entering is output is output, thereby increasing the number of balls entering. It is possible to understand that the situation was such that it was easy for the ball to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out the prize ball. On the other hand, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is less than the second specified value, a special sound B is output that indicates that the number of balls paid out is small compared to the number of balls entered. It is possible to understand that the situation was such that it was difficult for the ball to enter the winning slot to which it was paid out. Thereby, when the special sound is output, it is possible to understand whether the gaming efficiency is good or not.

In addition, in this example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is within the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, an effect is executed according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. do not have. However, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is within the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, for example, as audio output from the speaker, the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is near the reference value. A special sound C that suggests something may be output. As the special sound C, for example, a voice saying "So-so, isn't it?" is output. Thereby, when the special sound C is output, it can be understood that the game efficiency is close to the standard value assumed by the game designer.

In addition, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than the second specified value, in addition to outputting special sound B that suggests that the number of balls paid out relative to the number of balls entered is small, the currently set Which of the setting suggestion sounds A to C suggesting the setting value is output. In this way, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is less than the second specified value, it is difficult for the ball to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, and the gaming efficiency is reduced. Although it is a bad situation, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know information about the currently set setting values, which gives rise to the desire to continue playing even in such a situation where playing efficiency is poor. can be done. Further, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high value, the player is likely to win, and this can particularly motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is adjusted according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. This is to be executed every time the number of pitches entered reaches 100. As a result, as long as the game continues, it is possible to periodically execute effects according to the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and it is possible to periodically check whether the gaming efficiency is good. Can be done.

In addition, in this example, after the game is started after the power is turned on, at least until the number of balls B (entering ball number) that enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 1000 balls. During this period, the execution of effects is limited according to the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. This is because immediately after the power is turned on and the game starts, balls continue to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out prize balls, and the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is lower than the standard value. Bias is likely to occur, such as when the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered becomes lower than the standard value due to a situation where the ball does not enter the winning hole that is the target for paying out prize balls due to entering the ball. ing. For this reason, immediately after the game starts after the power is turned on, the information obtained from the special monitor information command is judged to be unreliable, and the effect is not executed according to the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. It is said that

In the process of step S2703, if it is determined that the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is greater than or equal to the first abnormal value or less than or equal to the second abnormal value, the number of balls entered is output as audio output from the speaker. An abnormality notification sound indicating that the number of payouts for the target deviates greatly from the reference value is output (step S2708). As the abnormality notification sound, a sound saying "That's strange" is output.

As mentioned above, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is greater than or equal to the first abnormal value, this is because the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is much higher than the reference value or the first specified value. , the number of payouts was unexpectedly large, and it is suspected that the balls were fraudulently placed into the winning slots that were supposed to pay out the prize balls. On the other hand, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is less than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is much lower than the reference value or the second specified value, so the number of payouts The number of balls has decreased more than expected, and the nails near the winning holes that pay out prize balls when the ball enters are bent to prevent balls from entering those winning holes. is suspected. In such a case, by outputting an abnormality alarm sound, it is possible to notify that some abnormality has occurred in the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. can.

Note that the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be changed by operating the performance operation section 301. That is, after changing the volume of the game sound, the performance sound will be output at the changed volume. However, while the volume of the special sound is output at the changed volume, the volume of the abnormal alarm sound is output at the maximum volume regardless of whether the volume has been changed or not. . For example, if the volume of the abnormal alarm sound is also reduced when the volume is changed to a low volume, even if the abnormal alarm sound is output, there is a possibility that the abnormal alarm sound will not be noticed. By outputting an abnormality notification sound, it is possible to reliably notify that some abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent activities.

In addition, in this example, a special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 100 balls, and the special monitor information command is sent. At the timing when the information command is sent, it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of balls entered to the number of balls put out, but at a different timing, It may be possible to perform an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts. For example, the special monitor information command may be transmitted at any time every time the game ball B enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port). Then, based on the special monitor information command, the timing is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is equal to or higher than the first specified value, or the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second specified value. At the timing determined as such, an effect (output of special sound) may be performed in accordance with the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered. This allows the information obtained from the special monitor information command to be known in real time.

Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed as the contact time to the handle 182, it may be possible to perform an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered. This can motivate the user to continue operating the handle 182. In addition, for example, during execution of a specific reach effect such as a highly anticipated reach effect, the timing at which the single-shot button 116 that can stop the launch of the game ball B is operated, or the operation of the single-shot button 116 is canceled. Depending on the timing, it may be possible to perform an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered. Among these, if it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered at the timing when the operation of the single button 116 is released, the single button 116 is operated. Even in a situation where the launching of the game ball B is stopped, the user can release the operation of the single-shot button 116 and generate a desire to continue launching the game ball B.

Regarding the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, each time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 60,000 balls, a new ball is input. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches that have become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In the specifications of such a special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time of calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls, at least the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) ( Until the number of balls entered (the number of balls entered) reaches 1,000 balls, the performance may be limited in accordance with the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of balls entered. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of newly entered balls, the situation where balls enter the winning hole which is the target of paying out prize balls due to entering balls continues, and the ratio of the number of entered balls to the number of entered balls continues to be higher than the standard value. The ratio of the number of paid out balls becomes high, or the situation where the ball continues to not enter the winning hole where the prize ball is to be paid out due to the ball entering, the ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls becomes lower than the standard value, etc. Bias is more likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the information obtained from the special monitor information command is judged to be unreliable, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is judged to be low. It is sufficient to decide not to perform the performance.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound from the speaker as an effect according to the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. may be executed using any one of audio, display, and lamp emission, or two or more of these may be executed.

[About measurement prohibited status of special monitor]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the gaming board 5 (number of entering balls); In other words, the number of game balls B ejected from within the gaming area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) by entering the winning hole are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated from this information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) in the main control board 1310, which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. A special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j. Since this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, it can be operated after opening the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and can only be operated by the hall manager. It is possible to do so.

The special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j can be operated either upward or downward from the reference position. A signal from this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Normally, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is set as a reference position, and the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out are counted. On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward or downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is created in which the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is prohibited (stopped). It is occurring. However, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, the game ball B cannot be ejected from the ball launcher 540 even if the handle 182 is operated, whereas the special monitor measurement When the inhibit switch 1310j is operated downward, a state is generated in which the game ball B is ejected from the ball ejecting device 540 when the handle 182 is operated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, the main control MPU uses the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal even if the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. The launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is set by inverting the . In other words, even when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state is generated. 182 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the firing control unit 633b does not drive the firing solenoid 542 because it is not receiving the firing permission signal, and the firing control unit 633b does not drive the game ball B. It is now impossible to type. Note that while the measurement prohibited state is in progress, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633; however, after the measurement prohibited state ends, the firing of the payout control board 633 is not output. Although it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the control unit 633b, if the handle 182 is continuously touched from before to after the measurement prohibition state ends, the measurement prohibition state ends. Even after the launch, the launch permission signal is not output. In such a case, after the measurement prohibition state ends, by once releasing your hand from the handle 182 and touching it again, a firing permission signal can be output, and the handle 182 can be rotated to play the game ball B. It can be implanted into region 5a.

On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. making it possible. In other words, when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is outputted to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state is generated, but while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, the launch control unit 633b does not receive the launch permission signal. Therefore, when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball is fired. You can type B.

(About extension of measurement prohibited state)
First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 286, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stopping) which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. (non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), the game ball that enters the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) Counting the number of balls B (number of pitches entered) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of pitches entered before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of balls paid out before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out does not change, so the information before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is also maintained regarding the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately terminate the measurement prohibition state, but instead sets it for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, At timing t3 when 5 seconds) have elapsed, the measurement prohibited state is ended, and counting of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the measurement prohibition state continues for a predetermined state duration period. In addition, after the count-prohibited state ends, the new number of balls entered is added to the information regarding the number of balls entered that has been maintained since before the transition to the count-prohibited state. The new number of payouts will be added to the information regarding the number of payouts that has been maintained since before the transition.

Note that after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position at timing t2, the handle 182 must be operated for a predetermined state duration period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the measurement prohibition state will continue. After the game ball B is launched, the ball enters the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) on the gaming area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It is set to be at least longer than the ball's falling time (for example, 4.5 seconds). For example, after operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward at timing t2, when the game ball B used during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 remains in the game area 4a while the measurement prohibition state is being executed. Therefore, even if the game ball B flows down the game area 4a after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the game ball B does not enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out). Regarding the timing of detection by the detection sensor corresponding to (the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of payouts).

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out. ing. For example, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 to resolve the abnormality, but during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, he will also check the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. If you count them, the game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) during such inspection will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h no longer indicates information during the game. In this regard, while inspecting the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The game balls B that enter the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) during such an inspection are not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Thereby, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

Furthermore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is prohibited (stopped). After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, the measurement prohibition state continues until a predetermined state duration period elapses. After the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 is completed and the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, there is a possibility that an abnormality will occur in the pachinko machine 1 again. In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, until the predetermined state continuation period has elapsed, by continuing the measurement prohibition state, the pachinko machine 1 can be restarted. Even if an abnormality occurs, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) regarding the game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) when such an abnormality occurred. It is not reflected in As a result, information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude information when an abnormality occurs, and the accuracy of information during gaming can be maintained.

In addition, during the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t3. After the state ends, the game ball B that entered the ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so that the detection sensors corresponding to each ball entry opening do not perform the detection itself". ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', and ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'' However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. In addition, after the counting prohibition state ends at timing t3, "detection is performed by the detection sensor, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and number of balls paid out is determined based on the detection signal. "How it is reflected in the count." As a result, even if a game ball B enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) in the measurement prohibited state, it is prohibited from being counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, game balls B are not paid out from the payout device 580 during the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3, the game balls B are released from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. In addition, during the measurement prohibition state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (variable state), and after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the fluctuation of the special symbol It is configured to shift to a state where display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the special symbols will not be displayed fluctuating and the payout device 580 will The game ball B is not paid out, and it is possible to prevent profits from being earned during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

In addition, during the measurement prohibition state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not ejected from the ball launcher 540, and after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the handle When the player 182 is operated, the game ball B is ejected from the ball ejecting device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, since the game ball B will not be launched in the first place, it will not be possible to cause the ball to enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) by firing the gaming ball B. , it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Furthermore, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. During the measurement prohibition state that is the period from timing t1 to t3, detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and continues even after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3. . As a result, when an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) using a magnet or applying vibration in the measurement prohibited state, illegal magnetism or illegal Vibration can be detected and fraudulent acts can be prevented. However, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, even if a magnet approaches or vibration is applied unintentionally by the hall manager during inspection, the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 may not detect it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, and the ball entry hole (winning hole) is treated as valid by using a magnet or by applying vibration. When attempting to illegally insert the game ball B into the game ball B, an illegal magnetic field or an illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558, but the outer end signal conveys the measurement prohibited state and the outer end signal conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Therefore, except in the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is output. Even if magnetism or unauthorized vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection will not be output. In addition, except for the measurement prohibited state, abnormality notifications that convey magnetic detection and vibration detection are performed using the performance display device 1600, etc., but during the measurement prohibited state, the measurement prohibited state as described below Priority is given to special displays that correspond to the above, and anomaly notifications (displays) that convey magnetic detection or vibration detection are not performed.

In this embodiment, as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and on the effect display device 1600. In addition, during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out. are doing. Displays on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. FIG. 287 shows a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in normal times (state where measurement is not prohibited), it is possible to count the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out, and the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is calculated. For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is 20.0%, the special monitor 1310h displays the numerical value "A-20.0", and the effect display device 1600 displays "Payout rate 20.0." 0%” is displayed (FIG. 287(A)). Thereby, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered can be recognized by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Note that in normal times, by transmitting an information command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 that conveys the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, the effect display device 1600 displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. It is possible to display.

More specifically, regarding the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, each time the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) reaches 60,000 balls, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of newly entered balls is calculated, and the calculation results of the old ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered are stored as a history of up to two calculation results. Then, on the special monitor 1310h, "Ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls currently entered" → "Ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, which is the history of the previous game" → "Number of balls entered, which is the history of the previous game" The display is changed every fixed period of time (for example, 3 seconds) in the order of "ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts." For example, if the current ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered in the history of the first game and the history of the second game is 20.0%, the special monitor 1310h displays "A-20.0". The display changes in the order of → "B-20.0" → "C-20.0" at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Note that while the measurement prohibition state is in progress, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as described later, but after the measurement prohibition state ends, the special display is ended and " It is arranged to start sequentially from the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the current number of balls entered.

In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. A period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the top to the reference position, and a period from timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the top to the reference position. Then, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from special display 1 to special display 2.

Specifically, during the measurement prohibition state, during the period from timing t1 to t2 before the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upward direction to the reference position, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward. As special display 1 corresponding to the current state, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "----", and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set". (Figure 287(B)). This allows both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a start command indicating the start of the measurement prohibition state is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is This makes it possible to start displaying Display 1.

Furthermore, during the measurement prohibition state, during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from above to the reference position, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from above to the reference position. As a special display 2 corresponding to the state after the measurement is stopped, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "++++++++", and the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Waiting for the end of the measurement prohibited state". (Figure 287(C)). In addition, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (figure) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "Waiting for end of measurement prohibited state". Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is waiting for the end of the measurement prohibition state. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, an end operation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from above. By transmitting to the board 1510, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, when a predetermined state duration period has elapsed after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position, an end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the measurement prohibition state. By transmitting the ball to the player, it is possible to return the effect display device 1600 to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, in the measurement prohibition state, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from special display 1 to special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position. As a result, either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above and return to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to put it back.

In addition, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state from special display 1 to special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position in the measurement prohibition state, In the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphics) is added and displayed surrounding the message "Waiting for end of measurement prohibited state". As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to easily recognize the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. In addition, in this example, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, but any notification corresponding to the measurement prohibited state may be used. In addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, the execution may be performed using any one of audio output from a speaker, light emission from a lamp, etc., or two or more of these may be used for execution.

In addition, the performance members (for example, the performance operation section 301, the back top and rear rotating decoration body 3440, and the back top and rear decoration body 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 have their respective initial and operating positions. However, during execution of the measurement prohibited state, the production member is restricted from operating. As a result, the performance member does not operate during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

Immediately after the start of timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. 0 may be displayed. For example, as special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state, all 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed, and a message "Start of measurement prohibition state" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It's okay. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is at the start of the measurement prohibition state. Furthermore, at the start of the measurement prohibition state, by displaying all the 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h on, it is possible to check whether the special monitor 1310 is operating normally.

In addition, in this example, in a state in which measurement is being performed normally and not in a measurement prohibited state, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out, and an effect display is also displayed. It is displayed on the device 1600. In the measurement prohibited state, special displays (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state are displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. it's shown. However, in the production display device 1600, the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, in a state where the measurement is normally performed and not in a state where measurement is prohibited. It may also be possible to display only that. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 is visible from the player side in a state in which measurement is normally performed and not in a measurement prohibited state, the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are normally measured. On the other hand, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be seen from the player side, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be seen as information about the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, special displays (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state are displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600, so the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are displayed. It is possible to know from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that the measurement is not being performed.

Further, in this example, a switch that can be operated in the vertical direction is used as the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, but any member that can be operated to shift to the measurement prohibition state may be used. For example, It may be a push-down switch or a member that can be shifted to the measurement prohibited state by a key operation owned by the hall manager.

Further, in this example, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j provided on the main control board 1310 is configured to be exposed from the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed. A small cover that disables access to the prohibition switch 1310j from the outside is provided on the main control board box 1320, and when operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, the small cover is opened to prevent the exposed special monitor measurement. The prohibition switch 1310j may also be operated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j.

(About a modification of the end timing of the measurement prohibited state)
In the above example, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, but waits for a predetermined state duration period to elapse from timing t2. Although it is assumed that the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the measurement prohibition state may end when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2. However, even in such a case, regarding the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also at timing t3 when a predetermined notification duration period has elapsed after the end of the measurement prohibited state. Until then, it will continue to be displayed. A modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

As shown in FIG. 288, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stopping) to prohibit (stop) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. (non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), the game ball that enters the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) Counting the number of balls B (number of pitches entered) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of pitches entered before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of balls paid out before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out does not change, so the information before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is also maintained regarding the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above at timing t2, the main control MPU ends the measurement prohibition state and starts counting the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. There is. In addition, after the count-prohibited state ends, the new number of balls entered is added to the information regarding the number of balls entered that has been maintained since before the transition to the count-prohibited state. The new number of payouts will be added to the information regarding the number of payouts that has been maintained since before the transition.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out. ing. For example, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 to resolve the abnormality, but during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1, he will also check the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. If you count them, the game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) during such inspection will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h no longer indicates information during the game. In this regard, while inspecting the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The game balls B that enter the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) during such an inspection are not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Thereby, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

In addition, during the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, even if the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is treated as invalid, and measurement is prohibited at timing t2. After the state ends, the game ball B that has entered such a ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so that the detection sensors corresponding to each ball entrance port do not perform detection itself". ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', and ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'' However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered or the number of balls put out. In addition, after the counting prohibition state ends at timing t2, "detection is performed by the detection sensor, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and number of balls paid out is determined based on the detection signal. "How it will be reflected in the count." As a result, even if a game ball B enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) in the measurement prohibited state, it is prohibited from being counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, game balls B are not paid out from the payout device 580 during the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2, the game balls B are released from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. In addition, during the measurement prohibition state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (variable state), and after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t2, the fluctuation of the special symbol It is configured to shift to a state where display can be performed (variable state). As a result, even if the game ball B enters the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 in the measurement prohibited state, the special symbols will not be displayed fluctuating and the payout device 580 will The game ball B is not paid out, and it is possible to prevent profits from being earned during the execution of the measurement prohibited state.

In addition, during the measurement prohibited state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not ejected from the ball launcher 540, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2, the handle When the player 182 is operated, the game ball B is ejected from the ball ejecting device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, since the game ball B will not be launched in the first place, it will not be possible to cause the ball to enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) by firing the gaming ball B. , it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Furthermore, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. During the measurement prohibition state that is the period from timing t1 to t2, detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and continues even after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t2. . As a result, when an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) using a magnet or applying vibration in the measurement prohibited state, illegal magnetism or illegal Vibration can be detected and fraudulent acts can be prevented. However, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, even if a magnet approaches or vibration is applied unintentionally by the hall manager during inspection, the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 may not detect it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, and the ball entry hole (winning hole) is treated as valid by using a magnet or by applying vibration. When attempting to illegally insert the game ball B into the game ball B, an illegal magnetic field or an illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558, but the outer end signal conveys the measurement prohibited state and the outer end signal conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Therefore, except in the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection is output. Even if magnetism or unauthorized vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection will not be output. In addition, magnetic detection and vibration detection cannot be used except during the display of special displays during execution of the measurement prohibition state and during the display of special displays that continue to be displayed after the measurement prohibition state ends as described later. Anomaly notifications to be communicated are performed using the production display device 1600, etc., but when such special displays are being displayed, priority is given to the special display, and abnormality notifications (displays) that convey magnetic detection and vibration detection are performed. I try not to do it.

In this embodiment, as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and on the effect display device 1600. In addition, during the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. are doing. The special display corresponding to the measurement-prohibited state is displayed not only while the measurement-prohibited state is being executed, but also continuously from the end of the measurement-prohibited state until reaching timing t3 when a predetermined notification duration period has elapsed. it's shown. A modification of the display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. 289 is a modification of the specific display displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward.

First, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. The special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also until timing t3, when a predetermined notification duration period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the measurement prohibited state. It continues to be displayed during this period.

Specifically, during the period from timing t1 to t2 when the measurement prohibition state is being executed, the special display 1 corresponding to the execution of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. -" is displayed, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Measurement prohibited state is being set" (FIG. 289(A)). This allows both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, a start command indicating the start of the measurement prohibition state is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is It is possible to start displaying Display 1.

In addition, during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the end of the measurement prohibition state, a symbol "++++++++" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as a special display 2 corresponding to the end of the measurement prohibition state. On the display device 1600, a message "Measurement prohibited state being set" is displayed (FIG. 289(B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "Measurement prohibited state being set". Thereby, both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 can be made to recognize that the measurement prohibition state is being set even though the measurement prohibition state has ended. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above, that is, at the end of the measurement prohibition state, an end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the measurement prohibition state. By transmitting the information, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 on the effect display device 1600. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not a predetermined notification duration period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibited state, and when the predetermined notification duration period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibited state, an effect is displayed. In the device 1600, it is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the measurement prohibition state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed not only while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, but also continuously from the end of the measurement prohibited state until a predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed. Here, when operating the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, since the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. There is. In other words, immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position, the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2. However, if the game ball B is illegally entered into the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), it will be after the measurement prohibition state has ended. The number of balls entered and the number of payouts are counted and reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h may not reflect the information during the game. It no longer has anything to show for it. In this regard, by making it appear as if the measurement prohibition state is being set even after the measurement prohibition state has ended, it is possible to reduce the motivation for trying to illegally enter the ball. The reliability of information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be increased. In addition, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 due to the fraudulent act, and in order to inspect the pachinko machine 1 after the abnormality has occurred, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j upward. If a measurement-prohibited state is generated due to a measurement-prohibited state, the person who may have committed the wrongdoing can be reminded that the measurement-prohibited state is being set after the measurement-prohibited state ends. The motivation to commit fraud can be reduced.

Furthermore, after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t2, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state continues to be displayed until timing t3, at which a predetermined notification duration period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, is reached. However, during such a predetermined notification duration period, when the handle 182 is operated, it is possible to fire the game ball B from the ball firing device 540, and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port When the game ball B enters a winning opening such as the opening 2004, it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols (a variable display of decorative symbols). In such a case, in the effect display device 1600, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed in a state in which a fluctuating display of decorative symbols is performed, but a special display is displayed rather than a fluctuating display of decorative symbols. By displaying it with priority, even if the game ball B is entered into the prize opening illegally, it can be recognized as if the decorative pattern fluctuation display was not performed, and it will be difficult to enter the ball illegally. This can reduce the desire to do so.

Also, before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state is switched from special display 1 to special display 2. As a result, either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above and return to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to put it back.

In addition, when switching the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibition state from special display 1 to special display 2 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from above to the reference position, in the effect display device 1600, A predetermined display (figure) is added and displayed to surround the message "Measurement prohibited state being set". As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to easily recognize the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from above. In addition, in this example, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed not only while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, but also from the end of the measurement prohibited state until a predetermined notification duration period has elapsed. However, any notification corresponding to the measurement prohibited state may be used, and such notification may include audio output from a speaker, light emission from a lamp, etc., in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j. The execution may be performed by using two or more of them.

In addition, the performance members (for example, the performance operation section 301, the back top and rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back top and back decoration 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 have their respective initial and operating positions. However, during execution of the measurement prohibited state, the effect member is restricted from operating. Thereby, the performance member does not operate while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered. Furthermore, the effect member may be restricted from operating not only while a special display is being displayed while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, but also while a special display that continues to be displayed after the measurement prohibition state ends. . As a result, even when the special display that continues to be displayed after the measurement prohibition state ends, the production elements do not operate as they do when the measurement prohibition state is in progress, so it appears as if the measurement prohibition state is being set. can be recognized.

Immediately after the start of timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. 0 may be displayed. For example, as special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state, all 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed, and a message "Start of measurement prohibition state" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It's okay. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is at the start of the measurement prohibition state. Furthermore, at the start of the measurement prohibition state, by displaying all 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h, it is possible to check whether the special monitor 1310 is operating normally.

In addition, in this example, while the special display is not displayed, except during the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibition state and the display of the special display that continues to be displayed after the end of the measurement prohibition state, As information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, while the special display is being displayed, the special display (special display 1, special display 2 ) is displayed. However, in the effect display device 1600, while the special display is not displayed, it only displays that the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are correctly measured, without displaying the ratio of the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out. You can do it like this. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 is visible from the player side while the special display is not displayed, the player side can only tell that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are being correctly counted. On the other hand, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be seen from the player side, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is used as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. It can be understood from the back side of machine 1. In addition, while the special display is displayed, on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600, if the special display 1 is displayed, the number of balls entered or paid out is not measured, and if the special display is 2, the number of balls entered or paid out is not measured. The player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can see the number or the number of payouts as if they were not being measured (as if the measurement prohibition state was being set).

(About permission to fire balls while measurement is prohibited)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward. Compared to the case where the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, it is the same in that it generates a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out, but when the handle 182 is operated, The difference is that a state in which a game ball B is fired from a firing device 540 is generated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. making it possible to do so. In other words, when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is outputted to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state is generated, but while the measurement prohibition state is being executed, the launch control unit 633b does not receive the launch permission signal. Therefore, when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball is fired. You can type B.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward at timing t1, the main control MPU enters a measurement prohibition state (stopping) which prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. (non-measurement state). Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), the game ball that enters the ball entering hole (winning hole, out hole) Counting the number of balls B (number of pitches entered) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of pitches entered before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is prohibited, and information regarding the number of balls paid out before transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out does not change, so the information before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is also maintained regarding the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately terminate the measurement prohibition state, but waits for a predetermined state duration period to elapse from timing t2. At timing t3, the measurement prohibited state is ended, and counting of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2, the measurement prohibition state continues for a predetermined state duration period (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, after the count-prohibited state ends, the new number of balls entered is added to the information regarding the number of balls entered that has been maintained since before the transition to the count-prohibited state. The new number of payouts will be added to the information regarding the number of payouts that has been maintained since before the transition.

In addition, during the measurement prohibition state which is a period from timing t1 to t3, when the handle 182 is operated, a firing permission state is set in which the game ball B is fired from the ball launcher 540, and the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3. I plan on continuing this even after that. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, it is possible to fire the game ball B from the ball firing device 540 by simultaneously setting the firing permission state, and by firing the game ball B, the ball enters the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). You can let the ball enter.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is prohibited (stopped). In addition, when the handle 182 is operated, a firing permission state is generated in which the game ball B is fired from the ball firing device 540. In other words, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, when the handle 182 is operated, a trial shot in which the game ball B is ejected from the ball launcher 540 is possible, and even if a trial shot is made, A trial mode is set in which the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not reflected. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball B is fired from the ball launcher 540, or whether the game ball B fired from the ball launcher 540 enters the ball entry port (winning port, out port) normally. In order to confirm whether there is a ball in the entrance hole ( The game ball B that entered the winning hole and out hole is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is It no longer indicates the information inside. In this regard, when the hall manager makes a trial shot, he or she can operate the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j downward to generate a measurement prohibition state that prohibits the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. The game ball B that enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) during trial play is not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. Thereby, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can indicate information during the game.

Furthermore, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated in which the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is prohibited (stopped). After the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the measurement prohibition state continues until a predetermined state duration period elapses. If the hall manager is making a test shot immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position, immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position, There is a possibility that the test-hit game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). In this regard, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, until the predetermined state duration period has elapsed, by continuing the measurement prohibition state, the test ball B However, even if a ball enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (regarding the number of balls entering) (percentage of number of payouts). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude the information at the time of trial playing, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

Note that after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position at timing t2, the handle 182 must be operated for a predetermined state duration period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the measurement prohibition state will continue. After the game ball B is launched, the ball enters the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) on the gaming area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It is set to be at least longer than the ball's falling time (for example, 4.5 seconds). As a result, even if the game ball B is fired by operating the handle 182 immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j to the standard position, the game ball B corresponds to the ball entry port (winning port, out port). Regarding the timing of detection by the detection sensor, it is not counted as the number of entering balls or the number of paid out balls while the measurement prohibition state continues, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of paid out against the number of entering balls) is not counted. percentage).

In addition, in the above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, but instead sets it for a predetermined state continuation period from timing t2. The measurement prohibition state is ended at timing t3 when The measurement prohibited state may be terminated at the time when the direction is returned to the reference position. That is, the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) may be terminated at the time when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below at timing t2.

In addition, in the trial shooting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing allowed state) that is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if game ball B enters the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening), it is treated as invalid. After the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the game ball B that enters the ball entrance is treated as valid. Specifically, in the trial shooting mode that is the period from timing t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so that the detection sensors corresponding to each ball entry opening do not perform the detection itself". ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'', and ``a mode in which detection is performed by the detection sensor and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310'' However, based on the detection signal, it is not reflected in the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. In addition, after the trial shot mode ends at timing t3, the detection is performed by the detection sensor, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered and number of balls put out is determined based on the detection signal. "How it is reflected in the count." As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) in the trial play mode, it is prohibited from being counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, in the trial play mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permission state) that is the period from timing t1 to t3, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, and after the trial play mode ends at timing t3. , it is possible to pay out game balls B from the payout device 580. In addition, in the trial mode that is the period from timing t1 to t3, it is impossible to display the special symbols in a variable manner (variable state), and after the trial mode ends at timing t3, the variable display of the special symbols is disabled. The system is designed to transition to a state in which it is possible to perform the following (variable state). As a result, in the trial play mode, even if the game ball B enters the winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the special symbols will not be displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device 580 will not display the special symbols. The game balls B are not paid out, and it is possible to prevent profits from being made during the trial play mode.

Furthermore, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. In the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permission state) that is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and after the trial shot mode ends at timing t3. I am also trying to continue. As a result, in the trial play mode, when an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) by using a magnet or applying vibration, it is possible to Vibration can be detected and fraudulent acts can be prevented. However, in the test shot mode that is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid. In such a case, in the trial play mode, even if a magnet approaches or vibration is applied unintentionally by the hall manager during trial play, the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 will still detect it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid in the trial firing mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) which is the period from timing t1 to t3, and the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and the detection by using a magnet or applying vibration is performed. When trying to illegally insert the game ball B into the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), illegal magnetism and illegal vibration were detected. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558, but the outer end signal conveys the trial play mode and the outer end signal conveys magnetic detection and vibration detection. The terminal signal is output from the same terminal. The outer end signal that conveys the trial shot mode is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. For this reason, except for the test shot mode, when an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected, an outer end signal is output that conveys the magnetic detection or vibration detection, but during the trial play mode, when an illegal magnetic field or vibration is detected, Even if magnetism or unauthorized vibration is detected, an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection will not be output. In addition, except for the trial play mode, abnormality notifications that convey magnetic detection and vibration detection are performed using the effect display device 1600, etc., but during the execution of the test play mode in which measurement is prohibited, the following Priority is given to special displays that correspond to the trial play mode, and abnormality notifications (displays) that convey magnetic detection or vibration detection are not performed.

In this embodiment, as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and on the effect display device 1600. In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t3, even if a trial shot is made, it is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered). On the special monitor 1310h or the performance display device 1600, a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing allowed state) is set to the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing allowed state) without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. is displayed. Displays on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291. FIG. 291 shows a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward.

First, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the production display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out. However, among these, the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position, and the period after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position. During the period from timing t2 to timing t3, the special display corresponding to the trial mode is switched from special display 3 to special display 4.

Specifically, in the trial firing mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), special monitor measurement is prohibited during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position. As a special display 3 corresponding to the state in which the switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "LLLLLL", and the effect display device 1600 displays "Trial mode setting in progress". This message is displayed (Fig. 291(A)). As a result, even if a trial shot is made on either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600, the trial shot mode ( It can be recognized that the state (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is being set. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a start command indicating the start of the trial play mode is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is This makes it possible to start displaying Display 3.

Furthermore, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from below to the reference position, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is As a special display 4 corresponding to the state after returning to the reference position from below, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "UUUUUU", and the effect display device 1600 displays "End of trial play mode". Waiting” message is displayed (FIG. 291(B)). Further, in the performance display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "Waiting for end of trial play mode". As a result, it can be recognized by both the special monitor 1310h and the performance display device 1600 that the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is waiting for completion. Note that when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from below to the reference position, a termination operation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j has been returned to the reference position from below. By transmitting to the board 1510, it is possible to start displaying the special display 4 on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, when a predetermined state duration period has elapsed after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, an end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the end of the trial mode. By transmitting the ball to the player, it is possible to return the effect display device 1600 to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out is not displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. and a special display corresponding to the launch permission state) is displayed. As a result, even if a trial shot is made on either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600, the trial shot mode ( It is possible to recognize whether a measurement prohibition state and a launch permission state are being set. Also, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing enabled state), a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from special display 3 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position. Switching to special display 4. As a result, either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 can recognize whether the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, and return to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to put it back.

Also, in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing enabled state), a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from special display 3 before and after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from below to the reference position. When switching to the special display 4, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display (figure) surrounding the message "Waiting for end of trial play mode". As a result, the special display 4 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 3, making it easier to recognize the state after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below. In addition, in this example, a special display corresponding to the trial firing mode is displayed while the trial firing mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permission state) is being executed, but any notification corresponding to the trial firing mode may be displayed. If possible, such notification may be performed using any of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, audio output from a speaker, light emission from a lamp, etc., and two or more of these may be used. It may also be executed.

Further, in this example, when the handle 182 is touched, the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and makes it possible to set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. When the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 starts to be input, a specific effect using audio, light emission, video, etc. is executed to notify that the firing of the game ball B has started. It is possible. However, while the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is in progress, although it is possible to input a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 by contacting the handle 182, it is possible to input a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but it is not possible to execute a specific effect. It is restricted. As a result, while the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permission state) is being executed, even if a test shot is made by contacting the handle 182, a specific performance is not executed, and the test shot work is hindered. can be prevented. Then, after the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) ends, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is started to be input due to contact with the handle 182, thereby making it possible to execute a specific effect. There is.

In addition, the performance members (for example, the performance operation section 301, the back top and rear rotating decoration 3440, and the back top and back decoration 3451, etc.) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 have their respective initial and operating positions. However, during execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the production member is restricted from operating. Thereby, during execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the performance member does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the trial shot operation from being hindered.

Immediately after the start of timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, that is, immediately after the start of the trial shooting mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permission state), the special monitor 1310h and the performance display device 1600 do not allow trial shooting. A corresponding special display 0 may be displayed at the start of the hitting mode. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the trial play mode, all 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed, and the message "Start of trial play mode" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It's okay. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is at the start of the trial play mode. Furthermore, at the start of the trial mode, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 is operating normally by displaying the 7 segments etc. of the special monitor 1310h so that they are all lit.

In addition, in this example, when the measurement is being performed normally and is not in the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing allowed state), the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is specially set as information regarding the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. It is displayed on the monitor 1310h and also on the effect display device 1600. In the trial mode, special displays (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial mode are displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the production display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of balls paid out. it's shown. However, in the production display device 1600, the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, in a state where the measurement is normal and not in the trial shot mode. It may also be possible to display only that. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 is visible from the player's side and is not in the trial play mode but is measuring normally, the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are normally measured. On the other hand, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be seen from the player side, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be seen as information about the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts can be grasped from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the trial play mode, special displays (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial play mode are displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts can be displayed. It is possible to know from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that the measurement is not being performed.

[Regarding the measurement of the special monitor when the ball enters when the second starting port is closed]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the gaming board 5 (number of entering balls); In other words, the number of game balls B ejected from within the gaming area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) by entering the winning hole are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated from this information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in this embodiment, the game ball B that enters the second starting port 2004 even when the second starting port 2004 is closed is counted as the number of entering balls. The game balls B entering the second starting port 2004 are controlled not to be counted as the number of balls entering. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed will be described with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed.

Regarding the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 operates according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, opens the second starting port 2004, and the game ball B can be accepted. The game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401. For this reason, the game ball B that entered just before the second starting port 2004 was closed may be detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 immediately after the second starting port 2004 was closed. From this, the game ball B detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 during a predetermined period from the time when the second starting port 2004 was closed is treated as "game ball B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed." Regarding game balls B that are not handled and detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 during a period excluding the opening of the second starting port 2004 and the predetermined period from the time of closing the second starting port 2004, It is handled as "game ball B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed."

As shown in FIG. 292, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1, the main control MPU controls the ball of the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port). It is counted (added) as a number (number of balls entering). Further, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1, the main control MPU counts (adds) the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of paid out). . In other words, the game balls B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed are reflected in the information (ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered) displayed on the special monitor 1310h.

Further, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1. Moreover, it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols based on the fact that the game ball B enters the ball when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1. As a result, for the game ball B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580 in the same way as when the game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 was opened. It is also possible to display special symbols in a variable manner.

Further, at timing t1, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a specific notification is sent to the outside using the effect display device 1600, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, etc. (notification of failure of normal measurement). As for the specific notification, which will be described in detail later, during execution of the specific notification, even if a game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, it will not be counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts (normal counting will not be performed). In order to inform the outside that there is no such thing, a warning message is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to flash with strong light emission. For example, if game ball B enters the ball when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a warning message will be displayed saying, ``There is a risk of unauthorized winning, so normal special monitor measurements will not be performed from this point forward.'' is displayed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B enters the ball when the second starting port 2004 is closed at the timing t1, a specific notification will be made in the effect display device 1600 while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. , a specific notification (message display) may be displayed with priority over a variable display of decorative patterns. For example, by making the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern invisible (making it difficult to see) through specific notification (message display), it is possible to greatly appeal to the outside that specific notification is being performed.

After that, while the specific notification is being executed, the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, and the game ball B enters the ball entering port (winning port, out port) other than the second starting port 2004. Depending on when the ball is hit, whether or not the number of balls entered and number of balls put out is counted is different. In other words, after the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1, there are two cases: a case where the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, and a ball entering port other than the second starting port 2004. Depending on the case where the game ball B enters the winning hole or the out hole, whether or not to count the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is made different. Note that even during execution of the specific notification, when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is ejected from the ball ejecting device 540.

Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, for game balls B that enter the second starting port 2004, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, the ball enters the ball entering port. It is prohibited to count (add) the number of game balls B that entered the winning opening and out opening as the number of balls entered (number of balls entered). Furthermore, during execution of the specific notification, game balls B that enter the second starting port 2004 are paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. Counting (adding) as the number of game balls B (number of payouts) is prohibited. That is, during execution of the specific notification, the game balls B that entered the second starting port 2004 are not reflected in the information (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h.

Further, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, it is treated as invalid. Specifically, while the specific notification is being executed, the power supply to the second starting port sensor 2401 is cut off so that the second starting port sensor 2401 corresponding to the second starting port 2004 does not perform the detection itself. "mode", "mode in which detection is performed by the second starting port sensor 2401 but no detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310", "mode in which detection is performed by the second starting port sensor 2401" , a mode in which the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310, but the detection signal is not reflected in counting the number of balls entered or the number of balls put out. As a result, even if a game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, it is prohibited to be counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and the information (input) displayed on the special monitor 1310h is prohibited. (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of pitches).

In addition, while the specific notification is being executed, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, the payout device Game balls B are never paid out from 580. In addition, while the specific notification is being executed, a special symbol is displayed based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. There is no display of fluctuations. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification, the special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner, and the game ball B will not be paid out from the payout device 580. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of specific notification.

On the other hand, while the specific notification is being executed, game balls B that enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) other than the second starting opening 2004 enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). The number of game balls B played (number of balls entered) is counted (added). In addition, during execution of the specific notification, regarding the game balls B that have entered the ball entrance opening (winning opening, out opening) other than the second starting opening 2004, the number of game balls B that are paid out from the payout device 580 ( It is counted (added) as the number of payouts). In other words, during execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) other than the second starting port 2004, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (regarding the number of balls entered) This will be reflected in the ratio of the number of payouts).

In addition, while the specific notification is being executed, based on the game ball B entering the winning hole (the winning hole that is the target of paying out prize balls) other than the second starting hole 2004, the game ball is released from the payout device 580. This makes it possible to pay out ball B. Also, while the specific notification is being executed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the game ball B entering the winning hole (the winning hole from which the prize ball is paid out) other than the second starting hole 2004. It is possible to do this. As a result, during execution of the specific notification, for game balls B that have entered the winning holes other than the second starting hole 2004, the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. be able to.

As described above, if a game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) for that game ball B. (number of balls entered) is counted (added), and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of paid out balls) is counted (added). When the second starting port 2004 is open, it is possible to let the game ball B enter, whereas when the second starting port 2004 is closed, it is impossible to let the game ball B enter. Regarding the game ball B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed, there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 was opened due to fraudulent activity and the game ball B was allowed to enter. However, for example, when the second starting port 2004 transitions from an open state to a closed state, the game ball B may get caught in the operating second starting port door 2414, and the second starting port 2004 is closed, the state in which the game ball B is caught in the second starting port door 2414 is resolved, and the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401. It is also possible that some irregularities have occurred. In other words, regarding the game ball B that entered the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 was closed, there is a possibility that the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity, but due to an irregularity, the second starting port Since there is a possibility that the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 in 2004, it does not necessarily mean that the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity. Therefore, the game ball B that entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls), but is included as information during the game. That's what I do.

In addition, when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a specific notification is made to the outside, and during the execution of the specific notification, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. As for game balls B, counting (adding) as the number of balls entering or the number of paying out is prohibited regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. Here, at the stage when one game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity. If the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 through this process, it can be determined that there is a very high possibility that the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity. For this reason, during execution of specific notification, the game balls B that enter the second starting port 2004 are prohibited from being counted (added) as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is prohibited. (The ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered) is not reflected. As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can exclude the information when it is determined that the ball was entered due to fraudulent activity, and the accuracy of the information during the game can be maintained.

Note that while the specific notification is being executed, it is prohibited to count (add) the game balls B that entered the second starting port 2004 as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, but after the specific notification is executed, After the pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the hall manager and the power is turned back on to resolve the situation where normal measurement is not possible, the game balls B that entered the second starting port 2004 are counted as the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. (addition).

In the above, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the entry of the game ball B when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1. You may choose not to pay out. Further, although it is possible to display a special symbol in a variable manner based on the entry of the game ball B when the second starting port 2004 is closed at timing t1, it is possible to display a variable display of the special symbol. You can. As a result, even for the game ball B that first enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. This makes it possible to prevent a profit from being made in a state where there is a possibility that the ball may have entered the second starting port 2004.

In addition, during execution of specific notification, game balls B that enter the second starting port 2004 are treated as ball entering ports (winning ports) regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. Although it is prohibited to count (add) the number of game balls B that entered the game ball B (the number of entered balls), it may be counted (added) as the number of entered balls. However, during execution of the specific notification, game balls B that enter the second starting port 2004 are paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed. Counting (adding) as the number of game balls B (number of payouts) is prohibited. As a result, if the game balls B continue to enter the second starting port 2004 while the specific notification is being executed, only the number of balls entered will be larger than the number of balls entered and the number of balls put out. Since it is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts is reduced, the act of trying to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during execution of the specific notification is prohibited. It can be suppressed.

As mentioned above, if the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed, it is possible that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity, or the second starting port 2004 is closed due to an irregularity. Since it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the mouth 2004, the game ball B is counted as the number of entered balls or the number of paid out balls. In this way, if it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity or whether the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to an irregularity, , the number of balls entered or the number of balls put out may be counted, and the following other examples may also be used. Specifically, regarding the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2414 is operated to open the second starting port 2004 according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. Although the configuration is such that it is possible to open the opening and accept the game ball B, in the normal state (state where time saving is not given), the normal lottery result does not become a hit, and the second starting port 2004 is not opened. may be configured. In such a case, regarding the game ball B that entered the second starting port 2004 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 was opened due to fraudulent activity and the game ball B was allowed to enter. However, for example, just before the end of the time saving state (a state in which time saving is given), the normal lottery result becomes a hit, and based on the win, the second starting port 2004 opens after the time saving state transitions to the normal state. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of an irregularity even though it is in a normal state. In other words, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 under normal conditions, whether the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 due to fraudulent activity or due to an irregularity, the second starting port 2004 Since it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the game ball B, the game ball B is counted as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. As a result, the game ball B that enters the second starting port 2004 in the normal state is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of paid out to the number of entered balls), but is included as information during the game. can be included.

[About measurement of special monitor when detecting abnormality]
As described above, during the game, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the gaming board 5 (number of entering balls); In other words, the number of game balls B ejected from within the gaming area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) by entering the winning hole are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is calculated from this information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in this embodiment, the game ball B that enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after an abnormality is detected is counted as the number of balls entered, but is not counted as the number of payouts. is controlled. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when such an abnormality is detected will be explained with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when an abnormality is detected.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example uses various methods to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred. Specifically, it monitors whether a large amount of game balls B are entering into one ball entrance in a short period of time among the ball entrances (input opening, out opening), and If a large number of game balls B enter the ball in a short period of time, it is possible that the wrongdoer has committed a fraudulent act such as directly entering the game ball B into one ball entrance. Since the game ball B has already been illegally entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 3005 that detects illegal vibrations within the game area 5a. Then, it monitors whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied, and if the magnetic sensor 2470 or vibration sensor 3005 detects it, it is determined that a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or applying vibration is being carried out. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will then enter the ball entry opening (winning opening, exit opening) illegally.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the ball entrances (input openings, exit openings) are connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring, and these wirings are monitored to see if they are disconnected or disconnected. If it is detected that the wiring is disconnected or disconnected, even if you enter the game ball B into the ball entry port (winning port, out port), it will not be detected by the detection sensor and the game will not be played normally. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred because it is not possible to perform the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 293, from the time when the abnormality is detected at timing t1, regarding the game ball B that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), the ball entry hole ( It is counted (added) as the number of game balls B that entered the winning opening and out opening (the number of entering balls). In addition, from the time when an abnormality is detected at timing t1, the game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) are counted as the number of game balls B (number of payouts) that are paid out from the payout device 580 ( addition) is prohibited. In other words, from the time when an abnormality is detected, game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) will be counted as the number of balls entered, but will not be counted as the number of payouts, and the information regarding the number of balls entered will be counted as the number of balls entered. Only this will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered).

As described above, the game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) after the abnormality was detected are counted as the number of balls entered, but are not counted as the number of payouts. From this, if the game ball B enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) after an abnormality is detected, only the number of entering balls will increase between the number of entering balls and the number of payouts, and the number of entering balls will increase. This will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts becomes smaller. Thereby, after the abnormality is detected, it is possible to prevent the act of trying to enter the game ball B into the ball entry port (winning port, out port).

In addition, from the time when an abnormality is detected at timing t1, when the game ball B enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole), it is treated as valid for counting the number of balls entered, and the payout is It is treated as invalid for counting numbers. Specifically, from the time when an abnormality is detected at timing t1, the detection sensor performs detection, and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310. Examples include "a mode in which the amount is reflected in the count but not reflected in the count of the number of payouts." As a result, from the time when an abnormality is detected, when a game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), only the information regarding the number of balls entered, out of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts, will be displayed in a special way. It can be included in the information displayed on the monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered).

Further, from the time when the abnormality is detected, the game balls B are not put out from the payout device 580. Moreover, from the time of abnormality detection, it is set in a state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variable state). As a result, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the game ball B enters a winning hole such as the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner, and the payout device Since the game balls B are not paid out from 580, it is possible to prevent profits from being made after detecting an abnormality.

Furthermore, when an abnormality is detected at timing t1, a specific notification (notification that normal measurement is not possible) is made to the outside using the effect display device 1600, an LED provided on the main body frame 4, etc. . As a specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), it will not be counted as the number of payouts (normal counting will not be performed). A warning message is displayed on the screen 1600, and an LED provided on the body frame 4 is made to flash with strong light. Furthermore, the displayed content of the warning message varies depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if it is detected that a large number of game balls B are entering a single ball entry hole in a short period of time, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message will be displayed saying "There is a possibility of unauthorized entry." Therefore, a warning message is displayed saying, ``We will no longer perform normal measurements on the special monitor from this point forward.'' In addition, if the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects that an abnormality has occurred, the message ``We will not measure normal special monitors from this point on as there is a risk of fraudulent winnings.'' ” is displayed as a warning message. In addition, if the wire is detected to be disconnected or disconnected, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, "We will not measure the normal special monitor from here on as there is a risk that winnings will not be detected." ” is displayed as a warning message.

Further, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not ejected from the ball ejecting device 540. As a result, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B will not be fired in the first place, so it is not possible to make the ball enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) by firing the game ball B. It is possible to prevent profits from being obtained after detecting an abnormality.

In the above, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not ejected from the ball launcher 540 after the abnormality is detected. B may be emitted. This makes it possible to launch the game ball B, but even if the game ball B enters a winning hole such as the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the special symbol may not be displayed in a variable manner. Since the game balls B are not paid out from the payout device 580, it is possible to prevent profits from being made after detecting an abnormality.

In addition, game balls B that entered the ball entrance (input hole, out hole) after an abnormality was detected are counted as the number of balls entered, but are prohibited from being counted as the number of payouts. After that, the pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the hall manager, and the power is turned on again to resolve the situation where normal measurement is not possible. It is possible to return to a state where it can be counted (added) as a number.

[Another example]
Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a mahjong ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate rotating drums or reels. Here, the slot machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 296, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to lock the front door (front frame) 6002 into the main body. Part (box) 6004 can be opened.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body part (box) 6004. It is used to open and close the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal keyhole 6005 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates when a regular metal key is rotated. The cylinder body of the metal locking device passes through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

In addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the main body ( It is electrically connected to the ground board provided inside the box (box) 6004. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) is capable of consolidating electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall. Electrically connected to equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. Rather, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch should not be placed near the metal locking device, and should be located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise were to enter the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch would not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts have no decorative plating applied at all, while others have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating, such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may penetrate. Among the various decorative parts, those whose entire front and back surfaces are decorated with decorative plating are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring (not shown), while others have electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. (Some are connected electrically). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative sections from entering the board ground of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative sections by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. In addition, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, and from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the gaming hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side, as described above.

Note that a static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004, A static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some have decorative plating applied to the entire surface, and among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. The ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are connected electrically to the terminals of the power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow through it, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the overvoltage disappears, the surge protection element (surge absorber) , which has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protrusion. Further, a storage payment button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage and settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also accommodates the main control board 1310 as well as a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a that can change setting values is mounted. That is, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Note that the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, or It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 includes a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). A setting display device 1310g configured with a setting display device 1310g, the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above, and the like may be implemented.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, performance devices (not shown), etc. can be viewed. It is now possible to see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, a presentation device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

These variable rotating bodies have a translucent pattern band printed with multiple types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) as pattern information, and is pasted on each cylindrical frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and each variable rotary body is connected to an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, multiple types of symbols are displayed in the display window that changes continuously from top to bottom. It looks like this.

The performance device includes a plurality of movable performance bodies (not shown), the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-mentioned peripheral control unit 1500. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable presentation objects, the drawing control of the presentation display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The progress of the performance is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying symbol information in a variable manner based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026 on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

In addition, in the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 controls when a predetermined number of game balls as game media are inserted into the ball slot 6008', and when the starting lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount to the game ball receptacle 6026 as a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back movable decorative body 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative board)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body part 3113b Flange part (peripheral wall part)
3113c First LED housing part 3113d Second LED housing part 3113e Reflection part 3114 Back decorative board (decorative board)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Board body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decoration body base 3115a Cover plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that grants a predetermined gaming profit when a lottery result by a lottery means is a specific result,
Equipped with a decorative part decorated with a predetermined decoration,
The decoration part has an LED mounted on at least one side, a copper foil forming a predetermined circuit for electrically connecting the LED, and a coating made of white solder resist. board,
a first member provided to face one side of the substrate;
a second member provided to face another surface different from the one surface of the substrate,
The substrate includes a specific area where the copper foil is not provided, and the specific area is an area formed around the entire circumference of the substrate by providing the copper foil within a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the substrate. and
When the first member, the second member, and the substrate are combined, one of the first member and the second member fits into the other, so that at least a portion thereof overlaps,
The creepage distance from the outside of the decoration part to the copper foil is determined by the length of the path created by the overlapping parts when the first member, the second member, and the board are combined and the predetermined distance of the specific area. increases the
The substrate includes a first wiring pattern formed on one side, a second wiring pattern formed on the other side, a first land electrically connected to the first wiring pattern, and the first wiring pattern formed on the other side. a through hole having a second wiring pattern and a second land electrically connected;
Among the through holes, a specific through hole in which no electronic component is mounted has a specific land whose outer peripheral edge is covered with the white solder resist.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images